Home

Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software Manual - Snap-on

1. 330 P W Furic IGy aii E EDU E Ee REN DES CERO SR UE HANA EINDA PAN LOCK SW AAE JAE E E A AA A E E OE A E REDE P_ABAGR Ohms P ABAGR2 Ohms E iere Ola P_AirBAG2 Ohms PABAGR Ohms n xs ns a PARICGBRAKE SWITGFT EA Er 325 PARK LAMP SWITCH 326 426 x n 325 325 PARKING BRAKE T A 287 Parking Brake 325 ParkNeuPos 257 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters ParkNeuPos vu cu 509 PART LOAD 426 PASS BEET a ird ertet ie esie e bet end cy Dr d vd edge e a Eee i t d le v DI d 296 Pass Door EOCKSW niii nde inen AT ee PEE EE angi Satan itso ED FOIE TER EA TRES 3
2. eren en ee ree n en ide E emi OUtShftSp RPM EET CH EG DAY SV E ee YU E M OVER ENG TM S eicere trt te etre ce eee COE E EI OIM d YE Y MI E OVERDRIVE SW OVERRUN CLUTCH OXS1 TES Ta irn hetero reds OXS2 TES OXYGEN SENSOR HBHEBATER 7 cinere ee EHE EE nin ER ein anid nes 423 P PSBUGKIEE SW e PO eo 477 DOOR REM ged te ara 309 P Door Key Sw UNLOGK Re EO ca nie 311 PlINDIG ATOR PEE 508 Buckle Sw eerie rere e a SEE a suck 310 bec RUE 508 P N Pos Sw P N POSI SW P N Position SW iiec eser a a e ERR NE RR VES 325 PINS REE MERLO MEN 426 P N SWIUT Op P 509 PAN MINORIS 509 P S OIEJPRESSURE SWITGEL ctore ga eR eo e Rp RR ED ae ERR CURE HERR eee 393 P S PRESS SW P S PRESS SW P S PRESS SW P S SIGNAL m m ae eee P W
3. O aUe uu FU EEPWT MS ioa ciet petet tne tre blc c le iranian Ed n c d t v a a rot vv ua FUEEPMWO IS ide eR a ee ean GRE eie FUELSYS1 m TNT HI NE dcIQA 239 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters G GATE or GARGOJDOORCAJAR URP ERREUR UE VEO E end 480 GEAR POSITION 392 GEARCIEUAT ss eae 502 GEAR RATIO 502 GEAR o em TI RUE 392 GEAR e X 498 Cz RAPERE HE EIL 501 GEAR seh pon eie ede ERE a o ec 501 T In E M un AV d fa ch A ANC 502 GEN E TERMINAL 392 GEN LIGHT GEN LIGHT GEN OUT V GEN OUT V GEN erotic eect e NU pers GEN e ae ao ie A Ee A cans oes See GEN FIELD GEN VU ue 393 CEN MON x cert n sees io Lh un lesen aM e Aas coos SML cA pue 393 GENERATOR is iu 393 GE
4. CAT TMP B2S GAT TMP B2S2 nice entente pee dne etin i nente nien rh en eei ne e t Datis CATZmonzsreadysc em eee RS RH RE Wed vetat etu A eee eid ete pri E Hei ER Tiere tte MIT E REV EN E Y RESO Rd i E DI EN RH t E TR EN ee IEEE ERE N 12 9 m eu 2 eiie mener itm de eee e Ee EE D ee 21 iste tege erben rr e v I P ie o b ly vo b d d e e e GATEMB22 3 3 sie cire tiende e a a a a R NE CC ENGAGED GG INHIBIMED sini MAR ii da aie GC ON OFF de e e Od RV ERI MW ey v Ee DCN ROTE e IR CC RES ACC SW mue nth rere he tee reete ett gru lc nt rer ERE HR ae ata AERE ERU ER EFE CCS FAULT WIN ou COS aul ein Nata ie a es eect a A UO deste aree o eter Et RE CHTO MI HN D
5. e d Ce Ee d ie eG seep iet i etri eei eres MAIN RELAY FB cicer the tt Hh tege m Le n P ete d b yere a ette e co e xl epic ne des MAIN RELAY t Ene hr P Ree n e E Hn E RR DEO TR TERI MAIN RELAY irc MAIN REERAY A c ret teme ed e ei rere ep eem EH Ore te fer pe erre MAIN SW scere er ee rto e bt E Di Hbi e o RR D T b ED IRR EARN gl e T NA Hre n coe ined e tre PH e E n ite an eet eG MAINRLY gt MAINSHAET SPB RPM etie Ue p Pn rea eee 412 MAINSHAFT SPEED KPED MBH cete tt t ertet tet eee ete tis C coe l 506 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP 414 MAN VAG kPa Inblgy terere E RIEN FO TEUER UNE EN v E EM VERE WE 414 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR 2s 414 MANUAL MODE INDICATOR irrito ec th eere tt dye ae e Ee D Vu ds 506 MAP M iiid etenim ed numen eain uide aH EA 415 SENSOR M PR 415 SOLV m oT Omer nno tratto e ER time eere RT PW Here en 415 com a 415 nee inen enemies niteuu es en ee aes 462 2 mE iene eal peice tedden he eel EN Ea 415 MAP BARQ SOE reine t
6. 383 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL rt t e et Hu ea 482 Right SW c cierre etn i ERR D A Une n a eee eei 329 RL ABS STATUS 289 RE Door Courtesy SW iiie tei tei naeh id m d RH Eid b ia Gee ee e Ed eade 309 RE Lock Posit E 313 REL PAW Auto SW niic dinde i ci ee AN eerie niin ie yin mene 313 RE P W DOWN E 313 RL P W Up Sw RL PRS SEN V HI SENS RANGE aii ae AA alae ee Ai ei ee ciel Sie st 477 RESSENS opp ates a eee ae Pa ten ee rei del eee 477 RI SENS WEIGELT bS itr eti ti d Ra i 477 HE VSG STATUS icio co tee ipia tectae I d bed tede das 289 RL WIG SEN x iot eicit entend n RE n eren Renee eiae tele e eni eau 289 io Ie eiecit 289 RIWHEEL ACGEL m s2 54 2 cce term eerte ie tete i i RE De i 289 uoce ni caet bi ae det d bred e b cet E C ded b bid i db D e tv d e vd tea 289 RO2ET4 96 HER Ham enun eee i ae eni 431 RO2ET2A EE 431 Room udg culc indiaas 300 RPHRSTR RPM COARSE RPMDBES 7 ien Hee ren RR di eid bh ir ree iie eee
7. aa va 289 eni atado edidere hen er 432 RrACM SOL MAX CURRENT eroe cited optic vec o p V Ree Ho CEP T eee Ce v A Eder x Cre EH eed 432 Rr AGM SOEMIN CUHRENLT iieri tete idee ertt ette e t e eddie teret er E Pe E crede t 432 RR Door Courtesy SW cute citt o etta c d ed hA HD DI e HIE dared db e ovde dvd etd 309 RR OPERATE TORQ i RR P W Ec aia ei ee pe redid eee eee RR P W Down SW C MURIS PRS SEN V ini niin rie tnc neat eee teet bb ain eam eet RR RR SENS RANGE RR SENS VOLTS tate cbe dg a ER NE e PARE DUE RIEN eot ce ad bl eet ron td vv oda RR SENSWEIGLELN IDS bh E he n e idee REF ie 477 aa 5 STATUS EP 290 M 290 RR WIG SENS V 289 RR WASHER SW ae lice nin eie Re EF Heo ven nea 327 REE WHEEL E 286 262 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters RR WHEEL ACCEL m s2 uic 290 RR WHEEL SPD Rete b im e re det pe cb f e eee 290 RR WIPERIN EE 327 BRWIPER QN tnter n eprehenderit i e Re
8. e 356 BLOCK LEARN ac 5c iiir e eor Een ER HER DER en End PEOR 355 BLOWER FAN SW VOTE NIEVE RR VER ead nineteen A VEA EVE CODE ev 356 BRACKET OhImS ipie tenere Gael VO Ge eL ERE RYE PV CY TAURO Fa re beer een 296 BRAKE BOOSTER PRESS 0 10 00000 000100100000000000 0 ennt ennt enini 356 eire ett i te he ge i I e eee t C e V o eee tu D a od eeepc d due 281 BRAKE LAMP aco sot n oe ri PEOR RED Re rn ERE ni he 281 BRAKE LAMP 478 BRAKE eei ee Remedios i eri ent BRAKE S Witsius punea po tone rege a WE ITIN OR ERR D e YD ye ee stent te eve po BRAKE SW BRAKE SW1 2 Ehre dra teet tee Ee be ien e vet 357 BRAKE SWITGH B citet cr re o vd eet pi i een ente even eC He Y CN T Co e Hr co Duel eph t ides 356 BRAKE SWITO R ter EE E Oe d rne n enn nera rre 356 BRAKE SWT 356 BRAKE WARN AMPs ttem tete n P PEERS TEUER CETTE YF TEE TRE ENS 282 BRAKE WARN dit cte ge e rio x e i V LAM S T VOIR E EA CEA Ey edo ME IA EH DA ds 478 BrakeOnOff ERE ER EH ete Ur n ee ER e ER OF re 356 Hr RE 497
9. 492 ZEN Te RR RE E NR 492 sostiene LLLA AL LE 486 486 AWDEOWLMP tah tO iE LLL 486 4WDMODE L ER 492 are caer etd cetacean acta DEAE 493 VREF TR I RERUM Y 337 A ACC GHUTONREBAY aL 337 Uu I M I P 337 IC COWS W eate eon 337 CCGONSMPIBWESIQNI C LAM LIN D 467 ar M MU M DM EE PIG GUID HY ZICHHIBSSIDE 337 AIC IDLE UP VSV cx qu mI IU M 337 AIC TOM OUT iie Lau E ML AME lic E 338 SUM M tae ga MU AM EDU CDM LEM M AS 338 AIGBBESS kPS 337 PRESS 337 FICE SS 338 REFRIG a 475 PCIE IY E MM M M LL ap one 337 REBEL iu uu c d uu uL Ru m 338 PG RE OY cate see Due LE
10. 44 Code Reading Connectors and Locations sese 44 Hard Codes and Soft Codes sse 51 Clearing Godes ucc ere ge Tu dpt ee 51 Field Service Functional entere nens 52 Prizm Actuator Tests eec dide Uh Mend aati nites 52 Chapter 8 2 22 54 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 8 54 Code Reading Connectors and 54 SES EET 56 Gode Type aee ee ite adl c A a ER Va eg eu 57 Manual Code Reading 1986 91 ECM LED 59 NE E 60 ABS Codes and Data 60 Manual Gode Reading 5 2 tee unite dee eae a inae 62 Code Clearing for 1996 2002 Passport with Rear Wheel 65 Code Clearing for 1996 2002 Passport with 4 Wheel 65 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS sse 66 SRS Main UE em 66 Manual Code 67 ener UE 71 Chapter 9 Ay Un Gallas isc 77 Testing Engine Transmission ABS a
11. hia 399 TEE 399 IDLING REQUEST jas we 470 399 IG LEVEL P M 399 H 399 Signal tern re rn een i nU e n P eni ens 319 IGT ADJ V p 399 KERO VA C ANA d En aret de miti eme qp D eie be dee 285 IGT LEVEL iiti d C tee Ce t tate tg e E 399 IG1 Relay MOnd iier hee eie epa CERE 318 IG1 Relay Mon2 2 318 162 318 IG2 Relay Mon2 scere tinte t te ree tuned d dvd itia eed dea 318 60586 ata e ete e ne mE EP aedi enim a 400 2 ILO inanan yae e a E E A N A AA T A TAE E E NAAN EAS AAN RAE NENA 318 243 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters IGN V 400 IGN ACC SIG 400 TERM MN RR REPRE ERR 400 GION T 400 E O aces eh cha ace abe LA it hr CUR M AMD ARE 400 AGING 9 eoe cec cnp LE DLL i D alent lle LU AE 400
12. DRV STAT US iecit xt re te eoe edere a te en ED e CH d a RH d he Y DI DAV OI i ERROR EI oreet nte nile etre enter DRVR BELT E Drve Door Lock 313 DS EI el c P 297 DSBEETR ORhIIS nire irre a TRE RH EY HE Ce EET ROME FEES aa to Ra ER EE EE 297 COUNT siet ce HR its E PUE ER RE A RE ROVER VL ERU UE RETE SE LO EN MM 372 DTE ONT eus E 282 DIG esteem reete iem eter pred een fatte m e rts 297 ONT ETE 372 DTC_CNT 500 DWN SW PRU 500 BATY N SS We i tenen 500 E zi Gy EI 314 5 ap e E EROR US OA RYE ERE IO er tei le ete eve er tib UR ERES 372 I2 Ediz 372 IMEEM UE 373 A 373 EC IGN RLY 373 ECB MTR RELAY 2 282 EOB MTR RELAY RTI 282 ECB RELAY P EEE 282 Asa e 282 ECL 96 500
13. 373 ds am E E E 373 373 Z0 366 demi MMC aM 373 373 232 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters ECT 1 V 35s D suivi 373 378 373 ECT AAMB 2 Pr TER m nte ED ERE RETIRER 374 ECT Power Mode Sw t EON Ur RONDE EUN SUCTUS REA E EVO ER UE 314 EGT SENSOR 8 a Wei vette re ere Wr rr EP rr hi EP HE EH EHE ERE e ERE RH ECT SENSORY RR ER E ERR ECT Snow Mode Sw RP Hdc rec Cc FS TSI eis ce yc d CER A A and HEIER e Se e oce ara I tha uU p ea na EGR 6101 1 1 Nes ees cate ee TR Oe NT SOREN SENT US ERT EGR EGR ERR ON ctl UT tes DM EGR LIFT SENSOR ERS tata Drevin eae ee eat M QU C i iyi apo ML MELDE ar LA CDM eA DLL NM n
14. a ten eae ee eatin antennae has 333 UNEKCSWUASS 1 ote a 333 UNEK SW DR initia hen LE 333 Unlock w KOEQO amp Patk rt eR OPE GERI EE E RARO RH FUNERIS EESRER 333 Unlock2 Operation UP SHIFT SWITCH UP SHIE T sie net ned ce ete i ER a o dide Ea I a c ER t sese d vets UPSHIET IEAMP ei d rada ettet arte NAG CUTS Ss scsi ee DL pM a LM D E A VACUUM PMP Zei ka VAE RESE TSIO naaa LI VAPOR PRES ac d VAPOR PRES VAPOR PRES VSV VAPOR PRESS PUMP Nols VABHINTAKE UOS M M ME MAL VBATT V VBATT MYy rue ee A ee abe Maik e eee a EP Mabel BLA IN Mdb SPEED e
15. A apu Qu 495 SENSOR BOT attestato benessere 495 SENSOR DEG lcu cas UL LAM 495 AP SENSORT a i CALI ULL nice 495 495 REUNIR HM 344 Fab Me KR c E tal 349 APP 1 amp 2 AGREE ids 2349 cad A RS 349 APRS UA PR a el het tea 349 APPAVE m 350 EE REIR 350 221 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters APP 0 96 S or 1 458 LM el a M Ml otha MALE E 458 A RTI PR PERPE TN OTT NEON NTT Ty Sen RUT TE one URONIC Ine ron eevee Te 458 Esas t e POM a tied DER IM 350 A yo a DA Ue alec glint 350 APP SENSOR MALI p DL LL M LEM LLL SII 344 APP SENSOR EN a RR 350 APP SENSOR 1 V 949 APP SENSOR 2 96 APP SENSOR 2 APP SENSOR 2 APP SENSOR APP SENSOR A V APP SENSOR
16. VEHICLE YEAR CONNECTOR LOCATION 1993 94 ECM 5 left side of steering column 22 pin 1 left side of heater box 9 pin 2 left side of heater box 2 1993 95 Hobbs HUN AUS UE for under left side of dash TCM 4 left side of steering column ABS controller 7 under R F seat carpet 1995 ECM 8 under right side of passenger carpet 22 pin 2 left side of heater box ae for under left side of dash Legacy 1990 94 4 left side of steering column ECM 5 left side of steering column 9 pin 2 left side of heater box ABS controller 7 under R F seat carpet 146 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 5 Figure 15 6 SVX common connector locations Table 15 6 SVX connector locations CONNECTOR LOCATION TCM under left side of dash ECM under left side of dash 10 pin and 20 pin connectors ABS control unit under RF seat 9 pin Check connector and diagnostic connector 1 2 3 left side of kickpanel 4 left side of kick panel 4 TRUNK Figure 15 7 XT and XT6 common connector locations Table 15 7 XT and XT6 connector locations CONNECTOR LOCATION D Check connector 9 pin Check connector 1 Read Memory connector 2 by ECM MPFI controller 3 in trunk below rear window and power steering controller connector under left rear quarter window 4 147 Subaru Testing Engine
17. INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 INTAKE AIR VS V enne eR C a need eb teen Renee RES snm M n INTAKE AIRY or e INTAKE AIR S tiep e bed ita tese I LE DV t EC ne A M D d ed ED etae INTAKE CNTRL INTAKE CTL VSV1 INTAKE CTE VSV2 enit e od Rete te teen ler tit INTAKE CT RE SQL tto eta tec eer PA P tecta te cb nte tede P Dl WE D LA erede dep a INTAKE cierta n Poen eem et Uam m eet eii eae INTEGRAT R D INTERIOR LAMP DEFEAT 5 iiie eerte ett teret t et RE re e HER E PR Pee o epit Interior Fight ON Unlock noia occae tte rco ttc ete ette rco d e be eb Interior Light INTERNAL RESISTANCE OHMS 01 14 470 6 090 ye en Aten ISC STEP rnt Ra prd me eaten eiiam sin ae asta de ISOLT2 246 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters ee na p Ne ee ice P UC P EN ba deo ee ep Eee 407 K K D SERVO SW K D SW KAMFUSE KEY CYE EKSSW ie ct ree cre 320 Key Cyl Lock SW ceeceeceeseesceeseeeeeesesseeeneeaecseessecaeesaeeaecsecseses
18. 332 Trunk M 332 Trunk Eid Operatioft cited ctt ertt tt co i rl saben E Cd dede rede e a eet v d tea 332 Trunk Main Sw 332 Trunk Opener Monitor onneani ava e CC i P ERE YID vL e c E Leder acte ie 332 Tr nk Op ner SW uina irt petet ee E i bc epe det ied n ved elect nde naan 332 m 332 TRUNKKOPNR SW tini etie epi ede ee enean se eee ei NNA 332 Trunk Back Door Open Sw 332 a a udine iut te nii id i 332 ctt eh cree t a ne tA UU Lebe ei nod eed rey a b b a c bt ttv 449 TS SRO nen hie i net een mee a 523 TSLIPRAT 1000 Dc ea eee eer 523 TSS RBM ziii eie SR e teo ime ebd etr bee 523 SOBVIUR 523 T rbSpds RPM ciiin enema ien ren Pen nde v e e ee REM t 450 TurbSpdS RPM eC 523 273 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Turn Left Sw 2 2323 Turn Right Sw 329 TWC TEMP eet tit teta coti e ede ta ta ca Mee idle td oe b vp dc da ba co rd cA Vide E t Do bee E Coe 450 U UN BUTTON III KM NIMM 333
19. 423 292 1 51 O2 B1 S2 mM ert vem dota O2 B1 S2 V O2 B1 S2 HTR O2 52 423 OZ BIsS2CMV 22 1 53 s H E O2 BT SA mV is dn iei eet ori ER Ne NEGERI saves Ee EUREN e REY ERROR NS ORTI sees MV M O2 2 51 V O2 B2 S1 HTR O2 B29S 1 AVR MA ak iir ERE e ER coves cacceste ERE RASEN Rer EE RE ROTE E OO e ir RERO 423 02 VA HE 463 OZ B2 S2 422 422 2 2 5 90 A T 423 02 252 R 423 O2 B2 S2 mV O2 B2 S3 mV 254 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters O2 B2 S4 mV ET 2 463 O2 CROSSCOUNTS 423 O HEATER BIS Ded A Dd ML rT ues 423 OSHEATERBTIO teste eod Gaia tinal ang t AD es 423 O2 HEATER BITS ie sii rdc iR UR Ue tB te i Uc o LONE UD SUD adores 423 OS
20. 484 Ini Threshold 5 gauge 2 484 Initial Switch Info cr irre tt eme edam e eet ire qr erdt pe eme ei e HE e enitn 484 Initial m 484 INJSET IMS sess tena in n denn rer eid et ep i en etd 404 ING Ec ie 404 INJ 2 MS 404 MS dade eei N 404 INJ x mS iis nm 2 404 INJ MS nasen a a a a ie a a y E a N e a aA 404 INJ BI a ete 404 2 5 tah eane a ai di Ar aai 404 oiii eri eric n e ere eU a TAa ai eni Ane 404 DIBEB UTEE 9 404 memet e eR Hber e p ri ED E edt celebre tel 404 INJ PULSE B2 tmgS catre eder idet t Ec tene D rv te ag cde e etd den edle eb a o td vv eda 404 EQUAL 404 INJ PW B1 mS wets wee 404 inten nettement e e t HP B od Re i e on Randa 404 INU MS E 504 INJ rni tte eri e ere HR Ene eni n eme eut 405 ec 405 245 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters INJ2 Fault
21. TARGET ENG SPD n n VARRONE 2 473 achete tete teh See ier DE Ce GP EE ER A ee 440 TARGET THiVALVE 2 eee t tie eter tenete eei d t RR pice e Md e ye sa Ee c X OA E De E des 440 TARGET TEUVEV ETES J De trie E n EDD er ERE ai Anais 440 EE 441 TAD TERMINALES HR heit n id 441 per URODA A E EE fan oni dana nei etna E lela adi E id adda TGG BRAKE SW 4 ecciesie et T a TR a de e n CI ced tede ye a re e e v ve die de dd 516 5 niece ni ome n e e ne e RBS WIE 441 516 ICG DUTY SOL OKT STATUS ree eter tee temer ete me ie P to er as eee erede dy 491 TOC DUTY J erected te t o EPI e UR LX E SR EX e ed WR E T EI 516 TOGEERFIGIENGY PEPERIT EE ORE YE ER UO Aes 517 ENAB SOL STATUS ds e 491 TOC ENABLE SOL ee n rene rient temet ee aot eripe RW ad ete A dte EHE 517 TCC ENABLED itt rtr eo ease ET IG I e tr dde be 516 temen trn Inno Oen nine T In DH EUR ada 517 TEC GROUNDED EE M S 517 MECC PWM ENABLED en
22. 11 Chapter 4r dece eee 12 Testing Engine Systems esie e 12 Code Reading Connectors and 12 ECM Locations 1986 to 1990 with LED 14 SCS MOS m 16 SN T EE 17 Manual Code Reading Engine 17 Multiple Godes LE 18 Testing Transmission 19 Code Reading Connector 19 Manual Code Reading Transmission 21 Testing Antilock Brake Systems 5 191 22 Code Reading Connectors and 22 ABS Codes and Data Testing sess esent 23 Manual Code Reading ABS Codes and Clearing 25 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS sse 28 SRS Main Men ce po Ed ead dne 28 Table of Contents Manual Gode Reading SRS c ure re te rk 29 Code Clearing SRS Codes sse nennen enne 31 Chapter 5 Chrysler 33 Testing Eng
23. 513 SHIF FLOCK SOL i cmn a te tepore a te Da ree t An vp bl be a d e dic o e t ted y edes 513 SHIFT LOCK SHIFT MAP SHIFT MAP NUMBER rtr erre Piece MN Re ee de tegeret rere E e E idt 513 road ne 330 Shift position P rt tende ote ren entente nre etit 330 Shift Position 330 SHIFT POSITION zt rni eterni eme Pt Ree tei o D FPE pbi cte 473 SHIFT SOL itera tena c ehe a e c E A vp bl E LC e d nce pe UN Ete et ee E buds 434 SHIFT SOL Atene E e eR n e HUC Ried 494 SHIFT SOL A js E 513 SHIETSOL A zucchero ii Or adve 514 SHIFT SOL Bin E M 434 SHIFT Eie nn e RE DUE ic e n i ep ea i eniin 494 SHIFT SOL B 513 SHIFT SOL B5 irren one ei pee ut RE beside t D me ne dee 514 SHIFT SOL Ge ana eed 434 SHIFT SOL DE as jai 494 SHIFT SOL 6 warner ies a en ie reece 513 ccm Hee hei d i ee bestia te te enm bee i e 434 SHIFT SOL D 494 SHIFT SOLE NE aR E Pen acr annie 434 p die a idl de eee ae ied oleate 494 Shift Tempzz eta egentem inn nrbe 301 SHIE F OLUTGH SW rn
24. LC A LE 472 MOTTQLMTX kgfm en 22420 MOUNT CTRESOL x eem onto i 420 s ERN ARRIERE A RERO RTT 420 inu olei ALPE IRL D MEI 319 IN RR SERERE 420 eer A M LM LP M MU LL n D ML ME 287 N EN 506 NSW aai 325 325 MEI ne 420 507 eril 9 507 IMEEM IMEEM 507 NCRKMF 253 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters ND WHL SPD n ds a 420 NEUN LIGH oer e oreet nop ie eripe ten aa tins ERI 488 EE M 420 NEUT SW M TQ ate iia EE RET ania ication t Re Aosta RED PATH EET T RE 507 NEM tee EIER recie Ier n ume due Neue Lr cse det paw Ene MART cR N VIST mtm n a Unde iint NEVU assailant ited hes rete en Hen avrai EE Ets 421
25. c A 286 WHEEL SPD RL WHEEL SPD RL 276 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters WHEEL SPD RR 286 WHEEL SPD RR 294 WHEL SPD Flivvect 294 intct thi ied teet e niente noie n E e em dee ie n e 294 WHE SPD Ri 294 WPEAST SERT detienen nie iie noeh sui died erem e e Ee EA EA 334 o ete ee pr remi cit ere te cerdo T De E He dere reales 334 WPINT REAR 335 WPRLY LOW m 334 WPRO REAR 2 25 te ctetuer t RE ter in dete ementi 334 WPRPRKSTS e E 335 X ERE 489 Y YAW RATE YAW RATE SENS 1 YAW RATE SENS Zii 295 YAW RATE VALUE ettet eoe debat din sedeo dre eo ce dre e adde did Nude 295 YAWRATE ene mco th iine reden ro doe tet eec 294 YAW RATE a M 294 YAW ZERO VALUE E
26. 424 NE UT ELITR ERR PER 02S Bi nc C VPE DRAIN E NES eo i e IN RR E E E RENTA 028 HEATER 61 O2S A FS MONITOR D M LM a Nee E Ed M M MEE e MD AE OSIMA A A M aoe 02512 V T RR e ERR Tem 2 D o 255 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters O2S14 V S T a 2 463 02821 mV 424 OZSA N ERR 424 SSP FT QE 464 463 LUAM ML Ms D UM LAE 425 ERR A E 424 2522 V ADJ OD CUT AT E 351 ODCU T 42 Seiwa tenet ent rete e niece need D nde E en tdi 507 p a 507 Nee ee A a ea 507 OB INHIBIT rate iceberg eei S De bl tu ctp
27. 516 TCE RELEASE ette rre e eve EI ME CIN ee D d DP RW E UE EHE LINT t 517 TCC SLIP RPM ie TT 2 517 TCC SOL 96 E CETUR ARS 517 WGC SOV EE 517 5 9 m 441 TOC SOLENOID nie ree eren Dn P e OE e EE E a 516 fice Q 518 TOCO O BRAKE O dhe ees i EC ERE 441 T snaait ni te td e ERI VE ec RU t eV DOT EMI eee ce EI E EIN 518 sn RR UI RI ORE Tone 518 TCCA V EE E atl ice voted en ei ERE ERREUR EE een metier de Mte eie m fes ret Eee m M paS TCCMACT RPM TCCMACT RPM TOI ttes TCIL FAULT fk l A eer ere 269 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters TEMP GAUGE we 442 TEN TERMINAL THIDLL 9 THOR Go PER eh HC 442 THROTL CLSD DUTY 96 socsessssessssssssesssssessesssseecsssusesssssusessssuecssssuesesssuessssssesssssueessssssesssssutsssssuisesssssuessssieeesssseeess 442 THROTL MTR OPN C BE o aL cot 442 2 442 THOM
28. Indicates if a door lock is being activated with a key D Door is the driver door P Door is the passenger door all others apply to any door Reads ON if the door is being unlocked with a key reads OFF at all other times Door Lock Lock Driver Lock Position Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the manual door lock switch signal for the passenger door Reads ON if the door is unlocked reads OFF at all other times Door Lock Unlock Pass Door Lock Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the manual door lock switch signal for the driver door Reads ON if the door is locked reads OFF at all other times Door Lock Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the electric lock unlock switch Reads ON when the switch is pressed to lock the doors and reads OFF at all other times Door Lock Sw LOCK Range ON OFF Displays the door lock switch signal Reads ON if the door is locked reads OFF when unlocked Door Lock Sw UNLOCK Range ON OFF Displays the door lock switch signal Reads ON if the door is unlocked reads OFF when locked Door Lock Sw Status Range ON OFF Indicates the manual door lock control switch signal Reads ON if the door is locked with the switch reads OFF at all other times 309 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Door Unlock Sw Status Pass Door Unlock Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the manual door lock control switch signal Door is the main switch and Pass is the passenger door Read
29. To Voltmeter Channel 2 To Voltmeter Channel 1 Figure 12 5 Connecting a Dual Trace Graphic Meter to a 1987 626 transmission connection IMPORTANT Be aware that the negative meter lead is connected to a 12 V source on the Y B yellow black wire the transmission control module TCM grounds the other wires to create the signal Therefore the displayed reading is inverted and the ones are the negative transitions This test may also be performed with a test lamp Connect the ground lead of the test lamp to the yellow black wire and probe the other two wires of the test connector one at a time The blue white wire displays the tens digit of the code as a 0 4 second flash followed by a 2 second pause The pattern then repeats If there is no flash no tens digit is present The blue black wire displays the ones digit as either a 2 0 second flash which is counted as five or a 0 4 second flash which is counted as a one Combine the two readings tens and ones to get a two digit code Figure 12 6 on page 111 110 12 2 Testing Antilock Brake Systems Channel 1 Blue Black Wire 2 0 Sec 0 4 Sec ue qm I vt 1 Lin Code Repeats On Off l Count E Count Each 1 as5 as 1 1 I Ones Digit 9 Channel 2 Blue White Wire 0 4 Sec 1 1 Repeats E Digit 1 Code is 19 Ones Digit Tens Digit
30. eee cete er tier reete nre e PER EE E DERE Ge PP EE eH AIRFLOW MS ae vetet ete i ie tte eb e Te a tree a t de p e EM e dee b e M ES ace t WERE s AIRE OW iM EE AIRFLOW V AIRFLOW RESET AIREEOW g S hue niet EP ce eu THp i e RA A A o Ie E ie S Du Eds AIT PMPSPES PRS KBa sien teer e Ee Ee trie no nC TCR aa Eie 347 AKNOCK E irre eri eee teer teer EE ree e e ere ere Pid oe Cu TPTRS Alarm Function i All Unlock Opn Cls AEESEAMPS 1 anter eere nete rente ee are tent Lac n ALT OCTBRE 1 5 iere Emmeness Men no En I nn eri n f e Alt L Term Sig RETE M ee AETERNATOR PE ree dete ALTE Yo c eei citt EE Hv o vei I D HRS aa RR UU EX UE E t e edes PALATE T We csc ous ccs ER EFE PEE E Ur E R Ambi Temp Sensor E Dude P lel rares eR 299 AMBIENT TEMP en ren in aa dU ntn WEB ERR 349 AMBIENT TEMP erences le r 349 AMBIENT rire teer re RO HIP P beret eer EE E e etr ve ren dee aene Eee p rev PY ERE 467 AP SENSOR A AP SENSOR B AP SENSOR V AP SENSOR A VOI C eue cs um Lu tuf asp
31. r 466 J inre tne eee ene i metiendo d be any 443 TP SENSOR V I pi tice poe ta t e tc cip ave reta Libr HEN ede ed vetet et du reete ev eda 447 TP SENSOR A V TP SENSOR B V mri nire Ue EGET I FOOTER YO E I E HD YER ca Hia M TP ie hie haa AE it id etie eben eiu eus TP TPS V TP TPS V TP_FAULT TP_FAULT TP_MODE 4 nier eret ren mre te Enn EP a cect Sle tS gh ae DUAE deme EAE 271 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters 448 TROTO RR ARP REPRE TPCT V m m m TES nM Cu cM TPS TPS TPS V Vu EE N e o t en beni 447 TRS AM aa M 444 TPSEBOMIEEL 378 posto e EMEN 443 Pic P RENE PP 444 TPS1 LRN MIN V TPS2 96 52 V TRAC BRK STATUS TRAC STATUS tva ee aged ave e go on d
32. 394 HO2 SNSR 2 Aa Medel are ed eerie nei eae ae 394 HO2S AE B1 ST HEATER be Heed eet e redes Che e ett dys 394 HO2S AE B2 S1 HEATER orit tta teer t E hr be pe end ce ED I e ve deed tec dc de A eed 394 HOSS HO2S 1 HEATER HO2S 2 HEATER HO2S 3 HEATER HO2S B1 H CUR HO2S B1 HEATER CURRENT 395 epu te Due Ri DM LU LLL A EK 395 EST A RA PRI Nm 395 HOSS SSHOUB E utu Lo EDU CELLA MD LL A DE 395 HO2S B1 S2 HEATER CURRENT xcu SS HEATER Eo MO tet anand BZH CUR ER E IE I RR RARIOR RR HO2S B2 HEATER CURRENT Sect cete o sn uae drei ed con ie abe dtc eit E hs E NR EE HOS BO A LL LM HO2S B2 HO2S B2 S2 HO2S B2 S2 HEATER CURRENT mA 25 2 52 25 enr mere ntt ine eere teen eme e Freier e re i EP etre E WE EP HO2S HEATED OXY GEN SENSOR AF cete eerte irte a nen d bee t Ce Pe C Oe DR e RU e ME 395 HO2S ST mA aeo ite nen reta ere ER neat ed t en E ni A 394 26 1 E 395 HO2S SSEBHEATB
33. ME ER TTE 5 ca GMP FAUT ret epe ne ede v t er t NU ge i uae CoastClSol mA TT vs i 22 tociens GoastOlSol mA tieni edere ert e n eode ito metere relie te Hi atts iere rel M Com B Door P W z D HOUR EU RECO ER LIO S e IN I eye d P d ved v edes Gom Body No 4 2 entered enr m nne team aU Rn am mA Com Body 5 Jais m ns C m COMB SW et cer reete ace erre re eret ee eroe ie en ee rra tee i Gom GRIS ene dae teen See Ae E e PA RISE COM CRRS3 wieder MA ene Ai a ae A et Ae ieee Comi Cr ise GITl s uiis enter p e C n e e We PO E RYE EDI vH E UE EAR annie Com CTR Console s nm 22 ito PSP a a a r Gomibb DOOF ciii ete Hire ete re Wr rt te ea rte E ra E Com iD DOOr Mitt Comiboubletllocks e PEE oA P GomD Seabs eee etr eiecti nat ener vec mte eoe eater rae
34. 353 BARO SENSON Ababa MOM IT E 353 BATT V BATT V BATT INSIDE RM 467 TEMP BATT TEMP V 223 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Batt Volt 1 484 VolE2 toast eR met REO ameti de tt rea REPERI 484 Batt a 484 484 484 BAT TM ett ere e E p Erste tra RETE THE E uites 496 SAVR aee tete vete TEE Hg n Lr E EI ME TAE AE YI CENE ra ey Dee e Ee Oe 305 BATTERY oto nier nr EROR REESE VERE ERR TEE ED 354 BATTERY BLOCK 2 467 BATTERY BEOCK MINIMU M V 467 BATTERY BEOCK V VOT to M 14 ctr tee e nee ede D e eben e rt ed n i d egi d des 467 BATTERY terrere 478 BATTERY SOG c M 468 BATTERY TEMPERATURE 1 to 3 468 BATTERY VOLES sssaaa a Ie i i EN EINER EUMD I Uo ee EN ERR eo a NS b DH a ecd d 478 BBP SENSOR ccn nde He rre ROTER REN Pe EP EH EE rr 354 BEM mE 355 nennt nee ren bete ERR cde RH 355 BLOCK dio
35. C P C SOL VLV 2000 ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 493 AUT SWISS LM LL LL NE Md 340 PPA IR Ss Pa ttt ER E REIR ee 493 SWT SWT AT OSSWTOH ee Lp LL M Rt tu LL 340 SRM TUR TT 494 GWT NR m e 494 SWETGB ihe selec DUI QUNM RI RM 340 AU DP WITICH Lp LL E D LC M M LEM E 494 ATDA ve NN EN 494 AOS SWITODI uiu ee ata OL D Malar TA LL 494 D5 SWT N SWITCH TUM ES E BENIN ERE MR RR RES Pe ct mela e Nica LE LI Mte LI aah ins 494 A T P SWITCH ANE ONE uos AM LU a te M d E M SWITCH SWITCH e E V M ceci ND RE 4 5 LM 494 A T SHIFT SOL UI detinet D ertet tua 494 sae cies eg e A UM M DL LM 494 AIT SHIFT SOL VLV D eain aibi du 494 An SHIETSOLVIV isi 494 A 495 AT
36. IER RR 473 SOFTWARE cA IR DC EL d 489 EE 493 SOL A SOL B ACT SOL B CMD SOL C ACT SOL C CMD SOL SUPPLY V He SOLMON1 SOLMON2 SOLMON3 SRARIGADY 9 ct th ren E RUE REED RR HERD TU Tn nde HO nin a E eS 400 436 SPARKADV 514 e e Y e EORR AN BEDA vL Y dre e TC A S d EID 400 SPARKADV i us Notis 2 465 SPDi NG c OO 436 SED NGO si i tne tete rte hr to ehh eterne eR Ere Wet a ree DE ER RYE 436 2 436 ect trie mirer ERREUR mde eee baie ame nia intcr 436 SPD NE M 436 IRE Rn n reme td e te e E 292 SPD SEN ER einge tici ed rb d Y MC EA bt p re be E A C ER el E EN EMT t ev OI vd 291 SEDI SEN URL A oiii ene REI ERR ERE RR PU een EIE EIE 292 SPD SEN RR m ds 292 SPD PEST oett Ute poet ee ERREUR RE de nonu dod re nane deter 437 2 KPH 436 SPB SP2 E e
37. gt Testing Engine and Transmission Systems adjustment fix first the throttle position sensor must be fixed to proceed If idle speed is correct skip to the last step Ten minutes after the idle speed test signal is received the PCM stops communicating Normally this is enough time to complete the adjustment If not return to the Functional Tests menu select and repeat the test Turn the throttle stop until idle RPM correct displays 5 Select to accept when the idle RPM is correct An instruction and verification screen displays 6 Runthe engine at 1500 RPM for 10 seconds return to idle and press Y Anidle RPM correct message should display If not repeat the idle speed adjustment 8 When the idle is properly adjusted exit the test EEC V Functional Tests NOTE Operations described in this section are not available on all tool platforms The following EEC V functional tests are described e Output State Test on page 109 Module Identification Test on page 110 NOTE The ignition key should be switched off when selecting Functional Tests from the Main Menu PCM on EEC V vehicles Output State Test This test lets you switch PCM signals to the engine actuators on and off for testing with a DVOM or lab scope The engine must be off before the test is selected During a test actuators stay on or off until you switch them Actuators default to their normal state after 10 minutes if
38. a EDPSSEDV A aie a rre ren n e n eines 409 luo dein aad A 409 LEDA 504 EET 504 neni RHOD RR IEEE t 505 LEFT FRONT SOLAR SNSR M coding ieee alti VH E TRES EUR E OE EA UU REEL 321 2 4 tO We eee EHE ei me te retento timebit eter ae 383 LEFT TURN SIGNAL e tege e n WR Pe WR HE ED o d e t depict des 480 cen o Ere RR ee e 321 liso M 505 7 iret en ttr e eret me b eerie tree Merit mH REO 286 EF MOTORFBIS iier t ite Pe bere i eee Ye HR EAR DI CIERRE E EUM REN MEET e be evt e 286 LEEAWHEEHE aera nin etr er etre rie RENE EP Pe ER Hr Eee ETHER 286 IB Mp MR 322 LF WSPD LFAWAKE e o NER RR UR ERR 409 FDR SW E 322 LL ML UM LU M UU E M 322 Ez ire zv RR 322 LFPW PEAK A 2829 EERW D i RUE SPRONTEMEB Ss on tl a EN RR or DS NT O NER m m Catalin LFTRIM 2
39. 1 gy 1 Notes and Important 2 INOQLOS ica 2 IMPOMMAM ET 2 Chapter 2 3 Chapter 3 Operations ici ccer ri eece recrear creer rk e tnm ra niae raa aman sU sca nre D aani 4 Selecting the 4 esie ai 7 pe 5 Selecting ce una bd 5 Connecting to the 6 Main Men Selections uiia eio eite eene er sad epa der edd 8 Gode FUNCIONS isi 8 Reading Different Code 9 Automatic Code 10 eT oefetre 10 Printing Codes xcu o aes at adel pea Ee 10 Manual 10 How to Get Codes idee reiten eate Ee tco la alate a Pee dat 11 REVIEWING CODES i
40. 338 RCBEOHESPSWLe ce tM Lu 338 AIGREOUEST MM M P 338 SIG AIC SW SWITCH SWITCH O o IRL M Mu uM uu EE 339 339 339 Poe cree 339 AIF 1 24 1 339 WIE AVBHAUJBO eye e occ el MED AAE De MA fa rns 339 A F LEARNED 217 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters AIF LEFT V Bu E 339 E tr ip enu AERATION RR RR RR a e NE HPP cM DD CLIMA Ra M DNE DUUM latin eV A F SSR TEST B1 A F SSR TEST B1 A F SSR TEST B2 AIF SSR TEST B2 ATi SWITCH ot aen a a Dn PAE E 5 PRO PEERS INEO S RE KT scar a NL MIU NRI Cp NU NI ANI alr AA PPT ASW N ne a GV SNR RE ATOPO SORVIVAACTUA E S uu M C P C SOL A COMMAND nS AT CG SO VIS ACTA ec ae C P C SOL VLV B COMMAND PIE BOOSODVU VO Le e p AE
41. 383 PANE MR 384 384 A MR UU 383 x T C n 384 FAME HO secret OR 384 La E 384 BAM S e RI LM C E D du e e E 384 pulo 384 pu espandere 384 S m cc LM uM ML I M e 366 FAN HIGH CTRL 2384 S p cup D 384 RAN MOTEL nere c cep 384 LM UE DUM UE 384 ANSI ms cree eh LM MU IM DL DE MEM MAE A EE FAST IDLE SOL FAT TERMINAL PAP Cc M RI M UR LE FAULT CODE DISPLAY Fle AIO REIR UL LM M M ML M Ql MIL E 236 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters 985 385 385 BGILZFAULT 2 52 ethnici n mpi en eben e 385 E diac nie elie eee loc ees 385 FE ABS STATUS 41r Ire et ee ue d er E EH ee EE E ir Pe ERE 283 SEN iA 283 FL SENS RANGE iis dino es 477 FLSENS VOLTS vied sonic ia ae i rien ei i ete a ae ee 477 FE SENS WEIGELT DS iiio tei tevin ie
42. 5 Mr f IVA T EVAP PRES V J 52 i dure cinerea ieee dee eae a n EVAP PURGE EVAP SOLEENOID trate oe cot dett ee a i evel ecol EVAP SYS s cotton i ERE RE Uri nta ien ai em t AT MBIT EVABP TIS Tz detti aequi emendato ee EVAP VENT SOL t rate tie ea caeca de bte CD e DIU ce t c olde abt ro dtd vv dua VP H2O EVAP inen T s EVAPCP ise da ke dade dee oni qid tete eed eed EVAPQOPJ96G iet te ace esi d dd d A BL D E LR d Pa a d i d dex v D D t 2 3 renensium ener ibn niin eara M 379 235 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters EVAPCV 382 BUABGV PAUL eL LM LT cd ete tend asia les LE 382 382 VAP TEIN A Sain cec eU d te 382 EVAPSOAK 382 BVAPNM m LM
43. EQ RAT11 EQ RAT12 EQ RAT13 EQ RAT14 EQ RAT21 EQ RAT22 EQ RAT23 EQ RAT24 1 EQ RAT32 EQ RAT41 EQ RAT42 iiri en eie ote ite i rei ee te tee rm Eee ESG COUNTER iit reb ie aede eb eret tac ee p t tL ped e o cde de edd eb E Cab Cit e td pedea ESC FAILURE rernm etie nme un Ue eie HR Ren EST ECT F ESTIMAT SPD RAT ETC ACT 9 CE DES 95 tiii i nie nen mei nee ERR RR e ETR 96 H EVAP A ES CMP gt itidem eei i i m Re e ide EE ER 341 EVAP A FS ENA 2 tte p d Pa X b e eH EI A bl de bee a ret ev dtd 341 EVAP BYPASS SOL s EE i 380 EVap Otrluz ait RS RE dente tee dte ee edid a Saeed Satine 300 EVAP CVS VALVE tates tace Ctt Dat d ted ia n Pd tee vice d t T hte Lcid e e tede d ea 380 5 VEV cesses cara nein end inen ER ec ale RR RE e EE Ret 380 380 2 380 rt bate tiep ebd t NE e DIL e CRINE bab Cb ed c D e taa EVAP MONITOR EVAP MONITOR EVAP MONITOR EVAP MONITOR DUTY 96 ii itii nece nime mice nn teet bete edm edet eut 380
44. Pere NENT SENET LEE 454 Seat AME ML LI D DNO CURED La 454 VTEC PRES SW B1 454 VIECPRESS W RR 454 VEG O E 454 VTEC SOL NP 454 275 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters VTEC SOL 2 Eu nu we 454 VTEC SOL B1 SOL NR taeda VVT ANGL 1 VVT ANGL 2 VVT CHNG ANGL 1 VVT CHNG ANGL 2 VVT CHNG ANGL 1 VT GING ANG cam anbieten hl p ec ate 455 WT CONTRO RTI NT P Rc 455 BA RR EE A 455 ah el he oa en tne 455 VVT GIG tue eM A p M ML Xx A ELE 455 RT ENT 455 DEO DD ILLU DL AE ind SEIS ee eL 455 VVT EX CHG ANG2 Tun 1 ecc erat M ct vane A Joss sss e ERR RS NATE WD Bl Oe NE R va Ns Yeti eae Nace a Wea ree NE VVT OCV DUTY B1 VVT OCV DUTY B2 VVTL AIM ANGL 1
45. Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not electric throttle control system has input power ON Idling BM VOLTS Range Min 0 Max 19 922 V Indicates BM voltage 10 to 15 V Idling CARB CODES Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates the number of emission related DTCs CODES Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates number of detected DTCs 1ST GEAR 2ND GEAR 3RD GEAR 4TH GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module 2nd AIR MON ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the secondary AIR monitor 2nd AIR MON CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the secondary AIR monitor 2ND SELECTED Range YES NO Indicates the gear selected 40 CYCLES Range CMPLT INCMP Indicates whether a DTC has remained active for 40 drive cycles 4WD ENGAGED Range ON OFF Indicates the 4WD switch status 4WD LOW SW Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the four wheel drive low switch Reads ON when the switch is on 334 Data Parameters Engine Parameters 5V REF V Range 0 0 to 5 12 V Indicates the reference voltage that the system sensors operate on The nominal reference value is 5 0 V but voltage may vary slightly depending on system calibration and charging voltage A C CLUTCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A C compressor clutch it reads ON when the clutch is engaged A C CLUTCH RELAY A C RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates a feedback signal from the A C compressor clutch
46. pA DM 290 ET e cea Me a M P 290 T 290 SLARL CUR SLARL CURR A CURL oc cde SIARR GUB CA 290 SIC VEIPOBE ecce minat c 291 D reae osea nex isa OPT TERR 489 STG INIA ace hg M RA Du in urs E REN RR ORI RR RI PE NE UN EET SLIP DES SLIPPAGE RPM tenebo cds attese he Ca eRe TS On DRO STE CU at nnd chile tek Caled incus EM Dt wien MeL E DN MU IL cl UA dE ADM Saitoh SLRFL CURR A 265 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters CUR ind za 291 SLRFR CURR A 291 SERRE CUR 291 SERRE inti hee dee n ent e n e eii ee ne m E d i HERI En E EE D Pe FAR ec 291 5028 B2 CUR mA oe E 435 S025 serere 436 SOAK TIME 436 sc 2 436 4 2 cO EE
47. sia chide di ree Pre te i 468 COOLING E M 366 ede mnn m ne tiim da m RR 486 COUNTERSHAFT SPEED km h MPE icri verre p Reve ere ene eer e ne ve ve eee a Pe e ve VER TUER ds 497 COUNTERSHAFT SPEED RPM 497 COURTESY LAMP SW sci ccn rte eee re e OM E t p UI E EDAX RD IN CAVE v ADR HE DR E A OI ed 309 228 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters 359 CRUISE CONTROL CRUISE CONTROL CRUISE INDIGATOR eine ede rte inherit tti ti a ind 367 CRUISE LAMP 367 CRUISE LIGHT rh A en ne RN e e ence a 367 metas 367 CRUISE MASTER MAIN SWT ritenere tenente tiir tete i PH Een ted eade a peak nie tente ela ena data 367 CRUISE RESUME SWT trit etre et eere te o Denn de Ee p ebd ni ded tee dete e ead teens 368 CURRENT ie noc 468 CUBRENTIGEAE cuiusmodi RU ai CI NM DUC SAL MU NE 498 CURRENT SENSOR n cu us coe taal LL M cottage at 368 CARLA rer 369 CYL 1 CYL 2 CYL 2 CYL 3 CYL
48. 427 Leda eine n e n eae EO RI er ERE es 287 PKBS SWiis eee bti o Mead eee t leto in ated a UE PI ed a cael Aba bl d a Codd en etd 325 PLATE Azure Re Hn emer e ED en Te eire ED EE ERE Hr 488 PLATE B babe 488 JN NOM 488 PLATE _D iv M 488 PEATE PW Pes a i nre enm P ner RE PEE e IE rur ost 488 M 309 258 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters P Mirror Memory 2 2 309 hann re rei emo 288 ci UN E M S 288 PNP SWAANSW i niinc ihnen REP eb een eem etes 509 427 PNP SWING His thai An 509 iro bt co taped dene vtta ace tive deel avi eb 509 POWER ROST RM 472 UL cce LL LA LM LL MM 510 ENT Tra en 427 PRESSA cM E Ate d 427 PRI PRESS MPa nen m PRIGPEED o scc antera tem tutos dc ches ape
49. 451 NS Y NE PTS NNI NN E a 451 A ERES EE EE 466 EV Ot tat aS ca RE ENS 524 a UL DAI ULL M Me M eC M LLL LL 524 VREE I e Sae a 452 VRIS SOL DM LED UII DU chine cela 452 VRIS SOL VLV 1 VRIS SOL VLV 2 RR TERRE REP HERR MESI PR ENERO E T VSA REQ TH LR ML A ULL SN Az d RENE RR VSC TRC OFF SW BS SPN ede E E ISTIS RENNES WA PCI Me NE PROS ETC rte Ce on ee CMT dk AMNES MID a ace ec m Deel Tle VT ACT2 m m ad ed RT Pone ell E NN EE RIEN Vu MEMO RN eee Bota VT DUTY cake ect Ba ance hah VEDUTA n a oer VT SOL DUTY ea VTC 5 VTD AUTOLRN MERIDIEN soe ee s LE Lu c ME E VTD FAIL WAT IIIS AB ab nied xA SLM Ne LU LAE LAM D LANE ieee yaaa alec ee eae cud ade Mem IRA A Melde VIDPASSWORD OK
50. position the reading is P N If the selector is in any other position the reading is GEAR POS COUNT Range 0 to 255 Indicates the number of cogs on the flywheel an intact flywheel should have 180 cogs The crankshaft position sensor is used to determine this value PRES UP VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command status for the vacuum switching valve VSV that controls the pressure up valve This valve diverts intake manifold vacuum from the fuel pressure regulator causing fuel rail pressure to rise PRESS R SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the pressure regulator cutoff solenoid valve Vacuum to the fuel pressure regulator is cut to prevent fuel percolation and make hot restart easier PRI PRESS MPa Range 0 3 to 0 9 MPa Indicates the status of the solenoid that regulates Primary Transmission Line Pressure PRI SPEED rpm Range variable Indicates the primary pulley speed Display value approximately matches engine speed PRNDL SW Range see below Indicates the gear presently selected according to the PRNDL switch Readings for most models are LOW 2ND 3RD 4TH and P N On some vehicles it may be D1 D2 D3 D4 NEUT REV and PARK If the transmission is between gears or the switch sends invalid signal displays 425 Data Parameters Engine Parameters PROM ID Range 0 to 99999 Indicates the identification numbers of the programmable read only memory PROM installe
51. C F Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F Indicates the estimated coolant temperature as calculated by the ECM ETC ACT Range 0 to 100 Indicates actual throttle plate opening in degrees Readings of 696 or less reflect a closed throttle and 8596 or more reflects a wide open throttle ETC DES Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the ECM desired throttle plate opening in degrees EVAP BYPASS SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the evaporative bypass solenoid valve The EVAP 2 way valve is bypassed when the solenoid valve is controlled to ON EVAP CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the EVAP monitor EVAP CVS VALVE EVAP CVS VLV Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the evaporative canister vent shut solenoid valve The valve closes the canister vent EVAP ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the EVAP monitor EVAP MON EVAP mon ready Range COMPL INCMP or YES NO Indicates the status of the evaporative emissions EVAP system monitor Reads COMPL completed or YES if the monitor has completed or conditions for monitoring have been met Reads INCMP incomplete or NO if the monitor has not completed or conditions for monitoring have not been met The sequence of events required to enable this monitor vary depending upon the EVAP system components EVAP MONITOR Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the EVAP monitor EVAP MONITOR Range NOT AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Indicates the EVAP
52. First Digit Second Digit Code Code 25 Repeats Figure 4 12 Acura engine Code Type 03 Table 4 4 Acura engine Code Type 03 Pattern Long and short Read codes on Red LED on ECM except most 1991 and later flash codes on CHECK engine lamp on dash Start codes by Turn the ignition on except most 1991 and later jumper the check connector then turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off and clear codes Only one code displays at a time except on some late model cars After repairs clear codes and test drive then check for other codes 4 1 6 Multiple Codes The 1990 and later Integra and the 1991 Legend and NSX pulse multiple codes with a 2 second pause between each code All other Acura models including the 1990 Legend with an ECM do not have multiple code memory gt To read codes for vehicles without multiple code capability Qo Gol I Read the trouble code Fix the problem Reset the ECM Drive the vehicle Check the LED for a new code Continue until no codes are present 18 Testing Transmission Systems 4 2 Testing Transmission Systems These instructions for reading manual codes only apply to 2001 and earlier models 2002 and later models have Codes and Data selections available from the Main Menu 4 2 1 Code Reading Connector Locations Figure 4 13 and Figure 4 14 provide diagnostic connector locations and adapter informati
53. IID eere rt iere er pr e ner treten i wen Here TER ei 305 Buttom Prs BUZZ crecen D re na rd D Cr e Ta HR EV YER LL d D aie 299 BUZZER nie PHI HIE RR EI 282 BYPASS AIB 1 ictor rn er ER ENTERA elie TAREA SER NER CR EV ea ER e VE AN x 357 224 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters dy dag HM 357 SHAE ISPD D MP ALL 357 CANCEL HISTORY ES patie an eae UNLOCK SW Id cM I MN durs Mie pU cec e CALJED VAE GG MR ML E CALED VALUE CALC TWC 9 CALC B2 TWC ez one Bn ac n P P CACO FOAD 6 CALC TIPS MEM EO HE O uu ten oe CAM LO TO HI CAM PHASE ACT 9 iBduhtizdezcdg e 359 PHASE DUTY 96 er y E petere dene entem nv Ee reae ve die eode 359 PHAS E VAR 35
54. On Off First 1 Second 11 1 Digit 2 Digit 3 1 i 1 a Code 23 1 i 4 Code 12 Figure 7 14 Engine Code Type 01 Table 7 1 Engine Code Type 01 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on Check Engine lamp Start codes by Install a jumper wire between two pins and turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off remove jumper wire then clear codes Code 12 always appears first Each code repeats three times including code 12 The code display cycle repeats as long as system is in a diagnostic state 0 5 Sec 1 Off First Second Digit 2 Digit 3 4 Code 23 14 Code 12 1 Figure 7 15 Engine Code 09 11 Table 7 2 Engine Code 09 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on Check Engine lamp Start codes by Use TOY 1 adapter turn the ignition on and select Manual Codes When done Turn the ignition off disconnect the scan tool the clear codes 0 3 Sec im On Off First 1 Second 111 2 3 1 Digit 2 Digit 3 1 14 Code 23 gt i 4 Code 12 39 1 Figure 7 16 Transmission Code Type 01 Table 7 3 Transmission Code Type 01 part 1 of 2 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on ECONO lamp 50 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems Table 7 3 Transmission Code Type 01 part 2 of 2
55. Start codes by Follow the appropriate diagnostic code reading procedure This procedure is for vehicles that do not have a connector for hook up To display codes the ECM must be in the diagnostic mode P To read codes for two mode control systems with Code Type 07b 1 2 3 QA X UL Locate the below the glove box on the toe board Turn the ignition on with the engine off Verify that the LED and the Check Engine lamp light briefly for a bulb check If either does not light correct the problem before proceeding Turn the diagnostic selector switch on the ECM fully clockwise Wait at least two seconds Turn the ECM diagnostic selector switch fully counterclockwise Count the long and short flashes either on the LED in the ECM or on the Check Engine lamp in the dash Any codes present flash one time each For example Long Long Long pause Short Short indicates code 32 Write down any codes present Clear codes by turning the diagnostic selector switch on the ECM fully clockwise Wait two seconds then repeat steps 5 and 6 to verify that no more codes are present 10 Turn the ignition off 14 1 3 Functional Tests NOTE o Operations described in this section are not available on all tool platforms 129 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Engine Systems The Functional Tests selection is available for most 1987 96 models with electronic concentrated control systems ECCS IMPORTANT
56. eta i eds Node teen ei 503 HOT OPREN LOOR C 395 tse rhet bed e tented ule stayed b E ne ted ye a ea DE Coe e d te ep tps 396 HTO CAT MON ENA eim i eredi be ERR n Rate d e niet den rei ct i ai 396 HTM CNT ds ss ius eus 503 ATM Dl REED aH deat auti bieten ir d RIDE 503 nna UOP 396 inimi erem enini ete eiiam tee 396 qe e 396 Iu 396 HER 2c eei a redde bc 396 HTR12Fault 396 eee 396 HTR2T alt ann saa arene dae edita eet it ir 396 HTR23F aUlU ceti ter a c Vl tede 396 HTR22 iie nie ete edet dee rh ten eric niet ee eniin eee 396 HTR22 Fault 2 rtc tet erre Rhe et eee a ap o t et eder ed e Eo Ya 396 2 a tine aie eiii A 396 1 aiit tartan at en et beet D t ic va CUI Peta bc i Da D ed c v ttd 396 HTREM12 A rte eee iie nee emma Ue been 396 HTRCM21 A js su 996 2 5 ai as Bee ave ane tib tend Rt Oe ER E
57. gal Ta FUEL FUEL CUT DECEL E zi eg RR RR RR FUEL CUTOFF stu sc i MM MR E DM S KU 388 ENDE RR ERE RR 389 238 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Fuel 480 FUEL LEVEL AVERAGE 389 FUEL AZIONE 389 FUEL LEVEL mW niin htnc bete em eee 389 FUEL LEVEL 9 ET 385 FUEL LEVEL c M 389 Hd OPEN SW PR 316 FUEL LVL SENSOR V ins s d 385 FUEE METER GTHE 96 itt eo e eec e be tiet Rei o E RO ERE ORE RUPEE E Ud eerie 389 F EEMISEIBE ARGUI E e ie eim d e Gee e i e i ee beg 389 F EL PMP SP GTL ate ipt ebd tta taco tee e lc n Pa teta a t n b de e Dl b t ro Deere de da 389 FUEEPHRES SOL inita iem mine noie nte etiamne 389 FUEL drizicce e 460 FUE PRESS eR Ree nt emat ite iei ie ae tie i ep eiie ete 389 FUEL PRS UP VSV chnn recede RP a D Ne bd ae E cp d d b t rbi a deba ro ed eee epa 389 iti eite RR rebote eie in US 390 FUEL PUMP RELAY 2 390 FUEL PUMPS Ai ate aid eee
58. E ae aaa 421 icc tet ere er ik asa nto cn Er tm Pr RN EEG nde eate eie ni hee tv 421 NOX SCELTE P M 300 NPSWITGEU eo ertet Reimer eit reme ee t e Hd Rie crei et Ere HE ES 421 NSAFETYSWM 4X4 Mien certe e e i n ee avc be dE D SU cue Ee yy v T V D 488 NSSHIET SO ER RETE DERE DHT RN een emer 507 NSX NTRBCD NUMBER OF BATT BLOC Kw itte pet tro t evi eret etes tte th eec e gh Hot vd d A co eH go edes 472 NUMKEYS deam c e bn e p ee n UR Er oT E et 421 O D OFF INDICATOR C 507 SW MILI 507 OPES ONNO D M 507 L E OWi sWumT it 507 SWITCH 507 O2 1 Ns we 422 OZ 2 AT 422 2 422 OA AESEAE 422 EM CMM 422 2 1 51 96 423 O2 BIS MR a
59. VEH SPEED ie rile ged ee brem t eed perio n e RE Een a at V hicle Spd Sig cote recte pro cirea peg Se VEHICLE SPD iie een nr ine EA en i e e eb iE etiim VEHICLE SPD m VEHIGEE SBPDS 2nd i reiten eb iet dps Vehicle Sped RR VEHICLE SPEED in a AA en entend en de ie Red VEHICLE SPEED Tc ieee VENT CONT VALVE irren etm eene icem dea eq eot re itta VHGESBD GU inen Een ice nte een endete ndun Mu ed eid bled ade ieee aude ned ate 274 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters VIAS S V m 451 conta stats oA coh cals 474 NR CERRO 293 VMF RAN VOLTAGE data cote ances crc deter DAL d 474 VOLT WO SEN Nu 293 MOLT NM SENS 2 o a easel LM LL E LI a 293 VOLT STROK SEN Vf eT EEN TOM NTN ACCT 294 VOLT STROK SEN 2 V Ns S VPOWEeR V ORE DUE DN TENE EE 524 Vila ee ee c
60. qu e ehe io epe de ae eee tette Ee dte DECEL FUEL C OFF ss us EE ETAT 2 52 reri ertet diee rennen nene D P EE Red zc DES IDLE RPM DESIRED FAN RPM ELEME DESIRED GX 5 DFT MONITOR n RE etae RE das c RENE ERE REM RO ERR ees GIO eee re EET EET FUEL INFO SWITCH ie H DIC PERSONALIZATION SW eo eene net eerte teen eere ineo tnnt Ene DIC SELECT SWITCH 230 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters DIC TRIP INFO SWITCH ii neret tete hari Perera vertant d er EA SW aoctor retro ere to e aet DIMMING INPUT esci rie ri Eee Rt I e rr eer E ER Een PUEDE EVER EYE ines DIMMING LEVEL Jire Dr on
61. EU DON C D I EGR POTO LU M DAMM LM E EGR CA MEN E RR MEL LOC En D END A LR EGR SOLENOID EGR STEP POS pcc D E Gaede EGR iain nic nep ioi mitem iii emi EGR SYSTEM e E m EGR TEMB M s Lice tate tice goa cde a ve ca ndo tene date He td Cd dd Wl ped de t Eo bd ce la bees EGR V L COMMAND s hodie es 375 VAC 5006 C a eaa eE N ea a Ea Ea d 376 EGR VENT SOL 96 natem modio dere aei leet etn cadens 376 eim B cC 375 EGR xiii en E 475 cimi 376 zelala n OTA T ag datant dad aah don aA ah deeem RR 376 EGRBARO pias d er i EHE t a LUN edd UI C ed LN A ho edebat bine beeen D e a 376 EGROC SOLENOID iia ierit erii NP OR E ii en ER RED ae 376 EGRCFault Jais E 2 976 P M 376 376 EGRMDS D irren coim nie eb eR E aee o o ni ied 376 ER C 376 233 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters E
62. Read codes on ABS warning lamp 16 pin OBD II DLC jump pin 1 to ground or connect an analog meter across Start codes by pins 4 or 5 to pin 8 12 pin diagnostic connector connect an analog meter across pins 4 and 12 When done Remove the jumper wire and clear codes Code display cycle repeats as long as system is in a diagnostic state A battery surge that causes the ABS system to fail may cause Code 16 to set 13 1 5 Codes and Data Slow Some 1988 and later models with the 3 0L SOHC V6 engine transmit data at a 63 baud rate The Main Menu for these vehicles displays a Codes and Data Slow option 13 1 6 Clearing Codes Most 1988 and later Mitsubishi models let you clear trouble codes from PCM memory through the scan tool Select Clear ECM Codes from the Scanner menu When codes are cleared the scan tool returns to the previous test mode and No Codes Present displays to indicate that codes are cleared If code clearing fails for any reason the previous codes reappear at the top of the data list If this happens repeat the code clearing procedure 13 1 7 Actuator Tests Most pre OBD Il and all 2002 03 OBD II models have the Actuator Tests selection on the Main Menu All actuator tests except injector and timing tests are key on engine off KOEO tests A list of available tests displays when Actuator Tests is selected from the menu The available tests vary by year and model During testing
63. 3 1 Figure 4 23 Acura ABS Code Type 04 Table 4 9 Acura ABS Code Type 04 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on ABS warning lamp For 2003 04 NSX Short SCS connector and turn key on do not press brake pedal ABS indicator will stay on for 2 seconds then turn off Main code will flash then pause 0 4 seconds sub code will flash and pause 3 6 seconds If a DTC is not available the ABS lamp will go off for 3 6 seconds then come back on For other models Short SCS connector and turn key on ABS indicator light will stay on for 2 seconds then turn off main code will flash then pause 0 4 seconds sub code will flash and pause 3 6 seconds stored codes will flash only one time per ignition cycle cycle key at least once to verify codes For 2000 02 3 5 RL Press parking brake pedal with SCS shorted hold VSA switch in the off position and turn the ignition on hold for 3 5 seconds until VSA light blinks 4 times this signals that codes have been cleared For 2003 2004 RL Press parking brake pedal Push VSA OFF switch hold it then turn ignition on Hold VSA switch for 3 5 seconds then release VSA switch After 3 seconds the VSA indicator should blink 4 times This signals that the codes have been cleared Clear codes For 2003 04 NSX With the SCS shorted press the brake pedal and cycle ignition on After the ABS indicator goes off release the brake pedal After the ABS indicator comes back on depress brake pedal again Aft
64. E 511 Q equ 429 op LEPIDE TM 429 R R UP R DNSTM 028 V BR Fog SW nie ien ie nne ivi Une i e ne ne R FRONT SOLAR SENSOR V eventa ee o dre ei Gee ieee ub ex hed uve E DELIA 321 E EUEEEEVEE My an nter ttn ee i e He Rente HE e 429 RINDICATOR MR P ate ie cd LA ed annette Cede ca Doe 511 E PROSHAET BBM init enr onini ente Ret e d n ai eeu 487 RiShade M 326 R Shade Delay Time 6 iiit mei te im oe pi ipee te iie eiie 327 R SWITCH ia rac ted vt t Feb taa ce red rA VI HD XE HIE dd rie bed eb td 429 nire iin in eR Haa nee e A ene An 511 25 ted adie deve tell aa eee ee 422 RWIND DEF SW aider eerte itg ee e t eoe P a Hi aee tet en er t t 429 WSPD RAD FAN RAISING PRES RATIO 96 cte reo e reete here ud te ev ate ee ose e e P PUBL IEEE eer eee ce 472 PRIDE eet ihre er ente EET EVE E ate ee 327 RDEE SW iiiter aa cte e ebd e AE DIU V dc Med al beetles bene o A D e 327 RE CVS VALVE 2 429 RE VTEC X 429 HE VTEG SOLZ ener RD o dte p e ee bete e eet 430 Rear Def axes dis eA o t EIN ei b o e
65. E RR E RR 503 IGN CYCLE DTC IGN CYCLE DTC IGN GY CLES i c X E i ie cene ree er leen ete ete ei eat IGN ON SW e lO ON SW makana tee Gina Naa me et b eee LEE IGN LIMING i nicer ertet eee eR n e eet ie ih end ER td IGN CYCLES SINCE LAST DTC je Mi Se c Mio IGNITION V E IGNITION 0 P IGNITION 1 V IGNITION 1 V is Ms is IGNITION 1 jede c P teh pe t cete ta cnt e er A b eo de ded Ge bud 319 IGNITIONI SW iu rernm 401 IGNITION c a ea E R EN A aE AA E E 401 IGNITION 401 IGRINE M inerenti E tie a eee ee b
66. Each code is displayed one time before moving on to the next code After all of the codes have displayed the entire code sequence will repeat until the jumper wire is removed from the diagnostic connector Flash code 12 should always be the first code to flash which indicates that flash code mode has been enabled If there are no current or history codes flash code 12 will be flashed until the jumper is removed from the diagnostic connector Flash code 13 indicates that History codes are stored in memory A factory scan tool is needed to read history codes 96 Isuzu Testing Transfer Case Body Control Module BCM and Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Control Systems 10 3 2 Clearing SRS Codes 1 MES Memory Erase Signal connector 2 SCS service connector Figure 10 30 1996 99 Oasis SRS code clearing left side of dash P To clear SRS Codes on 1996 99 Isuzu Oasis models 1 2 Switch the ignition off and disconnect the SCS connector from the service check connector Connect the SCS service connector part number 07PAZ 0010100 to the yellow 2 pin MES Memory Erase Signal connector A common jumper wire can be used as long as you maintain good contact between the terminals Switch the ignition on The SRS indicator lamp lights for about 6 seconds and then goes off Within 4 seconds of the lamp switching off remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector When the SRS indicator lamp lights again
67. iere Ee ga 390 FUEL REF bent 390 FUEL SENDER V iiie iet dete nente ec aimi abeam eite 385 RUOTE a eae aii eda pelted eee ead ee len eens 390 PUELSYS ie bei reu 390 TE vanah deri anita na eed ay ee 390 FUEL SYS CMPL re es dede 2 341 FUEL SYS ENA EC 341 F EESYS MON rere nre fet eme tte ad i et EE Ed EH oh edite iiic e ler ete Rn 391 F ELE SYS MONITOR bea tute tei bep ae redi la re PE UI Blei M n d bebe Dl ea ree ted de va 360 FUEL S YS nine men mime aime nte ee aiia FUEL FUEL SYS1 FUEL SYS1 FUEL SYS2 FUEL SYS2 FUEL TANK CAP L FUEL TEMP epe ette tta Loca eee P ete ag e c nne t elg bl i i C ode a Da td FUEL VOLAT etl i T n e C OT i PEE eR en t ici E nue e Ee hee FUEL 9 P C FUEL LEVEL 9 FUEL mon ready gilbuhdae FUeILVIIND V T E
68. Connect the MULTI 1 adapter turn the ignition on and select Manual Codes or install a jumper wire between two pins and turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off remove the jumper wire then clear codes Code 12 always appears first Each code repeats three times including code 12 The code display cycle repeats as long as system is in a diagnostic state Start codes by 0 5 Sec M Off First Second 11 2 1 Restart i Digit 2 Digit 3 pos i i 4 23 12 Figure 7 17 Transmission Code Type 09 Table 7 4 Transmission Code Type 09 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on O D OFF lamp Connect the TOY 1 adapter turn the O D switch on turn the ignition on then select Manual Codes When done Turn the ignition off disconnect the scan tool then clear codes Start codes by Geo ABS codes flash in a straight count with one long flash at the end Figure 7 18 The code repeats only one code is stored Lamp On Lamp Off 1 1 Code 4 Code4 Figure 7 18 ABS diagnostic code pulse 7 1 2 Hard Codes and Soft Codes Some models separate hard codes from soft historical codes 7 1 3 Clearing Codes Some 1987 and later models allow clearing trouble codes If the code clearing operation fails for any reason the previous codes reappear at the top of the data list when you retu
69. When the SRS or airbag warning light is flashing trouble codes install the other diagnostic terminal into pin 3 of the diagnostic connector for at least 3 seconds Codes are cleared when the SRS or airbag warning light resumes a normal flashing rate of 0 6 seconds On and 0 6 seconds Off 195 Subaru Testing Airbag SRS Systems 1 LLH 6 7 s 9 fopra 1314 2 1 Airbag SRS Diagnostic Connector 2 Diagnostic terminal B 3 Diagnostic terminal A Figure 15 59 2005 Forester and 2005 Impreza SRS Diagnostic connector gray 2005 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon 2006 Models except Baja P To retrieve trouble codes 1 Use the OBD II adapter with the specified Personality Key device Figure 15 60 2 Select Codes Only from the Codes and Data menu and follow any instructions on the scan tool display P To clear code memory e Select Clear Codes from the Codes and Data menu and follow any instructions on the scan tool display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 EE OEC ge Figure 15 60 16 Pin OBD II connector and common locations 1 16 pin DLC 2 OBD II adapter and Personality Key 196 Toyota Lexus and Scion This chapter contains information for testing Toyota Lexus and Scion vehicles The following Toyota Lexus and Scion systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission e Antilock
70. 19 1B 1C Shift request too high Water temperature to low Water temperature to high Gear ratio high Gear ratio low Shift selector is not P position Shift selector is not R position Shift selector is not N position Shift selector is not D5 position Shift selector is not D4 position 1D Shift selector is not D3 position 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Shift selector is not 2 position Shift selector is not 2 position Any failure is detected FAILURE No main shaft speed signal M SHAFT 2nd gear oil pressure switch malfunction 2nd GR 3rd gear oil pressure switch malfunction 3rd GR 4th gear oil pressure switch malfunction 4th GR Shift selector is not D position Shift selector is not S position Shift selector is not L position 510 Transmission Parameters 00 to 30 FF Data Parameters Transmission Parameters 30 Interrupt request by PGM FI system FF Unknown error ERROR SHIFT A SHIFT SOL A Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid A SHIFT B SHIFT SOL B Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid B SHIFT SOL C Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid C ShiftSol1 ShiftSol2 ShiftSol3 ShiftSol4 Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM commands for the shift solenoids Reads ON when the PCM has command the solenoid on reads OFF at all other times ShiftSol1 Fault ShiftSol2Fault Range YES NO Indicates the sh
71. ACCEL POS2 V ACCEL SSR AD V darter nette er senden de n avec PE Pe br b da eere dal nde hen bd 343 ACCEL SSR HLAD NV trn petere rientra inse ind det Eae e eee ed eei ee 344 ACCEL SWITCH m 495 219 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters ACM BATTERY VOLTAGE 2 343 MERE M TR 345 ROMAY 343 RR m 343 ACS MH e 303 343 343 2 a ML ILL 495 ACT VSV ON OFF _ 344 PS TU A cus MEA neil ars c 344 eee ee ee nT UTE 344 cate asda LC Dp CDM LL 345 EL PAS ce eh ERR DM NOI EN I OLI SU aa 345 AF B1 S1 HEATER 2 345 ce 345 AF BS LAMB uar AE 345 B2 S1 HEATER secet ce dt cuc a cea Er Hcc tc cca 345 AF FB ST FUEL TRIM BI ea ala REEL 345
72. Engine Transmission e Antilock Brake System ABS e Airbag SRS 9 1 Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Hyundai engine transmission and airbag SRS testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 77 e Clearing Codes page 79 e Actuator Tests on page 79 9 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Refer to Figure 9 1 below and Table 9 1 on page 78 Hyundai diagnostic connector locations and adapter usage information 3 T Figure 9 1 Common connector locations 77 Hyundai Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Table 9 1 Common connector locations VEHICLE YEAR LOCATION 1995 99 2 Above coin holder Accent 2001 06 3 Near hood release Azera 2006 3 1992 95 1 In fuse box Elantra 1996 06 3 Under dash near steering column Excel 1990 94 1 In fuse box Santa Fe 2001 06 1 Behind fuse panel Scoupe 1991 95 1 In fuse box 1989 95 1 In fuse box Sonata 1996 06 3 Under dash near steering column 1997 01 3 Under dash near steering column Tiburon 2003 06 1 Behind fuse panel Tucson 2005 06 3 XG300 XG350 2001 05 3 Under dash near steering column P To read codes from 1995 and earlier vehicles e Use the HYUN 2 adapter Figure 9 2 1 Connector 2 HYUN 2 adapter Figure 9 2 Connector and adapter for most OBD I vehicles P To read codes from most 1996 and later vehicles e Use the OBD II adapter with t
73. Indicates the status of the NOX gas sensor reading should increase as the amount of NOX emissions increases Reg Ctrl Curr A Range 2 to 255A Indicates the regulator control current as amps Reg Press Sens Range 0 45668 to 3 29437 MPaG Indicates regulator pressure as determined by the regulator pressure sensor Room Temperature Range 6 5 to 57 25 or 20 to 135 F Indicates the temperature of the passenger compartment air as determined by the room temperature sensor Set Temp D Set Temp P Range not available Shows the selected temperature setting for the driver D and passenger P side 298 Data Parameters Air Conditioning A C Parameters Shift Temp Range see below Indicates the temperature set shift Possible readings are INV invalid 2 C 1 C NORMAL 1 C 2 C Solar Sens D Solar Sens P Range 0 to 255 Shows the solar sensor setting for the driver D and passenger P side 299 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters This section defines the data parameters available from the body control module BCM on vehicles equipped with a BCM that have the ability to communicate with a scan tool It also includes the Ford Generic Electronic Module GEM parameters used on some Mazda models To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page NOTE Bec
74. Indicates the yaw rate sensor 1 in degrees per second YAW RATE SENS 2 Range min 128 deg s max 127 deg s Indicates the yaw rate sensor 2 in degrees per second YAW RATE VALUE Range min 128 deg s max 127 deg s Indicates the yaw rate value in degrees per second YAW ZERO VALUE Range min 128 deg s max 128 deg s Indicates the memorized zero value output in degrees per second ZERO DECELERAT m s2 Range min 25 11 m s2 to max 24 91 m s2 Indicates the memorized zero value ZERO STEERING Range min 3276 8 deg s max 3276 7 deg s Indicates the memorized zero value in degrees per second ZERO YAW RATE ZERO YAW RATE 2 Range min 128 deg s max 127 deg s Indicates the memorized zero value in degrees per second 293 Data Parameters Airbag SRS Parameters Airbag SRS Parameters This section defines parameters available from the airbag or supplemental restraint system SRS systems To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page BRACKET Ohms Range 0 to 22 5 Q Indicates the resistance of the airbag mounting ground CRSHSN1 Range 0 to 22 5 Q Indicates the resistance of the crash sensor D_Airbag Ohms Range 0 to 22 50 Indicates the driver s airbag resistance D_AirBAG2 Ohms Range 0 to 22 50 Indicates the driver s side airbag resistance D_ABAGR Ohms Range 0 to 22 50 Indicate
75. P To read codes automatically from a 1989 charade transmission Auto Code Read e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with black terminal converters to the 4 connector as shown in Figure 6 6 The connector is located near the brake booster and left strut tower 4 Pin Connector Multi 1 Adapter 3 4 1 Yellow 2 White 3 Green 4 Black Figure 6 6 1989 transmission 4 pin connector and MULTI 1 adapter 42 Daihatsu Testing Transmission Systems P To read codes automatically from 1990 92 Daihatsu Charade transmissions Auto Code Read Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with black terminal converters to 6 pin connector as shown in Figure 6 7 The connector is located near the bulkhead in the engine compartment Multi 1 Adapter 6 Pin Connector 1 2 3 4 1 Yellow 2 White 3 Green 4 Black with ground extension Figure 6 7 1990 1992 6 pin Transmission connector and MULTI 1 adapter 43 This chapter contains information for testing Geo vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Geo systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission e Antilock Brake System ABS 71 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems NOTE Operations described in this section are not available on all tool platforms Geo engine transmission and antilock brake system testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 44 e Hard Co
76. P To select the software from the Current Vehicle ID screen 1 2 Select to accept if you want to test the same vehicle or press select cancel if you want to test a different vehicle The System Selection menu displays if the same vehicle was selected The Software Confirmation screen displays if you selected to cancel Follow the on screen instructions to continue 3 2 ldentifying a Vehicle After you have selected the software you are prompted to identify the test vehicle by entering vehicle identification number VIN characters and answering questions NOTE Because of midyear manufacturing changes in engine computer systems you should always enter a new identification when you test a different vehicle even when two vehicles are the same year model and have the same engine and accessories installed To identify a vehicle 1 From the Manufacturer Selection menu select the vehicle manufacturer The first in a series of Vehicle Identification screens displays Scroll and select to enter VIN characters and answer any questions When you are finished a Vehicle ID Confirmation screen displays Select to continue if the vehicle ID is correct The System Selection menu or Connection Instruction screen displays 3 3 Selecting a System A System Selection menu prompts you to select which vehicle control system to test Menus vary by manufacturer and model Refer to the manufacturer specific chapters of this m
77. The CC RES ACC and CC SET CST parameters should only read YES when CC ON OFF reads ON If the CC ON OFF parameter reads OFF the CC RES ACC and CC SET CST parameters should both read NO CCM CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the comprehensive component monitor CCM ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the comprehensive component monitor CCP COMMAND Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM output signal to the charcoal canister purge CCP valve It reads ON when the ECM has de energized the solenoid to allow purging and reads OFF when the solenoid is energized to prevent purging CCSFault Range YES NO Indicates the presence of a fault in the coast clutch solenoid circuit It only reads YES when a circuit fault is present CDCV Range ON OFF Indicates the canister drain cut valve control signal CHASSIS PITCH Range YES NO Indicates the pitch status of the chassis it reads YES when pitch conditions exist e NO when pitch conditions do not exist CHECK MODE Range OFF ON Indicates check mode ON Check mode ON CHIME Range ON OFF Indicates the chimer control 360 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CHRGLP Range ON OFF Indicates the generator warning light status CHT CHT SENSOR Range 40 to 399 F or 40 199 C Indicates the cylinder head temperature CHT FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the cylinder head temperature status CHTIL Range ON OFF Indicates the operating
78. m 315 ERWWIPER EQW heehee endet ati eode D i he ed tee e peri EMIL 315 ER WIPER STOP eet eser pA re tC o a IR pedet tbc pe eau Hedge nb t ro ede eyes 315 BRONT FOG LAMP SW ien Ee lead eedem ene 314 Front Fog Light Sw rest i 2 314 Front Fog SW iae ER te a e eti Ie e p itd Rie beret reete ie Saunas 314 FRONT O2 MV 422 Front Washer SWIICh nent aie vin anni eee 314 Front Wiper High wsvcicccstsvessenesmvatederacen ens veisesncivincresvonceyvenweabeaueds reurentoaremmnntaeietes 314 Front Wiper It VOM iis coi 315 Front Wiper Int PC Front Wiper Low Front Wiper Stop FRONT WIPERS AGTIVE iiss iiit er tech o er tI Eo t od mad dep eei a i eee 315 PSI dc teet OR d ld re a n be reet d e dara FRWPPRKSW FT LEARN FT SENSOR C F V FIP SENSO Reece M LU psi LM M Ma uU EU ce IA ci sz RN m uu m FAULT ETISENSORUG GPL MILL A 388 RON RN TT ANT MERCED
79. 0 to 2 at idle approximately 0 to 70 above 1500 RPM EXH V T LEARN Range YET CMPLT Indicates condition of Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning YET indicates learning has not been performed yet CMPLT indicates learning has already been performed successfully EXH V TIM B1 Range 5 to 30 Indicates angle of exhaust camshaft retarded angle After warmup shift lever in N A C off and no load 5 to 5 at idle approximately 0 to 30 above 1500 RPM TIM B2 Range 5 to 30 Indicates angle of exhaust camshaft retarded angle After warmup shift lever in N A C off and no load 5 to 5 at idle approximately 0 to 30 above 1500 RPM FL ABS STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the front left wheel ABS control status ON during the control FL PRS SEN V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the front left pressure sensor 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released FL VSC STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the front left wheel VSC control status ON during the control FL W C SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the front left wheel cylinder pressure sensor open detection NORMAL when in normal condition FL W C SENS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the front left wheel cylinder pressure sensor 281 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released FL WHEEL ACCEL m s2 Range 200 84 m s2 to 199 27 m s2 Indicates the fro
80. 2WD L two wheel drive low ENCODER RETURN VOLTAGE Range 0 0 to 7 5 V Indicates the feedback voltage measured by the transfer case shift control module the encoder signal return ENCODER SUPPLY VOLTAGE Range 0 0 to 7 5 V Indicates the voltage supplied to the transfer case shift control module F AXLE REQ Range ON OFF Indicates the front axle switch request from the transfer case shift control module F AXLE SW LCKD Range YES NO Indicates the state of the front axle switch It reads YES if the switch is in the locked position to enabled 4WD operation F PROSHAFT RPM R PROSHAFT RPM Range 0 to 8192 RPM Indicates the speed of the front or rear propshaft as calculated by the transfer case shift control module IGN CYCLE DTC Range actual count Indicates how many ignition cycles have occurred since the last current DTC set LOW LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the 4WD low indicator status MODE SW SELECTED Range see below Indicates the current position of the transfer case shift control switch readings are e INVLD invalid signal e NEUT neutral 485 Data Parameters Transfer Case Parameters 2WD two wheel drive 4WD L four wheel drive low 4WD H four wheel drive high e AUTO 4 automatic four wheel drive 2WD L two wheel drive low MODE SW RETURN VOLTAGE Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the feedback signal return voltage from the transfer case shift control switch MOTOR A mA
81. Additional information for testing other systems that use this code type can be found in each System s testing section 1 2 Sec 0 3 Sec 1 0 Sec 0 3 Sec Dr ir iy in 1 1 1 Off i Digit LI i 144 Start Code and Repeated 1 Code 2 Code Sequence 1 5 Code 21 Second Digit 1 Figure 15 47 Subaru Code Type 08c Table 15 13 Subaru Code Type 08c Pattern Long and short Read codes on ABS airbag SRS Warning Light on instrument panel Start codes by Follow the appropriate Subaru procedure When done Clear codes according to the Subaru procedure Code Type 08d The ABS or TCS light signals a Start Code consisting of a 1 5 second flash a 2 0 second pause a 1 2 second flash a 0 6 second pause and a 0 3 second flash After another 1 2 second pause the light then flashes any stored codes Each code consists of long 1 2 second flashes and short 0 3 second flashes separated by a 0 3 second pause The total number of long flashes represent the 10s or tenth place digit and the total number of short flashes represents the 1s or first place digit A 0 6 second pause separates the 10s digit s from the 1s digit s A 1 2 second pause follows each code After all codes flash the Start Code repeats This sequence repeats for up to five minutes Additional information for testing other systems that use this code type can be found in each System s sec
82. Generic Electronic Module GEM Instrument Cluster Module ICM Parking Aid Module PAM Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Transfer Case 4x4M 12 1 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems Mazda engine and transmission system testing includes Code Reading on page 102 Manual Code Reading on page 103 Functional Tests 1983 95 models on page 104 Functional Tests All models with EEC IV and EEC V systems on page 105 Transmission Code Retrieval 1987 626 on page 110 12 1 1 Code Reading P To read codes from vehicles with a 16 pin connector Use the OBD II adapter with the specified Personality Key device Figure 12 1 Figure 12 1 16 connector and OBD II adapter with Personality Key device 102 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems P To read engine and transmission codes from a 17 pin underhood connector e Connect the MAZDA 1 adapter to the 17 pin connector Figure 12 2 For reading codes manually ground one of the following pins TEN Engine codes Transmission codes most cars IMPORTANT Grounding the incorrect pin may result in vehicle damage EET T ERE FAT FAC ONE FSC FE EE m pues verre peer ud F P TT JOKES Figure 12 2 17 pin underhood connector and MAZDA 1 adapter P To read codes from vehicles with 6 pin and 1 pin connectors e Use the MULTI 2 adapt
83. Indicates the battery blower motor stop control request standby blower SHIFT POSITION Range P R N DorB Indicates the shift position P R N D or B SHORT WAVE HIGH Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the waveform voltage in leak detection circuit in battery ECU READY light is left ON for 2 minutes and the pre boost voltage and the post boost voltage are equal 4 V or more SM SHIFT SENSOR V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the output voltage of the select position sensor main Selector lever in home position 0 5 to 2 0 V Shifting into N or D position 3 0 to 4 85 V SOC 96 Range Min 096 Max 10096 Indicates the battery state of charge Constant 0 to 10096 SS SHIFT SENSOR V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the output voltage of the select position sensor sub e Selector lever in home position 0 5 to 2 0 V Shifting into N or D position 3 0 to 4 85 V SS SHIFT SENSOR V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the output voltage of the select position sensor sub Selector lever in home position 0 5 to 2 0 V Shifting into N or D position 3 0 to 4 85 V TARGET ENG SPD RPM Range Min 0 rpm Max 8 000 rpm Indicates the target engine speed TIME DTC CLEAR MIN Range Min 0 min Max 65 535 min Indicates the elapsed time after clearing DTCs 471 Data Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters VEHICLE SPD Range Min
84. Operations This section explains how to begin using basic scan tool setup and test functions This information is specific to Asian Import vehicles For general scan tool functionality see the user manual appropriate to your diagnostic tool Figure 3 1 outlines the workflow of using the VCS software Test Same Vehicle i YES NO Select the Software Identify a Vehicle Select a System Connect to the Vehicle Code Functions Custom Setup Codes and Data Functional Tests Manual Code How To Get Figure 3 1 Basic Asian Import scan tool test operation Auto Code NOTE The exact order of test operation steps may vary depending on the test vehicle sure to follow all on screen instructions 3 1 Selecting the Software The first step in testing with the Vehicle Communication Software VCS is selecting the correct software for your test vehicle Two types of screens display when you turn on your scan tool The initial menu displays if you do not have a vehicle in memory The Current Vehicle ID screen displays if you have a vehicle in memory Operations Identifying a Vehicle P To select the software from the initial menu 1 3 Select Asian from the Vehicle Communication menu The software loads for a moment and then the Software Confirmation screen displays Select to confirm the software The Manufacturer Selection menu displays Select the manufacturer of the test vehicle from the list
85. Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the ECM calculated current oil life remaining as a percentage based on mileage driving conditions temperature and load conditions OIL PRES Range 0 to 999 kPa or 0 to 147 psi Indicates the engine oil pressure on some vehicles This may be a calculated value derived from an oil pressure voltage signal OIL PRESS V Range 0 to 5 0 V Indicates engine oil pressure as a voltage OPEN MALFUNC OPN MALFUNC Range ON OFF Indicates an open side malfunction OPSC Range actual Indicates the oil pressure switch control counter 423 Data Parameters Engine Parameters OSFMFLG Range YES NO Indicates the output shaft speed failure mode OutShftSp RPM Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates a PCM calculated RPM value for the transmission output shaft The output shaft speed sensor OSS is a voltage generating magnetic pickup The PCM converts the voltage signal of the OSS to an RPM value OXS1 TEST Range COMPL INCOMPL Indicates check mode result for HO2S bank 1 OXS2 TEST Range COMPL INCOMPLI Indicates check mode result for HO2S bank 2 OVER ENG TM S Range actual time Indicates the total time the engine was operated over the established RPM limit in seconds P N SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the park neutral switch status P S SIGNAL Range OFF ON Indicates the steering wheel has been turned moved since the ignition key was turned on This usually remains on du
86. Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS Clear Codes This section has information on clearing ABS codes using the scan tool P To clear codes 1 Select Clear Codes A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on Select to continue A code clearing confirmation screen displays Select to clear ABS codes The DTCs Cleared screen appears Select to exit 4 3 3 Manual Code Reading ABS Codes and Clearing Codes There are several types of manual codes for Acura ABS Type 02 see Figure 4 22 and Table 4 8 on page 25 Type 04 see Figure 4 23 and Table 4 9 on page 26 Type 5a see Figure 4 24 and Table 4 10 on page 27 Type 06 see Figure 4 25 and Table 4 11 on page 27 Type 12 see Figure 4 26 and Table 4 12 on page 28 Key On Pulse Code 5 Code Repeats Figure 4 22 Acura ABS Code Type 02 Table 4 8 Acura ABS Code Type 02 Pattern Straight count Read codes on ABS lamp on dash Start codes by Jumper the check connector then turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Only one code displays at a time except on some late model cars After repairs clear codes and test drive then check for other codes 25 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS 1 3 Sec 0 4 Sec 12 01 36 1 30 Sec iY Sec DIE T gt Start of Next Code Key On 1 3 9 1 4 1 Pulse ms 1 Y Code 34
87. The Switch test lets you check the following on off switch circuits Vehicle speed sensor VSS Start signal Idle switch P To perform a Switch test 1 Select Switch Test from the Functional Tests menu A test initialization screen displays Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature Select to begin the test The VSS parameter displays Above when speed exceeds 12 mph 20 kph and Below when speed is 12 mph or lower Also LED 3 turns on when the vehicle speed is above 12 mph and off when below The IGNITION SW OR IDLE SW parameter alternately displays High or Low each time the ignition switch or idle switch status changes Also LED 4 turns on when this parameter displays Low and off when High Real Time Monitor Mode 5 This function lets you check the following vehicle sensor circuits Airflow meter Fuel pump Crank angle sensor Ignition coil primary 131 Nissan and Infiniti gt 14 2 Testing Transmission Systems To perform a Real Time Monitor test 1 Select Real Time Monitor A test initialization screen displays 2 Asinstructed start the engine and press Y 3 Drive the vehicle to fully test these parameters If a problem is detected in a sensor circuit the displayed parameter changes from Normal to Faulty The LED 3 or 4 flashes and the scan tool beeps Base Idle Test The Base Idle test lets you check and adjust the vehicle base idle speed To perform a Base Idle test
88. sere sompno CA EH 1 20 pin connector 2 MULTI 1 adapter 3 Red MULTI 1 wire 4 Blue MULTI 1 wire 5 Black MULTI 1 wire Figure 11 1 20 pin DLC and MULTI 1 adapter engine codes 98 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems NOTE o Count long pulses as tens and short pulses as ones P To read transmission codes with a 20 pin connector e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with red terminal converters as shown in Figure 11 2 red lead to terminal 18 blue lead to terminal 11 and black lead to terminal 4 or 12 ENES ps e xf a 127 1 20 pin connector 2 MULTI 1 adapter 3 Red MULTI 1 wire 4 Blue MULTI 1 wire 5 Black MULTI 1 wire Figure 11 2 20 pin DLC and MULTI 1 adapter transmission codes P To read engine transmission ABS and airbag codes data and functional tests where applicable from vehicles with a 16 pin connector e Use OBD II adapter with the specified Personality Key device Figure 11 3 1 16 pin DLC 2 OBD II adapter Figure 11 3 16 DLC and OBD II adapter P To read 1994 2001 Sportage ABS codes e Ground terminal 1 as shown in Figure 11 4 on page 100 99 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems 1 3 pin connector 2 Fused jump wire Figure 11 4 1994 2001 Sportage 3 pin ABS check connector P To read 2001 2002 Rio and 1
89. we 405 2 ie Rte ennt e eti erben tec ot e ERE e PT HEURE teta et rete ra a o UO ede e Y A le be t dee E De C ede c E toe INJSEAU lL rete eedem eeu nie eo ele d elei EE INJ4 p Ba DBEE UMP 1 c 5 iiiter er ren Eten e n ERR RC Rh e En Ee E OH INJ6 Fault INJ FaU ai P INJECTOR MS INJECTOR MODE ws nite hene en e meat eet eben emet INPUT INPUT RPM bea t bete ie na ceca beant to ped p e de t a Ec b b EE c UE T d Co ede d ihn el d INST VBAT isto rnm iem eei in ePi d INT AIR ez pA R INT VOLUME INTV SOL BL EE 2 9 5 p INV SOL B2 nee eme e e re tee E te aU Ya P OP e b reete ertet TIM BI tate tt eterne ceca tne ti o e ti a ce dave ded at A tp d o Cede Pda 2 9 rire Kam en eden be ER INTAKE AIR S
90. 09 Vehicle speed too low VSS LO 0A Vehicle speed to high e 0B Brake switch off BOO OFF 0C Brake switch on BOO 00 Wrong shift lever position POS 20 Any failure is detected Failure 21 No main shaft speed signal M Shaft e 22 2nd gear oil pressure malfunction 2nd GR 23 3rd gear oil pressure malfunction 3rd GR 24 4th gear oil pressure malfunction 4th GR FF Unknown error ERROR DFT MONITOR XX Range see below Indicates the direct function test DFT monitor as a hex value 00 Normal NORMAL e 01 Under test operation TESTING 04 Complete COMPLETE 0 Test aborted TESTER command ABORTED 0F Test aborted Wrong condition ABORTED DFT RESULT XX Range see below Indicates the direct function test DFT results as a hex value 00 Normal NORMAL 02 Solenoid malfunction SOLENOID 20 3rd gear oil pressure switch malfunction 3rd GEAR 30 4th gear oil pressure switch malfunction condition 4th GEAR 497 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters DOWNSHIFT REQ 1 DOWNSHIFT REQ 2 DOWNSHIFT REQUEST 1 DOWNSHIFT REQUEST 2 Range ON OFF Indicates whether a downshift has been requested in order to maintain vehicle speed while cruise control is on Reads ON when the TCM requests a downshift DOWNSHIFT SWITCH DOWNSHIFT SWT DWN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the downshift
91. 1 Select Base Idle Test from the Functional Tests menu A test initialization screen displays 2 Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature 3 Select to begin the test 4 Follow the on screen instructions A countdown timer also displays for your convenience NOTE When the timer reaches 0 00 it does not reset 5 Select to continue the test The scan tool has now instructed the vehicle ECM to close the auxiliary air control AAC valve You can now adjust the vehicle base idle Idle Air Volume Relearn The Idle Air Volume Relearn is an operation that allows the ECM to quickly learn the idle air volume adaptive value after certain system components are replaced Once selected the test runs by itself without any operator input The test takes about 30 to 60 seconds and a test completed message displays at the conclusion of the procedure If the test complete message does not display switch the ignition off verify that all electrical loads are off start the engine and repeat the test Testing Transmission Systems Transmission system tests are available on models with the 4EAT transmission 132 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Transmission Systems 14 2 1 Nissan 4 Transmission Testing If you select Transmission from the System Selection menu at the end of the vehicle ID sequence the scan tool gives you instructions for applying power Automatic code gathering is not available on older Nissan 4 speed
92. 2 Jump wire Figure 8 9 1994 95 Passport data link connector locations 58 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 8 1 4 Manual Code Reading 1986 91 ECM LED ONLY There are 3 types of manual engine codes Type 02 see Figure 8 10 and Table 8 3 on page 59 Type 03 see Figure 8 11 and Table 8 4 on page 59 Type 04 see Figure 8 12 and Table 8 5 on page 60 Key On Pulse Code 5 Code Repeats Figure 8 10 Honda engine Code Type 02 Table 8 3 Honda engine Code Type 02 Pattern Straight count Read codes on Engine Red LED on ECM Trans Red LED on TCM Start codes by Turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Only one code displayed at a time except on some late model cares After repairing the problem clear codes and drive car then check for other codes Second Digit Code Code 25 Repeats First Digit Figure 8 11 Honda engine Code Type 03 Table 8 4 Honda engine Code Type 03 Pattern Long and short Red LED on ECM except 1990 and later Accord amp Prelude flash codes on Beag codes On CHECK engine lamp on dash Read codes on Red LED on TCM or gear indicator lamp on dash Turn the ignition on except for 1990 and later Accord amp Prelude jumper the Start ondes check connector then ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes One code displays at a time Repair clear codes a
93. 3 CYL 4 CYL 4 CYL 5 CYL 5 CYL 6 CYL 6 CYL 7 CYL 7 CYL 8 DEAGT PERFORMANCE TS iiti inem p a nine en decease nice 368 CylHdilemp V ke 370 229 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters D E REED HH 477 BNBDDIBON EI E 309 D Door Key SW UNLOCK ce cecceceseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeaeeeaecaeseesaeseecaeeeeesaesaeesaeeeeseaeeeeseaesaeseaeeeeeaeseeeaeseeseseeeeaeeaeees 311 D Door Warning Sw asus ER we 912 D INBIGATGOR M A c A dc A MI I MMC AT INLINE 498 Memory ATP 309 D Mirror Memory 2 309 E 498 D Seat SW 310 D SWITCH D SWITCH D C Converter Control ELD Unit bereit E DER D M MUFFLER SW RT DAMPING CTRL DBW drive by wire DOGSV DG C6 er ERR EROR DECSV SLIP REM eer somos Cr DD
94. 3 Stop engine and connect the green D Check connectors see D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations on page 166 together 4 Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine The check engine lamp CEL lamp should light 5 Depress the accelerator completely release it halfway hold it for two seconds and then release it completely 6 Startthe engine The CEL lamp should go off 7 Drive the vehicle at least 7 mph for at least one minute This may be done carefully on a service rack if necessary 8 Warm the engine at 2000 RPM until the ECS lamp turns on A flashing lamp indicates the system is OK A continuously lit lamp indicates codes are present The scan tool reads these codes 9 Select Code Functions Auto Code Read from the Main Menu and follow the connection instructions earlier in this chapter 10 After verifying the repair repeat the D Check with the Read Memory connectors connected to clear codes from ECM memory 11 Separate the D Check and Read Memory connectors 15 1 6 Code Type 08 Subaru uses five types of code patterns Code Type 08 Straight Count for ABS systems e Code Type 082 for engines 4EAT version 2 and ECVT transmissions and airbags e Code Type 08b for 4 version 1 transmissions Code Type 08c for All systems Code Type 08d for ABS systems Code Type 08 Straight Count Code Type 08 Straight Count codes are read from the ABS LED after th
95. A FS ENA O2S A FS HTR ENA SEC AIR ENA Range ENABLE UNABLE These parameters are part of the readiness monitors used to determine if the OBD II self diagnostics test has been run and or the resulting status of the test 339 Data Parameters Engine Parameters AC HI PRESS OPN Range HI NORM Indicates the state of the A C secondary high pressure switch The switch is normally open NORM and closes HI when high pressure is sensed REQ SIG Range ON OFF Indicates the air conditioning request signal status AC MON CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the A C monitor AC MON ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the A C monitor ACC RELAY Range OFF ON Indicates the status of the accessory relay PID displays ON when the ACC relay is on ACCEL ENRICH POWER ENRICH Range YES NO Indicates whether the ECM is momentarily increasing injector pulse width to obtain a richer mixture during acceleration Normally reads NO reads YES only during enrichment ACCEL IDL POS Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not accelerator pedal position sensor detecting idle ON Idling ACCEL LRN VAL 1 ACCEL LRN VAL 2 Range 0 to 124 512 Indicates the ETCS accelerator pedal sensor fully closed learned position value ACCEL LRN VAL ACCEL LRN VAL 2 Range Min 0 V Max 124 512 V Indicates the accelerator fully closed learning value Number 1 and Number 2 ACCEL POS1 Range Min 0 Max 100
96. CONTR SOLS darn stan i a Aa a E EE 346 AIR CONTRL SOL 346 AIRIDIMERT SOLE SE E terret deren rete re tee E ete ere d 346 Air Inlet Damper Pulse iret tee te ee eret D reed ere D e d ene a d ee d e Lee Fe eni e d eed de ah 299 Air Inlet Mode 1 irm rci enne damen endende 299 EE andi weet 346 Air MbcPulse D ih aite 299 Air Mix Pulse P nct cse re D D LRL e RA HH Lr o ee v Ld D eda 299 AIF OUbBPULSO Dente i imi aye DRE HORE ERE RS nemen ed 299 Ait Out Pulse P ocio A HI CE PUE HAS CLERO AVR Sei Ue e TECH VRBEM Ve YEA RUE 299 220 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters AIR PMP PRS kPa m cias 2 347 AIExPUMP BEBEAY 4 Eit rien ter etie ten dietis tech rers eR 347 AIR PUMP SIGNAL Ee Se aertara ENNE aaaeei riye Natives 347 AIEPUMP ziii a A E metit R E ER i rte tete etia tbc e cvi dea cueva sta sve N aeee aeaa AR STAT AIR SWITCH SOL AIR TEMP 2 tnia tanne aati a id a i a ae AIREEOM AZ cere ei ere eee tn eem Hn Re qd eta ea mia ente
97. Cice Ceneda 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 19 Figure 15 33 Table 15 1 ae MF X Figure 15 15 Figure 15 35 Table 15 2 Hardtop All All X Figure 15 19 Figure 15 33 Table 15 1 Hatchback All All X Figure 15 19 Figure 15 33 Table 15 1 Sedan All All X Figure 15 19 Figure 15 33 Table 15 1 1 8L H4 1BBL X Figure 15 19 Figure 15 33 Table 15 1 Wagon 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 19 Figure 15 33 Table 15 1 1 8L H4T MFI X Figure 15 15 Figure 15 35 Table 15 2 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 9 X Figure 15 16 Figure 15 35 Table 15 2 1 6L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 1 8L H4 1BBL X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 Hardtop 2BBL X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 1984 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 16 Figure 15 35 Table 15 2 Hatchback All All X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 Sedan All All X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 1 8L H4 1BBL X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 Wagon 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 28 Figure 15 34 Table 15 1 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 16 Figure 15 35 Table 15 2 Brat All All X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 4 Hatchback All All X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Sedan 1 8L H4 MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 1985 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 Weder 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 1 8L H4 MFI X
98. Connectors and Locations on page 12 Models with a separate 2 pin SCS connector Acura tool 07PAZ 001 0100 or equivalent is used to jump the 2 SCS connector With the SCS jumped the ABS lamp flashes a Type 4 code once per ignition cycle Models with the SCS in the 16 pin DLC The scan tool grounds the appropriate pin of the DLC which enables the SCS mode Follow the on screen instructions NOTE The K 18 key must be used for SCS mode The SCS help briefly explains the two trip bypass operation PCM only see the section on detection bypass ABS code clearing using SCS mode certain 1997 and later models When instructed by the scanner ABS codes may be cleared using the SCS mode Airbag code reading message typical using SCS mode The SCS mode can be used to retrieve airbag codes which flash as a Type 6 code on the SRS lamp Follow the on screen instructions Airbag codes are cleared using the message erase signal MES connector located in the fuse box NOTE The MES connector is not the same as the SCS connector 16 Testing Engine Systems Two trip detection bypass Use SCS mode to bypass ODB two trip detection and re create certain DTCs during diagnosis Some codes require a back driving sequence two road tests where the fault must occur in a similar operating condition NOTE On ODB II vehicles with the separate 2 pin SCS connector jumper the 2 pin connector for the SCS
99. FUELSYS1 FUELSYS2 Range OL CL or OPEN CLSD Indicates the operating status of fuel banks 1 and 2 read as follows e OL or OPEN for open loop e CLSD for closed loop When fuel bank status is OL or OPEN the ECM ignores the main O2S signal When a fuel bank status is CL or CLSD the ECM uses main O2S feedback to make corrections to fuel injection duration With the engine fully warm and running at idle these parameters should indicate closed loop At 2500 RPM with no load these parameters should also indicate closed loop Deceleration could cause these parameters to indicate open loop during fuel cutoff Some vehicles display only FUEL SYS1 while others display the status of both fuel banks FUEL SYS 1 FUEL SYS 2 Range UNUSED OL CL OL DRV OL FLT CL FLT Indicates the fuel system status 1 bank 1 2 bank 2 Reading should be CL with the engine warmed up and running at idle Interpret readings as follows UNUSED This parameter is not used on this engine 388 Data Parameters Engine Parameters OL Open Loop Has not yet satisfied conditions to go closed loop CL Closed Loop Using heated oxygen sensor as feedback for fuel control e OL DRV Open loop due to driving conditions fuel enrichment e OL FLT Open loop due to detected system fault e CL FLT Closed loop but heated oxygen sensor which used for fuel control malfunctioning FUEL SYS MON Range NOT AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Indicates the
100. In normal operation the O2S voltage ranges from 100 to 1000 mV The O2S must be hot above 500 F 260 C and the system in closed loop before the ECM responds to the sensor signal When displayed O2 mV is always shown in the center of the top line The O2S voltage also is shown as EXHAUST O2 mV in the data list for some functional tests and special data list displays Some OBD I engines have separate oxygen sensors for the front and rear banks The front O2S voltage is displayed as O2 2 mV and the rear O2S voltage is shown as O2 s mV B1 and B2 refer to banks 1 and 2 Bank 1 is always the bank containing the number 1 cylinder 025 suffix 51 or UPSTM indicates a pre catalyst O2S while suffix 52 or DNSTM indicates a post catalyst O2S 028 prefixes F and refer to the front and rear cylinder banks on a transverse engine During closed loop operation oxygen sensors should range from 100 mV to 900 mV A lean condition causes both sensors to read below 400 mV while a rich condition causes readings above 600 mV At 2500 RPM 025 readings should switch between high and low at least Six to ten times every ten seconds 420 Data Parameters Engine Parameters O2 B1 S1 HTR O2 B1 S2 HTR O2 B2 S1 HTR O2 B2 S2 HTR Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the commanded duty cycle of the heater control circuits for oxygen sensors on bank 1 and bank 2 The higher the percent the more the heater circuit ON time resulting in a hi
101. Indicates whether the EVAP diagnostic monitor has successfully completed EVAP VENT SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the EVAP vent solenoid it should read ON when the EVAP vent solenoid is closed to create a vacuum in the fuel tank OFF when the solenoid is open to allow purge EVAPCP Range ON OFF Indicates the evaporative emission canister purge valve duty cycle Displays whether the canister purge solenoid is on or off EVAPCP Range 0 to 100 Indicates the evaporative emission canister purge valve duty cycle 379 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EVAPCPFault Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM detects a fault in the EVAP canister purge solenoid circuit Reads YES if a fault is detected EVAPCV EVAPCV Range 0 to 100 Indicates the duty cycle of the EVAP canister vent solenoid which controls the amount of air entering the EVAP system 0 indicates the solenoid is fully open 100 indicates the solenoid is fully closed EVAPCVFault EVAPCV_FAULT Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM detects a fault in the canister vent solenoid circuit Reads YES when a fault is present EVAPPrgFlw V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the presence of purge flow from the canister to the engine Voltage should increase as purge flow increases 0 4to 1 3Vatidle e 0 4to 4 0 V at steady cruise EVAPSOAK Range actual Indicates that the EVAP monitor soak time conditions have been me
102. ON OFF Indicates the state of the wide open throttle WOT switch parameter which is calculated by the ECM It reads ON only when the throttle plate is wide open ZRDTY Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ZRDTY which inhibits power supplied to the TACV motor It reads ON when the power supply to the TACV motor has stopped 455 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters This section defines generic OBD II parameters To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page AAT Range variable Indicates the ambient air temperature AAT as degrees Data may be obtained directly from an AAT sensor or calculated by the ECM from other sensor signals AIR AIR STAT Range NOT USED UPS DNS OFF Indicates the status of the secondary air injection system Readings show how the air is being routed Possible readings include upstream UPS downstream DNS and atmosphere OFF AIRFLOW g s Range variable Indicates the PCM calculated mass airflow MAF based on the MAF sensor output Readings are in grams per second cubic meters per hour or kilograms per hour based The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body The MAF sensor measures the mass air flowing to the engine The PCM uses this value to calculate the injector pulse width needed for stoichiometry air fuel MAF sensor readings should be low at idl
103. Range Indicates the Neutral position indicator output INDPRNG ON OFF Range Indicates the Park position indicator output INDRRNG ON OFF Range Indicates the Reverse position indicator output INGEAR Range Indicates if the vehicle is in gear INH SW3M ON OFF Range Indicates the PNP switch 3 status INH SW4 ON OFF Range Indicates the PNP switch 4 status INH SW3 ON OFF Range Indicates the PNP switch 3 status INH SW2 ON OFF Range Indicates the PNP switch 2 status INH SW1 ON OFF Range Indicates the PNP switch 1 status 401 0 to 100 YES NO ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF actual ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Data Parameters Engine Parameters INI IAT TMP INI COOL TEMP INI COOL TMP Range 40 F to 249 or 40 C to 120 C Indicates the initial intake air temperature on engine first start Should be close to ambient air temperature INJ mS INJ PW mS INJ 1 mS INJ 1 PW mS INJ 2 mS INJ 2 PW mS INJ B1 mS INJ B2 mS INJ L mS INJ L mS INJECTOR mS INJ PULSE B1 mS INJ PULSE B2 mS INJ zx mS Range 0 to 65 3 mS Indicates fuel injection pulse width in milliseconds The pulse width is the length of time that the ECM commands the fuel injectors to turn on A high pulse width indicates more on time and a richer mixture A low pulse width indicates less on time and a leaner
104. Range 0 to 9 and Ato Indicates the register identification for each of the monitored tires 482 Data Parameters Select Switch Range Indicates the status of the initialization switch Select Switch Info Range Indicates the select switch setting information Tire Press 1 gauge Tire Press 2 gauge Tire Press 3 gauge Tire Press 4 gauge Tire Press 5 gauge Range Indicates the inflation pressure for each of the monitored tires Tire Temp 1 Tire Temp 2 Tire Temp 3 Tire Temp 4 Tire Temp 5 Range Indicates the temperature for each of the monitored tires Trans Status Range Displays the status of the transmission identification code 483 Tire Pressure Monitor Parmeters MAIN 2ND WITH WITHOUT 0 to 637 5 kPa or 0 to 92 9 psi 40 to 215 C or 40 to 419 F FINISH NOW Data Parameters Transfer Case Parameters Transfer Case Parameters This section provides parameter descriptions for electronic transfer cases on four wheel drive 4WD and all wheel drive AWD vehicles To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page 2WD HIGH LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case shift control module command status to the 2WD high indicator lamp on the instrument panel 4WDHIGLMP 4X4M Range OFF OFF FAIL ON ON B Indicates the high indicator lamp 4WD HIGH LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case sh
105. SRS codes for most 1994 and earlier vehicles e Figure 5 5 Codes for most OBD II vehicles with 12 pin and 16 pin connectors 3 4 4 3 1 Connectors 2 MULTI 1 adapter 3 Black 4 Green preferred or Yellow Figure 5 2 Connectors and adapter for most vehicles before 1987 34 Chrysler Imports Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Figure 5 3 Connector and adapter for most OBD I vehicles 1 Connector 2 HYUN 2 adapter 1 HYUN 2 adapter 2 Connector Figure 5 4 Connector and adapter for SHS system on most 1994 and earlier vehicles 1 Connectors 2 MITSU 1 adapter 3 OBD II adapter Figure 5 5 Connectors and adapters for most OBD II vehicles NOTE o Most OBD II vehicles have 16 pin and 12 pin connectors and use the MITSU 1 adapter connected through the OBD II connector The MITSU 1 lead with the 12 pin connector is not connected on all vehicles Follow on screen instructions for the correct hookup 35 Chrysler Imports IMPORTANT Do not use the Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS battery pack when connecting to Chrysler Import vehicles Use the Lighter Power Cable or Battery Power Cable 5 1 2 ABS Manu al Code Reading Chrysler Import antilock brake systems ABS transmit Type 11 codes Figure 5 6 shows how codes display Table 5 2 explains how to read the codes 1 1 5 Sec 1 1 mH 0 5 NT 3 Pause 2 Sec Paus
106. When the VTEC valve shifts to high valve it has a possibility of sticking This detects the failure with the knock sensor VTEC PRES SW VTEC PRES SW B1 VTEC PRES SW B2 VTEC PS SW Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the VTEC Oil pressure switch When oil pressure is applied the switch changes from ON to OFF The reading should be ON at low RPM A B1 and B2 in the parameter name indicates multiple switches used on a V type engine Bank 1 is the cylinder bank that contains cylinder 1 VTEC SOL VTEC SOL 1 VTEC SOL 2 VTEC SOL B1 VTEC SOL B2 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the VTEC solenoid valve Spool valve it reads ON when the solenoid is energized The ECM opens the solenoid valve to change the actuation of the valve timing and lift to improve performance The change point depends on the engine load conditions Solenoid valve designations are e Solenoid 1 is used to adjust the Low Mid change point Solenoid 2 is used to adjust the Mid High change point isthe cylinder bank that contains cylinder 1 B2isthe cylinder bank that does not contains cylinder 1 VVT ANGL 1 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT AIM target angle for the bank 1 intake cam 0 during a requested intrusive operation at idle is considered normal VVT ANGL 2 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT AIM target angle for the bank 2 intake cam 096 during a requested i
107. and engine RPM The relay is turned ON at high fuel pump control mode FUEL PRES SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel pump regulator control FUEL PRESS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the fuel tank level signal voltage FUEL PRS UP VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the fuel pressure up vacuum switching valve 387 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FUEL PUMP Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel pump status reads ON when the ECM senses a running fuel pump FUEL PUMP CTRL Range LOW HIGH Displays the fuel pump control relay status which indicates if the fuel pump is operating at HIGH or LOW capacity Status is determined by intake manifold pressure and engine RPM FUEL PUMP RELAY PUMP RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the current state of the fuel pump relay FUEL REF VOL V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the status of the reference supply voltage for the fuel level sensor It displays the input voltage to monitor and correct the supply voltage for the fuel level sensor FUEL STATUS FUEL SYS Range CL CL FLT OL OL DRV OL FLT Indicates whether the vehicle is operating in open or closed loop reads as follows e CL Normal closed loop e CL FLT One 028 is not switching and the PCM is using the other one for feedback e OL Normal open loop OL DRV Open loop because of driver action or other special circumstances e OL FLT Open loop with O2S problem or primary side coil failure FUEL SYS1 FUEL SYS2
108. monitor the selected actuator with a multimeter or by listening for actuator activation A completed test does not mean that the actuator was activated The scan tool only monitors the engine control module ECM commands to the actuator When you select an actuator test The scan tool commands the ECM to activate the selected actuator Approximately 5 seconds later the ECM deactivates the actuator All actuator tests except for injector tests must be performed with the key on and engine off KOEO Select a KOEO test with the engine running and a test rejected screen displays 122 Mitsubishi Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Injector Tests Engine Running Only Injector tests are available from the actuator test menu on most pre OBD II vehicles These tests are performed with the key on and engine running KOER The number of injector tests available varies a 4 cylinder MPI system has four tests a six cylinder system has six When you select an injector test The scan tool commands the ECM to disable the selected injector Approximately 5 seconds later the ECM reactivates the injector 123 Nissan and Infiniti This chapter contains information for testing Nissan and Infiniti vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Nissan and Infiniti systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission Antilock Brake Systems ABS Supplemental Restraint System
109. reads OFF at all other times DRLK RLY Range ON OFF Indicates the all doors lock relay 310 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters DRL L Range ON OFF Indicates the daytime running lamp left DRL R Range ON OFF Indicates the daytime running lamp right DRL Function Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the daytime running lamp DRL system Reads ON when DRL system is activated reads OFF when the system is off DRUNLK RLY Range ON OFF Indicates the all doors unlock relay Drv P W Auto Sw Pass P W Auto Sw RL P W Auto Sw RR P W Auto Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the indicated automatic power window switches Drv is the driver switch Pass is the passenger switch RL is the rear left switch RR is the rear right switch Reads ON when the switch is activated and off at all other times Drv P W Up Sw Pass P W UP Sw RL P W Up Sw RR P W Up Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the indicated power window up switches Drv is the driver switch Pass is the passenger switch RL is the rear left switch RR is the rear right switch Reads ON when the Switch is activated and off at all other times Drv P W Down Sw Pass P W Down Sw RL P W Down Sw RR P W Down Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the indicated power window down switches Drv is the driver switch Pass is the passenger switch RL is the rear left switch RR is the rear right switch Reads ON when the switch is
110. when the lock button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times 318 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Keyless Panic Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the panic button on the keyless entry remote transmitter Reads ON only when the panic button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times Keyless Pwr Sliding Left Door Keyless Pwr Sliding Right Door Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the power sliding door feature of the keyless entry system Reads ON when the PSD power sliding door button of the remote transmitter is pressed to open or close the indicated door Keyless Pwr Rear Hatch Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the hatch button on the keyless entry remote transmitter Reads ON only when the hatch button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times Keyless Pwr Rear Trunk Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the trunk button on the keyless entry remote transmitter Reads ON only when the trunk button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times Keyless Unlock Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the unlock button on the keyless entry remote transmitter Reads ON only when the unlock button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times LAST ID Range actual Indicates the last received tire transmitter ID code value Latch Circuit Range ON OFF Displays the latch circuit status Reads ON with the ignition switch on or the engine running reads OFF with the ignition switch off or in acce
111. 0 to vehicle max Indicates the left rear wheel speed sensor M R OUTPUT Range OFF ON Indicates status of actuator motor and motor relay ON indicates motor and motor relay are active OFF indicates motor and motor relay are inactive M MODE SIG Range OFF ON Indicates the automatic transmission A T manual mode status Reads OFF when not in A T manual mode and ON when in A T manual mode MAIN RELAY 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the main relay 1 for ECB Reads ON in operating mode when ECB is active 284 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters MAIN RELAY 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the main relay 2 for ECB Reads ON in operating mode when ECB is active MAS CYL PRESS 1 MAS CYL PRS 1 Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the master cylinder pressure sensor 1 reading Voltage increases when the brake pedal is depressed Readings should be from 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released MAS CYL PRESS 2 MAS CYL PRS 2 Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the master cylinder pressure sensor 2 reading Voltage increases when the brake pedal is depressed Readings should be from 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released MC1 Range ON OFF Indicates the MC1 status Reads ON when in operating mode reads OFF at all other times MC2 Range ON OFF Indicates the MC2 status Reads ON when in operating mode reads OFF at all other times M C SEN 1 Range NORM OPEN Indicates whether and open exists on the mast
112. 1 0 V Idling THRTL REQ POS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the ETCS throttle requirement position voltage 0 5V to 1 0V at idle is normal 443 Data Parameters Engine Parameters THRTL SSR 1 AD V Range 0 to 4 98 V Indicates the ETCS throttle sensor opener position value Number 1 AD The normal value range is 0 6V to 0 9V THRTL SSR 1 V Range 0 to 4 98 V Indicates the ETCS throttle sensor opener position value Number 1 The normal value range is 0 6 to 0 9V THRTL SSR 2 V Range 0 to 4 98 V Indicates the ETCS throttle sensor opener position value Number 2 The normal value range is 2 26V to 2 6V THRTL SSR 1 V Range Min 0 V Max 4 9804 V Indicates throttle sensor opener position Typical readings are 0 6 to 0 9 V THRTL SSR 2 V Range Min 0 V Max 4 9804 V Indicates throttle sensor opener position Number 2 2 2 to 2 6 V THROTTLE SW Range ON OFF Indicates the throttle switch TIME TIME ON Range 0 to 1092 minutes Indicates a continuous record of engine running time as minutes and seconds The value returns to zero whenever the engine is shut down or if run time exceeds the maximum This feature can help to isolate intermittent driveability problems that may occur within a time period after vehicle startup or after reaching cruising speed for example TIME DTC CLEAR Range Min 0 second Max 65 535 seconds Indicates time after DTC cleared Equivalent to time af
113. 1 adapter Figure 15 27 17 pin Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with a 17 pin Check connector e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter blue wire to Check connector pin 4 Figure 15 28 1 17 pin Check connector color varies 2 Pin 4 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 28 17 pin Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with a 17 pin Check connector e Connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to pin 7 Figure 15 28 164 Subaru Testing Engine Systems A1 62 Cosh AA 18 1610 1 17 pin Check connector color yellow 2 Pin 7 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 29 17 pin Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with a 17 pin Check connector e Connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to Check connector pin 11 Figure 15 28 4 As AA 48 19 20 1 17 Check connector color black 2 Pin 11 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 30 17 pin Check connector P To read codes from vehicles with a 16 pin OBD II connector e Use OBD II adapter with the specified Personality Key device Figure 15 31 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 co oe oc oc es oe Figure 15 31 16 pin OBD II connector with adapter and Personality Key device 1 16 pin DLC 2 OBD II ad
114. 10096 Indicates the signal of the EGR valve position sensor as a percentage EGR valve duty cycle percentage A low reading indicates low EGR flow a high reading indicates high EGR flow 374 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EGRVR FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the exhaust gas recirculation valve duty cycle status EGT SENSOR V Range 3 4 to 0 9 V SENSOR C F Range 500 to 700 C or 1060 1484 F Indicates the temperature of the exhaust gases either as the voltage signal from the exhaust gas temperature sensor or as ECM calculated temperature ELEC LOAD ELEC LOAD SIG ELEC LOAD SW LOAD SIGNAL Range ON OFF Indicates the electrical load on the charging system such as head lamps brake lamps rear defrost The ECM uses this signal to compensate for electrical loading at idle it reads ON when certain combinations of accessories are OFF when certain combinations of accessories are off ElecPrsCtrl Range 0 to 100 psi Indicates the PCM commanded transmission electronic control pressure This is a calculated parameter based on PCM controlled Pulse Width output ENG LOAD Range 0 to 100 Indicates current engine operating load as a percentage of maximum engine load ENG RESTART COND Range OK NG Indicates whether the engine can be restarted after the engine was shut down by the auto idling stop system ENG RUN TIME Range Min 0 second Max 65 535 seconds Indicates e
115. 12 Figure 15 13 MULTI 2 Asian adapter Connections Using OBD II Adapter The 16 pin OBD II adapter is used on some Subaru models beginning in 1995 and all 1996 and later OBD II equipped vehicles Use the OBD II adapter with the specified Personality Key device to read engine and transmission codes as shown in OBD II adapter and Personality See Table 15 9 for applicable vehicles Figure 15 14 OBD II adapter and Personality Key M 1 16 pin DLC 2 OBD II adapter 3 Personality 15 1 3 Reading Engine Codes The following contains information for connecting the scan tool to the vehicle for reading engine codes Included in this section are the following e Subaru Vehicle Connection Table on page 151 Table 15 9 e Subaru Vehicle Connection Diagrams on page 159 Figure 15 15 to Figure 15 31 150 Subaru Subaru Vehicle Connection Table Find the vehicle being tested in Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table and then go to the Testing Engine Systems correct Reading Codes Connector figure number shown for the vehicle Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 1 of 9 Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers S Code aces D Check eod Reading s us ou 2 2
116. 15 42 Table 15 3 Legacy Figure 15 17 1 7 Wagon All All Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Figure 15 17 1 8L H4 T MFI Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 17 2 1 8L H4 SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 19365 sedan Figure 15 17 2 21 H4 MFI XIX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 22 Figure 15 17 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 18 SVX All All X Power Pac Figure 15 43 Figure 15 43 Table 15 6 Figure 15 17 1 8L H4 T MFI XIX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 cos Figure 15 17 1 8L H4 SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Impreza All All Power Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Wagon Figure 15 17 f s 1 2L L3 2BBL X X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 1 2L L3 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 Legacy Figure 15 17 gt E Wagon All All X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 1 8L H4 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 1993 Figure 15 17 1 8L H4 SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Sedan Figure 15 17 2 21 4 MFI XIX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 MFI x x Figure 19 17 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 i Figure 15 18 9 9 SVX All A
117. 15 9 to a Subaru vehicle a 12 volt power cable Figure 15 11 Figure 15 12 and the ground adapter Figure 15 10 must be used Connect the MULTI 1 adapter as shown in Figure 15 9 Connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to the vehicle Check connector and pin designated in Table 15 9 148 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 MULTI 1 adapter 2 Ground black wire connect the ground adapter here Figure 15 10 3 MULTI 1 blue wire see Table 15 9 for connection to vehicle connector 4 12 volt power jack connect the power cable here Figure 15 11 Figure 15 12 Figure 15 9 MULTI 1 adapter e Figure 15 10 Ground adapter Figure 15 12 Battery power cable Connections Using the MULTI 2 Adapter The MULTI 2 adapter can be used on many Asian import vehicles The MULTI 2 adapter connector C is designed to connect to some Subaru vehicles equipped with a 9 pin Check connector Connect a 12 volt power cable Figure 15 11 Figure 15 12 and the ground adapter Figure 15 10 as shown in Figure 15 13 See Table 15 9 for applicable vehicles 149 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 Ground black wire connect the ground adapter here Figure 15 10 2 Mazda amp Ford MULTI 2E 3 Isuzu amp Geo with GM system MULTI 2D 4 Subaru MULTI 2C 5 Mazda amp Ford MULTI 2B 6 Special applications MULTI 2A 7 12 volt power jack connect the power cable here Figure 15 11 Figure 15
118. 15765 4 CAN 2003 later ISO 15765 4 CAN K line ISO 9141 15 L line ISO 9141 Manufacturer s discretion 16 Vehicle battery positive The DLC cannot be hidden behind panels and must be accessible without the use of tools Figure 17 2 Although out of the normal line of sight the DLC should be clearly visible to a crouching technician 208 Generic OBD II Main Menu Selections Figure 17 2 OBD II diagnostic connector location If the DLC is not visible you may find a manufacturers sticker on the lower steering column cover or below the left side of the dash center indicating the DLC location The DLC is designed for scan tool access only You cannot jumper any of the terminals to display codes on the instrument cluster warning lamp or malfunction indicator lamp MIL P To connect to a vehicle Follow the on screen connection instructions and then select to continue The Main Menu displays 17 4 Main Menu Selections There are up to three main menu choices in Generic Testing Mode Codes and Data Menu displays a sub menu of choices for viewing parameter data diagnostic trouble codes DTCs and various oxygen sensor O2S signal characteristics Custom Setup configures scan tool settings see the manual for your diagnostic tool Review Movie appears on a menu only after a movie is recorded The Review Movie feature works the same in Generic Testing Mode as with specific manufacturers See the manual for your diag
119. 197 Tracker 1989 1995 engine code reading 46 1990 1995 with Kelsey Hayes RWAL code reading 49 Tredia 1984 1988 connector locations 118 Trooper 1984 1985 connector location 82 1986 1987 2 31 engine connector locations 81 1986 1987 code reading 82 1988 1991 2 6L engine connector locations 81 1988 1991 A T connector and adapter 84 1988 1991 connectors 83 1989 1991 2 8L engine connector locations 81 1990 1994 transmission connector locations 82 1990 2002 engine connector locations 81 Truck Chrysler Imports 1990 1994 connector locations 34 Truck Mitsubishi 1990 1996 connector locations 118 TSX 2004 engine connector locations 13 2004 transmission connector locations 20 TSX TL 2004 SRS code clearing 32 Index V Van Mitsubishi 1987 1990 connector locations 118 Vehicross 1999 2001 engine connector locations 81 Vigor 1992 1994 ABS connector locations 22 1992 1995 transmission connector locations 19 Vista 1987 1991 connector locations 34 1992 1996 connector locations 34 W Wagon Mitsubishi 1987 1990 connector locations 118 X XG300 XG350 2001 2004 78 XT 1986 1987 Read Memory and D Check connectors 169 XT XT6 1987 1991 transmission code reading 181 connector locations 147 542
120. 1985 1987 ECM and LED locations 57 D Daihatsu 40 43 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems and ABS 40 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 40 Manual Code Reading 41 Testing Transmission Systems 42 Code Reading Connector Locations 42 transmission system testing 42 D Check connectors See diagnostic connectors del Sol 1992 1997 SRS code clearing 72 1993 1997 connections locations 55 1993 1997 connector locations 55 diagnostic connectors D Check 166 Read Memory 166 Diamante 1992 2004 connector locations 118 E Echo 2000 and later SRS code reading 203 Eclipse 1990 2005 connector locations 118 EEC IV functional tests 106 109 Computed Timing test 106 Idle Speed Adjustment test 108 Output State Check 107 Wiggle Engine Off test 106 Wiggle Engine Running test 107 EEC V Functional Tests 106 EEC V functional tests Output State test 109 EGI MGI 1983 1984 Read Memory and D Check connectors 168 Elantra 1992 2004 connector locations 78 Element 2003 2004 connector locations 55 2003 2004 SRS code clearing 75 Endeavor 2004 connector locations 118 Excel 1990 1994 connector locations 78 Expo LRV 1992 1996 connector locations 118 F For 88 G Galant 1985 2005 connector locations 118 Generic OBD II Operations 207 213 6 OBD II connector pinout 208 Connecting To The Vehicle 208 OBD II and What it Means 207 Selecting The Generic Test Mode 208 Geo 44 92 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems
121. 212 F ECT 1 V ECT SENSOR V ECT V Rang 7 Q 0to5 0V Indicates the engine coolant temperature ECT as voltage The ECT is a thermistor installed in the engine coolant passages A 5 V reference signal is applied to the ECT As temperature increases sensor resistance decreases to provide a variable voltage signal to the PCM The converts ECT sensor voltage to temperature Typical ECT readings are 0 70 V to 0 40 V on a warm engine at idle ECT LAMP 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the status of engine coolant temperature lamp 1 This lamp turns ON when the engine coolant is cold less than 56 371 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ECT LAMP 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the status of engine coolant temperature lamp 2 This lamp flashes when the engine coolant is heated above 118 C and turns ON when it is overheated above 124 C ECT FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the engine coolant temperature status ECYL1 ECYL2 Range not available Indicates the cylinder sensor 1 or 2 disconnect noise counter for V6 engines EGR BOOST SOL Range ONOFF Indicates the EGR boost sensor solenoid valve control signal EGR CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the EGR monitor EFE COMMAND Range ON OFF Indicates whether the ECM has commanded the early fuel evaporation EFE system to turn on it should read ON when the EFE system has received a signal to energize OFF when the system
122. 427 eee Tee 326 326 1 2 Aa MAS 481 PINTS LM tly MM p LLL MS 481 PRNDE SW ete PROM ID PS AB Ohms BS BUE od cp ud D DE Mena ac NINE PR RR REM 298 SBE ISA OHS acid cota ahs MALO IQ LAUD ULL 298 tec ea MMC DID IRE CAT DM 428 ic vignette 393 PUMP V P MP RELAY NN EORR PURGE CUT SOL PURGE CUT VSV PURGE DENSITY PURGE DUTY PURGE FLOW PURGE SOL PURGE VOL STPS i ito ditte emn ine eed d nie 429 PURGE lc M Naa 381 259 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Push Sw 326 PWM ILLU 326 PWR GORGILOIT cicatrice t e eee ts eor ee e e I a p e b e n le v 326 PWHR RESOURGE IB AMD iicet ter Het Hen ee dedi ERE PR ER EC E i 472 PWHR RESOURCE VB V iret reete eet NOH Gau dp o TEE iki CMT TUE CU eee 472 A diueeEly
123. 44 Clearing Codes 51 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 44 537 Index Field Service Functional Tests 52 Hard Codes and Soft Codes 51 Manual Code Reading 49 Prizm Actuator Tests 52 troubleshooting 525 H Honda 54 76 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 54 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 54 Code Type 57 ECM Locations 57 Manual Code Reading 62 SCS mode 56 16 pin DLC 56 2 pin SCS connector 56 Two trip detection bypass 56 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 66 Manual Code Reading 67 SRS Codes and Data Testing SRS MAIN MENU 66 Hyundai 77 Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Systems 77 Actuator Tests 79 Clearing Codes 79 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 77 Injector Tests Engine Running Only 79 1984 1989 engine connector locations 81 1985 1989 code reading 85 Impreza 1993 1994 transmission code reading 181 182 1993 1995 connector locations 146 1995 connector locations 148 Impulse 1984 1992 engine connector locations 81 1988 1989 code reading 85 1990 and later code reading 85 1990 1992 ABS connector locations 89 1990 1992 transmission connector locations 82 Infiniti See Nissan Infiniti Insight 2000 connector locations 55 2000 2004 SRS code clearing 76 2001 2004 connections locations 55 Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters 476 538 Integra 1986 1989 LED locations 14 1990 and later code reading 18 1990 1993 ABS connector locations 23 1990 1995 transmission
124. 88 e Manual Code Reading ABS on page 90 Clearing ABS Codes on page 93 10 2 1 ABS Code Reading Connectors and Locations Refer to Figure 10 15 and Table 10 4 for common Isuzu ABS diagnostic connector locations 88 Isuzu Testing Antilock Brake System ABS 1 Figure 10 15 suzu common ABS connector locations Table 10 4 Common ABS connector location VEHICLE YEAR CONNECTOR LOCATION Amigo 1990 94 1 Impulse 1990 92 1 Pickup 1990 95 1 Rodeo 1990 95 1 Stylus 1990 93 1 P To read ABS codes from 2003 06 Ascender 2006 1 280 and 1 350 e Connect the OBD II adapter to the 16 pin connector Figure 10 16 os a V ALe 10 2 19 15 46 EJ 1 16 pin DLC 2 OBD II adapter Figure 10 16 2003 06 Ascender 2006 1 280 and I 350 ABS connector 89 Isuzu Testing Antilock Brake System ABS 10 2 2 Manual Code Reading ABS There are 3 types of manual ABS codes for Isuzu vehicles Rear wheel antilock RWAL see Figure 10 18 and Table 10 5 on page 90 Type 02 see Figure 10 20 and Table 10 6 on page 91 Type 05a see Figure 10 22 and Table 10 7 on page 92 RWAL ABS Code Type The RWAL diagnostic connector location is shown in Figure 10 17 y Figure 10 17 1991 95 Rodeo 1990 95 Pickup and 1992 94 Amigo1 pin RWAL diagnostic connector Straight Count Flashes the lamp or LED the number of times equal to the trouble code w
125. 96 LG FL IDLE mS LATURN IND ios o ttti ce Poet t Cd obe abel Ce ee c ae C e c vd d dd rcnt frr ri bn viel hn Aa in RR Ua EU aee eed Light AUTO ODE even N A A A sen n Light Gonttol 2 1 re eR ert ettet e ei E Rer UD HER EIE i em ad ee S Light Off Delay ic tet t tete ec tala tied i Le D re vdd La Dd D Light Rhieostat 1i nemi mene nn rire ERR E e nei LIGHT SENSOR P M 321 248 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Lighting Time ns m 323 SRE on Hetero iier mop Drei edente eee come ODE ere 323 Ein COMMUNICATION ssec cetero ier e et rete tege n eee doe eL adl dein d c eR x tp es 323 96 en ee EO th Ee Er ER EEG EORR RN EE TRE LINE PRES 6 M P EINE PRESS A sities inset eere e UU pter d e P ERE UP PEDE ead 5 96 LK BUTTON SIG LO SPEED CUT eS entender ARG siti LOAD ABS 86 PP EOAD PGT 96 dct iecit de e re t En ERREUR nde nte ie a nai es 96 eR LOAD SIGNAL
126. A F ratio multiply the stoichiometric A F ratio 14 7 1 by the displayed value EVAP PCT 6 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the evaporative emission EVAP purge control valve opening as a percentage A reading of 0926 indicates the valve is closed no purge flow and a 100 reading indicates the purge valve is fully open maximum purge flow EVAP VP Pa Range 8192 to 8192 Pa EVAP_VP H20 Range 32 887 to 32 884 20 Indicates the evaporative emissions EVAP system vapor pressure which is obtained from a fuel pressure sensor in the tank or in the evaporative system vapor line FLI Range 0 to 100 Indicates the amount of fuel in the tank as a percentage of tank capacity A 0 reading indicates an empty fuel tank and 100 indicates a full tank Readings may be taken directly from a sensor or calculated by the ECM from other sensor signals FRP Range 0 to 655350 kPa or 0 to 111 psi Indicates fuel rail pressure relative to atmospheric pressure Displayed pressure should be the same as an actual gauge reading taken at the fuel rail FUEL PRESS Range 0 to 768 kPa or 0 to 111 psi Indicates the actual pressure in the fuel rail FUEL SYS1 FUEL SYS2 Range NOT USED OL CL OL DRV OL FLT CL FLT Indicates the fuel system operating status for bank 1 and bank 2 Displayed values are OL Open loop not all conditions were met to allow closed loop e CL Closed loop oxygen sensor is suppling feedback for fue
127. AF FB ST FUEL TRIM sete tetanic ca hdc can lade sate 345 FB ST FUEL TRIM E ett E ia ant tela nad yeas 345 AF FB AVG LT FUEL TRIM B1 345 AF FB AVG LT FUEL TRIM B2 sssessssssesssssssssssssssesssssscssssssessssseeessssuesssssuessssssesssssuesssssnsesssanisssesssueesssaneessssneeersaseees 345 AVG LT FUEL ct biet ub tr na gn acd eda ce ea 345 E E 2 LOU LL UD MD IL DE LM eas 345 AF FB GMD Bis te ea ea con DA Cup ME 346 cria 346 AF AF FB COND SE AF LAMBDA AF SENSOR mA a a a 346 AE SENSORIBT 3 rete a a cae 346 AE SENSOR B2 ttai tere eO e atin Hoe rete Ho oa gne CI eie eyed bes e e ve ld e M ds 346 AE SENSOR cane nein aren na Niemen ete ea eee eH RE ee ta ER TP IE ees 346 M ME 303 495 AFS Bineet teh e ve c ey de CRI I ET a A C 495 Al STATUS 346 AICV VSV E H T 346 AIRBAG LAMB iR En rete e rte as RE aree HEE HR Pe Re Rr vet ven t 478 Ait Cond SW scars terrere peces e a vv 303 AIR
128. BATTERY BLOCK V V01 to V14 Range Indicates the battery block voltage SOC 60 12 to 20 V 465 327 68 V Max 327 67 V 327 68 V Max 327 67 V 327 68 V 327 67 V Data Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters BATTERY SOC Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the battery state of charge BATTERY TEMPERATURE 1 to 3 Range 327 68 Max 327 67 C Indicates the temperature of the HV battery Undisturbed for 1 day Same as ambient air CHECK MODE Range ON OFF Indicates the check mode CONVERTER TEMP Range Min 50 C Max 205 C Indicates boost converter temperature e Undisturbed for 1 day at 25 C 77 F 25 C 77 F e Street driving 25 to 60 C 77 to 140 F e If the value is 50 58 B short in sensor circuit e If the value is 205 C 401 F Open or GND short in sensor circuit COOLANT TEMP Range Min 40 C Max 140 C Indicates the engine coolant temperature After warming up 80 to 100 C 176 to 212 F e If the value is 40 C 40 F Open in sensor circuit e Ifthe value is 140 C 284 F Short in sensor circuit COOLING FAN SPD Range Min 0 Max 6 Indicates the battery blower motor actuation mode Stopped 0 Low to High speed actuation 1 to 6 CURRENT DTC Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates the number of current DTCs DELTA SOC Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the difference betwee
129. BCM 137 Testing Controller Area Network CAN 137 Chapter 15 Subaru dey sacneseuaee 143 Testing Engine 143 Code Reading Connector Locations sse 143 Connecting the Scan Tool to the 148 Reading Engine Codes wx teme E Rede aere e ert edes 150 D Check and Read Memory Connector 166 Automatic Code uito e emp t iere 172 Type 08 EE 176 Testing Transmission 180 Transmission Code 180 1987 92 4EAT Transmission Version 1 181 1990 96 4EAT Transmission Version 2 181 1990 96 4EAT Transmission Version 2 History Codes 182 1989 94 Justy ECVT 8 183 1996 06 Subaru Models with an OBD II 16 pin 184 Testing ABS Systems iler tarif e i RA tears data 184 ABS Code Inform ation oiii Rein ep eet ip te 184 ABS Typ6S 4 1 nuce eie
130. BOO BrakeOnOff BRAKE SW BRAKE SWITCH BRAKE SWITCH B BRAKE SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the brake pedal switch it reads ON when the brakes are applied OFF when the brakes not applied BOO BRAKE SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the brake on off BOO switch It reads ON when the ECM has recognized a 4 3 downshift which should unlock the torque converter clutch on some models When ON related parameters should be 4 3 DOWNSHIFT reads YES TCC COMMAND reads OFF BOOST PRS VSV BOOST VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the turbocharger wastegate control BOOST valve vacuum switching valve Reads ON when the VSV opens the wastegate valve BOOST SENSOR Range variable Indicates turbocharger boost pressure inside the intake manifold it should read e Close to barometric pressure at idle High when the engine is fully loaded WOT Zero during closed throttle deceleration BPA Range ON OFF Indicates the brake pressure applied switch BRAKE BOOSTER PRESS SENSOR Range 8 9 to 3 4 V 10 to 101 kPa or 3 to 20 inHg Indicates the negative pressure vacuum or the relative voltage of the negative pressure internal to the brake booster assembly 354 Data Parameters Engine Parameters BRAKE SW1 BRAKE SW2 Range ON OFF Indicates brake switch BRAKE SW1 and stop lamp switch BRAKE SW2 status which are input to the automatic speed control system B1S1 L R
131. CODE DISPLAY Range actual Indicates the diagnostic trouble codes FC CTP Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ECM command to cut fuel FC during closed throttle CTP deceleration It reads ON when the ECM commands a fuel cut after sensing a closed throttle FC IDL Range ON OFF Fuel cut idle ON Fuel cut operating ON when throttle valve is fully closed and engine speed is over 2 800 rpm FC TAU Range ON OFF Indicates fuel cut TAU fuel cut during very light load ON Fuel cut operating A fuel cut is being performed under very light load to prevent engine combustion from becoming incomplete FCIL Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel cap off indicator lamp status FCIL FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a fuel cap off indicator lamp fault FIA CTRL SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the fuel injector air control solenoid valve It is turned ON in order to better atomize the fuel under various driving conditions FlexFuel Hz Range 32512 to 32768 Hz Indicates the flexible fuel output frequency FLI FLI 96 FUEL SENDER V FUEL LEVEL V FUEL LVL SENSOR V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V 0 to 12 V or 0 to 10096 Indicates the amount of fuel remaining in the tank as voltage or a percentage Percent readings indicate current level to total capacity Voltage readings should be Below 1 V for an empty tank About 2 5 V or 6 V depending on system for a full tank FLI FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the a fle
132. Check connector 2 Figure 15 37 1986 87 XT Vehicles with ECM Memory D Check and Read Memory SUA N RITO Sy 67 LEO 27 LA 205 EE 240 4 1 Read Memory connectors 2 D Check connectors 3 Check connector 3 4 Check connector 4 5 Check connector 1 6 Check connector 2 7 ECU 8 ECU LED Figure 15 38 1986 SPI connectors 169 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 Fuel pump relay 2 Read Memory connectors 3 D Check connectors 4 Ignition relay Figure 15 39 1987 Justy 1 ECM and Check connector under dash 2 Read Memory connectors under hood 3 D Check connectors under hood 4 Check connectors under dash and under hood Figure 15 40 1987 94 SPI connectors 170 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 Read Memory connectors 2 D Check connectors 3 ECM 4 Fuel pump Figure 15 41 1987 91 XT models connector in the trunk 1 Fuel pump relay 2 Read Memory connectors 3 D Check connectors 4 Ignition relay Figure 15 42 1988 94 Justy Carbureted 1990 94 Justy MFI 1990 94 Legacy and 1987 94 L Series 171 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 2 HET 4 5 7 e 9 t0 1 Test mode of MPFI 21 Read memory of MPFI 30 Clear memory of SRS 40 Not used 50 Test mode of power steering 61 Read memory of power steering 71 Diagnosis of power steering 80 Diagnosis of passive belt
133. Code Repeats Repeats Off Figure 12 6 1987 626 transmission manual flash codes Testing Antilock Brake Systems When a ABS malfunction occurs the ABS electronic control module ECM illuminates the ABS lamp on the instrument panel On some systems the ABS ECM stores codes for most malfunctions and provides data stream information for some models Codes transmit to a scan tool through either the OBD II diagnostic link connector DLC or the ABS test connector Data stream information displays when the ABS control system provides it NOTE The following sections apply to ABS systems on vehicles with or without traction control To read ABS codes from vehicles with a 17 pin underhood connector e Connect the MAZDA 1 adapter to the 17 pin connector Figure 12 7 For reading codes manually ground the TBS pin IMPORTANT Grounding the incorrect pin may result in vehicle damage 111 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ree i ET IET 222223 FAT FAC FSC d IIS FIP EI peer ERR IN 5 Figure 12 7 17 pin underhood connector and MAZDA 1 adapter P To read 1988 92 626 MX6 ABS codes e Connect an analog voltmeter to FBS G R Figure 12 8 e Read malfunction code s by observing meter needle swings Analog Voltmeter 1 FBS Green Red 2 TBS Green Black 3 GND Black 4 Jump wire
134. Connectors and Locations 117 Codes amp Data Slow 122 Injector Tests Engine Running Only 123 Transmission Manual Code Reading 121 troubleshooting 523 Montero 1989 2005 connector locations 118 Montero Sport 1997 2004 connector locations 118 MPV 1990 1993 ABS code reading 113 MR2 2000 and later SRS code reading 203 MX6 1988 1992 ABS code reading 112 N Navajo 1993 1994 4WAL code reading 112 Nissan troubleshooting 524 Nissan Infiniti 124 137 Testing Controller Area Network CAN Systems 137 Testing Engine Systems 124 Air Fuel Check Mode 2 130 Base Test 132 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 124 Code Type 07 125 Code Type 07a 126 Code Type 07a Five Mode System 127 Code Type 07b Two Mode System 129 Exhaust Monitor Test Mode 1 130 Functional Tests 129 Real Time Monitor Mode 5 131 Self Diagnostic Mode 3 131 Switch Test Mode 4 131 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 135 Manual Code Reading 135 Testing Transmission Systems 132 Nissan 4EAT Transmission Testing 133 transmission system testing 132 Index NSX 1991 code reading 18 1991 1995 ABS connector locations 22 1991 1995 transmission connector locations 19 1995 connector locations 14 1995 2003 engine connector locations 13 1995 2003 transmission connector locations 20 2003 2004 ABS code reading 26 2004 engine connector locations 13 NSX T 2004 transmission connector locations 20 Occupant Classification OCC Parameters 4
135. D D Brake warning lamp Front wiper stop position R High beam status R Hood switch R Low beam status R 4 a a a A Rear window defogger control switch R Table 14 8 CAN Type 2 and 3 communication signal identification part 1 of 3 Control Unit TCM BCM M amp A ABS IPDM E R Signal m Compressor feedback A C Compressor request Accelerator pedal position ASCD CRUISE lamp ASCD OD cancel request ASCD operation ASCD SET lamp Battery voltage Closed throttle position Cooling fan speed request Engine coolant temperature Engine speed A a a a a a a a a a a a m Fuel consumption monitor 139 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Controller Area Network CAN Systems Table 14 8 CAN 2 and 3 communication signal identification part 2 of 3 Signal Control Unit ECM TCM BCM M amp A ABS IPDM E Malfunction indicator lamp T R Wide open throttle position T R A T CHECK indicator lamp T R A T position indicator T R R A T self diagnosis R T Manual mode gear position T R Manual mode indicator T R Output shaft speed R T Turbine speed R T A C switch R T Blower fan motor switch R Buzzer output T R Day time running light request T R Door switch T
136. Data Slow Readings from these vehicles take up to seven seconds to change The baud rate or data update rate depends on the it is not controlled by the scan tool Codes and Data for 1989 and Later Toyota Cressida and Lexus LS400 These vehicles transmit ECM operating data to the scan tool This test mode appears on the Main Menu as the selection Data No Codes These Toyota systems do not transmit trouble codes in this mode Codes must be read separately by using the Code Functions selection from the Main Menu To place the Cressida and Lexus LS400 in a test mode where the ECM is more sensitive to trouble codes see Code Sensitivity OBD ll and some Pre OBD II on page 199 For a detailed explanation refer to Troubleshooter References TA043 and TA044 1996 2006 Mazda 16 Pin DLC Voltage Chart P To test the terminal voltages e the terminal voltages using a voltmeter Figure A 1 maps the data link connector Refer to Table A 1 for corresponding voltages 523 Troubleshooting A 4 No Communication for 1987 90 Nissan 1 J1850 BUS 2 CAN medium speed 3 Case ground 4 Power ground 5 CAN high speed 6 ISO K line KW2000 7 41850 BUS 8 CAN medium speed 9 Module programming signal 10 high speed 11 Battery B Table A 1 Test 16 pin DLC Terminal Voltages Pin Protocol Voltage 2 J1850 0 0 V 3 C
137. Data Parameters Transmission Parameters PCF FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the line pressure control status PCFA A Range 0 0 to 5 0 A Indicates the line pressure control AMP PCG Range not available Indicates the converter pressure control PCG FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the converter pressure control status PCSV 20 Range 0 to 100 0 Indicates the duty cycle DC of the pulse width modulated PWM signal being applied to the pressure control solenoid valve PCSV The PCSV regulates hydraulic pressure to the clutches during shifts PCS ACT AMP Range 0 to 1 10 A Indicates the actual current of the pressure control A solenoid at the control module High current indicates low line pressure Low current indicates high line pressure PCS DES AMP Range 0 to 1 10 A Indicates a calculated value determined by the accelerator pedal position and the actual throttle position The parameter represents the driver s intended request for torque or acceleration and is used to optimize transmission controls e 0 represents an idle or coast request e 100 represents a request for wide open throttle WOT PCS DUTY PCS DUTY CYCL 6 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the commanded state of the pressure control solenoid PCS and reads as follows 096 when the solenoid is not energized About 60 at idle during maximum on time POWERSHIFT SW Range ON OFF Indicates whether the vehic
138. Dnlock Shift erii reete te rot 304 AUTOLMP AUX BATT V 6 RE 353 oust tls eL bM Le E cL Men se es se ls ecce cedere 357 BIST R bASOC iae RD e P ERE ee t ER et 353 BIS LEE 357 B1S2 HTR AMPS rnision a N 353 EAE aN A V E AAE E AAT E EE E AN AEE AOE A EET 353 251 L R Sec we 353 25 PEE 357 PRXRIEMEIL B 353 B25S1 R E S86 v a ode est eere e o e EE 357 252 EE P e RU e Eu SR a en aea oe o deed alae 353 BAGK DIMIBUTYIGYGEE DER UU ee CREE RS ERA REO SEINS 304 Back Door OpeniSw e 304 Back Door Open Sw ies scele 304 BACK DOOR SW arain Sic et e ue EROR EIE e OR E Rr REPRE E RO DDR eerte qute 304 Backup Light SW au cod 304 BACK UP LIGHT cL 353 Back Up Light Transistor 2 304 BAGKUBEMB ie Ee eT n a Rh 304 BARO A MAPPA I AD AA 353 BARO C a 353 MED LE MM E 353 BARO SENSOR V zs
139. Door Lock Sw UNLOCK iiie eite rtr eer E rre eri ei AAs 311 DOOR SW AS DOOR SW DR Door SW Ej Door Sw EB ctor teret ve ee Have Eti EHE ed te m ee Re riens Door b DOR MI YI V C UE IN rA A e Ll cv ed Door Sw RR 912 DOOR SW RR NONE EVE E 312 Door Unlock Swi Status Ve Pe vec ere e ier 312 Door 312 BBC 312 DOWNY R E M 371 5 55 5 ies te tert Pt ee err ree erre E Here 500 DOWNSHIET REQE2 incre rre o titre te er o tne eie ern dero 500 DOWNSHIFT REQUEST 1 500 DOWNSHIFT REQUEST 2 3 o rere entero PME eee ee WEIN e REY ES 500 GER E etat etr hereto mere diee eiie eet ipee 500 DOWNSHIET SWT ae i ccr e ren revertentes 500 DPEEXV scito nni cate ER Ter em een DPFEGR DR BUKL DR PTENS ORES i edet cite ye a HE ee ED EA AH go e bey E a RH edes 296 DRAJEMBEZIG ER ERE I RE 479 TRAE 479 DRIVE GONDEITIO
140. E d rd tee ubt td 425 etch e e ae a e ie n RT eta Rt 425 OD OFF LIGHT anita Seas eked 2 507 ODORE SW tetto dte nette e eat te t eee 507 oL 481 ODOMETER km miles en FERE Ie Mn pror nen le enti 508 ODOMETR E R M Oil Press Sw OIL PRESS V EA o s 9 OR SW Prae etie ETE Te n nri leni ARA o AME MB c ceed ener bed eee deed eee AE Open Door Warnihg etre ierit Pt Rer a Sidi dude 325 OPEN MALEEUNG rati ite DEA DOC E SAEC dt deed td dt es 425 OPEN CESDEQOP een eth inei e i in t erar ein indt 410 OPN MALFUNC 425 OPRSES T ie etia ELE nea 297 ol 425 Optical Sensor 4 retener nem iini nine e niet 325 OS SRO M 508 256 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters OSFMFLG 426 OSS RPM OSS FAULT a aaan T
141. EEC IV system into a mode that records intermittent service codes as you wiggle or tap on engine sensors actuators and wiring connectors with the engine running To conduct a Wiggle Engine Running test 1 Select Wiggle Engine Running The test instruction screen displays 2 Ifthe engine is running a warning message displays Switch the engine off wait 10 seconds then restart the test Otherwise start and run the engine at idle speed 3 Once the engine is fully warm select to enter the test The screen momentarily displays a test initiated message then switches to the test screen 4 Wiggle or tap on sensors actuators and wiring connectors The bottom line of the screen is blank until a fault occurs and a code sets When a code sets the bottom line reads memory code stored run KOEO test but this message only appears during a fault Always check for memory DTOs after a wiggle test NOTE Do not wiggle the test adapter loose from the self test connector during this test or a false code may set Always exit the test before turning off the ignition To read the service codes from a wiggle test Select Codes Menu gt KOEO Self Test Output State Check This test allows you to switch the PCM signals to the engine actuators on and off to take voltmeter readings If the engine is running turn it off before selecting the output state test NOTE The EEC V Output State Test is the same as the EEC IV Output State Check
142. ER Ee ee tid diene ae dv e 341 ea tec eiue iR eden 341 M HT 393 240 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters FAULT x 2 393 HI A C PRESS 393 RR RR RR 317 PUG TOT SHOR PE 502 HIPS AE ee ee ag cacti aac 393 FINES PRESSURE ES h a LM MM E 393 E Elea eds eects DIE EN T m 502 HIGH ALTITUDE HIGH BATTERY HIGH BEAM LAMPA naniii eiiiai ed ee e ertet RI e Pe t ibd m a E E pei 480 HIGH BEAM SELECT heit eet C t to tree e dic t t C Hee ted da eng pd 317 Beam SW Eaton een enia eie 317 High Flasher C 315 HIGHIGEAR secon ivan Ge ities enn ei enin ieu tei in nenne eene 502 High Mount STOP Eight transistOr eai cta oe ice bead pe ite p bee DO I ta ye b Co parvo ep 317 HIGH RAD FAN Hist Com Rain HISTORY DTC Hi Level Warning Sig rct rettet tata eret eb e Pte delet e cd ca 316 HO2 SNSR T mW 5r iit eno oie nte eee nen OR E Hee leri
143. Figure 15 29 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 ur 1 8L H4 MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 37 Table 15 7 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 37 Table 15 7 151 Subaru Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 2 of 9 Testing Engine Systems Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers o Code si Reading Read 5 Fuel Be D Check Reading Year Model Engine 1541 Codes Memory System 5 m Connectors Connector za Connector Connectors Lo ations Brat All All no Figure 15 36 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Coupe SPI Eu 122 Figure 15 38 Figure 15 38 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 igag Seden 18LH4 SP ias Figure 15 38 Figure 15 38 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Wagon 18LH4 spl ae PV Figure 15 38 Figure 15 38 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 vr 1 8L H4 MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 37 Table 15 7 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 29 Figure 15 37 Table 15 7 Figure 15 26 X Figure 15 27 Figure 15 36 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36
144. HI Ignition voltage LO 0 volts TFP SWITCH A TFP SWITCH B TFP SWITCH C Range Indicates the status of the PCM switch A B and C inputs to the transmission fluid pressure TFP switch assembly Readings are ON when the voltage signal is low and the switch is closed OFF when the voltage signal is high and the switch is open The PCM uses the combination of high and low voltage signals from the switches to determine manual valve position The manual valve regulates line pressure TCC engagement and shift solenoid operation TFT Range 40 to 399 F or 40 199 C Indicates the transmission fluid temperature TFT V TrnFluidTmp V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the transmission fluid temperature voltage TFT FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a transmission fluid temperature fault THROTTLE SW Range ON OFF Indicates the throttle switch THOP THROTTLE Range 0 to 100 Indicates the throttle position 517 Data Parameters ThrPosMODE Range Indicates the throttle position DELIV Nm Range Transmission Parameters PT WOT CT 0 to 691 Indicates the estimated amount of torque in Nm that is delivered from the engine The ECM sends the engine torque information to the transmission control module TCM via the high speed GMLAN serial data line TORQUE Range Indicates the net engine torque TP MODE Indicates the thr
145. Hood is engine compartment P is passenger Rear is hatch RL is rear left and RR is rear right Reads ON when the switch is on door open and off at all other times D Mirror Memory M1 D Mirror Memory M2 P Mirror Memory M1 P Mirror Memory M2 Range MEM NOT MEM Indicates whether or not a mirror position is saved in memory D is driver side P is passenger side M1 is memory 1 and M2 is memory 2 Reads MEM when a position is saved and NOT MEM when there is no position saved in memory 307 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters D Seat Buckle Sw P Seat Buckle Sw SEAT BELT SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the seat belt D is driver P is passenger switches Reads ON when the seat belt buckle is latched and reads OFF when the buckle is disconnected D UP SW Range UP DOWN Indicates the status of the driver door up switch DD LOCK Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the driver door lock switch DD UNLOCK Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the driver door unlock switch Dimmer Sw Dimmer HI Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the headlight dimmer switch Reads ON when the switch is positioned to operate the high beam headlamps reads OFF at all other times DIMMING INPUT V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the position of the IP dimmer switch rheostat The display reads 4 0 V when the head lamp switch is in the Auto position and the day time running lamps DRL are on or the IP dim
146. II 16 pin connector with no other specified Check connectors used to gather transmission codes The How To Get Codes selection from the Code Functions menu displays manual code gathering instructions see How to Get Codes on page 11 Subaru uses two different code types for transmission codes Detailed information for these code types can be found in the section Code Type 08 on page 176 e Code Type 08a for 1990 94 4EAT version 2 and all Justy ECVT transmissions Code 08b for 1987 91 4EAT version 1 transmissions e Generic Powertrain codes for 1996 2006 models with no other diagnostic routines specified by the manufacturer 180 Subaru Testing Transmission Systems The scan tool displays the code type for the specific vehicle you are testing The transmission control system is placed in the diagnostic mode by performing vehicle specific routines These routines consist of a series of ignition cycles throttle movements and gear selections 15 2 2 1987 92 4EAT Transmission Version 1 Use this procedure to test the 4EAT transmission in 1987 1991 XT and XT6 and 1987 1992 4WD Loyale Turbo MPFI P To determine if any codes are present e Turn the ignition on engine off Codes are present if the Power lamp flashes four times following the 2 second bulb check If the lamp remains on there is a problem in the lamp circuit or with the control module If the lamp remains off after the 2 second lamp check no
147. Indicates vehicle speed the value is calculated by the ECM PCM or TCM based on input pulses from the vehicle speed sensor VSS The ECM uses vehicle speed primarily for torque converter clutch TCC engagement although it also is an important value for electronic cruise control systems Manual transmission vehicles without cruise control and some automatic transmission vehicles without a TCC do not have a VSS The scan tool may display a parameter for these models but the reading will always be 0 VENT CONT VALVE Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command status to the EVAP canister control valve It should read ON when the PCM has commanded the vent valve closed to prevent the canister from venting VHCL SPD CUT Range NON CUT Indicates the vehicle cruise condition NON Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed e CUT Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the set speed and ASCD operation is cut off VIAS S V Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the variable induction air control system solenoid valve which controls the vacuum signal from the intake manifold and reads as follows 1 800 to 3 600 RPM ON All other conditions OFF VPS SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command status of the valve pulse system control solenoid valve To reduce fuel consumption the ECM commands the solenoid valve not to lift both intake and exhaust valves without controlling the ignition system durin
148. Legacy ABS Check connector location 186 Subaru Testing ABS Systems 1995 96 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon w o TCS 1997 late 99 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon 1998 04 Impreza Coupe Sedan and Wagon 2001 04 Forester 2003 04 Baja To retrieve trouble codes 1 Locate the ABS diagnostic connector and diagnostic terminals near the heater assembly on the driver side Figure 15 51 Switch the ignition off Connect a diagnosis terminal to the diagnosis connector terminal 6 Switch the ignition on Read the trouble codes on the TCS warning lamp Code 08c Figure 15 47 The following condition apply to testing these vehicles 11 displays first then the stored codes display in order beginning with the most recent stored codes The code display repeats for up to five minutes fthere are no codes in memory only code 11 displays To clear code memory 1 Disconnect the diagnosis terminal from the diagnosis connector terminal 6 Figure 15 51 2 Connectthe diagnosis terminal to the diagnosis connector terminal 6 for at least 0 2 second and then disconnect it 3 Repeat step 2 an additional two times 3 times total within twelve seconds 1995 96 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon with TCS To retrieve trouble codes 1 Locate the ABS diagnostic connector and diagnostic terminals near the heater assembly on the driver side Figure 15 51 Switch the ignition off Connect
149. MOTOR B mA Range variable Indicates the current applied to the transfer case motors A or B in milliamperes Readings are positive when the motors are driven forward and negative when driven in reverse MTR CCW Range ON OFF Indicates the counterclockwise shift motor driver output state MTR CW Range ON OFF Indicates the clockwise shift motor driver output state NEUT LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case shift control module command status to the Neutral indicator lamp on the instrument panel NSAFETYSW 4X4M Range ON OFF Indicates the neutral safety switch PLATE A Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case contact plate switch A PLATE B Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case contact plate switch B PLATE C Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case contact plate switch C PLATE D Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case contact plate switch D PLATE PWR Range OFF OFF FAIL ON Indicates the contact plate power 486 Data Parameters Transfer Case Parameters SHMOTCCLO 4X4M Range OFF OFF FAIL ON Indicates the transmission transfer counterclockwise motor output SHMOTCLOC 4X4M Range OFF OFF FAIL ON ON B Indicates the clockwise shift relay coil status SLIP ADPT DC 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the signal being applied to the automatic transfer case motor SOFTWARE ID Range YES NO Indicates whether the c
150. PCM has commanded the shift solenoid to energize 432 Data Parameters ShiftSol1Fault ShiftSol2Fault ShiftSol3Fault ShiftSol4Fault Range Engine Parameters ON OFF Indicates whether the PCM detects a fault in the shift solenoid circuits it reads YES only when a fault is present SHRTFT1 Range Indicates the status of the short term fuel trim 1 SHRTFT2 Range Indicates the status of the short term fuel trim 2 SHRTFT11 Range Indicates the status of the short term fuel trim bank 1 sensor 1 SHRTFT12 Range Indicates the status of the short term fuel trim bank 1 sensor 2 SHRTFT21 Range Indicates the status of the short term fuel trim bank 2 sensor 1 SHRTFT22 Range Indicates the status of the short term fuel trim bank 2 sensor 2 SLIP REV rpm Range 35 to 35 35 to 35 35 to 35 35 to 35 35 to 35 35 to 35 variable Indicates the difference between the engine speed and the primary pulley speed SMCOIL A Range Indicates the step motor coil A energizing status SMCOIL B Range Indicates the step motor coil B energizing status SMCOIL C Range Indicates the step motor coil C energizing status SMCOIL D Range Indicates the step motor coil D energizing status SO2S B2 H CUR mA Range ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF variable Indicates the amount of current the ECM is applying to the bank 2
151. PRNDL DISPLAY Range PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE 3RD 2ND 1ST INVALID Indicates the state of the PRNDL switch as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC INVALID indicates an invalid value PRNDL STATE Range INV PARK REV NEUT DRV 3RD 2ND 1ST INV Indicates the state of the PRNDL switch as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC INV indicates an invalid value 479 Data Parameters Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters RIGHT TURN SIGNAL Range OFF ON Indicates the right turn signal supply voltage circuit as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC An active turn signal will toggle the parameter between OFF and ON SBLTLMP SEAT BELT LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the seat belt fasten seat belt indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC SECURITY LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the security system indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC SELTESTDTC Range actual Indicates the number of trouble codes set due to diagnostic test SERVICE 4WD Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the serviced 4WD system indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC Speed Meter Range 0 to 158 MPH or 0 to 255 KPH Indicates the vehicle speed The display should match the reading on the speedometer Tacho Meter Range 0 to 12 750 RPM Indicates the engine speed The display should match the tachome
152. R WSPD Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the rear wheel speed sensor REGEN CO OPRT Range BEFORE DURING Indicates the regenerate co operation Reads DURING while regenerate is operating REGEN COOP Range ON OFF Indicates the regenerative co operation status Reads ON when the system is operating reads OFF at all other times REGEN TORQ FL N m Range 0 to 4080 N m Indicates the regenerative request torque FL 0 N m indicates that ECB is not in operation REGEN TORQ FR N m Range 0 to 4080 N m Indicates the regenerative request torque FR 0 N m indicates that ECB is not in operation REGEN TORQ RL N m Range 0 to 4080 N m Indicates the regenerative request torque RL 0 N m indicates that ECB is not in operation REGEN TORQ RR N m Range 0 to 4080 N m Indicates the regenerative request torque RR 0 N m indicates that ECB is not in operation RESERVOIR SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of brake fluid reservoir level warning switch ON when the reservoir level is normal OFF when the reservoir level is low 286 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters RF WSPD Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the right front wheel speed sensor signal as vehicle speed RL ABS STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the rear left wheel ABS control status Reads ON when ABS is active reads OFF at all other times RL PRS SEN V RL W C SENS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the r
153. Read Memory Connector Locations on page 166 together Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine The ECS lamp on the instrument panel should light Start the engine The ECS lamp should go off Run the engine at idle for 1 minute then snap the throttle fully open 5 times Briefly race the engine to activate the pressure switch test then drive at a speed above 6 mph This may be done carefully on a service rack if necessary Run the engine at 2500 RPM until the ECS lamp lights A flashing lamp means the system is OK A continuously lit lamp means trouble codes are present The scan tool reads the codes Select Code Functions Auto Code Read from the Main Menu and follow the connection instructions earlier in this chapter Repeat this procedure until no trouble codes are found 10 Separate the D Check connectors 1987 Justy EFC D Check Use this D Check procedure for 1987 Justy vehicles with an electronic feedback carburetor EFC If the ECS lamp is lit perform the ECS check U Check before doing this D Check P To perform a D Check 1 2 3 Connect the scan tool data cable to the vehicle Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature Stop the engine and connect the green D Check connectors see D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations on page 166 together Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine The ECS lamp should light and the ECM transmits specific vehic
154. SC SET LMP Range ON OFF Indicates the speed control set indicator SCCS SCCS V Range 0 to 10 00 V Indicates the speed control command switch SCCS voltage SEC PRESS MPa Range 0 5 to 0 9 MPa Indicates the status of the solenoid that regulates Secondary Transmission Line Pressure SEC SPEED rpm Range variable Indicates the secondary pulley speed Display value approximately matches speedometer SEGRP Range 0 to 100 Indicates the EGR valve stepping motor position SEGRP DES Range 0 to 100 Indicates the EGR motor position desired SELTESTDTC Range actual Indicates the diagnostic trouble codes SET LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cruise control indicator light on the instrument panel SET VHCL SPD Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the selected cruise control speed SFTCMD H Range not available Indicates the status of the SFT command which determines whether the ECM is in functional test mode SFTRIM 1 SFTRIM 2 Range 25 to 35 Indicates if the PCM is commanding a rich or a lean short term fuel mixture correction Readings range from 25 to 35 with 000 as the midpoint A number above zero indicates a PCM command for a short term rich mixture correction A number below zero indicates the PCM is commanding a short term lean mixture The ST FUEL number leads the long term fuel LT FUEL number When a pattern or trend of short term corrections to fuel met
155. SRS Controller Area Network Systems CAN 14 1 Testing Engine Systems Nissan and Infiniti engine system testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 124 Code Types 07 on page 125 Functional Tests on page 129 14 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Figure 14 1 and Figure 14 2 on page 125 show Nissan and Infiniti diagnostic connector locations and adapter information for reading engine codes P To read codes 1 Connect the molded adapter to the connector shown in Figure 14 1 and Figure 14 2 on page 125 which may be in the following locations Driver side kick panel Passenger side kick panel Left side of dash Under passenger seat Behind driver side trim panel The scan tool will indicate the connector location Select codes from the codes and data menu or select how to get codes from the code functions menu and follow the on screen instructions 124 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Engine Systems 1 Diagnostic connector 2 NISSAN 1 adapter Figure 14 1 Vehicle diagnostic connector NOTE Some models have a similar looking 16 terminal connector under the instrument panel that is not a scan tool connector Pre 1995 vehicles that do not have this 12 pin diagnostic connector may have an ECM with one or two fault indicating LEDs Refer to Code Types 07 for information on reading codes from these vehicles 1 16 pin DLC Use OBD II adapter 2 14 pin conn
156. Short is code 23 2 1 2 Pin Service Check connector 2 Special tool O7PAZ 0010100 or equivalent 3 SRS indicator lamp Figure 10 19 1996 1999 Isuzu Oasis ABS service check connector location 0 5 Sec 0 4 Sec oo 54 71 i t 0 3 Sec 0 4 Sec 1 1 1 1 Ignitioni i i Switch 4 gt 4 5 On 1 First Cycle Second Cycle 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 10 20 ABS Code Type 02 Table 10 6 suzu ABS Code Type 02 Pattern Long Short Main code sub code Read codes on ABS indicator lamp With ignition switch off connect SCS service connector OEM 07PAZ 0010100 or jumper wire to 2 pin ABS service connector Turn ignition switch on without the brake pedal depressed Depressing brake pedal will initiate DTC erasure mode Start codes by Follow the procedure in the Clearing ABS Codes section of this manual Procedure includes connecting the SCS service connector or jumper wire to the 2 pin ABS service check connector pressing amp releasing the brake pedal several times while monitoring the ABS indicator lamp Clear codes by When done Turn the ignition off and disconnect the SCS service connector or jumper wire 91 Isuzu Testing Antilock Brake System ABS Code Type 05a To read ABS codes from an 2002 04 Axiom 1996 2002 Trooper 1999 2001 Rodeo or 1999 2001 Vehicross Jump pins 4 and 12 as show
157. Systems Figure 15 8 1995 Legacy 1995 Impreza 2 2L and 1996 06 Subaru common connector locations Table 15 8 1995 Legacy Impreza 2 2L and 1996 to 2006 connector location VEHICLE YEAR CONNECTOR LOCATION Legacy ABS diagnosis connector 1 left side of heater box ang 4995 16 pin OBD II connector for 2 under left side of dash Impreza engine and transmission 2 2L Airbag SRS diagnosis connector 3 under left side of dash ABS diagnosis connector 1 left side of heater box All Models 1996 04 16 0 OBD II connector for 2 under left side of dash engine and transmission Airbag SRS diagnosis connector 3 under left side of dash 16 pin OBD II connector for All except ena transmission and ABS 2005 06 Airbag SRS diagnosis connector 3 under left side of dash 16 pin OBD II connector for Legacy engine transmission ABS and 1 left side of heater box airbag 15 1 2 Connecting the Scan Tool to the Vehicle This section contains information for connecting the scan tool to the diagnostic connector for testing or troubleshooting Included in this section are the following e Connections Using the MULTI 1 Adapter on page 148 Figure 15 9 e Connections Using the MULTI 2 Adapter on page 149 Figure 15 13 e Connections Using the OBD II Adapter on page 150 Figure 15 14 Connections Using the MULTI 1 Adapter To connect the MULTI 1 adapter Figure
158. TEC SOLVIS D Dt gah MILI DELE 495 218 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters ABS LAMP sean es 478 ABS SRI STATUS 280 ABS STOP a svete 280 ABS WARN LAMP o nni nie REC hee bai seid ene nire ee es 281 5 5 VOLT M ABS WARNS e lala ABSLAMP ABSOL PRES V 5 ri Reb nme te itte er mE HP E Eee ie ed m e ave i a Ever eri AT CUM E ABV VENT 6 iet oiii er hee entem iiam d eben ein iei ene ACX ENA x7 uk e erede dote nette iet ert ep AG HEUPRESS OBN e rtr EO ead ae te bed b a re deed deed 342 AGIMON CMPL ie Renee a inna iU 342 AC MON ENA js ens 942 AC REQSSIQ wet e eret etu iti tete eet ER OPER 342 Qd Re eo te b ae beer bre tees reve t e v de DT S 302 AGC PRESS SENS neni ennemi sian adi ein ti sina eeu 281 AGC PRESS SENS 1 qa a C EOD QU EO
159. Table 15 1 Coupe 1eLH4 spl x ive pu Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Hatchback Figure 15 26 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 27 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Justy All All X Figure 15 20 Figure 15 39 Figure 15 39 Table 15 3 1997 18LH4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Figure 15 24 3 Sedan 1 8L H4 SPI X Figure 15 25 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 2BBL X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Wagon 18LH4A SP Eus Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 35 Table 15 4 xi 1 8L H4 MFI X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 41 Figure 15 41 Table 15 7 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 41 Figure 15 41 Table 15 7 152 Subaru Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 3 of 9 Testing Engine Systems Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers o Code an Reading Read 5 Fuel Be D Check Reading Year Model Engine Codes Memory System 2 Connector Connectors Connectors eae Figure 15 24 5 2 1 8L H4 SPI X Figure 15 25 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 30 Figure 15 42 Figur
160. The following selections are available Data No Codes begins communication with the ABS module and displays data parameters e Codes Only gathers and displays ABS trouble codes Clear Codes clears ABS memory codes from the ABS ECM memory Review Codes allows you to view codes This menu item appears only after code gathering Print Codes allows you to print codes This menu item appears only after code gathering Data No Codes This section has information on viewing ABS data using the scan tool To enter and exit ABS data 1 Enter in the vehicle ID 2 Turn the ignition on 3 Select Data No Codes 4 Turn the ignition off after completing the ABS data tests Codes Only This section has information on retrieving ABS codes using the scan tool To gather codes 1 Select Codes Only A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue The initializing Communication message appears NOTE The initializing Communication screen means the scan tool is attempting to start the test however it does not mean the vehicle has responded If the message stays on the screen more than a few minutes the test did not start If no codes are detected during the test a 0000 no faults present message displays 3 The Code List which shows all codes in memory displays if codes are present Clear Codes This section has information on clearing ABS cod
161. The ignition key should be switched off when selecting Functional Tests from the Main Menu PCM on EEC IV and EEC V vehicles 105 gt Testing Engine and Transmission Systems EEC IV Functional Tests NOTE Operations described in this section are not available on all tool platforms EEC IV systems typically offer several functional tests the following EEC IV functional tests are described in this section Computed Timing Test on page 106 e Wiggle Engine Off Test on page 106 Wiggle Engine Running Test on page 107 e Output State Check on page 107 Idle Speed Adjustment Test on page 108 Computed Timing Test This test checks ignition timing with the engine running at a controlled idle speed It also verifies the ability of the PCM to advance and retard timing Connect either a timing light or a magnetic timing meter to the engine before testing On most EEC IV engines the PCM advances timing 20 above the base timing setting So if the base timing specification is 10 BTDC expect to read 30 BTDC with a timing light or meter Refer to Mazda service manuals for timing specifications and test procedures To conduct a Computed Timing test 1 Select Computed Timing The timing check screen displays NOTE A warning message displays if the timing check test is selected with the engine running or with the ignition switch on This means the PCM self test output STO circui
162. activated and off at all other times Drvr Door Lock Posit Sw Lock Posit Sw Pass Lock Posit Sw Rear Lock Posit Sw RL Lock Posit Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the door unlock detection switch signal Drvr is the driver switch Lock is the master Switch Pass is the passenger switch Rear is the hatch switch RL is the rear left switch Reads ON when the switch is on unlocked and off when the switch is off locked 311 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters ECT Power Mode Sw Range ON OFF Displays the on off status of the electronically controlled transmission power mode switch Reads ON when the switch is active and reads OFF at all other times When active the shift pattern is optimized for performance ECT Snow Mode Sw Range ON OFF Displays the on off status of the electronically controlled transmission snow mode switch Reads ON when the switch is active and reads OFF at all other times When active the shift pattern is optimized for traction and the vehicle starts out in second gear E G Condition Range RUN STOP Displays the operating status of the engine Reads RUN when the engine is running and reads STOP when the engine is off Engine Running Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the engine is running Reads ON when the engine is running Engine Status Range STOP STALL RUN CRANK Indicates the operating status of the engine Entry Delay Range 0 14 30 Displays the setting of the delay tim
163. actual Indicates the EGR sensor input at the time of a misfire 410 Data Parameters Engine Parameters M ENG Range actual Indicates the engine RPM at the time of a misfire M IAT Range actual Indicates the intake air temperature IAT at the time of a misfire M LOAD Range actual Indicates the engine load at the time of a misfire M PNP Range PARK NEUTRAL Indicates the park neutral position PNP at the time of a misfire M RUN Range actual Indicates the engine running time at the time of a misfire M SOAK Range actual Indicates the engine off soak time in minutes prior to a misfire M TP Range actual Indicates the throttle position at the time of a misfire M TRIP Range actual Indicates the number of trips since the time of a misfire M VSS Range actual Indicates the vehicle speed at the time of a misfire MAF gm Sec MAF g s Range 0 to 665 g s Indicates mass airflow MAF which is the amount of air entering the engine expressed as grams per second The value is determined by the MAF sensor signal f value 2 7 to 3 7 9 5 Idling e If value 8 8 to 9 8 g s 2 000 rpm fvalue approximately 0 0 0 5 Mass air flow meter power source circuit open VG circuit open or short e fvalue 160 0 g s or more E2G circuit open MAF Hz Range 0 to 31 999 Hz Indicates mass airflow MAF which is the amount of air entering the engine expressed as hertz The value is determined by t
164. airbag sensor assembly may cause low source voltage 16 5 2 Code Clearing P To clear SRS codes from 2000 and later Echo Celica and MR2 and most 2001 and later models 1 Connect two jumper wires to terminals 13 and 6 of DCL3 16 pin OBD II Figure 16 12 2 Turn the ignition switch on and wait approximately six seconds 3 Starting with the Tc terminal alternately ground terminal Tc then terminal A B twice each in cycles of 1 0 second Figure 16 13 Ensure that terminal Tc remains grounded 204 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Several seconds after the clearing procedure is complete Step 3 the SRS warming lamp blinks in a 50 ms second cycle to indicate codes have been cleared Figure 16 13 1 Terminal 6 2 Terminal 13 Tc Figure 16 12 Ground DCL3 terminals Te Body 1 We 0 5 to 1 5 Seconds 1 i off 2 AB Body 1 I dw 50 ms Moser Se m gre en VIE gt I 1 I I Fg 1 SRS Warning Lamp 1 Figure 16 13 SRS airbag code clearing P To clear SRS codes on most other vehicles 1 Switch the ignition on without starting the engine 2 Connect a jumper wire between terminals 4 and 13 of the DLC3 16 pin OBD 11 Figure 16 11 Codes should now display 3 Some vehicles may require this method a Withi
165. ale ht eer eau a 481 OW TOME eL MM DL 487 OR OCOD RR 505 EIC aA hc ek 505 LPS A 2 on 505 Eo M 505 LR WHEEL cube ibat batte Beatam Ato t acte edi 286 i E 323 RR RR RENE 323 249 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters 323 324 324 is 324 5 286 ERAWANKE rie rte eia e e at meii Rt em Pe dee rie en te eS 324 Bici es 506 ERIDPRG eA REDI nte e n e ee i E ERE ERE 324 LRLOBAT wee 324 R 324 LT ADP AA PIU 411 96 rr tte er din sin a eee n REOR FAEERE Re 411 ur NI Ep M I N 411 LT FUEL TRIM COUNTS vee 412 LT FUEL TRIM B1 GOUNTS iii ct eterne dece tete c EHE px o HE D Io nd e x ec OM eps 412 LT FUEL TRIM BZ COUNTS ai netter erect Re en ena he eb eere ERE Ed 412 EF TRIM BI 96 E 411 96 aia a td e e a ie e etr ene i
166. and wear New clutches have the maximum amount of friction material Therefore newer clutches require less volume and have a lower CVI value The range of normal wear for CVI values are e LR Clutch 35 to 83 e 2 4 Clutch 20 to 70 e UD Clutch 24 to 70 OD Clutch 48 to 150 The OD Clutch value varies per model year Refer to the Fast Track Domestic Transmission Troubleshooter or the Chrysler Service Manual for correct OD clutch CVI values If battery power is interrupted the TCM reverts to initial or baseline CVI values and the TCM must relearn each clutch circuit Be aware initial CVI values are not used during troubleshooting They are startup values only To teach clutch volumes to the transmission control module 1 Run the quick learn functional test NOTE The ATM tests actuate solenoids in the transmission The parking brake must be set during the tests The shift lever must be in park to exit an ATM test If the shift lever is not in park the scan tool does not exit the test 2 Road test and run through a complete up and down shift sequence Avoid moving the throttle on steady acceleration upshifts The TCM must also learn high speed and low speed kickdown shifts Refer to Chrysler test procedures for more detailed information 39 Daihatsu This chapter contains information for testing Daihatsu vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following systems may be availabl
167. and BARO pressure readings Voltage should be high when pressure is high and low when pressure is low If either or both of the readings appear abnormal for the expected local barometric pressure the sensor signal to the ECM is inaccurate or the ECM calculations are incorrect for some reason BARO V BARO S V BARO SENSOR V Range 0 0 to 5 12 V Indicates the voltage signal from the barometric pressure BARO sensor The reading should be high when barometric pressure is near atmospheric pressure at sea level It should drop as barometric pressure drops The ECM uses the BARO sensor voltage and the manifold absolute pressure MAP sensor voltage to calculate the manifold vacuum and determine true absolute pressure Some systems do not have a BARO sensor However the ECM provides a BARO reading by sampling the MAP sensor reading with the key on and the engine off just before cranking At this point manifold pressure should equal or be very close to atmospheric pressure The ECM also 351 Data Parameters Engine Parameters updates these BARO estimates when the engine is running by sampling MAP voltage when the engine is at wide open throttle BARO Hz Range 125 to 160 Hz Indicates the barometric pressure as hertz BARO EGR SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the BARO SEGRP solenoid status BASADJ Range ON OFF Indicates whether the BCM is in base idle adjustment mode it reads ON when the ECM is in base idle air adjustmen
168. be as shown in the table below 369 Data Parameters Engine Parameters Table 18 4 Typical sensor outputs for DPFE parameter 0 55 Volt Offset 1 0 Volt Offset inHg kPa Volts inHg kPa Volts 8 83 29 81 4 66 8 56 28 9 4 95 6 62 22 36 3 64 4 3 14 4 2 97 4 41 14 90 2 61 0 0 1 0 2 21 7 46 1 58 0 0 0 55 DPFEGR Range not available Indicates the delta feedback pressure exhaust gas recirculation DRIVE CounT DRIVECNT Range 0 to 255 Indicates the number of times the engine has been started since the last DTC P1000 monitor readiness set DRIVE DIST km mile Range actual distance Indicates the drive distance DRIVE TIME min Range actual minutes Indicates the total drive time in minutes DRV STATUS Range IDLE F C or F C Indicates the control status of the vehicle reading are IDLE during idling control e F C during fuel cut control e F C DECEL during fuel cut control on deceleration DTC CouNT DTC_CNT Range 0 to 255 Indicates the DTC count The count includes DTC needing no action DTC STORED Range actual count Indicates the total number of current DTCs set this ignition cycle E ABV STEPS E ABV STEP POS Range 0 to 125 Indicates the position of the supercharger bypass valve stepper motor Reads 125 when the valve is fully open and 0 when closed 370 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EACV Range 0 to 10096 Indicates el
169. bleeds air into the intake manifold to raise RPM IDLING Range ON OFF Indicates whether the engine is running at idle IG LEVEL IG1 LEVEL Range HIGH LOW Indicates the status of the IG1 voltage level IG MISFIRE Range actual count Indicates the misfire accumulated counter for 2VI method ignition systems IG T ADJ V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the status of the ignition timing adjuster volume switch as volts Ignition timing at idle is controlled by this volume switch 397 Data Parameters Engine Parameters IGDSBL Range 0 1 Indicates the cessation of injection B Bit changes to 1 if injection of each cylinder ceases Bit 0 doesn t always show cylinder 1 IGN V IGNITION V Range 0 0 to 25 5 V Indicates the key on system voltage IGN ACC SIG Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the ignition switch ACC input signal to the control module This parameter displays ON when the ignition switch is in the ignition accessory position and OFF when the ignition switch is in any other position IGN ADJ TERM OCT ADJ Range ON OFF or CLSD OPEN Indicates the state of the ignition timing adjustment terminal CLSD when shorted to ground adjustment mode OFF or OPEN when open normal mode IGN ADVANCE Range Min 64 deg Max 63 5 deg Indicates the ignition timing advance for Number 1 cylinder Typical readings range from 5 to 22 BTDC with the engine running at idle IGN ADV
170. cleared by removing the battery ground cable or removing a fuse In some cases however the Auto Code Read function lets the scan tool clear codes automatically Select from the menu and follow the on screen instructions for automatic code clearing NOTE If the vehicle ECM does not receive the code clearing command the Clearing Codes message stays on the screen indefinitely Printing Codes See the manual for your diagnostic tool for information about setting up a printer Manual Code Entry If you are testing a vehicle that can only display codes manually you receive connection instructions from the Connection Instruction screen Select How To Get Codes from the Code Function menu to see on screen instructions about reading manual codes from the vehicle you are testing 10 Operations Code Functions 3 6 6 How to Get Codes Selecting How To Get Codes gives instructions for observing codes manually or automatically depending on the vehicle The on screen instructions are supplemented in the manufacturer specific chapters of this manual 3 6 7 Reviewing Codes The Review Codes selection is only available after the scan tool has received codes from manual code entry Selecting Review Codes displays a screen that lists all codes in memory 11 This chapter contains information for testing Acura vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Acura systems may be available fo
171. connector locations 19 1992 2001 engine connector locations 13 1996 2001 transmission connector locations 20 Isuzu 80 Testing Antilock Brake System ABS 88 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 88 Manual Code Reading 90 Clearing Codes 93 Code Type 02 91 Code Type 05a 92 RWAL ABS Code Type 90 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 80 Clearing Codes 87 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 80 Field Service Functional Tests 88 Manual Code Reading Engine 86 Road Test No C amp D 87 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 93 Manual Code Reading 94 Clearing Codes 97 Code Type 02a 94 Code Type 03 96 Testing Transfer Case and Body Control Module BCM 97 troubleshooting 525 J Justy 1987 D check procedure 174 1987 Read Memory and D Check connectors 170 1988 1990 Read Memory and D Check connectors 171 1988 1991 D check procedure 175 1989 1994 ECVT transmission code reading 183 connector locations 145 K Kia 98 101 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems 98 Code Reading 98 Manual ABS Code Reading 101 L Lancer 2002 2005 connector locations 118 Lancer Sport Back 2004 connector locations 118 Laser 1990 1994 connector locations 34 Index Legacy 1990 Read Memory and D Check connectors 171 1990 1994 connector locations 146 1990 1994 transmission code reading 181 182 Legend 1986 1990 ABS connector locations 22 1986 1990 sedan LED locations 14 1987 1990 coupe transmission connector locatio
172. data movies Manufacturer specific sections feature detailed locations of hard to find connectors and information on manual code reading This manual also includes chapters on data parameters OBD II data parameters and scan tool specific troubleshooting advice The first two sections of this manual overview safety and usage conventions The remainder of this manual is divided into the following chapters e Chapter 3 Operations offers general software operating explanations and procedures Chapters 4 16 offer testing information and procedures for control systems of the following manufacturers Chapter 4 Acura Chapter 5 Chrysler Imports Chapter 6 Daihatsu Chapter 7 Geo Chapter 8 Honda Chapter 9 Hyundai Chapter 10 Isuzu Chapter 11 Kia Chapter 12 Mazda Chapter 13 Mitsubishi Chapter 14 Nissan Infiniti Chapter 15 Subaru Chapter 16 Toyota Lexus Scion e Chapter 17 Generic OBD II Operations provides information about testing in the Generic OBD II Test Mode Chapter 18 Data Parameters provides definitions for data parameters Appendix A Other Software Available lists the other software titles available from Snap on Appendix B Troubleshooting offers advice for troubleshooting scan tool to vehicle communication and other issues e Glossary of Terms lists terms and acronyms used in this manual and in Asian Import manufacturer s literature
173. dent ttv bl a o Da Heec E AL b DE D ge cet EL D ve cues 434 SHIE T GEUTOH SWTT ice ade nent d d e nbi einen 434 ShiftSol1 ShiftSol1 ShiftSolt Fault c eei c d ance Le D e ab La e 435 ShiftSolTFaull zs 2 6 ritieni ie te n en en Aaa nien nee hin en En e hind 513 SIMS 02 ele ieee id ee red eee cae 434 264 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters ShiftSol2 zu Ws 22513 ShiftSol2Fault ShiftSol2Fault ShiftSol 91 eie eie mite uim iut si Meme SOME OLS EE OTT ShiftSol3Fault SITS O14 RET ShiftSol4 ShiftSol4Fault SHMOTGCEO A4XAM et Eoi si serrer Se Se qe te ende eerie terii bere 489 SHMOTGEOG 4XAM iiti ctt t ebbe to C edic tinae e S tr bee dee uc e entiende doen 489 SHORT WAVE HIGEL 2253 e PRI mt eiiim e eR 473 Uc EMI M MM MAD A EM M DUM SHRIFTI aan ET m m SHRTFT11 SHRTFT11 SHRTFT12 SHRTFT12 SHRTFT13 SHRTFT14 ESTEE REPE EATEN cere IDEEN SUGAR T SHRTFT21 SHRTFT21 SHRTFT22 SHRTFT22 SHRTFT23 SHRTFT24 SHRI TS Ooie M LINDE LC DII RE LU DIDI AM M UTRUM SHRTFT31 96 SHRTFT32 SHRTE TA 99 ette e ect b e i Stee O e LT SHRTFTA1 96 AAA
174. detected Mode ON QXREF Range not available Indicates the status of the learned QIDL at IDLE R FUEL LEVEL V Range 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the fuel level in the right tank as voltage and reads as follows About 0 8 V empty tank About 2 5 V full tank R SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission R range switch R WIND DEF SW Range ON OFF Indicates the rear defrost switch status RAD FAN Range ON OFF Indicates the fan control signal RE CVS VALVE Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the return signal of the evaporative canister vent shut solenoid valve It reads ON when the circuit is normal and the solenoid valve is on RE VTEC SOL REL VTEC SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the VTS return signal it reads ON when the circuit is normal and VTS is on An OFF reading indicates a circuit problem 427 Data Parameters Engine Parameters RE VTEC SOL2 Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the VTEC solenoid valve 2 signal it reads ON when the circuit is normal and VTS2 is on An OFF reading indicates a circuit problem REAR O2 HEATERS Range ON OFF Indicates the rear downstream exhaust gas oxygen sensor heater status REDUCED POWER Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates whether the PCM is receiving a signal from the TAC module that a throttle actuator control system fault is occurring it reads e ACTIVE if a fault occurs and the PCM limits the engine power e INACTIVE under nor
175. due to an absence of spark poor fuel metering poor compression or any other cause Typically inputs from the ECT MAF and CKP sensors are required to enable this monitor O2 SENSOR Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates and monitors oxygen sensor switching frequency for degradation and circuit operation O2 HEATER Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates and monitors the oxygen sensor heater circuit for proper operation when heated oxygen sensors are used 474 Data Parameters Occupant Classification OCC Parameters Occupant Classification OCC Parameters This section defines parameters available from the airbag or supplemental restraint system Occupant Classification OCC systems To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page PASSENGER CLASS Range OFF CRS CHILD AF05 AM50 Indicates the passenger classification weight based measurement e fthe value is CRS child restraint system is active e Ifthe value is CHILD under 80 Ibs e If the value is AF05 80 Ibs to 120 Ibs e If the value is AM50 above 120 Ibs SENS RANGE INF Range OK NG Indicates the status of the sensor range information FL SENS RANGE FR SENS RANGE RL SENS RANGE RR SENS RANGE Range OK MAX MIN Indicates the relative weight input to seat sensor e OK sensor range is 38 lbs to 60 Ibs MAX is above 60 105 MIN is lower than 38 105 FL SENS VOLTS FR SENS VOLTS RL
176. ede d p e SENSOR 1 9 IAT SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 9 IAT SENSOR p VAT eta ence Pi nile iniecit nen bet en inh ea Nes aver icant IAT aente eee ea Ase tina cette bodega Da taco tne vdd d LC bd eee Le E C rd ics cp Qd lb Md D FAULT ie a Gili ald a aire evi ed ce IAT DOM e M iin ies rin tn iei ote ie tia n a rai e cns M DLE AIR iiir ete rete teme it mee P e di den ieteb ei eiie 397 IDLE CTRESOL 96 atate edere t cot Hv tice ig ia ned t ae a Ce b etd cvv deed 399 IDEEXEEABN ir nhe en ERR NER Her E e ee 399 IDLE STOP CTRL 999 IDEE SW i nenne ett m ot RS Reb RC ee eter e iin 285 IDLE SW E 359 ic rti E nire eei e RERO e es 359 IDLE TARGET ENTE E 399 e
177. ee rx e VUL CREDE HE 281 AGG Relay M 303 ACG RELAY citate tita ace e det ta a n eed d EHE bd cai ola 342 ACC SEN 281 SW DE iets cane eae pee we dete Pied eee del ee ee 302 ACCEL DEG 96 nni RO re n ten ten Een eh at aet re eia eren e ei 467 ACCEL ENRICH itte tacita ee a taeda ca lv dps tari oed i d eee d d C 342 ACCEL IDE POS uri nte edenda het ea Ati ni aA ee ee ti 342 ACCEL LRN e Aa 342 342 ACCEL LRN VALET Posetio rnt c ere LE E re c LAB EV D HL DUI noe odd t ev ea 342 AGGEL ERN VAL2 ie nete RU REP i ede nee 342 ACCEL POS FROM EFI be 2 378 ACCEL POS SIQ ii en Rare etie Cem eibi Bert e HE P eos 281 96 ecetescatacose vetere tate ee ip led Fonte ta De cd ede i d Hi a Da C e teda i deoa 344 AGGEL POS1 95 urn nain t o Erie P THREE HE DEA Uri e de ep epu eet 342 1 s 467 51 teni ri ete erit eet sain e E EE 343 AGCEL POS 96 carter sacos vage t ce co a d deg Cav ded b do d heed oa Hot eel aren tva 344 ACCEL 52 ACCEL 52
178. has occurred in the MIL circuit MISFIRE MISFire Range YES NO Indicates the accumulated misfires for CSF method MISFIRE CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the misfire monitor MISFIRE CYCLES Range 0 to 100 Indicates the number of engine cycles that were analyzed for misfire data This is a count of the misfire tests during 200 crankshaft revolutions MISFIRE CYCLE COUNTS MISS CYCLE Range 0 to 2000 Indicates the misfire cycle counter This counts the number of TDC occurrences in each 1000 engine rotations It returns to zero at 2000 counts with a 4 cylinder engine and returns to zero at 3000 counts on a 6 cylinder engine MISFIRE CYL 1 MISFIRE CYL 2 MISFIRE CYL 3 MISFIRE CYL 4 MISFIRE CYL 5 MISFIRE CYL 6 MISFIRE CYL 7 MISFIRE CYL 8 Range 0 to 255 Indicates the number of possible misfires detected on each cylinder during the last 200 cylinder firing events These readings normally display some activity but the activity should be fairly equal for all cylinders MISFIRE ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the misfire monitor 416 Data Parameters Engine Parameters MISFIRE LOAD g sec Range Min 0 g rev Max 3 98 g rev Indicates engine load for first misfire range 0 g rev Misfire 0 MISFIRE MARGIN Range 100 to 99 2296 Indicates the misfire detecting margin used during monitoring A reading of 30 is normal MISFIRE MONITOR Range NOT AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Indicates the misfi
179. indicates a situation which if not avoided may result in damage to the test equipment or vehicle Example IMPORTANT To avoid incorrect TPS adjustment or component damage be sure to follow the on screen instructions Refer to a vehicle service manual for complete test or adjustment procedures Introduction The Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS allows you to test multiple vehicle systems engine transmission ABS and airbag SRS The functional and component tests offered by the software allow for simplified diagnostics and troubleshooting The Asian Import VCS establishes a data link between the scan tool and the electronic control systems of the vehicle being serviced This data link allows you to view diagnostic trouble codes DTCs serial data and freeze frame information available from the electronic control module ECM On models with bi directional communication the VCS also lets you perform certain system and component tests and provides the ability to switch off the malfunction indicator lamp MIL after repairs are made The amount and type of information and tests available with the Asian Import VCS varies by the year make model and equipment options of the test vehicle With the software you can interpret electronic control module trouble codes read input and output signals test specific systems and components check the operation of certain actuators solenoids valves and relays and record and view
180. individual cylinder banks LT TRM AVG1 LT TRM AVG2 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the average of all long term fuel trim cells as percentage The short term fuel trim cells are rated for the amount of which they are used For example an idle cell is rated higher than a wide open cell If a fueling malfunction occurs in the idle cell and the wide open cell the average would be more affected by the idle cell than the wide open cell A low value indicates that the fuel system is rich and fuel delivery is being reduced A high value indicates that a lean condition exists and the PCM compensates by adding fuel When the average of the cells reach a predetermined high or low a fuel trim DTC sets LUSEL SOL MON Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the torque converter lock up ON when lock up OFF when no lock up LUSEL SOL OUT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the lock up select solenoid valve ON when selector lever is in P and positions e When OFF wait for at least 5 seconds with the selector lever R D S and L positions M SHAFT SPD RPM MAINSHAFT SPD RPM Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the transmission mainshaft speed sensor signal It should read ON whenever the mainshaft is turning M T SHIFT LOCK Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the M T shift lock relay It indicates ON when the ECM commands the shift lock relay to turn on M DPFE Range
181. input or output circuit that is not exclusively monitored by another monitor system A malfunction can be a short an open or an out of range value This monitor is enabled shortly after the engine is started However some individual components may not immediately be available for monitoring EGR SYS Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates the EGR system Tests the integrity and flow characteristics of the EGR system This monitor is enabled during EGR system operation after certain base engine operating conditions are satisfied Inputs from the ECT IAT TP and CKP sensors are required to enable the EGR monitor EVAP SYS Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates the EVAP system Checks the function of EVAP components and the ability of the system to flow fuel vapor hydrocarbons to the engine The sequence of events required to enable this monitor vary depending on the EVAP system components FUEL SYS Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates and monitors the adaptive fuel control system and determines when a learned value exceeds a specified threshold Inputs from the ECT IAT and MAF or MAP sensors are required to enable this monitor HEATED CAT Range READY NOT DONE N A No description available 473 Data Parameters OBD II Readiness Monitors MISFIRE Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates and monitors engine misfire and designates by DTC the specific cylinder in which a misfire occurs Misfire is a lack of combustion Which may be
182. is available and reads OFF when not available Rewipe Time Range 3 4 Displays the interval timing for the automatic windshield wiper system in seconds RF AJAR Range Indicates the right front door ajar status RF ID Range Indicates the right front tire transmitter identifier RF LRN Range Indicates the right front learn status RF MES Range Indicates the right front measure status RF NORM Range Indicates the right front normal status RF PSI Range Indicates the right front tire pressure status RF REC Range Indicates the right front transmit received after learn RFAWAKE Range Indicates the right front awake status RFDR SW Range Indicates the right front door status RFIDPRG Range Indicates the right front sensor programmed RFLOWBAT Range Indicates the right front low battery status 326 OPEN CLSD actual ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE actual YES NO YES NO CLSD AJAR YES NO LOW OK Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters RHTURN IND Turn Right Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the turn indicator switch Reads ON when the switch is positioned to operate the right hand indicators reads OFF at all other times Right Turn Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the turn signal switch status reads ON when the switch is in the right turn position RR AJAR Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the right re
183. is based on transmission temperature and will change states during a 3 2 downshift to regulate the appropriate pressure The commanded state of the solenoid should change with an increase of throttle at approximately 30 MPH 48 MPH 3 2 TIME Range ON OFF Indicates the 3 2 timing solenoid valve 3 2 TIMING SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the 3 2 timing solenoid valve 3RD GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH 3rd PRESSURE SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the 3rd gear pressure switch Reads ON when the transmission is operating in 3rd gear it reads OFF at all other times 4 3 DOWNSHIFT Range YES NO Indicates whether the ECM has recognized the 4 3 downshift it reads ON during a recognized a 4 3 downshift which should unlock the torque converter clutch on some models When ON related parameters should be 4 3 DOWNSHIFT reads YES TCC COMMAND reads OFF 4TH GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module 4th PRESSURE SWITCH 4th PRESSURE SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the 4th gear pressure switch Reads ON when the transmission is operating in 4th gear it reads OFF at all other times 4WDCPWMOU Range ON OFF FAIL B Indicates the 4WD clutch PWM status 4WDCPWMST Range variable Indicates the 4WD clutch PWM status 4WDMODE_L Range ON OFF Indicates the 4x4 low mode 490 Data Parameters Transmission Paramet
184. is de energized to remove heat from the air fuel mixture The EFE system is used on carbureted engines to preheat the incoming air fuel mixture for a cold engine The EFE system may be a vacuum operated manifold heat control valve or an electric grid heater under the carburetor This parameter is an output signal from the ECM only It does not indicate whether the EFE System has responded EGR COMMAND EGR SOLENOID EGR SYS EGR SYSTEM Range ON OFF Indicates whether the ECM has commanded the EGR vacuum solenoid or vacuum switching valve VSV to open should read ON when the solenoid has received a signal to energize open a vacuum line and apply vacuum to the EGR valve e OFF when the solenoid has been de energized to cut off EGR vacuum Typically readings are OFF in park or neutral at idle or in open loop and ON at cruising speed in closed loop These are output signals only The reading does not indicate whether the solenoid or valve responded or whether the EGR valve actually opened 372 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EGR ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the EGR monitor EGR L COM EGR V L COMMAND Range not available Indicates the ECM command for EGR valve lift EGR LIFT Range not available Indicates the actual EGR valve lift subtracted from zero lift which is learned from the EGR valve life sensor EGR LIFT SENSOR EGR VLS Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates voltage changes in proportion to EGR
185. is operating at high altitude it reads YES when the ECM is controlling the engine for high altitude operation with low barometric pressure On some fuel injected vehicles the ECM compares the throttle position mass airflow and RPM readings to determine engine load If the throttle is open more than expected for a given load the ECM assumes it is operating at high altitude and adjusts fuel metering accordingly Reads YES during high altitude operation HIGH BATTERY Range YES NO Indicates the vehicle battery state reads NO under normal conditions and YES when battery voltage is higher than specifications On most vehicles a high battery voltage condition causes the ECM to disable the output solenoids to protect the ECM from high current HO2 SNSR 1 mV HO2 SNSR 2 mV Range 0 to 1000 mV Indicates heated oxygen sensor HO2S output as millivolts Sensor 1 is upstream closest to the engine and HO2S 2 is downstream after the converter Sensor 1 voltage should fluctuate constantly from about 50 mV lean exhaust to 800 mV rich exhaust during closed loop operation Sensor 2 voltage fluctuates slowly over a longer period of time due to the oxygen storage capability of an efficiently operating catalyst If the voltage fluctuates rapidly on a hot catalyst low catalyst efficiency may be the cause HO2S mA HO2S S1 mA Range 8 89 to 8 89 mA Indicates heated oxygen sensor HO2S output as milliamperes Negative value
186. jump the DLC from the backside while the scanner is connected to the DLC Connect Jump Wire Between Terminals 1 and 12 Figure 8 5 Data connector from the wire side Honda numbering not the same as SAE 56 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 8 1 3 Code Type For those systems that rely on manual code reading you must interpret a DTC from a flashing indicator lamp The code flash sequence varies by model and system The scanner therefore refers you to a certain code type i e COPE TYPE 04 Code type is a specific labeling system that identifies the appropriate section in this manual for each subsystem ECM Locations 1985 to 1991 ECM LED Figure 8 6 Common ECM and LED locations Table 8 2 Common ECM and LED locations VEHICLE YEAR LOCATION Accord LXI 1986 89 1 Under seat 1985 87 4 Under seat Civic 1988 91 2 Under carpet CRX 1985 87 4 Under seat 1985 87 5 Under left rear ashtray Prelude 1988 91 2 Under carpet 57 Honda Testing Engine and Transmission Systems C d You may need to push the I p seat forward and open the 1 LED inspection cover 4 1 Ix ss Ns aN A S 5 1 Remove ashtray to see LED flash 2 ECM Figure 8 7 Sample ECM locations 1 Service Check connector 2 Jump wire Figure 8 8 1990 later Accord and Prelude Service Check connector locations 1 White DLC
187. latched Seat Mem 1 Sw Seat Mem 2 Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the indicated seat memory switches Reads ON when the indicated switch is activated reads OFF at all other times Seat Mem Set Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the indicated seat memory set switch reads ON when the seat memory Switch is activated reads OFF at all other times Sensitivity Range 40 20 NORM 20 40 Displays the sensitivity setting Shift position N Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the transmission is in neutral range reads ON when in neutral and OFF at all other times Shift position P Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the transmission is in park range reads ON when in park and OFF at all other times Shift position R Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the transmission is in reverse range reads ON when in reverse and OFF at all other times Sport A T Sw Range ON OFF Displays the on off status of the electronically controlled transmission sport mode switch Reads ON when the switch is active and reads OFF at all other times When active the shift pattern is altered to delay upshifts and quicken throttle downshifts Speed Mode Range ON OFF Displays the speed mode status Reads ON when speed mode is available and OFF when speed mode is not available SPR_ID Range actual Indicates the spare tire transmitter identifier 328 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Para
188. main lines Twisted pair data line style is used to reduce interference on the circuits T l l l X X o o o o e S S S S m m m m 2 2 2 lt lt lt lt o o CAN L Line CAN H Main Line CAN L Main Line CAN H Main Line Termination Termination Circuit Circuit Figure 14 11 Sample CAN schematic Based on the current applied the termination circuit produces an electrical potential difference between the data lines This potential difference is what the ECMs on the CAN system use to transmit and receive data 137 Nissan and Infiniti Refer to the vehicle equipment identification decal on the vehicle to determine which type of CAN system is used on the test vehicle Also verify that the specified equipment is actually installed on the vehicle A specific ECM either transmits a signal to or receives a signal from the CAN network for each data parameter Use the following tables to determine if a signal is transmitted or received by an Testing Controller Area Network CAN Systems Table 14 6 Acronym and abbreviation identification Item Description ABS Antilock brake traction control and or vehicle dynamic control module BCM Body control module DLC Data link connector ECM Engine control module IPDM E Intelligent power distribution module engine room M amp A Unified meter and A C amplifier module R Rece
189. memory either through automatic code reading or manual code entry Operations Code Functions Select Code Functions Auto Code Select Auto Activate Vehicle Scan Tool Reads Read Code Read Code Output And Tags Codes No Manual Code Activate Vehicle No Select Manual Code Other Test Functions Use Scan Tool for 9 Code Definitions Fix the Problem Clear Codes Reset Ecm Re check for Codes Figure 3 15 Basic Code Functions Auto Code Read and Manual Code Entry 3 6 1 Reading Different Code Types Depending on the vehicle the diagnostic connector may have automatic code reading or you may have to read codes by observing a flashing lamp LEDs After you enter the vehicle ID the scan tool tells you which type of system is on the vehicle you are testing For vehicles with diagnostic connectors that have automatic code reading Auto Code Read connection instructions for code reading display at the end of the vehicle ID sequence Instructions for activating flash codes are available by selecting How To Get Codes Flash Codes Different types of code pulse patterns are used by different manufacturers for different models When a vehicle has indicator lamps LEDs that flash trouble codes the scan tool gives you the code type used for the vehicle you are testing and brief description of the code flashing pattern Five general code patterns are used Straight Count flashes the lamp or LED the number of times equal to the
190. modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Combi Sw Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the combination switch ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com D Door Com P Door Com RR Door Com RL Door Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the indicated D driver P passenger RR rear right RL rear left door ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com D Door Mirr Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the driver side mirror ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com D Door Mtr Com P Door Mtr Com RR Door Mtr Com RL Door Mtr Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the indicated D driver P passenger RR rear right RL rear left power window regulator ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC 304 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Com D Seat Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between t
191. monitor EVAP PC DUTY Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the evaporative purge control solenoid valve This indicates the drive percentage of the purge control solenoid valve when on 378 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EVAP PC SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the evaporative purge cut solenoid valve The canister purging is accomplished by drawing fresh air through the canister and into a port on the throttle body when then solenoid is OFF EVAP PF SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the evaporative purge flow switch This is the vacuum switch that detects EVAP purge line failure The switch turns on when vacuum exists EVAP PRES V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the pressure in the evaporative emissions EVAP purge line As EVAP pressure increases sensor voltage increases The ECM uses this signal to detect pressure leaks and faulty components EVAP PURGE Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the pulse width modulated duty cycle applied to the EVAP purge valve by the PCM At 100 the valve should be fully open to purge the system EVAP PURG V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the evaporative emission canister purge valve voltage EVAP SOLENOID PURGE VSV PURGE SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command status for the vacuum switching valve VSV or solenoid that controls the evaporative emission EVAP purge valve reads ON when the system is purging EVAP TST Range PASS FAIL
192. must be serviced Certain codes such as those for the wheel speed sensors and the pump motor only set while the vehicle is being driven P To clear the codes 1 Select Clear Codes A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue The self test initiated screen displays 3 When the test finishes a codes cleared screen displays Clearing Code Memory The scan tool retains codes in its memory The scan tool memory not vehicle memory can be cleared using any of the following methods e Repeat the test which overwrites the previous code e Select a different system for testing Enter a new vehicle ID Review Codes Return to the service code menu from the KOEO self test or memory code test and Review Codes displays as a selection When this selection is available it indicates recorded codes are in scan tool memory from either or both tests To review codes 1 Select Review Codes A code list similar to the lists displayed at the end of the self tests displays 2 Fixthe problems in the order listed Also remember these important points about the review codes list Review all codes until end of list appears The scan tool saves codes from the most recent test for display under review codes a re test codes from the previous test are replaced with a new list Always write down continuous memory codes after any test If MEMORY CODES was se
193. not the vehicle is in motion reads STOP or OFF when the vehicle is at rest and RUN or ON while running or moving WARN 1 Range actual Indicates the TPMS last warning event 1 Transmitter ID WARN 2 Range actual Indicates the TPMS last warning event 2 Transmitter ID WARN 3 Range actual Indicates the TPMS last warning event 3 Transmitter ID WARN 4 Range actual Indicates the TPMS last warning event 4 Transmitter ID WARN 5 Range actual Indicates the TPMS last warning event 5 Transmitter ID Warn By Glass Snsr Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the glass breakage sensor of the alarm system Reads ON when the sensor detects breaking glass reads OFF at all other times 331 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Warn By Horn Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the warning by horn system Reads ON when the system is active and the horn sounds when the alarm is triggered reads OFF when the horn alarm is disabled WASH FRT Range ON OFF Indicates the front washer switch status WASHPUMP Range ON OFF Indicates the washer pump status WASHRLY Range ON OFF Indicates the washer relay status WIP Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the availability of power to the windshield wiper switch Reading should be ON whenever the ignition is switched on and OFF when the ignition is off WIP Sw 1 WIP Sw C1 WIP Sw 2S WIP Sw SM Range ON OFF Indicates th
194. of the lighting control rheostat 478 Data Parameters Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters LOW FUEL LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the low fuel warning indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC LOW WASHER FLUID Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the state of the low washer fluid switch input as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC A closed switch indicates the fluid level is low and is displayed as CLSD MONITORED COOLANT TEMP Range 40 to 419 or 40 to 215 C Indicates the instrument panel cluster IPC monitored coolant temperature data as provided by the PCM via serial data communication This value may differ slightly from the displayed coolant temperature MONITORED FUEL LEVEL Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the instrument panel cluster IPC monitored fuel level as provided by the PCM via serial data communication This value may differ slightly from the displayed fuel level MONITORED OIL PRESSURE Range 0 to 99 psi or 0 to 682 kPa Indicates the instrument panel cluster IPC monitored oil pressure as provided by the PCM via serial data communication This value may differ slightly from the displayed oil pressure ODOMETR Range actual Indicates the odometer reading Odo Trip Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the odometer trip switch OIL P L IC Range OFF ON Oil pressure low indicator status P DR Range CLSD AJAR Passenger door status
195. on LPS LPSB Range 0 to 100 Indicates the line pressure solenoid percentage or the line pressure solenoid B percentage LPS A Range 0 0to 5 0A Indicates the line pressure solenoid 503 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters LRB Range 0 to 100 There is no additional information available for this parameter MAF V MAF MASS AIR V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates mass air flow MAINSHAFT SPEED KPH MPH Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the vehicle speed based on the mainshaft speed which is determined by the signal of the counterspeed sensor MANUAL MODE INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates whether the shift selector lever is operating in the manual mode position it reads ON when in manual mode MEAS SSC A Range 0 0 to 5 0A Indicates the measured current shift solenoid C MEAS SSD A Range 0 0 5 0 A Indicates the measured current shift solenoid D MEAS SSE A Range 0 0 to 5 0A Indicates the measured current shift solenoid E MEAS SSF A Range 0 0 5 0 Indicates measured current shift solenoid MIL Range ON OFF Indicates the malfunction indicator lamp MLN SW Range ON OFF Indicates whether the throttle plate is open MNL SW Range ON OFF Indicates the manual range switch MTSW Range AT MT Indicates manual trans auto trans discrimination signal N INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the N indicator lamp on t
196. on engine off tests except for the injector and timing tests which are explained in Injector Tests Engine Running Only Selecting Actuator Tests for these vehicles displays a list of available tests The available tests vary by year and model During testing you must monitor the selected actuator with a voltmeter ammeter or by listening for actuator activation A completed test does not mean that the actuator is operating The scan tool only monitors the engine control module ECM commands to the actuator Select an actuator test and the scan tool commands the ECM to activate it About 5 seconds later the engine controller deactivates the actuator NOTE All actuator tests except for injector tests must be performed with the key on and engine off KOEO If you select a KOEO test with the engine running a test rejected message displays Injector Tests Engine Running Only The injector tests available from the actuator test menu are performed with the key on and engine running KOER and are available on most pre OBD II vehicles The number of injector tests available varies by the number of cylinders and type of fuel injection system a 4 cylinder MPI system has four tests a six cylinder system has six When you select an injector test the scan tool commands the ECM to disable the selected injector About 5 seconds later the ECM stops the test and the injector is enabled 5 1 6 EVAP Monitoring Test The EVAP Monitori
197. on the instrument cluster Reads ON when the lamp is lit and reads OFF at all other times Optical Sensor V Range 0 00 to 5 00 V Indicates the optical sensor signal voltage which varies with the amount of ambient light Reads 0 00 V in darkness and 4 50 to 5 00 in full light Open Door Warning Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the open door warning system Reads ON when the system is active a door is open and reads OFF at all other times P W Lock Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the power window lock switch Reads ON when the lock feature is active and reads OFF when released PARK LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the parking lamps status PARK SW Range ON OFF Indicates the park light switch status PARK BRAKE SWITCH Range RELEASE SET Park Brake Sw Parking Brake Sw PKBS Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the parking brake Reads SET or ON when the switch is closed park brake is engaged Reads RELEASE or OFF when the parking brake is released 323 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters The BCM uses this data in controlling the parking brake indicator the reminder chime feature and the DRL system PARK LAMP SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the park lamp switch signal circuit status A closed switch is displayed as ON Passing Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the lamp switch reads ON when Passing position is selected Passive Mode Range ON OFF D
198. or relay it reads ON when the clutch is engaged e OFF when the clutch is disengaged Some vehicles provide both the A C REQUEST and the A C CLUTCH parameters They should cycle together both ON or both OFF unless the ECM is overriding the instrument panel control Others models have an A C REQUEST parameter but do not monitor A C CLUTCH feedback A C COMP SW Range LO NORM Indicates the state of the A C compressor cycling switch Readings should be e LO when pressure is low NORM when pressure is normal The A C compressor cycling switch is normally closed A C CUT A C CUT SIG A C SIG Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A C cut signal from the PCM to the A C control assembly Reads ON only when the PCM is actively disabling the A C compressor in order to prevent overloading the engine during a heavy load operation A C ENABLED Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the air conditioning switch A C HI SIDE psi A C PRESS psi A C PRESS kPa Range 25 to 460 psi or 170 to 3170 kPa Indicates the PCM calculated refrigerant pressure based on the voltage signal from the A C high side pressure sensor The value reflects the load that the A C compressor is placing on the engine Typically readings are slightly low when pressure is decreasing and slightly high when pressure is increasing The value is used to adjust idle and control the cooling fans A C IDLE UP VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command
199. parameters are displayed as a measured value in the appropriate units Voltage pressure temperature time and speed parameters are examples of analog values The scan tool displays them as numbers that vary through a range of values in units such as pounds per square inch psi kilopascal kPa degrees Celsius C degrees Fahrenheit F kilometers per hour KPH or miles per hour MPH Some data parameters display in numbers that range from 0 to 100 0 to 255 or 0 to 1800 These ranges are used because in each case it is the maximum number range that the control module transmits for a given parameter However many parameter readings never reach the highest possible number For example you never see a vehicle speed parameter reading of 255 MPH The maximum range of a parameter often varies by year model and engine On these applications the word variable appears in the range heading but typical sampled values observed under actual test conditions are in the parameter description when available Parameters may also be identified as input signals or output commands Input or feedback parameters are signals from various sensors and switches to the electronic control module ECM They may display as analog or discrete values depending on the input device type e Output parameters are commands that the ECM transmits to various actuators such as solenoids and fuel injectors They are displayed as discrete parameters anal
200. percentage current air flow divided by peak air flow indicates the capacity of the engine load Normal readings at idle are 10 to 35 CMP 1 NO PULSE CMP 2 NO PULSE CMP A NO PULSE CMP B NO PULSE CMP NO PULSE COUNTS Range not available Indicates the camshaft position CMP sensor disappearance counter Counts CMP NOISE 1 CMP NOISE 2 CMP A NOISE CMP B NOISE Range not available Indicates the camshaft position CMP 1 or 2 noise counter This counter detects the noise compared with CKP sensor 1 or 2 CMP CTRL Range 0 to 180 Indicates the camshaft position sensor control command The ECU calculates the target angle of the camshaft and uses it to regulate the VTC control valve solenoid CMP CTRL Range 0 to 180 Indicates the camshaft position sensor control in degrees which is the cam angle controlled by the camshaft actuator CMP RESYNCS Range 0 to 255 Indicates a count of the number of times the PCM had to synchronize the camshaft position CMP sensor CMP SENSOR RPM Range variable Indicates the engine speed based on the signal from the camshaft position CKP sensor CMP FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the camshaft position sensor status CoastCISol Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command to the coast clutch solenoid which allows engine braking in third gear when fourth gear is enabled by the transmission control switch Reads ON when the coast clutch solenoid is activated
201. pressure TC SLIP RPM Range not available Indicates the torque converter slip actual TCC BRAKE SW Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the status of the torque converter clutch TCC brake switch This is a normally closed 2 pole switch and may be equipped with a vacuum port The TCC brake switch supplies ignition voltage to the TCC and a feedback signal to the PCM When the brake pedal is pressed the Switch opens ignition voltage is removed from the TCC and the PCM receives a feedback signal On models with cruise control the TCC brake switch is also used to vent the cruise control servo to atmosphere Reads OPEN when the brake pedal is applied switch open to disengage the torque converter clutch and cruise control and CLSD when the brake pedal is released switch closed TCC COMMAND TCCC TCC PWM ENABLED TCC SOLENOID Range ON OFF TCC ENABLED Range YES NO Indicates the ECM command to the torque converter clutch TCC Reads ON or YES when the ECM commands the TCC to engage and OFF or NO when the TCC is commanded off TCC engagement lockup depends on gear selection speed engine temperature and throttle position The ECM grounds one side of the circuit that energizes the TCC solenoid In addition the circuit must also be completed by various transmission speed and brake switches to open the transmission hydraulic line and engage the TCC TCC DUTY Range 0 to 100 Indicates the commanded duty cycle of the TCC so
202. problem Computer or output circuit fault Transmission control problem Co By The final characters in the DTC tell you the conditions that triggered the code Different sensors actuators and circuits are assigned blocks of numbers and the lowest number in the block indicates a general malfunction This is the generic DTC Higher numbers in the assigned block called enhanced codes provide more specific information such as low or high voltage slow response or an out of range signal Code Clearing The scan tool can clear trouble codes and other saved data from PCM memory P To clear the codes 1 Select 04 Clear Emissions Related Data from the Select Service menu A confirmation screen displays 2 Selecting erases all codes freeze frame data and test results from PCM memory Follow the on screen prompts to clear the data and return to the menu If the code clearing operation fails for any reason the previous codes reappear If this occurs repeat the Clear Codes operation O2 Monitors This selection lets you view various 02S signal response characteristics There are two different monitors one for pre converter sensors and one for post converter sensors The PCM looks for three main things from the pre converter oxygen sensor e Maximum voltage e Minimum voltage e Switching rate The PCM looks for the sensor signal to rise above 600 millivolts fall below 300 millivolts an
203. range The value is the turbine speed divided by the output speed in D5 range with the TCC locked GEN LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates the generator warning light GEN OUT V Range to 18 V Indicates the generator output voltage GEN 6 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the generator field current control duty signal HC PRES SW Range ON OFF Indicates the high clutch pressure switch HC HC_SOL Range 0 to 100 Indicates the high clutch solenoid HEADLIGHT SW Range ON OFF Indicates the headlight switch HI CLUTCH Range 0 to 100 Indicates the high clutch solenoid HI PS PRESSURE Range ON OFF Indicates the power steering pressure switch HIGH GEAR Range YES NO Indicates whether the high gear contacts in the transmission are open or closed it reads YES when the contacts are closed HOLD LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission control indicator hold light 500 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters HOLD SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the overdrive cancel switch hold switch HOT MODE Range ON OFF NOTE The temperature values stated are approximate and vary by transmission application and calibration Indicates hot mode status Reads ON when the transmission is operating in hot mode The transmission enters hot mode operation if the transmission fluid temperature exceed 266 F 130 C and has not cooled to 248 F 120 C for more than 5 seconds During hot mode
204. rr erre vet Entry amp Start oi Cte eie ta Deed ba OE Dc E AU EO gy sed c d eed oves Com FL Seat A C Com FR Seat A C Gom Master SW ih reete tte hee ibn wn ete etie nre dee Aaa ohn ead Mayday G Way sr ctas cate ce Heb e c ar tl dc e D e Pede ad de e d dad Dada Gomi Mayday 0 2205 iro nn en nice nte eon ener enfin 227 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Com Park Assist 308 Com P Door Mtr Com P Seabis eor td en te vi Ren ie ee en rh ITO HERE eee Com PWE B DOr e ye Leo nre P O Com RL Door Mtr Com RL Door Com RR Door Mtr GomRR DOOf eet Hered ied rr EH Rn EO E PH ee P rra ier Rr Com S W Pad Sw Gom Slide ROOF xara t Et ne een n ere ODE s M P COM Tilt amp Tele HS REI Rer tein eater etre idi eden ire Gee id ette eee tei ettet COM Tire Pressure s eene tI Id I D IRE RES ROMAN EE EYE Uo Ie MI edes UM E eU D dus 309 eene EI 365 COMMEVAP 365 GOMMTAC 96 1 2 an ei eere rre he EE Het rot vere ep eerie ette rentre e EY 365 Commi nication GTR Gonsole nee tr t bt
205. short flashes and 4 wheel drive 4WD vehicles have eleven short flashes The short flashes represent code numbers 1 through 10 or 11 A long 0 6 second flash indicates a fault at that position For example Short Short Short Short Long Short Short Short Short Short Short indicates Code 5 because the fifth flash is long If no codes are present all flashes are short 0 1 second The code is followed by a 2 5 second pause and a 2 second flash then the pattern repeats 1 1 1 0 6 Sec SEDI M Only 4WD Code 5 Only Figure 15 46 Subaru Code Type 08b Table 15 12 Subaru Code Type 08b Pattern Long flash Read codes on POWER lamp on instrument panel Start codes by Follow the appropriate Subaru procedure When done Clear codes according to the Subaru procedure 10 or 11 short flashes is pass code 178 Subaru Testing Engine Systems Code Type 08c The ABS light signals a Start Code consisting of a 1 2 second flash and 0 3 flash separated by a 0 3 second pause Figure 15 47 Then the light flashes any stored codes Each code consists of long and short flashes separated by a 0 3 second pause The total number of long flashes represent the 10s or tenth place digit and the total number of short flashes represents the 1s or first place digit A 1 0 second pause follows each code After all codes flash the Start Code repeats This sequence repeats for up to five minutes
206. solenoid COUNTERSHAFT SPEED km h MPH Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the vehicle speed based on the countershaft speed which is determined by the signal of the counterspeed sensor COUNTERSHAFT SPEED RPM Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the rotational speed of the countershaft which is based on the signal form the counterspeed sensor CPP SW Range DEPRESSED RELEASED Indicates the clutch pedal position switch 495 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters CURRENT GEAR Range 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH or CREEP GEAR Range 1 23 4 Indicates the gear the transmission is currently operating in On some models a 1 value can be either reverse drive or first gear If the transmission is between gears CREEP or may display can also indicate an invalid signal is being received D INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the D indicator lamp on the instrument panel It should only read ON when the D position lamp is lighted D POS SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the drive position switch It reads ON when the switch contacts are closed and the vehicle is in drive D SWITCH Range actual Indicates the transmission D range switch D3 INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the indicator lamp on the instrument panel It should only read ON when the D3 position lamp is lighted D3 SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the D3 switch It reads ON only wh
207. status of the cylinder head temperature indicator lamp CHTIL and should only read ON if the lamp is on CHTIL FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the cylinder head temperature indicator lamp status CKP A NO PULSE CKP B NO PULSE CKP NO PULSE Range 0 to 255 Indicates the crankshaft position sensor A or B disappearance counter Counts CKP A NOISE CKP B NOISE CKP NOISE Range 0 to 255 Indicates the crankshaft position sensor A or B noise counter Counts CKP RESYNCS Range 0 to 255 Indicates a count of the number of times the PCM had to synchronize the crankshaft position CKP sensor CKP SENSOR RPM Range variable Indicates the engine speed based on the signal from the crankshaft position CKP sensor CLEAR FLOOD Range YES NO Indicates whether the ECM is operating in clear flood mode and only reads YES when clear flood is active On many fuel injected engines the ECM responds to engine cranking with a wide open throttle by commanding a clear flood mode which provides a very lean air fuel mixture to help clear a flooded engine CLR DIST Range actual Indicates the distance since the diagnostic trouble codes were cleared 361 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CLUTCH SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the clutch pedal position switch it reads ON when the clutch pedal is depressed and the switch is electrically closed CLV Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the PCM calculated load value This
208. status of the fuel temperature sensor on the fuel rail This indicates the temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail FTP SENSOR FTP SNSR Range variable Indicates the status of the fuel tank pressure sensor on the fuel tank junction box as voltage or pressure With no tank pressure fuel fill cap open to atmosphere reading should be e 0 6 kPa 4 5 mmHg 0 2 inHg e 2 3V to 2 7V Minimum and maximum readings are e 8 3 kPa to 8 3 kPa 62 mmHg to 62 mmHg 2 5 inHg to 2 5 inHg e 0 0V to 5 0V FTP V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the fuel tank pressure transducer voltage FTP FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a fuel tank pressure transducer fault FTT SENSOR C F V Range variable Indicates the temperature of the fuel in the fuel tank based on the fuel tank temperature sensor signal The sensor is on the fuel tank junction box FUEL CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the fuel system monitor FUEL CUT Range ON OFF Indicates whether the PCM is commanding the fuel injectors to turn off It reads ON when the command is cut fuel injectors off and OFF at all other times FUEL CUT DECEL FUEL CUTOFF SOL Range ON OFF Indicates whether the PCM is commanding the fuel injectors to turn off due to a deceleration condition It reads ON when the ECM energizes the solenoid to open the fuel line for normal delivery OFF when the ECM de energizes the solenoid to close the fuel line a
209. sub code Read codes on Red LED on antilock brake controller Start codes by Turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Only one code displays at a time except on some late model cars After repairs clear codes and test drive then check for other codes 4 4 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Testing Acura supplemental restraint systems SRS or airbag systems includes SRS Main Menu on page 28 Manual Code Reading SRS on page 29 Code Clearing SRS Codes on page 31 4 4 1 SRS Main Menu After selecting SRS from the System Selection menu the Main Menu SRS displays Selections vary by model and year Codes and Data Menu When Codes and Data Menu is selected a menu with the following choices displays Data No Codes begins communication with the SRS module and displays data parameters e Codes Only gathers and displays SRS trouble codes Clear Codes clears SRS memory codes from the SRS ECM memory Review Codes allows you to view codes This menu item appears only after code gathering Print Codes allows you to print codes This menu item appears only after code gathering 28 4 4 2 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Data No Codes This section has information on viewing SRS data using the scan tool To enter and exit SRS data 1 Enter in the vehicle ID 2 Turn the ignition on 3 Select Data No Co
210. system TCS TRACTION SIGNAL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the traction control system TCS and reads ON when TCS is on TPCT TPCT V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the lowest closed throttle voltage TPCT V Range not available Indicates the most recent throttle position TP sensor voltage at closed throttle throttle position closed throttle TPS Range 0 to 100 Indicates the throttle position TPS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the throttle position sensor signal voltage 446 Data Parameters Engine Parameters TQR ECT Range ON OFF Indicates the torque reduction execution signal TR V Range 0 0 to 1 5 V Indicates the transmission signal return voltage measured at PCM pin 64 Voltage varies by what gear the transmission is operating in Table 18 7 TR V voltage Gear Voltage Gear Voltage Park 0 0V Overdrive 1 5V Reverse 1 5V Manual 2 0 0 V Neutral 1 5V Manual 1 00 Readings vary by 0 3V TRIP Range YES NO Indicates whether a trip has occurred A trip is a complete ignition on engine run ignition off cycle that tests all components and systems on an OBD II vehicle TRIP CounT TRIP CNT Range 0 to 255 Indicates the number of OBD II drive cycles completed since the last DTC P1000 monitor readiness set TRIP SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the trip reset switch TrnCtrlindLamp Range ON OFF Indica
211. the immobilizer module allows ECM to start the engine IMRC Range ON OFF Indicates the intake manifold runner control IMRC MON SW Range ON OFF Indicates the intake manifold runner control monitor IMRC POS SENSOR IMRC VP SENSOR V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the intake manifold runner control solenoid valve position sensor signal voltage IMRC SOL IMRC SOL VLV Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the intake manifold runner control solenoid valve IMRC VLV CMD IMT IMRC VLV CMD Range OPEN CLOSE Indicates the PCM command to the intake manifold runner control solenoid valve position switch It should read CLOSE at low engine speed IMT IMRC VALVE SW IMT IMRC VLV SWT IMT VLV SW Range OPEN CLOSE Indicates the status of the intake manifold runner control solenoid valve position switch It should read CLOSE at low engine speed IMTV Range ON OFF Indicates the intake manifold tuning valve 400 Data Parameters IMTV 96 Range Engine Parameters 0 to 100 Indicates the PCM command status for the intake manifold tuning valve At 10096 the valve should be fully open IMTV 96 Range Indicates the duty cycle of the intake manifold tuning valve IMTV FAULT Range Indicates an intake manifold tuning valve fault INDDRNG ON OFF Range Indicates the Drive position indicator output INDLRNG ON OFF Range Indicates the Low position indicator output INDNRNG ON OFF
212. the interior lights illuminate when unlock is off Illumination Sw Interior Light Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the interior lighting switch Reads ON when the switch is pushed in reads OFF when the switch is not pushed in The Illumination SW parameter is for the switch marked ON OFF and the Interior Light parameter is for the switch marked DOOR Illumination System Light Control Range ONOFF Indicates the status of the lighting control system Reads ON when the system is on reads OFF when the system is off INT VOLUME Range 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Indicates the interval setting for the windshield wipers INADVERTENT POWER RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the inadvertent power battery rundown protection feature of the BCM Reads OFF when all inadvertent power circuits are functioning normally 317 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters INDICATOR DIMMING Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the pulse width modulated PWM signal distributed by the BCM to the PWM controlled IP backlighting based on the position of the IP switch The display reads 1 296 when the headlamp switch is in the Auto position and the daytime running lamps DRL are on or the IP dimmer switch is in the Full Dim position The display reads 10096 when the head lamps or park lamps are turned on and the IP dimmer switch is in the Full Bright position INTERIOR LAMP DEFEAT Range ON OFF Indicate
213. the shift selector lever is in the D3 position A T D4 SWITCH A T D4 SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T D4 position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the D4 position A T D5 SWITCH A T D5 SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T D5 position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the D5 position A T N SWITCH A T N SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T N position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the N position A T NP SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T NP position switch Reads ON when the shift selector lever is in either the N or P position A T P SWITCH A T P SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T P position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the P position A T R SWITCH A T R SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T R position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the R position A T SHIFT SOL VLV A A T SHIFT SOL VLV B A T SHIFT SOL VLV A T SHIFT SOL VLV D A T SHIFT SOL VLV E SHIFT SOL A SHIFT SOL B SHIFT SOL C SHIFT SOL D SHIFT SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the automatic transmission shift solenoid valves A B C D and E Reads ON when the indicated solenoid valve is energized to charge the fluid line 492 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters A T T C C SOL VLV A T T C C SOL VLV A R
214. the test name is the only difference the function is the same 107 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems P To conduct an output state test 1 Select Output State Check The test initiation screen displays 2 Select to imitate the test then switch the ignition on without starting the engine IMPORTANT When the test begins all actuators except IAC and fuel injectors should be off and the PCM circuits from the should be high above 10 V Use the DVOM or lab scope to check actuators A self test initiated screen displays followed by the test screen 3 Pressthe accelerator to wide open throttle WOT to switch all engine actuators from off to on or from on to off All of the actuators stay on or off until the throttle is pressed again As the actuators change state the bottom line of the display shows if they are on or off Idle Speed Adjustment Test This test allows you to adjust the idle speed for certain 1991 and later engines Before adjusting idle speed make sure the throttle body and idle speed control ISC device are clean and the throttle linkage is not sticking or binding Also switch all accessories off and make sure the O2S is working properly ignition timing is correct and there are no vacuum leaks Place the transmission in park or neutral before selecting the test A command from the scan tool starts the engine running test and a signal from the EEC IV PCM indicates when the test
215. the trans input shaft SPD SP2 KPH SPD SP2 MPH Range 0 to 255 KPH or 0 to 158 MPH Indicates the transmission output shaft speed in KPH or MPH 434 Data Parameters Engine Parameters SPD TEST Range COMPL INCOMPL Indicates the status of the CHECK MODE vehicle speed sensor test SRC CAN Range ENABLE DISABLE Indicates is the starter motor relay is enabled ST ALPHA ST ALPHA B2 20 Range 0 to 20096 Indicates whether the ECM is commanding a rich or a lean mixture as part of the short term fuel metering correction strategy On a V type engine ST ALPHA is the bank 1 value and ST ALPHA B2 is bank 2 The value changes in response to changing patterns of the long term fuel trim corrections Short term fuel trim ranges from 096 to 200 with 10096 as the midpoint At 10096 the PCM is not adjusting the injector pulse width or the engine is running in a fail safe mode At readings above 100 the engine is running lean while the PCM is commanding a short term rich mixture correction At a reading below 100 the engine is running rich while the PCM is commanding short term lean mixture correction ST FUEL TRIM COUNTS ST FUEL TRIM B1 COUNTS ST FUEL TRIM B2 COUNTS Range 0 to 255 Indicates the short term fuel trim correction as a step count If the oxygen sensor voltage indicates a lean mixture the step count increases and the ECM commands a longer fuel injector pulse width Bank 1 B1 contains cylinder 1
216. the vehicle is started or if the ignition switch cycles off and on IMPORTANT Make sure the fuel system is intact before proceeding Selecting All Outputs On causes the electric fuel pump to briefly energize Also make sure fan blades are clear of obstruction before selecting low or high speed fan on To conduct an output state test 1 Select Output State Test A test activation screen displays 2 Selectto activate and the test list displays 3 Select the desired test Ifthe vehicle performs the test activated or fan requested displays to the right of the selected test 109 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems Ifthe vehicle does not perform the test error displays to the right of the selected test Take circuit readings while the test is activated Module Identification Test This test displays the PCM software file part number and sometimes the vehicle VIN Select the test and an information screen displays 12 1 5 Transmission Code Retrieval 1987 626 Gathering codes from a 1987 626 transmission requires taking a reading from two wires on the test connector This can be performed with a dual trace graphing meter connected as shown in Figure 12 5 Blue Black Wire Ones Digit Blue White Wire Tens Digit Yellow Black 12V Meter Screen 1 8 2 U ieu E O 4 Ones Digit DC Chi 8 2 14 To Voltmeter Common Ground is 8 BBUDC Che Tens Digit
217. to 21 25 hours Indicates the length of time in hours since the PCM set the first airbag DTC VBATT V Range 0 0 to 25 0 V Indicates the voltage being supplied to the airbag electronic control module ECM 296 Data Parameters Air Conditioning A C Parameters Air Conditioning A C Parameters This section defines data parameters thata are available from the A C electronic control module A C ECM which controls the adjustment of the climate in the passenger compartment of the vehicle This section applies only to models with a stand alone A C ECM Parameters for A C systems incorporated into the body control module BCM are defined in the BCM section Air Inlet Damper Pulse Range 0 to 255 Displays the pulse of the signal provided to the air inlet damper Air Inlet Mode Range AUTO MANUAL Indicates the setting of the mode switch for the system air intake Air Mix Pulse D Air Mix Pulse P Range 0 to 255 Shows the signal pulse supplied to the driver D and passenger P side air mixture doors Air Out Pulse D Air Out Pulse P Range 0 to 255 Shows the signal pulse supplied to the driver D and passenger P side air outlet doors Ambi Temp Range 30 8 to 50 8 C or 23 to 123 Indicates the A C ECM adjusted ambient air temperature Ambi Temp Sensor Range 23 3 to 65 95 C or 10 to 150 Indicates the ambient temperature as determined by the sensor not adjusted Ambient Temp S
218. to Neutral to Drive to D s to Drive 9 Perform full throttle acceleration to 25 mph and then let the vehicle coast to a stop without applying the brakes 10 Press and release the brake pedal three times 11 If no codes are present the ECVT 2WD or Clutch Temp 4WD lamp flashes evenly twice per second 12 If codes are present the lamp flashes Code Type 8a long short Subaru Code Type 08a on page 178 Figure 15 45 NOTA 183 Subaru Testing ABS Systems 15 2 6 1996 06 Subaru Models with an OBD II 16 pin Connector 1996 2006 Subaru models with an OBD II 16 pin connector do not support any other specific diagnostic routines Refer to the section Testing Engine Systems on page 143 for OBD II 16 pin connector locations Codes displayed are OBD II Generic Powertrain codes 15 3 Testing ABS Systems The following sections include information for testing Subaru antilock brake systems Subaru ABS testing includes the following ABS Code Information ABS Code Types ABS Code Reading and Connector Locations 15 3 1 ABS Code Information If you select ABS from the System Selection menu after identifying a 1990 2004 model year vehicle the scan tool gives you instructions for applying power If you select ABS from the System Selection menu after identifying a 2005 2006 model year vehicle the scan tool gives you instructions for connecting to the OBD II 16 pin connector 1990 2004 Subaru ABS systems use
219. to the A C idle up vacuum switching valve VSV Reads ON when the VSV opens the valve When open the A C idle up valve bleeds a measured quantity of air from the intake manifold which increases RPM at idle 335 Data Parameters Engine Parameters A C LOAD V Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the air conditioning load signal voltage A C MAG CLUTCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A C compressor magnetic clutch Reads ON when the clutch is engaged and reads OFF at all other times A C PRESS V Range 0 0 to 5 12 V Indicates the voltage signal to the ECM from the A C high side pressure sensor High voltage equals high pressure low voltage equals low pressure See A C PRESS psi below for calculated measurement information A C RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the air conditioning relay A C RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates a feedback signal from the A C compressor clutch or relay it reads ON when the clutch is engaged OFF when the clutch is disengaged A C REQUEST A C REQUEST SW Range YES NO or ON OFF Indicates the position of the air conditioning switch it reads YES or ON when the A C switch is turned on or when the ECM is commanding the A C system to turn the compressor on In some cases the A C compressor may not turn on even though the switch is set to on Several other switch or sensor signals may prevent the ECM from engaging the A C compressor clutch A reading of ON or YES mean
220. your system Contact your sales representative for availability of accessories and optional equipment Conventions This manual uses the conventions described below Bold Text Bold text is used for emphasis and to highlight selectable items such as buttons and menu options Example Select OK to continue 1 1 2 Terminology Certain terms are used to command specific actions throughout this manual Those terms are described below Select The term select means to highlight a menu item or other option then pressing the Y a OK Accept or similar button to activate it Example Select Functional Tests Scroll The term scroll means moving the cursor or changing data by using the directional arrow buttons scroll bars or other means Example Scroll to see any other codes and the data list Using This Manual Notes and Important Messages 1 2 1 2 1 Scan Tool The term scan tool is used to refer to any tool that communicates directly with the vehicle data stream When necessary the term Scanner is used to distinguish Snap on equipment from another diagnostic device such as the factory scan tool from the manufacturer Notes and Important Messages The following messages appear throughout this manual Notes A NOTE provides helpful information such as explanations tips and comments Example NOTE For additional information refer to 1 2 2 Important IMPORTANT
221. 0 km h Max 255 km h Indicates the vehicle speed Vehicle stopped 0 km h 0 mph VEHICLE SPD Range Min 256 km h Max 254 km h Indicates resolver vehicle speed Driving at 40 km h 25 mph 40 km h 25 mph VH V Range Min 0 V Max 765 V Indicates high voltage after it is boosted Engine revved up with the transmission in Park position HV battery voltage to 500 V e Ifthe value is 0 V Open or GND short in sensor circuit e Ifthe value is 765 V B short in sensor circuit VL V Range Min 0 V Max 510 V Indicates high voltage before it is boosted Power switch ON READY Practically the same as the HV battery voltage e Ifthe value is 0 V Open or GND short in sensor circuit e Ifthe value is 510 V B short in sensor circuit VMF FAN VOLTAGE Range Min 25 6 V 25 4 V Indicates the battery blower motor monitoring voltage e Fan mode 1 with READY light ON and P position 9 5 to 11 5 V WARM UPS CYC DTC CLEAR Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates the number of times engine is warmed up after clearing DTCs One cycle MIL OFF engine coolant temperature increases from below 22 71 6 F before starting the engine to above 70 C 158 F after starting the engine Increments once per warm up cycle WIN Range 64 kW Max 0 kW 25 kW or more Indicates the charge control wattage sent from battery ECU to the hybrid vehicle control ECU WIN CTRL POWER W Range Min 40 800 W
222. 02 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems 5 5 203 Reading SRS 203 eerie 204 Chapter 17 Generic 207 OBD II and What it 207 Selecting The Generic Test 208 Connecting To The 208 Main Menu Selections n Vet racer reb Fen re E 209 Codes and Data 209 viii Table of Contents Chapter 18 Data Parameters 214 Interpreting Pressure 215 Alphabetic List 888 RA 216 Antilock Brake System ABS 278 Airbag SRS Paramelers iu tht ee mede ge vts 294 Air Conditioning A C 297 Body Control Module BCM 300 Eriginie Pararneters iti eta ee rs ER M e reot
223. 04a Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on ABS warning lamp Short the service check connector and turn key on ABS indicator will stay on for 2 seconds then turn off main code will flash then pause 0 4 seconds sub code will flash and pause 3 6 seconds stored codes will flash only one time per ignition cycle cycle key at least once to verify codes Do not press the brake pedal when retrieving codes or the system will go into code clear mode Start codes by When done Clear codes by cycling the ignition on and off 20 times 63 Testing ABS 0 2 Sec 1 0 2 i 14Sec 14 Sec lt gt 1 1 1 Code Repeats Figure 8 16 Honda ABS Code Type 05a Table 8 9 Honda ABS Code Type 05a Pattern Straight count first long flash starts the code the rest are short flashes Read codes on Rear ABS indicator lamp or brake lamp With the key on momentarily connect and disconnect terminals 12 and 4 on the OBD II 16 pin DLC Figure 8 2 Turn the ignition switch on Clearing codes Codes are cleared every time the key is cycled off Start codes by When done Clear codes diagnose repair test drive and check for other codes If there is no code stored the Rear ABS lamp goes off and remains off If a code is stored the lamp begins flashing If the Rear ABS lamp stays on continuously check to see if the DLC leads are shorted together The leads must only be shorted m
224. 05 229 152 76 Compare the MAP voltage and MAP pressure readings displayed on the scan tool Pressure should be high when voltage is high low when voltage is low If the readings appear abnormal for the apparent engine load the sensor signal to the ECM may be inaccurate or the ECM calculations may be incorrect for some reason MAP V Range 0 to 5 12 V Indicates the MAP sensor signal voltage Voltage varies with manifold pressure it should be Low when absolute pressure is low high manifold vacuum High when absolute pressure is high low manifold vacuum Range see below Indicates the manifold absolute pressure MAP sensor outputs frequency signal which is relative to intake manifold vacuum The MAP sensor frequency increases as intake manifold vacuum decreases 2 reads as follows 80 Hz at 101 6 kPa 30 inHg of manifold vacuum 159 Hz at zero manifold vacuum The PCM uses the MAP signal to determine engine load and regulate the air fuel ratio ignition timing and EGR flow and to compensate for altitude MAP SOL V Range ON OFF Indicates the boost sensor solenoid valve status 413 Data Parameters Engine Parameters MAP BARO SOL MAP BARO SOLENOID Range MAP BARO Indicates the state of the MAP BARO solenoid valve which applies intake manifold vacuum or barometric atmospheric pressure to the sensing port of the absolute pressure sensor Compare to the ABSOL PRE
225. 1 AF FB CMD B2 Range 0 0 to 99 9 Indicates the A F ratio feedback command which is the target air fuel ratio that ECM is trying to maintain based on sensor data Readings should be between 14 2 and 15 2 at idle B1 or B2 provide information for vehicles with two banks of injectors AF FB COND Range OPEN CLOSED Indicates the Air Fuel Ratio Feedback Condition it displays the current loop operating status AF SENSOR AF SENSOR mA AF SENSOR B1 AF SENSOR B2 Range 0 0 to 99 9 Displays from the air fuel ratio A F sensor signal which detects exhaust gas oxygen content Al STATUS Range OK NG Indicates the status of the air injection system based on pressure sensor feedback to monitor air flow pressure and volume AICV VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the current state of the AICV Air Intake Control Valve This valve controls the AICV in response to engine air demand When the throttle is open 6096 or more and RPM is above 3 600 the AICV is open ON to allow extra intake air At all other times the AICV is closed OFF AIR CONTRL SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the air control secondary air injection solenoid valve status Reads ON when secondary air is routed to the exhaust port AIR CONTRL SOL AIR DIVERT SOL Range NORM DIV or PORT DIV Indicates the ECM command to the air injection control or diverter valve solenoid it reads NORM or PORT when the solenoid is commanded to move the valve to direct air downstream
226. 11 Pass Door Unlock SW t eH TA VERE UE ER CHR ROB CURIE CLONE AGREE 312 PASS IMPACTED erecti aie Gla ic e ere Wr re asia Read rre di e e E ERE e YE EE I Here ia Gat Pass Lock Posit Sw Pass P W Auto Sw Pass P W Down Sw Pass PAN ite e Wr mr ep EP ra ende e aids P ss PSD SW neos ies erbe e PASS REEDOOR AJARUSWS 4 erben ere eere RH RP REED ie Yee ERE i RE ERR YE es 312 PASSENGER 5 i ee ERU POMPE YER SONA LR E UE ULCUS E ED EE VE EE NO Ve 477 Passing Eight SW irr ih etie tete itin iei P eR Ie e nitet ei 315 PASSING SW ASSIA OW ied Eee P ENS Passive Mode Dp MAE PCM IN VTD FAIL cu D EE LL Nate CNN AE atin Maced PCS ACT AMP M TUN PISS DES cL E M hi DU LA Le ten DM C tne 510 510 eic ard 510 slot 326 PEDAL STROKE V atate ciet ete vice e Ht tc ice M Re dre a dedi dpa 288 BEDAE STROKE 2 V P nuire nee tice n porti ec ne dee en 288 np
227. 15 42 Table 15 4 XT All All X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 41 Figure 15 41 Table 15 7 153 Subaru Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 4 of 9 Testing Engine Systems Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers o OIS Code si Reading Read 5 Fuel D Check Reading Year Model Engine 3 5 35 Codes Memory System 2 Connector CONNectors Connectors pen Figure 15 17 All SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 wane Figure 15 17 All MFI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 12113 2BBL Figure 15 17 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 Justy Figure 15 18 1 2113 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 Legacy Touring All al Figure 15 17 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Figure 15 18 Wagon Legacy Figure 15 17 Wagon All All xX X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Figure 15 17 1990 All SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Figure 15 17 All MFI X x Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 17 f 3 Touring All SPI XIX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Wagon Figure 15 17 All MFI X x Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 1
228. 172 Subaru Testing Engine Systems IMPORTANT Do not turn off the ignition if the ECS lamp is lit because the trouble codes can be lost If the ECS lamp is not lit proceed to the D Check procedure If the ECS lamp is lit perform the U Check procedure To perform a U Check 1 If a hard code is present the LED on the ECM will be flashing the code Gather these codes before proceeding 2 Onvehicles with ECM memory capability continue with step 3 On vehicles without ECM memory capability leave the engine running and skip to step 4 3 vehicles with ECM memory turn the key off and connect the vehicle Read Memory connectors together see D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations on page 166 Some cars have black connectors and some have clear connectors 4 Identify the vehicle connect the data cable and confirm the identification On vehicles with ECM memory capability turn the key on and leave the engine off 5 Select Code Functions gt Auto Code Read from the Main Menu and follow the connection instructions earlier in this chapter 6 Atthis point the scan tool reads and displays any codes stored in the ECM memory Separate the Read Memory connectors 8 Proceed to the D Check procedure for the test vehicle 1983 89 ECC D Check Use this D Check procedure for all 1983 89 vehicles with an electronically controlled carburetor ECC except Justy If the ECS lamp is lit perform the ECS check U Check b
229. 19 11 Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with an 11 pin Check connector e Connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to Check connector pin 15 Figure 15 20 1 11 pin Check connector color varies 2 Pin 15 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 20 11 pin Check Connector 161 Subaru Testing Engine Systems P To read codes on vehicles with a 13 pin Check connector e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter blue wire to Check connector pin 10 Figure 15 21 1 13 pin Check connector color yellow 2 Pin 10 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 21 13 pin Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with a 13 pin Check connector e Connection depends on the color of the 13 pin Check connector a If natural connect the MULTI 1 blue wire to Check connector pin 11 Figure 15 22 b If yellow connect the MULTI 1 blue wire to Check connector pin 6 Figure 15 23 d 4 12 ha 1 13 pin Check connector color natural 2 Pin 11 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 22 13 pin Check connector 1 13 pin Check connector Color yellow 2 Pin 6 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 23 13 pin Check connector 162 Subaru Testing Engine Systems P To read codes on vehicles with a 13 pin Check connector e Connection depends on the color and or location of the 1
230. 1990 91 1 ECM Trooper 1992 94 6 ECM 1996 2002 1 Trooper 2 3L 1986 87 2 Trooper 2 6L 1988 91 4 Trooper 2 8L 1989 91 3 Vehicross 1999 2001 1 81 Isuzu Testing Engine and Transmission Systems Figure 10 2 Common transmission connector locations Table 10 2 Common transmission connector locations VEHICLE YEAR CONNECTOR LOCATION Amigo 1990 94 1 Impulse 1990 92 1 Pickup 1990 95 1 Rodeo 1990 95 1 Stylus 1990 93 1 1990 91 1 Trooper 1992 94 2 NOTE o The 1984 85 Trooper connector is hard to find Figure 10 3 Figure 10 3 1984 1985 Isuzu Trooper diagnostic connector P To read codes from 1986 87 Trooper e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter to the ALDL or diagnostic connector Figure 10 4 on page 83 82 Isuzu Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 1 ALDL connector 2 Diagnostic connector 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 10 4 1986 87 Trooper connectors and adapter Diagnostic connector locations for the 1988 91 Trooper are shown in Figure 10 5 1 ALDL connector 2 Distributor set timing connector 3 ECM 4 Diagnostic lead terminal Figure 10 5 1988 91 Trooper connectors Diagnostic connector locations for the 1984 95 Pickup 1988 95 Amigo and 1991 95 Rodeo are shown in Figure 10 6 on page 84 83 Isuzu Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 1 1984 87 Impulse leads and ALDL not shown 2 RWAL 1 pin connector
231. 3 ALDL 3 pin connector 4 Timing set connector 5 Diagnostic leads connect together for flash codes Figu re 10 6 1984 95 Pickup 1988 95 Amigo and 1991 95 Rodeo connectors P To read codes from 1984 95 Pickup 1988 95 Amigo and 1991 95 Rodeo e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with the white terminal converters Figure 10 7 and Figure 10 8 Diagnostic Connector MULTI 1 Adapter Green White Black 1 Hood release 2 ECM 3 Diagnostic connector 4 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 10 8 1988 91 Trooper with automatic transmission connector location 84 Isuzu Testing Engine and Transmission Systems P To read codes from vehicles with a 12 pin connector e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter to the connector Figure 10 9 or use the GM 1 adapter 1 amp EXER ES d 1 Diagnostic connector 2 MULTI 1 adapter 3 GM 1 adapter 4 Green MULTI 1 wire 5 White MULTI 1 wire 6 Black MULTI 1 wire Figure 10 9 12 pin connector and adapters P To read codes from 1988 89 Impulse e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with the white terminal converters Figure 10 10 1 Diagnostic connector 2 Black MULTI 1 wire 3 Green MULTI 1 wire 4 White MULTI 1 wire 5 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 10 10 1988 89 Impulse connector and adapter P To read codes from 198572 89 I Mark and 1990 and later Impulse Connect the MULTI 2 D adapter to the white 3 pin connector Fi
232. 3 pin Check connector a If your Check connector is under the hood and black connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to pin 5 of the Check connector Figure 15 24 b If your Check connector is located under the dash or inside the trunk connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to pin 6 of the Check connector Figure 15 25 89 HAR 1 13 pin Check connector color black location under hood 2 Pin 5 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1adapter Figure 15 24 13 pin Check connector d AN AAGA 1 13 pin Check connector color varies location under dash or inside trunk 2 Pin 11 Connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 25 13 pin Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with a 13 pin or 17 pin Check connector e Determine if your Check connector is a 13 pin or a 17 pin Check connector a If 13 pin connect the MULTI 1 blue wire to Check connector pin 11 of the Figure 15 26 b If 17 pin connect the MULTI 1 blue wire to Check connector pin 7 Figure 15 27 163 Subaru Testing Engine Systems d G hA 1 13 pin Check connector color varies 2 Pin 11 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 26 13 pin Check connector A1 A2 Cosh AA AAN 1 17 pin Check connector color varies 2 Pin 7 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI
233. 362 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CoastClSol mA Range 0 to 1000 mA Indicates the actual current of the PCM output to the coast clutch solenoid in milliamperes When activated coast clutch solenoid allows engine braking in third gear when fourth gear is disabled by the transmission control switch COLD STARTUP Range YES NO Indicates whether the engine is operating in cold start mode A cold start is when the engine coolant temperature ECT rises above a predetermined temperature during an ignition cycle During the next ignition cycle the ECT should be below the predetermined point Also the ECT and the intake air temperature IAT are less than 122 F 50 C and are within 5 F 3 C of each other at start up When the above is true the display reads YES COLP Range ON OFF Indicates the refrigerant pressure switch middle pressure status COMMEGR Range 0 to 100 Indicates the commanded EGR status 0 100 Indicates the commanded purge COMMTAC Range 0 to 100 Indicates the commanded throttle actuator control COMPONENT MONITOR Range NOT AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Indicates the comprehensive component monitor COND FAN Range ON OFF Indicates the FAN signal COND FAN LO Range ON OFF Indicates the FAN 1 control signal COOL FAN Range 0 to 100 Indicates the duty cycle on engines that control the engine fan by pulse w
234. 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Impreza 1 8L H4 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Coupe 2 2L H4 MFI X Figure 15 31 Table 15 5 Impreza 1 8L H4 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Sedan 2 2L H4 MFI X Figure 15 31 Table 15 5 1995 Impreza 1 8L H4 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Wagon 2 2L H4 MFI X Figure 15 31 Table 15 5 Legacy Sedan All All X Figure 15 31 Table 15 8 ried All All X Figure 15 31 Table 15 8 SVX All All X Power Pac Figure 15 43 Figure 15 43 Table 15 6 1996 to All All All X Figure 15 31 Table 15 8 2005 impreza All OBD II Coupe Impreza All All OBD II TOO Al All OBD II Wagon 1996 Legacy BAe Al All OBD II Legacy Sedan Al All OBD II Legacy Al All OBD II Wagon SVX Al All OBD II 156 Subaru Testing Engine Systems Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 7 of 9 Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers o Reading Read 3 Year engine Fuel wem 5 za 5 Connector Connectors Locations pid All All OBD II is All All OBD II All OBD II 1997 All All OBD II Legacy Sedan All All OBD II vn All All OBD II SVX All All OBD II gis All All OBD II All All OBD I
235. 502 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters LEDC Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the shift indicator light control It reads ON when the gear selector lever is in 1st 3rd or 5th position in the sequential mode LEVER POS Range P N REV DRIVE 2ND 1ST Indicates the position of the shift selector lever LINE PRES LPS Range 0 to 100 Indicates the duty cycle of the ECM command to the line pressure solenoid The ECM relies on the TP sensor to raise or lower line pressure When the system functions properly the larger the throttle opening the higher the percentage solenoid on time and the greater the line pressure LINEDES Range 0 to 100 Indicates the desired line pressure the ECM is attempting to maintain as a percentage of base line pressure The value indicates target modifier pressure and target pressure of the control solenoid valve LOAD PCT Range 0 to 100 Indicates the engine load LOAD Range 0 to 100 Indicates the engine load LOCKUP B DUTY Range 0 to 100 Indicates the duty cycle of the signal being applied to lockup solenoid B When the solenoid valve is energized the fluid line is changed LOW HOLD INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the low hold indicator lamp on the instrument panel Reads ON when the panel lamp is on LOW HOLD SWITCH LOW HOLD SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the low hold switch on Reads ON when the switch is
236. 55 Indicates all cylinders misfire rate 0 to 35 367 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CylHdTemp V CHTS V Range 0 25 to 4 75 V Indicates cylinder head temperature expressed as voltage The higher the voltage the lower the temperature D SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission Drive range switch status D C Converter Control ELD Unit ELD Range not available Indicates the total vehicle electric load based on current in the main power harness This value is taken from the electric load detector ELD sensor signal which is installed on the main fuse box D C CTRL VOL V Range 0 0 25 V Indicates the battery charging voltage of the D C converter in standard 14 5 V mode D M MUFFLER SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the muffler mode changeover switch on the Mitsubishi 3000GT Turbo and Dodge Stealth turbo with a dual mode D M muffler it reads ON when the switch is in the TOUR position OFF when the switch is in the SPORT position A valve in the main muffler inlet switches between two different inlet apertures a large aperture sport mode for improved fuel consumption and driveability and a smaller aperture tour mode for quieter operation at lower engine RPM The changeover switch is located on the dash DAMPING CTRL Range ON OFF Indicates the damping control status The damping control eases the fluctuation in revolution speed with a IMA motor it reads ON when the function is acti
237. 6 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1987 94 SPI connectors on page 170 Figure 15 40 1987 91 XT models connector in the trunk on page 171 Figure 15 41 1988 94 Justy Carbureted 1990 94 Justy MFI 1990 94 Legacy and 1987 94 L Series on page 171 Figure 15 42 1992 95 SVX models connectors in left kick panel on page 172 Figure 15 43 Vehicles without ECM Memory D Check Only Under Hood Connector Location Under Dash Connor Location 1 Check connector 2 2 Check connector 1 3 Check connector 4 4 Check connector 3 5 D Check connectors 6 ECU 7 ECU LED Figure 15 33 1983 ECC carbureted 1 Check connector 1 2 Check connector 2 3 Check connector 3 4 Check connector 4 5 D Check connectors 6 ECU LED 7 ECU Figure 15 34 1984 ECC carbureted 167 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 ECM 2 D Check connectors 3 Check connectors 1 2 and 3 4 Check connector 4 Figure 15 35 1983 84 Turbo 1985 87 all except XT Under Hood Connector Location Under Dash Connector Location 1 Check connector 1 2 Check connector 2 3 Check connector 3 4 Check connector 4 5 Check connector 5 6 Check connector 6 7 D Check connectors 8 ECU 9 ECU LED Figure 15 36 1985 89 ECC overhead cam 168 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 Check connector 1 2 D Check connectors 3 ECM 4 Fuel pump 5
238. 7 All SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 MIROR Figure 15 17 All MFI X x Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 17 XT All All X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 41 Figure 15 41 Table 15 7 12113 2BBL x x Figure 15 17 Ei ure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 Justy Figure 15 18 1 2113 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 Legacy Figure 15 17 Wagon All All X X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Figure 15 17 1991 1 8L H4 SPI X X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Figure 15 17 2 21 H4 MFI XIX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Wagon Al al x x Figure 15 17 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 9 Figure 15 18 XT All All X Figure 15 21 Figure 15 41 Figure 15 41 Table 15 7 154 Subaru Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 5 of 9 Testing Engine Systems Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers Code Reading Read 5 Fuel Be D Check Reading Year Model Engine 3 5 35 9 Codes Memory System E 2 Connector CONNectors Connectors eae Figure 15 17 3 1 2L L3 2BBL X X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 1 2L L3 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure
239. 75 Odyssey 1995 2004 connector locations 55 1996 1998 SRS code clearing 73 1999 2002 SRS code clearing 73 Outlander 2003 2005 connector locations 118 P Passport 1994 1995 connector locations 58 1994 2002 connector locations 55 1996 2002 with 4WAL code clearing 65 1996 2002 with RWAL code reading 65 Pickup Isuzu 1984 1985 connector location 84 1990 1995 ABS connector locations 89 1990 1995 engine connector locations 81 1990 1995 transmission connector locations 82 Pilot 2003 2004 connector locations 55 2003 2004 SRS code clearing 76 Precis 1990 1994 connector locations 118 Prelude 1985 1991 ECM and LED locations 57 1990 and later connector locations 58 1992 2001 connector locations 55 1994 1996 SRS code clearing 73 1997 2001 SRS code clearing 72 Prizm 1989 1995 connector locations 45 1992 with 4AGE transmission code reading 49 1993 1995 with 7AFE transmission code reading 49 actuator tests 52 R Raider 1989 connector locations 34 RAM 50 1994 connector locations 34 Read Memory connector See diagnostic connectors Rio 2001 2002 ABS code reading 100 Rodeo 1990 1995 ABS connector locations 89 1990 1995 transmission connector locations 82 1990 2004 engine connector locations 81 1991 1995 connector locations 84 RSX 2002 2004 engine connector locations 13 2002 2004 transmission connector locations 20 S 52000 2000 2003 SRS code clearing 74 2000 2004 connector locations 55 2004 SRS code clearing 74 S
240. 9 oe 419 MISEIRE TES TL tien nre een eee nie nier ERE ind 419 MISFIR E ean 418 252 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters MISFire ds 2 418 MISHR E MISFIRED CYL nupus MISS CY CLE cnni iie teh ien ende e n e MISS HISTORY 1 MISS HISTORY 2 MISS HISTORY 3 MISS HISTORY 4 MISS HISTORY 5 Mode Status MODE SW RETURN VOLTAGE MODESWISERECTED eee taedet to beca dcbet bbs ttt obesse MONITORED COOLANT TEMP ecce atia iet ue sect cp Usi dart 481 MONITORED FUEL LEVEL 96 481 MONITORED OIL PRESSURE eo caters ed dt 481 RT RR EE 419 MOT ECM SIGNAL vie 22419 MOTOR MA e d tli IURE a ue ica De ae 488 MOTOR Bim os ene ad Men one a eer lashes 488 MOTOR DUTY eA NRI PRA 419 MOTOR POS IL LM LLL 420 MOTOR POS STEPS s stes a eue eate ett ul ctt c E ur d udo 397 MOTORCTEPOMD C M LA M LM C LU e MD 399 MOTORTTEMP 472 MOTORS TEMP DL
241. 9 e Easier LEE 359 CAN CIRC 1 CAN CIRC 2 CAN CIRC 3 CAN CIRC 4 CAN CIRC 5 CAN CIRC 6 CAN CIRC 7 CAN CIRC 8 CAN CIRC 9 GAN CTREAVSMW 12 ERR 360 Car Finder CASeGND V CASeGND V CATIGMBIE A AI Mee GAT ENA CAT MON CAT MONITOR CONDITION B1 CAT MONITOR CONDIT ON B2 terere ene xe eerie iter Ee era bres n eU 360 CAT MONITOR CONDITION reote RESET eR REESE REA E RN NR ERR DERE TES 360 DM CAT 2 a e RR RI Ri e uM CAT OT FC CYL 1 CAT OT FC 2 CAT OT FC CYL 3 CAT OT FC 4 225 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters CAT OT CYL 5 wets 961 CAT CYL 6 CAT 7 CAT OT CYL 8 361 GAT TEMP BIS E N 361 CAT TEMP BAS 2 361 CAT TEMP B282 tti ecetevebn a nn dide e idee Ic ea a tt ee ead 361 CAT TEMP 2521 ins ics 2 961 CAT NULLE CAT TMP BIS2
242. 90 Diagnosis of SRS 10 Ground 1 Diagnosis terminals 2 Select monitor connector Yellow 3 Diagnosis connector Black Figure 15 43 1992 95 SVX models connectors in left kick panel 15 1 5 Automatic Code Reading During Subaru automatic code reading you must perform two diagnostic checks e U Check or Electronic Control System ECS check D Check The specific procedure for each depends on the model and year of the test vehicle ECS Check U Check All models do this only if the ECS lamp on the dash is lit ECC D Check All 1983 89 models except Justy with an electronically controlled carburetor ECC 1987 MPI D Check 1983 86 vehicles with Multipoint Injection MPI e 1987 Justy EFC D Check 1987 Justy with an electronic feedback carburetor EFC e Justy EFC or MPI D Check 1988 90 Justy with an electronic feedback carburetor EFC and 1990 91 Justy vehicles with multipoint injection 1 SPlor MPI D Check All 1986 94 Single Point Injection SPI vehicles and 1987 92 MPI vehicles Failure to follow the right procedure may result in misreading codes or inaccurate diagnosis NOTE For transmission codes see Transmission Code Reading on page 180 ECS Check U Check The ECM does not have memory capability on most pre 1987 vehicles The ECM on 1986 models with single point injection SPI and 1983 89 models with an electronically controlled carburetor ECC has memory
243. 96 VVTL AIM ANGL 2 WAC WOT A C WAC WOT A C WAGZSEADIET s cerit abe bye Ne SEE LULA rd tin UNI MTM AT ty tate re WARM UPS CYG DI C CLEAR cL 456 WARM UPS CYC DTC 474 WARM UPS ite ie en da SAO cd gr ee ae 466 WARMUP ENRICH crate ALAIN A E NE 438 WARM UPS W O EMISSION 457 WARM UPS W O NON EMISSION 8 2 44 110 2 2 01111100600000000000000 0 trennen enne nnns 457 Warn By Glass Snsr 333 LAETI eA P140 TERR TL DUNT A 334 PAZ m Se 333 WAIN i IE IEEE CET 333 WARN Giran a ee Ave HU ads CREER E ERR RR ERE EISE ERE de re eee aa e PR REN RO tee 333 3 cnr I MI uu A AE E M m 333 AI 5 aare 333 WASH e nose ES we 334 aes 315 334 Is E 334 WASTEGATE SOL ote eerte Mone ud ua ee Mer iret 457 WHEEL SPB EL 286 WEEELSPDIEE SS me IP A R AT DI AU 294
244. 995 97 Sephia ABS codes e Connect pin 8 to ground pins 4 or 12 as shown in Figure 11 5 1 20 pin connector 2 Jump wires Figure 11 5 20 pin DLC jump pins for ABS codes P To read 2000 01 Spectra and Sephia ABS codes e Connect pin 16 to ground pins 4 or 12 as shown in Figure 11 6 1 20 pin connector 2 Jump wires Figure 11 6 20 pin DLC jump pins for ABS codes 100 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems 11 1 2 Manual ABS Code Reading Kia ABS transmits Type 13 manual codes see Figure 11 7 and Table 11 1 0 2 to 0 5 Sec First Digit 3 Second Digit 5 1 Code ra Code 35 Repeats Figure 11 7 ABS Code Type 13 Table 11 1 Kia ABS Code Type 13 Pattern Straight count Read codes on Flashes ABS lamp Start codes by Jumper the ABS and ground terminals in the 20 pin connector or jumper Terminal 1 to ground in the 3 pin ABS connector When done Turn the ignition off and clear codes After fixing problem clear codes and drive car then check for other codes 101 This chapter contains information for testing Mazda vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Mazda systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission Antilock Brake System ABS Airbag Electric Automatic Temperature Control EATC Electronic Power Steering EPS
245. AL when in normal condition DECELERAT SEN m s2 DECELERAT SEN 2 m s2 Range 18 52 to 18 39 m s2 Indicates the decelerator sensor 1 Reading changes when vehicle is bounced DTC CNT Range 0 to 255 Indicates the number of trouble codes set ECB MTR RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the ABS motor relay status ECB MTR RELAY 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the ABS motor relay 2 status ECB RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the ABS main relay status ECB RELAY 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the ABS main relay 2 status ENABLE RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the ABS control module output signal to the enable relay it reads ON when the relay is powered This relay provides battery voltage and current to the ABS control module and the electromagnetic brakes EMBs 280 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters ENG OIL TMP Range to 100 C 0 212 Indicates temperature of engine oil More than 70 C 158 F after warmup EX VTC DTY B1 Range 0 to 7096 Indicates control value of the exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder Angle becomes larger as value increases After warmup shift lever in off and no load 0 to 2 at idle approximately 0 to 7096 above 1500 RPM EX VTC DTY B2 Range 0 to 7096 Indicates control value of the exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder Angle becomes larger as value increases After warmup shift lever in off and no load
246. ANCE IGN ADV IGN TIMING SPK ADV SPK ADV SPARK ADV 5 SPARK ADVANCE TIMING TOTAL ADV Range 90 to 90 Indicates the amount of total spark advance or retard being commanded by the ECM as degrees The value including base timing on most vehicles On some vehicles such as Chrysler Imports the value does not including base timing IGN CYCLES Range 0 to 50 Indicates the number of times the engine has been started since the last DTC set or codes were cleared IGN CYCLE DTC Range YES NO Indicates whether a DTC set on the current ignition cycle 398 Data Parameters Engine Parameters IGN EVENTS X IGNITION Range see below Indicates the number of ignition events the ECM expects to occur during the next 1000 crankshaft revolutions The PCM uses this information to determine the misfire rate Range varies by the number of cylinders Oto 2000 for a 4 cylinder engine 0103000 or a 6 cylinder engine 0104000 or a 8 cylinder engine The X IGN EVENTS X is a value from 1 to 8 depending on the cylinder being monitored IGN FUEL VTD Range YES NO Indicates whether a Vehicle Theft Deterrent VTD code is stored in memory IGNITION Range Min 0 Max 800 Indicates ignition counter 0 to 800 IGNITION 1 V Range 0 0 to 25 5 V Indicates system voltage measured by the ECM at its ignition feed circuit Ignition voltage is only present when the vehicle is
247. ATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the automatic transmission fluid ATF overheat indicator lamp Normal reading is OFF It reads ON and the lamp is lit only when the ATF exceeds the maximum recommended temperature BARO BARO V Range 2 6 to 4 6 V Indicates barometric pressure as voltage and should read as follows e 4 6 Vat sea level 2 6 elevation of 10 000 feet BATT V Range 010 16 V Indicates the battery voltage BLOWR FAN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the blower motor 494 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters BOO BrakeOnOff Range ON OFF Indicates the brake on and off BRAKE SW Range ON OFF Indicates the brake switch input status CALC TPS Range 0 to 100 Indicates a calculated value determined by the accelerator pedal position and the actual throttle position The parameter represents the driver s intended request for torque or acceleration and is used to optimize transmission controls 0 represents an idle or coast request 100 represents a request for wide open throttle WOT CASeGND V Range 16 0 V to 16 0 V Indicates the case ground CCS FAULT CCSFault Range YES NO Indicates the coast clutch solenoid status CLCH_SOL Range 0 to 100 Indicates the PWM output control command 1 CoastClSol mA Range not available Indicates the coast clutch solenoid in milli amps CoastClutchSol Range ON OFF Indicates the coast clutch
248. AULT Range YES NO Indicates the inlet air temperature status IATDC Range 40 to 399 F or 40 199 C Indicates the intake air temperature 2 IATDC V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the intake air temperature 2 in voltage IATLC V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the Lysholm compressor intake air temperature signal voltage 396 Data Parameters Engine Parameters IDL A V LEARN Range YET CMPLT Indicates the condition of Idle Air Volume Learning e YET Idle Air Volume Learning has not been performed yet e Idle Air Volume Learning has already been performed successfully IDLE CTRL SOL 96 IAC COM Range 100 to 100 Indicates the drive percentage of the IAC solenoid valve IDLE LEARN Range COMPLETED NOT COMPLETED NOT APPLICABLE Indicates whether the PCM completed the idle learn program IDLE STOP CTRL Range YES NO Indicates whether the ECM is operating in idle stop control mode IDLE TARGET TH MOTOR TH CMD Range 0 to 180 Indicates the PCM calculated target throttle valve position at idle in degrees IDLE UP SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the idle up solenoid valve The valve is turned ON when A C SW is turned on but it is controlled ON OFF depending on the engine operating conditions IDLE UP VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the vacuum switching valve VSV is used to actuate the idle up valve When ON the idle up valve
249. Air Temperature Also referred to as Manifold Air Temperature MAT IGN Ignition inHg Inches of mercury INJ Injector ISC Idle Speed Control Electronic control of minimum throttle position 531 Glossary K D Kickdown kPa Kilopascals LCKD Locked LED Light Emitting Diode MAT Manifold Air Temperature Also referred to as Intake Air Temperature IAT MES Memory Erase Signal MFI A fuel delivery system in which each cylinder is individually fueled Also referred to as Multi Point Injection 1 movie A vehicle data record whose length depends on the number of selected data parameters MPFI Multiport Fuel Injection MPI Multi Point Injection A fuel delivery system in which each cylinder is individually fueled Also referred to as Multiport Fuel Injection MFI mS Milliseconds mV Millivolts 02 025 Oxygen Sensor A sensor which detects oxygen O2 content in the exhaust gases OD Overdrive 532 Glossary P S Power Steering PAB Passenger Airbag PASS Passenger PCM Powertrain Control Module Personality A device that identifies a manufacturer s configuration for the vehicle diagnostic connector to the scan tool PIP Position Indicator Pulse POS Position psi Pounds per square inch PSP Power Steering Pressure PW Pulse Width PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWR Power REF Reference RF Right Front or Radio Frequency RPM
250. Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software Manual August 2013 EAZ0025B02J Rev A Trademarks Acknowledgements Snap on is a trademark of Snap on Incorporated All other marks are trademarks of their respective holders Copyright Information 2013 Snap on Incorporated All rights reserved Disclaimer The information specifications and illustrations in this manual are based on the latest information available at the time of printing Snap on reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice Visit our Web site at http diagnostics snapon com For Technical Assistance Call 1 800 424 7226 Safety Information For your own safety and the safety of others and to prevent damage to the equipment and vehicles upon which it is used it is important that the accompanying Safety Information be read and understood by all persons operating or coming into contact with the equipment We suggest you store a copy near the unit in sight of the operator This product is intended for use by properly trained and skilled professional automotive technicians The safety messages presented throughout this manual are reminders to the operator to exercise extreme care when using this test instrument There are many variations in procedures techniques tools and parts for servicing vehicles as well as in the skill of the individual doing the work Because of the vast number of test applications and variations in the products th
251. B NER SE ERRARE PE OMNE UN UU UTE APP1 V APP1 APP2 AGREE APP1 APP3 AGREE 2o D 20 Meet P PE APP2 APP3 AGREE LOCKUP Aor B hein een I ie ar rr erm re d e deem DEG e caer er iicet AT OD GANGEL cidit gor RED EET RE REO da VA AE ea ATE TEMP INDICATOR e dme e dae 496 ATF TEMP SENSOR 9 5 e ep rne Dea 496 ATE TEMP SENSOR V e ee dde diee retener citt ica Pe ee te ra ERTE 496 ATM PRES S C ATM PRESS 2 ttim nied ail RH aca via eei p nin ER IEEE hie PRESSY V ien e uehementer a e Beate en E EDU AUTO 4WD LAMP AUTO BIOW UP foe C AUTO EIGHT SW aed iad Ge a eee 222 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Auto Light Sw 303 Auto Lock Delay 304 304 AUTO LRN TIMER inii nie nieder inm ri i eene ni 352 E M 352 Auto
252. B Door Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the power back door ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com R Console Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the rear console ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Slide Roof Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the sunroof ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com S W Pad Sw Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the steering wheel paddle switches and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com TDS Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the theft deterrent system TDS ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Tilt amp Tele Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the steering column tilt and telescope ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an a
253. Brake System ABS Supplemental Restraint System SRS 16 1 Identifying 1995 and Earlier Vehicles Available engine types vary depending on the model and year In most cases you can find the engine type by locating the Vehicle Emission Control Information sticker or emissions decal inside the engine compartment If a VECI sticker is not available engine type is sometimes noted on the vehicle nameplate Figure 16 1 which may be nthe engine compartment on the bulkhead neither fender well area e On a door or a door post 4 ENGINE TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 2759CC JT2MA67L1E0110038 O 18440 2 gt MODEL MA61L BLPQFA CTRATMI 035 YS84 F293 A43DE 1 Engine 2 Model number Figure 16 1 Toyota vehicle nameplate 16 2 Testing Engine Systems Toyota Lexus and Scion engine testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 198 e Code Sensitivity OBD ll and some Pre OBD II on page 199 Data No Codes on page 199 Manual Code Reading on page 200 e Actuator Tests on page 200 197 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Engine Systems 16 2 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 1 Use TOY 1 adapter 2 Optional Jump E1 to T T1 or TE1 to flash codes Figure 16 2 Toyota Lexus diagnostic connector requiring TOY 1 adapter 1 Use TOY 2 adapter 2 Optional Jump E1 to TE1 to f
254. CAM PHASE ACT Range 0 to 25 Indicates the actual PCM commanded camshaft retard in degrees CAM PHASE DES 9 Range 0 to 25 Indicates the PCM desired camshaft phase angle CAM PHASE DUTY Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle the PCM is applying to the camshaft phase solenoid to achieve desired cam retard or advance CAM PHASE VARI Range 0 to 2596 Indicates the difference in degrees between the desired and actual camshaft angle CAM SENSOR CRANK SENSOR Range YES NO Indicates the status of the camshaft position CMP and crankshaft position CKP sensor signals used in direct ignition systems DIS The CMP signal is used for fuel injection timing and cylinder identification The CKP signal is used to control fuel injection quantity and determine engine speed and spark advance When starting or running the engine these parameters read YES These parameters are useful when troubleshooting a no start problem 357 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CAN CIRC 1 CAN CIRC 2 CAN CIRC 3 CAN CIRC 4 CAN CIRC 5 CAN CIRC 6 CAN CIRC 7 CAN CIRC 8 CAN CIRC 9 Range UNKNOWN NORM OK Indicates the condition of controller area network CAN circuits 1 to 9 CAN CTRL VSV Range ON OFF shows the status of the EVAP canister control vacuum switching valve which is used for active test support CASeGND V Range 16 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the voltage difference between the PCM case ground and the hardwi
255. D e tie eh em eiie 396 AV BATT GH ROST 1i cote tt eeepc da ta i re s ee eto hdc da ana Deere a eet b OO t rd rd 470 ihe erecti ennenindu titan die eU rice eau 285 ANES 319 l Eight On U lock fee cert es osito aee tete Eee ee Red 319 za AME UE 396 A DIA IDE nA M AL AS AI ARTI LAU UN 396 IAB c E IAB HI CTRL SOL IAB LOW CTRL SOL TAG Oo CU E CM EM IAG GOM jnn A A WAG COMPE IAC COMMAND COUNTS eroe e ee aa eee eee sae REOR D 397 IAC DIRECTION dee EET 397 IAC STER Spinea e M ULM CM C dM od CM MIU epe IM IAC AAC 96 242 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters IAC AAC STEPS T unu 2 397 IAC IDLE AIR 503 91 em een RETREAT TT entree 398 PAG PANG M seis s tebe iota nae Sekt eit tale an D c Rt AD Od ESAE 398 UU OP 398 o LL MI LIS 398 398 IAT FROM ret e na ede ex blot td eed yc t e Abe ecd tue bcd e p Td a Co
256. DD LM LM LAU AM 382 EVAPVM FAULT 382 nC T N 382 EVMV A 2 382 BT c as ctt ian debates UA ale c DR lad 283 RT RR RAPERE ERR 283 EXHIBVPASSWMSU tein d eM Ld an tech A DLL DILE E Di 382 PENT ES Dues poss cns Eu ped kh ND IDEA IIS ILU MEL llc D Gd Ro 383 EXH GAS CTL VSV 383 EP ERU d AN 283 EXAN WRN een Cat M ae Me 383 UNM ar ED eat ec 283 c EM Er ML ML M dE o Ae E tute 283 EXHAUST GEN eat tact hU c UAI 383 EXTXROM i cime iei uini uui cae M Uc Mi ELS LL IR dal 297 F GG ON e D Mu I MM E 487 F AXLE SW LCKD 1 487 FBNKUP ue Jute il HM LU D M UU M 383 Md 422 F Fog Light SW teehee D IN D MM E 314 S 383 PROSHAFT RPM 1 487 UIST OSS eo Le LI E MM M 422 PA i
257. DES from the SERVICE CODE Menu Some systems gather continuous codes automatically after the KOEO self test Select SERVICE CODES and the following choices are available on the SERVICE CODE Menu KOEO SELF TEST displays on demand codes present with the ignition on but the engine not running These are usually electrical open and short circuits and must be serviced first before any continuous codes On some systems the KOEO test displays continuous codes and the MEMORY CODES selection does not appear on the menu MEMORY CODES displays continuous codes of intermittent faults from the ABS module when available Memory codes should be serviced last Clear Codes clears continuous memory codes from the ABS ECM memory How To Get Codes displays how to manually gather and clear RABS codes Review Codes lets you view codes Print Codes lets you print codes 113 Testing Antilock Brake Systems Any time a self test is selected a self test initiated message displays This message means the scan tool attempted to start the test it does not mean the vehicle responded If the message stays on the screen more than a few minutes the test probably did not start Should this happen exit the test cycle the ignition key then retest KOEO Self Test This selection initiates a self test for ABS that is similar to that for the engine To conduct a KOEO Self Test 1 Select KOEO Self Test A key on verification screen
258. E POS 443 88 1 V d daba 443 THROTTLE UE 443 443 THROTTLE el a ated ke 443 THROTTLE 443 THROTTLE MIA decet n t DR allots 443 THROTTLE 2 443 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR V cute nM be inks Wale Whe IS Si 444 SOLOS esae eu E ML RU MM AL COD UNA bc 444 Qul e mci 446 eo OL RN TMT MR 519 THROTTLE VLV _ 444 Mir e mE sie eli ale MT EHE 465 THROTTLE Cooma aan u a a a a S 519 RT 444 ATE OSI htc cue a te abe ica be eid A ak N 520 THATE CMD VAL Vannini i 444 THATE CMND VAL 444 it eue heo tetti trattati bod eaa e 444 THRTL LEARN VAL V ve 445 THRTL MTR CLOSE aa Ug GM SU EDU 445 ene M oL LM ML UR S ME MU 445 THRTL MTR OPEN orsi dara crt o dua 445 dels E CUN M M MED ALL CASE 445 THRTL V THRTL POS2 96 THRT
259. E cadera 327 REA 327 NORM RR WSPD cite 1570 2 P vM BHORnPSI Un E RM RRO REC BUNTMISEG ett Ln D LU D M PA D ML as 464 S MODE SWITCH 511 S SHIET SENSOBRN M 473 S SWITCH S SWITCH S GARELAY E 432 SOLENOIDS 432 SIG TARGET ge 432 WAC SOU AT LE TTA C nA A URNAM AAT 432 M 432 SBLTLMP IC M mes 2 SBIW ROST EP SEAT BELT LAMP as uus iz IIBER M e a CLUB Sea MEM A E Seat Mem Set OW een ee eei aa eR Y YER SR ETE a Eea aA D SEAT TRAC Meng fates EA EI d EDI EA UP M AAT ANTT iier mteib SEC AIR ENA SEC AIR MONITOR SEC AIR MONITOR SEC PRESS MPa SEC SPEEDO MEL SECURITY bAMB RE UR ge ERE a ER ee SEGRRiDES 76 EMI RP eim
260. ER d Ree ren Pn mte E ER ERE PERPE ER ena 394 HO2S S2 V dices tene se rio x vg a CA ARABI IS MEM A WE C RIT IN E UN RE E EVE E Hd 395 HO2S S2 FO EAT nen tes nda cha IR RE CER EE A a UR ee ETE Eten 395 25 52 HEATER CURRENT mA ri 395 HO2S S2 HEATER tiere rere HOD PEE ER OO Ee ER HERR tie 395 295 52 395 HO29 53 V en trovare nom aree NES nae mede nio 395 HO2S ready ee ete a E o e ER VR OW 395 241 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters HO2S11 mA us we 395 2512 mA nete ee i E Rer eei deberi uda en ines 395 2521 395 2522 mA ctn ni erdt n eR n NER tied a ee 395 loe BeiBIci uuu aetna eee Geen 502 HOLD SWITCH 503 Hood Go rtesy SW nni cade t Do te tlc d top d Have LA Ud y E E A Ce ed rae ee abe ue ze redd edd ed 309 HOOD OPEN SW ET dins 2 317 HOOD SW M 317 Hood SW M disci otis 317 HOMES sabe wedi PRO 317 zit titt Rea nter eame ieu 317 d
261. ES ENGINE SPD RPM Range Min 0 rpm Max 8 000 rpm Idling 950 to 1 050 rpm 467 Data Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters HISTORY DTC Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates the number of history DTCs HV BATT CH RQST Range NO YES Indicates the HV battery charging request Requesting HV battery charging YES IB BATTERY Range 327 68 A to 327 67 A Indicates the current value of the battery pack Soon after a full load acceleration with the engine stopped Maximum 140 A room temperature When shifting into N position 1 second has elapsed after engine started with P position engine stopped head light ON A C fan high and READY light ON Maximum 30 A IDLING REQUEST Range NO YES Indicates the engine idling request Requesting idle YES INTAKE AIR Range Min 40 C Max 140 C Indicates the intake air temperature Constant Same as ambient air temperature INTERNAL RESISTANCE OHMS R01 R14 Range Min 0 Max 0 255 Indicates the internal resistance of each battery block Always 0 01 to 0 1 MAX BAT BLOCK Range 0 to 13 Indicates the battery block number with maximum voltage one of the numbers 0 to 13 MG1 INVERT TEMP Range Min 50 C Max 205 C Indicates MG1 inverter temperature e Undisturbed for 1 day at 25 C 77 F 25 C 77 F e Street driving 25 to 80 C 77 to 176 F e If the value is 50 58 B short in sensor circuit e I
262. Electronic Automatic Transmissions 4 but is available on most 1990 and later models For transmission codes select How To Get Codes from the Code Functions menu and the scan tool either displays manual code gathering instructions or gathers the codes for you For 4 transmissions that require manual code gathering Nissan uses Type 7c transmission codes Figure 14 6 and Table 14 4 on page 133 Code Code 5 Figure 14 6 Nissan Code Type 07c Table 14 4 Nissan Code Type 7c Used on Nissan 4EAT transmissions Pattern Long flash Read codes on Power A T Check or O D lamp depending on vehicle Start codes by Follow the appropriate Nissan procedure When done Codes clear automatically when the problem is fixed Code Type 7c consists of a 2 second flash followed by a 1 second pause then a series of ten short 0 1 second flashes Short flashes represent code numbers 1 through 10 A long 0 6 second flash indicates a fault at the indicated position For example Short Short Short Short Long Short Short Short Short Short indicates Code 5 because the fifth flash is long If no codes are present the ten flashes are all short 0 1 second The code sequence is followed by a 2 5 second pause a 2 second flash then the pattern repeats To read Nissan 4EAT transmission codes manually you must follow a specific diagnostic procedure Failure to do so may result in misreading codes or inaccurate diagnos
263. F ON Indicates the state of the battery indicator charging system lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC BATTERY VOLTS Range 0 00 to 19 0 Indicates the voltage measured at the battery positive voltage circuit of the instrument panel cluster IPC BRAKE LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the brake system indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC This lamp will also illuminate indicating that the parking brake is applied BRAKE WARN Range OFF ON Brake system warning CHECK GAUGES LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the cruise control system indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC CCNT Range actual Diagnostic trouble code count CRUISE CONTROL Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the cruise control system indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC 476 Data Parameters Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters DIC FUEL INFO SWITCH Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the fuel button of the driver information center DIC switch as monitored by the instrument panel cluster A closed switch is displayed as ON DIC PERSONALIZATION SW Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the personalization button of the driver information center DIC switch as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC A closed switch is displayed as ON DIC SELECT SWITCH Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the select
264. F when switched off SPD SEN FR Range NORM OPEN Indicates front right speed sensor open circuit detection Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected An OPEN reading indicates an open circuit 289 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters SPD SEN FL Range NORM OPEN Indicates front left speed sensor open detection Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected An OPEN reading indicates an open circuit SPD SEN RR Range NORM OPEN Indicates rear right speed sensor open detection Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected An OPEN reading indicates an open circuit SPD SEN RL Range NORM OPEN Indicates rear left speed sensor open detection Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected An OPEN reading indicates an open circuit SSC Range ON OFF Indicates the SSC operating status Reads ON when active reads OFF at all other times STEERING ANG STEERING ANGLE Range min 1152 deg max 1150 875 deg Indicates the steering angle sensor output in degrees Left turn Increase Right Turn Decrease STEERING SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the steering sensor open detection Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected An OPEN reading indicates an open circuit STOP LAMP SW STOP LIGHT SW Range ON OFF Indicates the stop light switch status Reads ON when the brake pedal is depressed OFF when the brake pedal is released ST
265. Figure 12 8 Analog voltmeter and terminal on 1988 1992 626 MX6 P To read 1993 94 Navajo 4 Wheel Antilock AWAL brakes codes 1 With the key off jump the white light blue and black wires Figure 12 9 2 Turn key on and remove the jumper within 5 seconds 3 Countflashes Code 16 is a system pass 1 Black Light Blue 2 Dark Green 3 Black 4 White Light Blue Figure 12 9 1993 94 Navajo with 4WAL 112 Testing Antilock Brake Systems P To read 1990 93 B Series and MPV ABS codes 1 Attach a jumper wire to Terminal C yellow wire Figure 12 10 Ground the jumper wire to the chassis for one second and release it Figure 12 10 Terminal C on 1990 93 B Series and MPV 2 Countflashes A flashing pattern consists of a number of short flashes and ends with a long flash Count flashes and include the long flash in the count IMPORTANT Always use a fused jumper wire when connecting to ground 12 2 1 ABS Main Menu After selecting ABS from the System Selection menu the Main Menu ABS displays Selections vary by model and year The following main menu selections are discussed here Service Codes on page 113 ABS Data Communication Guidelines on page 116 Refer to the manual for your diagnostic tool for information on other menu options Service Codes During a KOEO self test the ABS ECM transmits on demand codes On most systems continuous codes are gathered by selecting MEMORY CO
266. Figure 17 3 O2 sensor monitor tests Pending Codes Pending codes set when operating conditions are out of the normal range but not all the criteria to set a DTC occur For example a failure must occur on two consecutive trips or drive cycles before certain OBD II codes set In this case a pending code is recorded during the first trip when the failure first occurs 212 Generic OBD II Main Menu Selections Data No Codes OBD II vehicles transmit PCM operating data to the scan tool but do not broadcast DTCs in this mode The scan tool does not affect PCM operation and the vehicle can be driven normally for road testing Use the Codes Only selection to read DTCs Freeze Frame This selection lets you view certain data parameter readings that the vehicle stores the instant that a code DTC is set Parameters displayed will vary depending on the code 213 Data Parameters The following chapter provides definitions and operating ranges for the data stream parameters that display on the scan tool The scan tool can display all of the operating parameters available from the electronic control module of the vehicle which provides two basic kinds of parameters Digital discrete parameters are those that can be in only one of two states such as on or off open or closed high or low rich or lean and yes or no Switches relays and solenoids are examples of devices that provide discrete parameters on the data list Analog
267. GRVR 96 ips 2 976 EGRVR FAULT 377 EGT SENSOR 9G aiti ctt ette teeth ie e ee edge c i da tb t Dee odd tede Doa 377 EGT SENSOR M nier ERR eoim shana abeinentetim een eie 377 370 LOAD eet eei e P ep Reb E Rn 377 dNzede El maia i aa ar aadete a EEE anaes 377 ELEC LOAD Jis EE es 377 ElecPrSCttls er EO yere Lo e E e d IRE ERO PINE 377 reum C EET 500 Emi s Gas DP 300 ENABLE RELAY iine rernm e E DERE ERI UD FO e E er 282 ENCODER GEAR 487 ENCODER RETURN VOLTAGE c er te e pei c e E e Eee erede 487 ENCODER SUPPLY VOLTAGE 2 ttr bic o re Pace vitae e bd e a nda ba a OR I Ne Ho oed pe eda 487 ENG LOAD F nante ei vi uie adam eade enin 377 ENG OIL PRESS SW js s es 377 ENG OIIE TEMP tI RH t Rer ceteri i Ben od RE He AH P ER HE ERE 377 ENG OILTMP E 283 ENGON RUN iet there n tee e pain bee een em eeu 377 ENG RESTART iet tr ire ete orta ER VES RO Y Ee decer d eye a He e Gia 377 M 377 ENG RUN LE 469 ENG SPD FROM EFI ae Sivas 2 978 iia a nated iia di ie a ee
268. HEATERIBE LLL LU LM LA LM LL ACE 423 Tet taco etc 423 O2 HEATER O2 HEATER O2 LR B1S1 ms O2 LR B2S1 ms OZMO BSa ited M MA D RR e ARE AS uds ted d Netus Dt M UM LEAL A RUE O2 RL B1S1 ms O2 RL B2S1 ms m iE OS SENSOR a MEM DU A E a MBs c 424 OZB HTA GMD aa e are ues EER 424 2 2 1 COME denas eise tss 424 OM Da Sm Na d ML M LM LL 424 025 1 STATUS 025 2 STATUS DOS VAS WOMENS cos stc LE M ns oh ee LL 841 841 TA SIT CMPD eee uec ae caste lind al bee 341 028 A FS 341 DIS IA ESVHITELGMBIE uec I EL acd M D xe M M 424 OS VAEST HTR ENA 424 APE SVN ITIOR scc DM LLLI id Tah fo ane ee ied alin 341 028 A FS MONITOR Ne plu MONITOR dosi eos cae ML
269. I 1998 1 All All OBD II Legacy Sedan All All OBD II woe All All OBD II Wagon All All OBD II e All All OBD II M All All OBD II 1999 TE All All OBD II Legacy Sedan All All OBD II All All OBD II Wagon All All OBD II ps All All OBD II a All All OBD II 2009 Legacy Sedan All All OBD II oo All All OBD II Wagon All All OBD II 157 Subaru Testing Engine Systems Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 8 of 9 Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers o Code Reading Read 3 Year modei engine 8 codes Deneck memory Reading za 5 Connector Connectors ilocalons Forester All All OBD II Impreza All All OBD II Coupe Impreza All All OBD II Sedan 2001 All All OBD II Wagon Legacy Sedan All All OBD II Legacy All All OBD II Wagon Forester All All OBD II Impreza Sedan All All OBD II Impreza All All OBD II Wagon 2002 Legacy Outback All All OBD II Sedan Legacy Outback All All OBD II Wagon Baja All All OBD II Forester All All OBD II Impreza Sedan All All OBD II D All All OBD II 2003 agon Legacy Outback All All OBD II Sedan Legacy Outback All All OBD II Wagon Baja All All OBD II Forester All All OBD II Impreza Sedan All All OBD II Impreza All All OBD II 2004 Wagon Legacy Outback All All OBD II Sedan Leg
270. IME Range Min 0 min Max 65 535 min Indicates the elapsed time after starting engine with MIL ON MIL STATUS MIL Status MIL status Range ON OFF Indicates the malfunction indicator lamp MIL status e Constant ON repair in accordance with detected DTCs MIN BAT BLOCK Range 0 to 13 Indicates the battery block number with minimum voltage one of the numbers 0 to 13 M SHIFT SENSOR V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the output voltage of the shift position sensor main Selector lever in home position 2 0 to 3 0 V Shifting into position 4 0 to 4 8 V Shifting into B or D position 0 2 to 1 0 V 469 Data Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters MCYL CTRL POWER N m Range 512 Nm 508 Nm Indicates braking torque that is equivalent to the master cylinder hydraulic pressure Brake pedal depressed Changes with brake pedal pressure MOTOR1 TEMP Range Min 50 C Max 205 C Indicates MG2 motor temperature e Undisturbed for 1 day at 25 C 77 F 25 C 77 F e Street driving 25 to 80 C 77 to 176 F e If the value is 50 58 F Open or B short in sensor circuit e Ifthe value is 205 C 401 F GND short in sensor circuit MOTOR2 TEMP Range Min 50 C Max 205 C Indicates transaxle fluid temperature e Undisturbed for 1 day at 25 C 77 F 25 C 77 F e Street driving 25 to 80 C 77 to 176 F e If the value i
271. Indicates the Absolute Accelerator Pedal Position APP Number 1 e 10 to 25 Accelerator pedal released e 60 to 90 Accelerator pedal fully depressed ACCEL POS2 Range Min 0 Max 100 Indicates the Absolute Accelerator Pedal Position APP Number 2 e 20 to 45 Accelerator pedal released e 80 to 100 96 Accelerator pedal fully depressed 340 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ACCEL POS1 V Range Min 0 V Max 4 98 V Indicates the Absolute Accelerator Pedal Position APP sensor Number 1 voltage e 0 5to 1 1 V Accelerator pedal released e 2 6 to 4 5 V Accelerator pedal fully depressed ACCEL POS2 V Range Min 0 V Max 4 98 V Indicates the Absolute Accelerator Pedal Position APP sensor Number 2 voltage e 1 2to 2 0 V Accelerator pedal released e 3 4 to 5 0 V Accelerator pedal fully depressed ACCEL SSR 1 AD V Range Min 0 V Max 4 98 V Indicates the accelerator fully closed value Number 1 AD ACCPPA Range 0 to 100 Indicates the status of tolerator pedal position A ACCPPB Range 0 to 100 Indicates the status of tolerator pedal position B ACCS Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the air conditioning compressor cycling switch ACCS A C Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the air conditioning cycle switch ACCS Reads ON if the A C switch on the instrument panel is on or the PCM is commanding the A C compressor on In some cases the A C compresso
272. Indicates the status of the reverse switch Reads ON when the shift lever is in the R position RPM Range not available Indicates the engine speed S MODE SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the mode switch It reads ON when the switch is on S SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission S range switch SELF DIAG LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the Powershift or O D Off lamp on the instrument panel and the presence of a transmission diagnostic trouble codes on some vehicles It reads ON if a DTC set or the lamp is on or both OFF if no codes set and that the lamp is off 509 Data Parameters SFT ERROR CODE XX Range Indicates the cause of a single function test DFT error as a hex value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 10 Not under testing NOT TEST Oil temperature too low EOT LO Oil temperature too high EOT HI Engine speed to low RPM LO Engine speed to high RPM HI Wrong throttle condition TPS Throttle position to low TPS LO Throttle position to high TPS HI Wrong vehicle speed condition VSS Vehicle speed to low VSS LO Vehicle speed to high VSS HI Brake switch OFF BOO OFF Brake switch ON BOO ON Wrong switch lever position MLP POS Engine is running Operational parameter is out of range Shift request not sequential 11 Shift request too low 12 13 14 15 16 18
273. Indicates the volume of intake air to the engine as Hertz it reads e From 25 to 50 Hz at idle 700 RPM e From 70 to 100 Hz at 2000 RPM depending on engine displacement AIRFLOW mS Range 0 to 625 mS Indicates the volume of intake air to the engine as milliseconds AIRFLOW g s Range 0 to 500 g s AIRFLOW m3 h Range 0 to 255 m3 h AIRFLOW kg h Range 0 to 408 kg h Indicates the amount of air flowing into the engine The ECM calculates this value of intake airflow based on the MAF sensor output Readings which display as grams per second g s cubic meters per hour m3 h or kilograms per hour kg h should be low at idle and increase as the throttle opens AIRFLOW V AIRFLOW mV Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the volume of intake air entering the engine it reads A5V when there is no airflow AOV at maximum airflow As air volume increases the voltage output decreases AIRFLOW RESET Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the airflow reset function on some turbocharged vehicles this function resets the airflow sensor when there is a change from high speed heavy load driving to sudden deceleration Reads ON only when airflow reset is activated AKNOCK AKNOCK 1 AKNOCK 2 Range not available Indicates the status of the knock sensor signal 346 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ALL LAMPS Range ON OFF Indicates the status of all warning lamps ALL SEG Range not available Indicates t
274. Indicates whether a DTC exists for any of the range indicator lamps on the instrument panel The reading alternates between ON and OFF if there is a DTC present the appropriate indicator light blinks as well INGEAR Range YES NO Indicates the in gear status INJ mS Range 0 0 to 99 9 mS Indicates the fuel pulse width INPUT RPM Range actual Indicates the turbine shaft speed K D SERVO SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the kickdown servo which activates the piston that controls the kickdown band It reads OFF when the kickdown band is applied it reads ON when the kickdown band is not applied K D SW KICKDOWN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command for a downshift during acceleration it reads ON if the ECM has commanded a downshift KICK DOWN SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of an accelerator pedal switch It reads ON when the pedal is fully depressed to initiate a transmission downshift L SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission L range switch LAST SHFT SEC Range 0 to 6 38 seconds Indicates the actual shift time of the last upshift LEDA Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the shift indicator light control It reads ON when the gear selector lever is in 4th or 5th position in the sequential mode LEDB Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the shift indicator light control It reads ON when the gear selector lever is in 2nd or 3rd position in the sequential mode
275. Intermittent Failure SRS indicator blinks like this Table 8 14 Honda SRS Code Type 06 Intermittent Failure Pattern Main code sub code stays on Read codes on SRS warning lamp Short the SCS and turn key on SRS warning light will turn on then off after 3 0 Start codes by seconds Code will then flash then indicator stays on representing intermittent failure Clearing codes See Code Clearing on page 71 When done Clear codes 2004 Civic CR V Insight and S 2000 69 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS System is normal n d indicator stays on Key On 1 No Codes Figure 8 24 Honda SRS Code Type 06 Normal no failure SRS indicator stays on Table 8 15 Honda SRS Code Type 06 Normal no failure Pattern No code stays on Read codes on SRS warning lamp Short the SCS and turn key on SRS warning light will turn on then off after 3 0 edes seconds The indicator will then stay on indicating that the system is normal Clearing codes See Code Clearing on page 71 When done Clear codes 2004 Civic CR V Insight and S 2000 1 2 Sec 0 3 Sec 20 ili 1220 ty rStart of Next Code Key On 2 Pulse l 14 Code 23 gt 1 3 1 1 4 Figure 8 25 Honda SRS Code Type 07 Table 8 16 Honda SRS Code Type 07 Pattern Main co
276. K RELAY In order to see the FRONT DOOR LOCK RELAY parameter change state a remote keyless entry or key fob lock signal is needed to request the BCM to command the FRONT and or REAR DOOR LOCK RELAY to lock one or all the doors A vehicle that is not equipped with a remote keyless entry option may switch the parameters in a different manner Codes Range 0 to 255 Displays the number of diagnostic trouble codes DTCs in memory 1TOUCH DN Range ON OFF Indicates the one touch down switch status ACC Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ignition switch Reads ON when the switch is in the accessory position reads OFF at all other times Acc On Sw Range ON OFF Indicates whether the ignition switch is in the accessory ACC position Reads ON with the switch in ACC position and OFF at all other times 300 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters ACC Relay Mon Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ignition accessory relay monitor Reads ON when the ignition switch is in the accessory position reads OFF when the switch is off ACSW Range ON OFF Indicates the air conditioning switch status AFS Off Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the AFS off switch reads ON when the switch is on and OFF when off Alarm Function Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the panic function of the alarm system Reads ON when panic is active reads OFF when panic is disabled Air Cond Sw Rang
277. L reete ete eire 321 amp M M KICKDOWN SW KICK DOWN SWITCH KNOCK ADVANCE KNOCK CRRT E e d m um pU IL I ELI CBE S e c crt esce UE Mer A dr LIN MN Aloe MIN EE I KNOCK OTRE EG US uon epe IA DM DAMM SM A a KNOGK OIM EEE E LI M KNOCK VAI IM KNOCK RBC is e ne cre esce M DID MA LC UD KNOCK RET 9 KNOCK RETARD 2 KNOCK RETARD CYL 1 KNOCK RETARD CYL 2 ag M 408 504 247 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters LAMP 50297 LAST SEC 504 P Veg Maipo a a P 321 Lateh Circuits st en eni ater ni IR I 321 EATERAL G I S2 ERE EH EVO ea ae ead ea ean YR Ee Vd 285 EBEAM AUTO a eerte eme bee een EH EP de a inn riri Pe EE EP Per rr 321 a e c E D 408 LDP3EVAPOP A so nin etn REPE EP RE e EEUU C cea IE Oe hi EP A ERE E oe 408 LDP IDL A LDP MON A LDPREER A 2 ete
278. L POS2 V TIHRT BEBAY ict ten tnt de esL tende TARTE REQ POS PM 445 TERIEREQPOS VJ 2 eter m ei em ett e i reden dee deese ir 445 THRTL SSR 1 446 TART SSRHT Vinn 446 TARTE SSR 1 AD V aaa teat ver eec e e edd ENEN EENE 446 270 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters THRTL SSR 2 V 446 THRTL SSR 422 V 446 TIME DTC CLEAR 446 TIME DIG GEEAR MIN rti ie nee recie d ie e p EE RU tea EE e de 473 TIMES ON HOURS deine einai aioe Gitte irene Gaede re 298 TIME ON TIMESES TIMING BTDC Tire CARIOr M 485 Tire 1 4 100 485 IGrmeR 485 Tire Pross IOEIUrI 485 BEC EdGru ee A A 485 Tire Temp D 485 Tire Tomp mtm 485 Tire Temp 3 485 Tite Tomp A Pes see ioe ceed echt ache Neve Uc eec de pe temer d ehe 485
279. M command to the malfunction indicator lamp MIL on the instrument panel Readings should correspond to the actual state of the MIL Suspect a MIL circuit problem if the value does not match the MIL condition MIL DIST Range 0 to 65535 mi or km Indicates the distance the vehicle has been driven since the malfunction indicator lamp MIL was switched on by the PCM The display reads 0 unless the MIL has been commanded on Once activated the accumulated kilometers or miles display When PCM memory is cleared or if 40 warm up cycles occur without the MIL setting conditions reoccurring the display resets to 0 O2 B1 S1 mV O2 B1 S2 mV O2 B1 S3 mV O2 B1 S4 mV O2 B2 S1 mV O2 B2 S2 mV O2 B2 S3 mV O2 B2 S4 mV Range 0 to 1800 mV Indicates the oxygen sensor O2S signal as millivolts mV The O2S is the primary sensor that indicates whether the engine is running rich or lean The O2S generates a voltage signal that ranges from 0 to 1000 mV A high millivolt signal indicates a rich exhaust a low signal indicates a lean exhaust In normal operation the oxygen sensor voltage ranges from 100 to 1000 mV The sensor must be hot above 500 F 260 C and the system must be in closed loop before the PCM corrects the fuel mixture in response to the O2S signal The prefixes B1 and B2 correlate to the O2S for banks 1 and 2 Bank 1 is always the bank that contains number 1 or the first cylinder in the firing order Suffix S1 indicates a pre cata
280. Max 0 W Indicates the charge control power value Normal is 25 000 W or more WOUT Range Min 0 kW Max 63 5 Kw Indicates the discharge control wattage which is sent from battery ECU to hybrid vehicle control ECU 21 kW or less WOUT CTRL POWER W Range Min 0 W Max 81 600 W Indicates the discharge control power value Normal is 21 000 W or less 472 Data Parameters OBD II Readiness Monitors OBD II Readiness Monitors This section defines generic OBD II readiness monitor parameters To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page A C REFRIG Range READY NOT DONE N A No description available AIR Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates and monitors the function of the secondary air system and tests the ability of the AIR system to inject air into the exhaust This monitor relies on O2S feedback to determine the presence of air flow Inputs from the ECT IAT and CKP sensors and the O2S monitor are required to enable the AIR monitor CAT Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates when the catalytic converter has fallen below a minimum level of effectiveness Inputs from the ECT IAT and TP sensors are required to enable this monitor Some vehicles may also require CKP and VSS inputs When this monitor is READY it relies mainly on inputs from the oxygen sensors COMPONENTS Range READY NOT DONE N A Indicates when a malfunction occurs in any PCM
281. N ID torte eter eret ee rre terere temere ERE RE videte rere Aen 469 DRIVE CONDITION eset tiere te ente vorrei nb in eene gue AO 469 DRIVE GOUH T 4 a oti ee Pr er P E ERO REO EE REO A eati e 372 DRIVE 9 500 231 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters DRIVE DIST km mile 2 372 DRIVE POSITION nati Ever rete oW mm T EE EO E 500 DRIVE TIME miti ost ote ego C ted re d eee er eye ttt eter peces e v Ro ve ey tib be EE ve i de deeds 372 DRIVEGNT neto ren eh Eie Pr ere ER EE ate REED ERE RATIO 372 E 500 Driver Lock POSitiON rever eer erre e terere eere ree de e iere deter 311 Driver PSDQBW ee tn d a MR bep tbv et Med ve SI st 312 DRIVER ER DOOR AJAR SW i iir tree ad e EG Ee EET EG HE HEINE EE UE ET RE entices 312 DRIVING MILEAGE ipai BE eiie niet e etre Enn e nim nte atn ne t ea DREK RLY DRUNLK RLY DRV IMPACT ID DVSP W Auto SW ihnen EHE EHE ER PR EE ited EE ERE ETHER DPW DOWN SW eerie e tva Y PA RR EACH PITE BAUER
282. NEDG 6 a om A RE LA MAT A hk setts In INA LAU A TT IA prime 393 CQ APTBIAAE EE 393 a LEE EE EN MEM 502 G SENSOR V a dr nn d NEC RD a TA a a a 285 H HAC PRS ZONE 3 dc ae e E Co eet le eee 393 Hand Freg O 300 Hazard Answer Back rettet e iei edere taie n ae ee n e boe ene kde 316 Hazard Sw HAZARD HBEAMSW HC PRES SW HG 96 itt nie meti ei ore RE ee enin ie eedem inan 501 LMP SW Head Lamp SW 1 24 conet poe tr d reta cte e e nodu e D Dade y Aube oe y ote 316 HEAD LAMP SW 2 is Dis 316 2 Antti aaa 316 HEADB EAMP SW RR Rote E Reto eren PRU diede t diii en dene test d eS 316 Head Fight SW race rc t evecta c te teret te pa a e ebbe 316 Headlamp Auto Signal is iter rere Sheets hea ehe e ei de niet 303 5 epe rt tee c ee pea atre doeet te eed cen nv vod Ve re eet aloe ee d canine 316 HEADLAMP WASHER 5 rns ceci riter t E b HI ip esce tto Pepe en 316 d a e eee e d td ep be dug Na d aad M rnv e ead HEADLIGHT SW HEADLIGHT SW x HEATED CAT Htm Reti e e et ie dite
283. NO atall other times LOW FUEL INDI Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the low fuel indicator lamp on the instrument cluster It should read ON when the low fuel indicator lamp is on The low fuel lamp blinks if a malfunction is detected in the fuel tank pressure or temperature sensor circuits 408 Data Parameters Engine Parameters LOW OIL LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the engine oil pressure lamp It should read ON when the engine oil pressure indicator lamp is on LOW OIL LEVEL Range YES NO Indicates the status of the engine oil level is low it reads YES when the PCM detects a low engine oil level NO under normal operation LOW OIL PRESS Range YES NO Indicates the status of the engine oil pressure sensor it reads YES when oil pressure is low NO under normal operation LOW RPM RANGE Range ON OFF Indicates whether the engine is operating in the low RPM range It reads ON during low RPM operation and OFF at all other times LOW SELECTED Range YES NO Indicates the transmission L range switch LT ADP B2S2 ms Range not available Indicates the long term ADP values of the rear O2S for compensating fuel LT ALPHA LT ALPHA B2 LT TRIM 1 LT TRIM 2 LT TRIM B1 LT TRIM B2 Range variable Indicates whether the ECM is commanding a rich or a lean mixture as part of the long term fuel metering correction strategy The value changes in response to
284. O e mE CKP A NO PULSE x INO IG Ee asad ae nu c p ace ace pM A Mice LU DL MEE Uf CKP B NO PULSE Lei cud ecu a P LL LULA I Delta OL dE PESE Linde ez t Leu eR RUEDAS p t a ce Delt eS HE Urt pM Us 226 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters NOISE CKP RESYNCS SENSORS deut tocco cube naa beide ctt t Ceu ioc BE ted ceminiet a tal ang hg i naan LIE DULL aM A RE CLEAR a CR DST EM O ER d LA LE DE ME f B c NON ERR RR RE CLUTCH SWITCH 363 CMP m tm e imet eH p Eee mte as mee RED OMP 2 NOJPULSE ate eno Penh d ta ed ia n M a a n eder e Nr ee E PULSE intende RH an PRI tia iia mms i1 ay wo I zt PE GMP BINQ PUESE 7 S oie an eene ei ee ee ee eh ETE GMP B NOISE ctt ete tex p C bebe d b Ee ro needed id bad ve i bao GMP GFERIU S si rh AURIS neu RU mann Rid CTRL CMD 9 CMP NO PULSE COUNTS OGMP NOISE 7 Ehe e E REI e Ae oes mi
285. OFF ON OFF 0 to vehicle max actual YES NO ON OFF Indicates whether the shift selector lever has been moved to initiate an upshift reads ON if an upshift has been requested UP SW Range ON OFF Indicates whether the ECM is allowing an upshift reads ON when an upshift is allowed VBATT V Range Indicates the battery position voltage 521 0 0 to 16 0 V Data Parameters Transmission Parameters VEH SPEED Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the vehicle speed VPoWeR V VPWR V Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the battery positive voltage VPWR BATT V Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the module supply voltage vss Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the vehicle speed VSS METER Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the digital input from the VSS analog to digital converter in the instrument meter WAC WOT Range ON OFF Indicates the wide open throttle air conditioning cut out 522 A 1 A 2 A 3 Troubleshooting The vehicles listed in the following sections are specific Asian Import models that may have problems communicating with the scan tool Slow Codes for Many 1988 and Later Mitsubishi Chrysler Imports and Hyundai Sonata Models with the 2 4L 4 cylinder or the 3 0L V6 SOHC engine transmit data at 63 baud rate It may appear that there is a communication problem when actually data is transmitting at a very slow speed The Main Menu for these vehicles displays Codes and
286. ON when active and off when disabled When active all doors automatically lock when the gear selector lever is moved to drive position while the ignition is switched on LOW BEAM DUTY CYCLE 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the pulse width modulated PWM ground signal controlling the headlamp driver module HDM The BCM uses this feature to signal the HDM to operate the low beam head lamps in low beam headlamp mode at full intensity 10096 or in DRL mode at a reduced intensity 81 LR_AJAR Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the left rear door ajar status LR_ID Range actual Indicates the left rear tire transmitter identifier LR_LRN Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the left rear learn status 321 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters LR MES Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the left rear measure status LR NORM Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the left rear normal status LR REC Range YES NO Indicates the left rear transmit received after learn LRAWAKE Range YES NO Indicates the left rear awake status LRIDPRG Range YES NO Indicates the left rear sensor programmed LRLOBAT Range LOW OK Indicates the left rear low battery LRO PSI Range actual Indicates the left rear outer tire pressure Lugg Courtesy Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the luggage courtesy lamp switch Reads ON when the luggage compartment courtesy lamp switch is turned on and OFF
287. ON when the switch is on and OFF at all other times Hazard Answer Back Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the wireless hazard answer back system Reads ON when the system is active reads OFF when the system is disabled HBEAMSW Range ON OFF Indicates the high beam switch status HEADLAMP HEAD LAMP SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the headlamp switch signal circuit Head Lamp Sw 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the status of head lamp switch 1 low beams reads ON when the switch is on Head Lamp SW 2 HEAD LAMP SW 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the headlamp switch 2 reads ON when the switch is on Headlamp Signal Head Light Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the light control switch Reads ON when the switch is set to the head position and reads OFF at all other times HEADLAMP WASHER Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the headlamp washer switch Reads ON when the switch is activated and OFF at all other times 314 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters HI BEAM SW HIGH BEAM SELECT Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the high beam switch Reads ON when the switch is in the position that activates the high beams High Beam SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the high beam light switch reads ON when the switch is on Hood Sw HOOD SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the engine compartment hood switch Reads ON if the hood is open an
288. R ANGLE Range 720 to 720 Indicates steering angle detected by the steering angle sensor Approximately 0 when straight ahead 720 to 720 when vehicle is moving STROKE SEN 1 Range NORM OPEN Indicates the stop light switch status Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected An OPEN reading indicates an open circuit TCS OFF LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates TCS OFF lamp status ON indicates TCS OFF lamp is on OFF indicates TCS OFF lamp is off TCS OFF SW Range OFF ON Indicates TCS OFF switch status ON indicates switch is pressed OFF indicates switch is not pressed 290 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters TEST MODE Range NORM TEST Indicates the test mode status Reads NORM normal unless test mode is active reads TEST only during test mode operation TRAC STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the TRAC control operating status Reads ON when TRAC is active reads OFF at all other times TRAC BRK STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the TRAC brake control status V R OUTPUT Range OFF ON Indicates status of actuator relay ON indicates relay is active KOER OFF indicates relay is inactive KOEO VDC OFF LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates VDC OFF lamp status ON indicates VDC OFF lamp is on OFF indicates VDC OFF lamp is off VDC OFF SW Range OFF ON Indicates VDC OFF switch status ON indicates switch is pressed OFF indicates switch is not pressed VEH SPEED Range 0
289. R R Front wiper request T R High beam request T R R Horn chirp R Ignition switch T R Low beam request T R Position lights request T R R Rear window defogger switch T R Sleep request 1 T R Sleep request 2 T R Theft warning horn request T R Tire pressure T R Turn indicator T R Wake up request 1 T R Fuel level sensor R T Manual mode shift down R T Manual mode shift up R T Manual mode R T Not manual mode R T Seat belt buckle switch R T Stop lamp switch R T Vehicle speed sensor d B i I R T A T shift schedule change demand R T ABS operation R T ABS warning lamp R T 140 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Controller Area Network CAN Systems Table 14 8 CAN 2 and 3 communication signal identification part 3 of 3 Control Unit ECM TCM BCM M amp A ABS IPDM E Brake warning lamp R T SLIP indicator lamp R TSC OFF indicator lamp R T Front wiper stop position R Signal High beam status R Hood switch R Low beam status R Rear window defogger control switch R Table 14 9 CAN Type 4 and 5 communication signal identification part 1 of 2 Control Unit ABS TCM BCM M amp A STRG IPDM E R Signal m A C Compressor feedback A C Compressor request Accelerator pedal position ASCD CRUISE lamp ASCD OD cancel request ASCD operation ASCD SET lamp Battery voltage Closed throttle po
290. RD SWIUTGEL 4 eo Ci tede te beer bee e een D vd ex ga Cd end a i dd e db d das Fosse casita ERR In RETE FPIMODE PORES RELAY ier we ete mee n eren eter ea ER E ed Ete v ve REPRE e E RH MEC EPTDR M ie reet E etre va ea I I A tegi Give nated cen E DI BRIABS STATUS ie rore ER Ee EE RR Ree Pd E ORE EE eta er FR ACM SOL CURRENT FR ACM SOL MAX CURRENT FR ACM SOL MIN CURRENT ii sienten vie WU PIRE in meia Ae i FR OPERATE TEN GENERE ENSE RENE VOR EVE EE 237 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters FR PRS SEN V 284 FR RQST TORQ 284 FR SENS RANGE teeta ette ibat t tae da Ha e hp eren c a p ric t be LH Ded got e EN ee teda da tees 477 EB SENS VOLTS x niente ie nien e n atem ei ena mte 477 5 65 DS 477 ER VSC STATUS eit ote tei n d etd n E epe be E n Ga aden FRW SEN TEE FR W C SENS V FR WASHER SW ER WHEEL ACCEL m S2 inaa e Re ie IE e d i ed e b eyed bed 285 FR WHEEL iei eate trei ae red ld n P tee M a eed psc Ea a Ld ette ded dea 285 ER WIPERCEI eatem etie ale eie einen ean 315 ER E
291. RPM The powertrain control module PCM computes the engine RPM The instrument panel cluster IPC monitors the engine RPM circuit from the PCM Engine RPM should remain close to the desired idle under various engine loads with the engine idling Fuel Gauge FUEL_LEVEL Range 0 to 100 Indicates the amount of fuel in the tank as a percentage GATE or CARGO DOOR AJAR Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the lift gate switch as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC When the lift gate or cargo door is opened the lift gate switch closes A closed switch is displayed as ON HD_LMP_SW Range OFF ON Head lamp switch HIGH BEAM LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the headlamp high beam indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC IGN CYCLES SINCE LAST DTC Range 0 to 50 Indicates 0 to 50 The IPC counts the number of times the ignition is cycled since the current DTC was set IGN_KEY Range IN OUT Indicates ignition key IGNITION 1 V Range 0 00 to 19 0 Indicates voltage measured on the ignition 1 voltage circuit of the instrument panel cluster IPC INST_VBAT Range 010 16 V Instrument cluster module voltage LEFT TURN SIGNAL Range OFF ON Indicates the left turn signal supply voltage circuit as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC An active turn signal will toggle the parameter between OFF and ON Light Rheostat Range 0 to 255 Indicates the position
292. Range YES NO Indicates the state of the normally closed TCC release switch It reads YES if the switch is open the TCC is released e NO if the switch is closed the TCC is applied TCC SLIP RPM Range 0 to engine max or 4080 to 4079 rpm Indicates the TCC slip rate on some 4T60E transaxles and 4L60E and 4L80E transmissions For a 4T60E transaxle TCC SLIP RPM reads as follow Anegative value means engine speed is less than turbine speed deceleration A positive value means engine speed is greater than turbine speed acceleration Avalue of zero means engine speed equals turbine speed TCC is applied For 4L60E and 4L80E transmissions the speed difference between input and output vanes of the torque converter displays TCC SOL 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the signal the ECM is applying to the torque converter clutch TCC solenoid As the value increases so does the degree of TCC lockup 515 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters TCC Range 0 to 100 Indicates the pulse width modulated PWM signal to the torque converter clutch TCC TCC_FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a torque converter clutch fault TCC_MES A Range 0 0 to 5 0A Indicates the measured current for the TCC pressure control TCCA V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the torque converter clutch actual TCCC Range 0 to 100 Indicates the torque converter clutch control solenoid TCCFault R
293. Range min 25 11 m s2 to max 24 91 m s2 Indicates the lateral G force 283 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters LF MOTOR AMPS RF MOTOR AMPS REAR MOTOR AMPS Range 0to 20A Indicates the output current the ABS control module is applying to the motors as amperes The reading is a positive value when the motors are driven forward and negative when the motors are driven in reverse During motor operation this value should be higher than the current displayed by the MOTOR FBK parameters LF MOTOR FBK RF MOTOR FBK REAR MOTOR FBK Range 0to 20A Indicates the feedback current measured by the ABS control module from the drive motors During motor operation this value should be lower than the current being displayed by the MOTOR AMPS parameters LF WHEEL MPH RF WHEEL MPH RR WHEEL MPH WHEEL SPD FL WHEEL SPD FR WHEEL SPD RL LR WHEEL MPH WHEEL SPD RR Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the speed of the individual wheels which is calculated by the ABS control module from the input voltage signals of the wheel speed sensors Wheel speeds should be equal to each other and to vehicle speed as the vehicle is driven in a straight line without braking Wheel speeds vary when turning and may vary during braking without antilock operations During ABS braking wheel speeds should remain close to equal LF WSPD Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the left front wheel speed sensor LR WSPD Range
294. Read trouble codes before selecting a functional test otherwise codes may be lost There are five diagnostic modes built into vehicles with ECCS Mode 1 Exhaust monitor e Mode 2 Air Fuel Check Mode 3 Self Diagnosis Mode 4 Switch Test Mode 5 Real Time Monitor A Base Idle Test is also available on the menu However this special test is not a standard ECCS mode test The sections that follow describe each of these functional tests The self diagnosis mode mode 3 is not available on the Functional Tests menu This mode is entered when you select Auto Code Read from the Code Functions menu Once you select a functional test the scan tool automatically switches the ECM to the correct mode and tells you how to begin the testing As the ECM changes modes LEDs 3 and 4 on the scan tool flash the corresponding mode number Exhaust Monitor Test Mode 1 The Exhaust Monitor test lets you monitor the mixture ratio feedback signal from the oxygen sensor O2S P To perform an Exhaust Monitor test 1 Select Exhaust Monitor from the Functional Tests menu A test initialization screen displays 2 Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature Select to begin the test When prompted raise and hold engine speed at 2000 RPM The display shows Lean when the exhaust is lean and Rich when rich LED 3 on the scan tool flashes to indicate that the scan tool is receiving a signal from the 028 Ai
295. Revolutions Per Minute engine speed SCS Service Check Signal 533 Glossary SOL Solenoid SPI Single Point Injection An electronically controlled fuel injection system in which one or more fuel injectors are located in a throttle body Also referred to as Throttle Body Fuel Injection TBI SRS Supplemental Restraint System airbags SW Switch TAC Throttle Actuator Control TCM Transmission Control Module TCS Traction Control System TEMP Temperature TFP Transmission Fluid Pressure Positive pressure in a transmission hydraulic system THROT Throttle TP Throttle Position V Voltage or Volts VAC Vacuum VEH Vehicle VIN Vehicle Identification Number VPWR Vehicle Power VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor 534 Glossary VSV Vacuum Switching Valve VTD Vehicle Theft Deterrent VVT Variable Valve Timing WOT Wide Open Throttle XFER Transfer 535 Index Numerics 2 2 CL 1997 engine connector locations 13 1997 transmission connector locations 20 2 3 CL 1998 1999 engine connector locations 13 1998 1999 transmission connector locations 2 5 TL 1995 connector locations 14 1995 1996 SRS code reading 30 1995 1998 engine connector locations 13 1995 1998 transmission connector locations 2004 RL 2004 ABS code reading 26 3 0 CL 1997 1999 engine connector locations 13 1997 1999 transmission connector locations 3 2 CL 2001 2003 engine connector locations 13 2001 2003 transmission co
296. S 28 Code Clearing 31 Manual Code Reading 29 SRS Codes and Data Testing SRS MAIN MENU 28 Testing Transmission Systems 19 Code Reading connector locations 19 Transmission service check connector locations 19 Amigo 1988 1995 connector locations 84 1990 1994 ABS connector locations 89 1990 1994 engine connector locations 81 1990 1994 transmission connector locations 82 Ascender 2003 2004 engine connector locations 81 Avenger 1995 2000 connector locations 34 Axiom 536 2002 2004 engine connector locations 81 Index B Series 1990 1993 ABS code reading 113 C Celica 2000 and later SRS code reading 203 Chrysler Imports 33 Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Systems 33 ABS Manual Code Reading 36 Actuator Tests 37 Clearing Codes 36 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 33 Codes amp Data Slow 37 Common connector locations 33 Injector Tests Engine Running Only 37 troubleshooting 523 Civic 1985 1991 ECM and LED locations 57 1992 2004 connector locations 55 1994 2000 SRS code clearing 72 2001 2004 SRS code clearing 75 Code 129 Colt 1987 1996 turbo connector locations 34 1988 1990 wagon connector locations 34 1989 1996 connector locations 34 Conquest 1984 1989 connector locations 34 Cordia 1984 1988 connector locations 118 Cressida 1983 1984 connectors 199 troubleshooting 523 CR V 1997 2001 SRS code clearing 75 1997 2004 connector locations 55 2002 2004 SRS code clearing 75 CRX
297. S V absolute pressure voltage as follows MAP displays if the ABSOL PRES V parameter shows MAP voltage BARO displays if the ABSOL PRES V parameter shows BARO voltage MAP BARO SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the MAP BARO solenoid status MAP BARO Hg Range see below Indicates the barometric pressure which is calculated by the PCM based on the frequency of the barometric pressure BP sensor signal This parameter reads as follows 30 1 inHg at sea level 23 inHg at 7 000 feet MAP BARO V Range 2 6 to 4 6 V Indicates the barometric pressure as voltage and should read as follows 4 6 sea level 2 6 elevation of 10 000 feet MAP FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the manifold absolute pressure sensor status Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F Indicates the ECM calculated manifold air temperature MAT the temperature of the intake air charge A thermistor type temperature sensor installed in the intake manifold is usually used to measure intake air temperature the ECM converts MAT sensor voltage to an air temperature reading The MAT reading should be close to ambient air temperature on a cold engine and should rise steadily as the engine warms High temperature MAT readings may differ greatly from vehicle to vehicle because of the underhood temperature variations and hot soak conditions MAX ENG SPD RPM Range 0 to engine max Indicates the m
298. SE MEAS SSF A A FAULT E eheu MM DLL M NE M MA adulta leis SEEN RR DM MED ILI A uiu uh de Nn a CCELI DER E UE MEPMAXS e c ups epe pL RR aM Me A MS Mar INUEFT actrees teta ira att ethene Pane downoad neat aede 470 REV luu UA DU i E 470 TOR ANTI ouest ett cett ERN ct Ed DR cct RUN EUN RECO Mol uA 470 251 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters MG1 TORQ EXEC VAL N m 2 471 MG2 INVERT edet rome pie a iHe D P GREG Re te EE Oa 471 MGZ REV RPM per P 471 MG2 TORQ itenim e n edd eee eiue an RN diee 471 MG2 TORQ EXEG VAL N m trea e Ur e Een EH P Pe Ye EO E HE E ice URGE ve Ede 471 MIL DIST osien 417 MIL DIST cade t D be ta tcp a e SE LIU Geer enon 463 MEON RUN DIST i e eerte hice er E ie toe REOR EHE E OE RN eee 417 MIL ON RUN DIST 2 471 MIE ON R N TIME MIN irit teet ipt been ett eere Has a dedi n iiiter e E een eii de 417 MILZON RUNSTIME tect sca caet tbe de tci re te tcl dece a Ue y bee
299. SENS VOLTS RR SENS VOLTS Range A 0 1198 Indicates the sensor volts Normal range is 0 V to 4 7 V FL SENS WEIGHT Ibs FR SENS WEIGHT lbs RL SENS WEIGHT Ibs RR SENS WEIGHT Ibs Range 38 Ibs to 82 05 Indicates the relative weight input to seat sensor Normal range is 38 lbs to 82 165 TOTAL WEIGHT Ibs Range 150 Ibs to 283 Ibs Indicates the relative weight input to seat sensor Normal range is 150 Ibs to 283 Ibs D BUCKLE SW Range ON OFF NG Indicates the driver buckle switch status P BUCKLE SW Range ON OFF NG Indicates the passenger buckle switch status 475 Data Parameters Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters This section defines data parameters available from the instrument panel cluster IPC assemblies that have the ability to communicate with a scan tool via the DLC connector To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page ABS LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the antilock brake system ABS indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC ABS WARN Range OFF ON Antilock brake system ABS indicator lamp warning AIR BAG LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the airbag system or supplemental inflatable restraint system SIR indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC BATTERY LAMP Range OF
300. SI SW PNP SWITCH PNP SW PNP SWT Range Transmission Parameters ON OFF Indicates the position of the park neutral position PNP switch it should read on only with the gear selector lever in N or P position P N SWITCH PNP SW NSW Range Indicates the signal from the park neutral position PNP switch see below What characters display in the range depend on the vehicle On most the readings for this parameter are PARK REV NEUT DRIVE 2ND and LOW Others use either P N for park and neutral or R DL for reverse and forward gears If the range displays a number that number corresponds to the presently engaged gear The display shows question marks between gears or when the signal is invalid P N POS ParkNeuPos Range Indicates the Park Neutral position P S PRESS SW Range Indicates the power steering pressure switch PCA Range Indicates the pressure control solenoid A PCA FAULT Range Indicates the pressure control solenoid A status PCAA A Range Indicates the pressure control solenoid A AMP PCB Range Indicates the pressure control solenoid B PCB FAULT Range Indicates the pressure control solenoid B status PCBA A Range Indicates the pressure control solenoid B AMP PCF Range Indicates the line pressure control 507 PARK NEUT ON OFF not available YES NO 0 0 to 5 0A not available YES NO 0 0 to 5 0A not available
301. SSURE High Vacuum Figure 18 1 Air pressure relationships Turbocharger boost operation also affects manifold pressure When a turbocharger is providing boost pressure manifold absolute pressure rises above atmospheric pressure Depending on the control system and sensors used on an engine one or more of the MAP BARO or vacuum parameters display on the scan tool It may also display boost pressure on a turbocharged engine Parameters display as both a voltage reading from the sensor and as a pressure measurement in either kilopascal kPa or inches of mercury Hg The preset measurements for all three values are in kPa 215 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Numerics CODES TC 302 CARB CODES nie ET Aem 936 HOO DES reese DEN 336 POODES wastes nummi mote Me eat i i 467 B e nite 467 IBM NOLTS Rm aie maie temen maie aeu 336 tena eens acre s e ete dur 336 INDICATOR aana Ree RUIN RS 490 T POS SWITGELE ir pete deep eU desc UN acce a ned ed eic de e d b t oda t eee 490 TSYS BRAKE s UR nme NUR nn NUS E namen ee 280 1 2 ERROR SEC o EN EN we 490 T 2 SWIFT SEC sewed GeO enam anteire dente 490 12 SOL CKT STAT
302. ST TRIM 96 ST TRIM B1 ST TRIM B2 ST TRIM 1 90 ST TRIM 2 90 TRIM 1 51 96 TRIM B1 S2 96 TRIM B2 S1 TRIM B2 S2 Range 25 to 25 100 to 100 or 0 to 200 Indicates the short term fuel trim correction as a percentage The short term fuel trim represents a short term correction to fuel delivery by the PCM in response to the amount of time the oxygen sensor O2S voltage spends above or below the 450 mV threshold Trim number prefixes B1 and B2 correlate to banks 1 and 2 Bank 1 is always the bank that contains the number 1 cylinder TRIM number suffix S1 indicates a pre catalyst O2S input while suffix S2 indicates a post catalyst O2S input Short term fuel trim ranges from 100 to 100 25 to 25 or 0 to 200 depending the vehicle Depending on which scale is used zero or 100 percent serves as the midpoint A number above the midpoint indicates the PCM is commanding a long term rich mixture correction A number the midpoint indicates the PCM is commanding a lean mixture Under certain conditions such as an extended idle and a high ambient temperature the canister purge may cause the short term fuel trim to read in the negative range during normal operation The fuel trim values at maximum may indicate an excessively rich or lean system 435 Data Parameters Engine Parameters Short term fuel trim leads the long term trim LT TRIM When a pattern or trend of short term corrections to fue
303. Sec 251 L R Sec B1S1 R L Sec B2S1 R L Sec Range 0 to 1 000 sec O2 LR B1S1 ms O2 LR B2S1 ms 02 RL B1S1 ms 02 RL B2S1 ms Range 0 to 1000 ms Indicates the lean to rich L R and rich to lean R L oxygen sensor O2S switching times for bank 1 B1 and bank 2 B2 The ECM monitors for fluctuations in voltage ranging from greater than 0 600 V to less than 0 400 V BYPASS AIR Range ON OFF Indicates the secondary air injection bypass BYPASS AIR 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the secondary air injection bypass 1 C SHAFT SPD km h MPH Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the vehicle speed calculated from the countershaft RPM on a manual transmission CANCEL HISTORY Range 0000 H to 8000 H Indicates the cruise control cancel history which shows the reason why cruise control was canceled The CANCEL HISTORY 1 data is the latest data possible readings are e 000 H NO DATA e 0001 H MAIN SW OFF Main switch was pressed 0002 H BRAKE PEDAL Brake pedal was pressed 0004 H GEAR CLUTCH PDL AT Except D range MT Clutch pedal was pressed e 0008 CANCEL SW ON Cancel switch was pressed e 0010 H VSA ABS ACT VSA ABS control was active e 0020 SET RES SW amp BRAKE pressed at the same time e 0040 H CAN COM CAN communication problem e 0080 H Out of Vehicle SPD Vehicle speed is out of control e 0100 H IHCC COM ERROR Communication error with IHCC control mo
304. TCS Code Type 08d Figure 15 48 2005 06 All Subaru models display codes and data with the scan tool 15 3 3 ABS Code Reading and Connector Locations 1990 1992 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 49 1992 1997 SVX Figure 15 49 1993 1994 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 50 1995 1996 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon w o TCS Figure 15 51 1995 1996 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon with TCS Figure 15 51 1993 1996 Impreza Coupe Sedan and Wagon w o TCS Figure 15 51 1997 early Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 53 1997 late 1999 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 51 1998 2001 Impreza Coupe Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 51 2001 Forester Figure 15 51 2000 2004 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 54 2003 2004 Baja Figure 15 51 2005 2006 All Subaru Models Figure 15 55 1990 92 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon 1992 97 SVX P To retrieve trouble codes 1 Drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 19mph 30kph for least one minute before attempting to access the self diagnostic program Do not switch the ignition off after driving The ABS lamp on the instrument panel turns on when the self diagnostic program senses a problem About 5 to 12 seconds after the instrument panel lamp turns on the ABS trouble codes display by flashing an LED The LED is located under the right front seat Figure 15 49 See Subaru Code Type 08 Straight Count on page 177 for reading code
305. Tire TEMP T 485 nine PR Ema n Hen i Ee e e ee Een ED ED Ene a i er 446 ds oer o 332 332 TORQ DELIV Nifi hata ul 520 TORQUE TORQUE TOTAL ADV qiie red en emet bib ene red teria teeta iege 400 TOTAL WEIGRIT lDS uae tr ttr tte tae et n Di bed nce I t e d edd a b d E M rte pd i de doa 477 90 iae ertt cene ave us In eee ree eH e i Er re rec E 443 lico 447 Uua E 444 RAE clic 447 Wik Ried Maia ei aA i Rida GR PME 447 TP B TP C TP MODE 520 447
306. To read 1989 Spectrum and 1990 94 Storm engine codes optional e Jump pins as shown in Figure 7 5 Figure 7 5 Pins to jump for flash codes P To read 1989 95 Tracker engine codes e Jump pins as shown in Figure 7 6 on the connector near the left side of the engine 46 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems Figure 7 6 1989 95 Tracker connector jump pins P To read 1992 95 Metro except 1992 1 0L engine codes Jump pins as shown in Figure 7 7 on the connector near the left strut tower on the firewall Figure 7 7 1992 1995 Metro connector jump pins P To read 1992 94 Storm 1 8L transmission codes e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter to the 5 pin connector under the glove box Figure 7 8 1 Connector 2 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 7 8 1992 94 Storm 1 8L connector and adapter P To read 1992 94 Storm 1 8L transmission codes optional e Jump pins as shown in Figure 7 9 1 Red 2 Black Figure 7 9 Pins to jumper for transmission codes 47 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems P To read 1992 95 1 3L and 1995 1 0L Metro transmission codes e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter to the 3 pin connector Figure 7 10 under the left side of the dashboard 1 Connector 2 MULTI 1 adapter 3 Green 4 White 5 Black Figure 7 10 1992 95 1 3L and 1995 1 0L Metro connector and adapter P To read 1992 94 1 0L Metro transmission code
307. US atre t Pee tt co esee dn tee tb chi dtl v bc v e No e dd 491 1 2 SOLENOID e theme Ente uam ien beim eigene 490 ISTOGEA c ERE TST GEAR Sce etr i oie mm OR e eo oe E imet en n dete 1TOUCH DN 2 FRAMES 2 INDICATOR 2 POS SWIETQEL i ementi meth Rete Hn Ita Se 491 2 9 ERROR SE et tete ire Y RE M nde n s p ctt t desee tative 490 2 3 S HIE SEG serotonin ede tt eb iva aie e Un EM 490 2 39 GOD OKT STATUS scere eet tct rure aie c Eu tUe Ie Ye CO Ve ae 491 223 SOLENO ID rt Eh Sh nh em no REA 23T OO EE 2 4 BRK PRS SW 2 4 BRK SOL uns EN is 24B 96 GEI Un E HERO Rina audet eeu aS 2nd AIR MON CMP t t Cae d lle e LR ertt 336 2nd MON EN A the nm emm nite mne 336 AND GEAR ve TEE 336 eer erat oe Pn 491 2nd PRESSURBE SWITQH z ttti t b ba d et euet UL ce e dv e t erode 491 2nd PRESSURE SWT dis 2 491 2ND SELECTED ERG UN REI us oe acetate meer eei esti LE ton Scc 336 cm HERI es ente tni tre i ehe RR 491 PRESE 484 2WDEIIGEDEAMB 3 rh nine ii niet temm eso Rie iata ie manie 486 2 60 eee uec et Mete ied utc eae Ue M 492 3 2 SOL CKT STAT US EO enit RR Dh OO ENT UR RUP 491 3 2 TIME ten Pe
308. W HIGH Indicates the ECM command to operate the radiator cooling fan The LOW RAD FAN and HI RAD FAN parameters refer to one fan with two speed settings CPP Range RELEASED DEPRESSED Indicates the clutch pedal position switch CPP SW Range RELEASED DEPRESSED Indicates the clutch pedal position switch CRANK Range YES NO Indicates whether the ignition switch cranking circuit is closed through the starter motor solenoid it reads YES when the cranking circuit is closed and the engine is cranking NO when the circuit is open The CRANK signal causes the ECM to shut down temporarily as the engine cranks because power cannot be ensured with the high current draw of the starter CRANK Z2 RPM Range 0 to 2000 rpm Indicates the speed of the camshaft as determined by the CMP and CKP sensor signal it is used in direct ignition systems DIS 364 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CRANK REQUEST Range YES NO Indicates the PCM request to engage the cranking relay and power the starter it only reads YES when the ignition switch is in the crank position CRANKING Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the ignition switch it reads ON when the ignition switch is in the crank start position OFF other times The ECM uses this signal to control the fuel injection idle speed and ignition timing during engine cranking CRANKING RPM Range 0 to 800 rpm Indicates engine RPM while the starter
309. W PEAK A Range Indicates the left front power window peak amp draw LFPW SW Range Indicates the left front power window switch 320 Body Control Module BCM Parameters actual OPEN CLSD actual ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE actual YES NO YES NO CLSD AJAR YES NO LOW OK actual OFF DOWN UP ONE TOUCH Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters LHTURN IND Turn Left Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the turn indicator switch Reads ON when the switch is positioned to operate the left hand indicators reads OFF at all other times Lighting Time Range 7 5 15 30 Displays the setting of the lighting time seconds Light Off Delay Range 30 60 90 Displays the setting of the automatic lighting delay in seconds Lights remain on for the displayed time after the ignition is switched off Lin Com Lin Communication Range WITH WITHOUT Indicates current communication between the LIN ECM the and the main BCM Reads WITH when there is a communication connection reads WITHOUT when unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC LK BUTTON SIG Range ON OFF Indicates a door lock switch signal being received from a remote transmitter LOCK SW AS LOCK SW DR Range ON OFF Indicates the door lock switch signal status for the driver DR and passenger AS doors Lock IG On Drv Range ON OFF Displays the status of the lock command system Reads
310. X CURRENT FR ACM SOL MIN CURRENT Range not available Indicates the maximum or minimum current applied to the front ACM control module for the ignition cycle as amperes FRP PSI Range 37 to 150 psi Indicates the fuel rail pressure FRP V Range not available Indicates the fuel rail pressure voltage FRP DSD Range actual Indicates the fuel rail pressure desired FRP FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a fuel rail pressure fault FRT Range 40 to 399 F or 40 199 C Indicates the fuel rail temperature FRT V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the fuel rail temperature voltage FRZSTR 1 Range actual count Indicates the status of the freeze frame data as a count A count is recorded every time the ECM stores freeze frame data FSS FSS B1 FSS B2 Range not available Indicates the status of the fuel system which may be divided by cylinder banks 1 or 2 FT CELL Range 0 to 23 Indicates the fuel cell that the PCM is currently operating in which is determined by manifold absolute pressure MAP and RPM inputs FT LEARN Range ENABLED DISABLED Indicates if conditions are appropriate for enabling long term fuel trim correction reads ENABLED when long term fuel trim is responding to the short term fuel trim DISABLED when long term fuel trim is not responding to in short term fuel trim 385 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FT SENSOR C F V Range variable Indicates the
311. YES FAIL Indicates the retard action taken by the ECM it reads NO range No retarding YES range Retarding FAIL range Retard impossible RETARD REQUEST Range NO YES FAIL Displays the retard request from the traction control system TCS control unit status it reads NO Noretard requesting e YES Retard requesting e FAIL TCS system failure REV SELECTED Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission Reverse range switch REVERSE LOCK SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the reverse select lock solenoid When turned ON it is impossible to select Reverse Gear RO2FT1 Range 35 to 35 Indicates the rear O2Sfuel trim bank 1 status RO2FT2 Range 35 to 35 Indicates the rear O2S fuel trim bank 2 status RPHRSTR Range LOW HIGH Indicates the status of the rear peakhold reset The 2VI sensor peakhold voltage is reset by this peakhold reset signal from the ECM RPM Range actual RPM COARSE Range 0 to 7968 rpm RPM FINE Range 0 to 1992 rpm Indicates the engine speed RPMDES Range 0 to engine max Indicates desired engine speed as calculated by the PCM for base idle This reading should always be close to actual idle RPM 429 Data Parameters Engine Parameters Rr ACM SOL CURRENT Range variable Indicates the output current to the rear ACM control module as amperes Rr ACM SOL MAX CURRENT Range variable Indicates the maximum current output to the rear ACM con
312. YES if the sensor signals agree and correspond to the same accelerator pedal positions NOif the sensor signals disagree and correspond to different pedal positions 347 Data Parameters Engine Parameters APP AVE Range 0 to 125 counts Indicates the accelerator pedal position APP as step counts The TAC Module takes the voltages from the 3 APP sensors averages the readings and converts the readings into counts The average number of counts is different on every vehicle APP CTP SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the accelerator pedal position APP switch it reads ON when the accelerator pedal is released e OFF when the accelerator pedal is depressed APP SENSOR 9 APP SENSOR 1 APP SENSOR 2 Range 0 to 180 Indicates the accelerator pedal position APP as degrees of throttle opening APP SENSOR A V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage signal from accelerator pedal position APP sensor A the sensor is a potentiometer connected to the accelerator cable APP SENSOR V APP SENSOR B V APP SENSOR B V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage signal from accelerator pedal position APP sensor B the sensor is a potentiometer connected to the accelerator cable It should read half the voltage value of APP sensor A 0 to 10096 Indicates the accelerator pedal position 1 V APP2 V APP3 V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage signal from a
313. a Ce out ne va Ld bte r A dae a eN aA 401 IGRTNI Mys d sistere err i etii ERN HOHER hei Te RR A REUS 401 I Key Hatch M 317 PaniC 318 I Key Pwr Window DOW 318 EK y Trunk droht EUST ILLUMINAT Illumination Sw Illumination System ILM GON TROLS ies te Rite ie ee Eee eee met eee Ue reed ea Rae IMA 2 i IMA OUTPUT KW x nihi tener ice n OP e PE i e ie IMA REQUEST kW IMA STANDBY nre Rente e RE od p P IH eee nrejcielP EE IMMOBILIZER rie inermem Hen en e RE e lebe ER ERE eie d IMRC MON SW IMRC POS SENSOR EE VIM CMD 2 eee eal M 244 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters IMRC VP SENSOR V 402 DA Li Me D eL ALD as ae ince 402 IMT IMRC VALVE he ecce UE Ru ME anten AE utu Fass te t NIA 402 MT MBRONIN d E TEE anon 402 POAT RASS VALS E 402 DAT CS alc te LU LU LAE nant
314. a diagnosis terminal to the diagnosis connector terminal 4 Switch the ignition on Read the trouble codes on the TCS warning lamp Code Type 08d Figure 15 48 The following condition apply to testing these vehicles 11 displays first then the stored codes display in order beginning with the most recent stored codes fthere are no codes in memory only code 11 displays c RON P To clear code memory 1 Disconnect the diagnosis terminal from the diagnosis connector terminal 4 Figure 15 51 2 Connect the diagnosis terminal to the diagnosis connector terminal 4 for at least 0 15 second and then disconnect it 3 Repeat step 2 an additional two times 3 times total within twelve seconds 187 Subaru Testing ABS Systems 1 Diagnosis connector 2 Diagnosis terminals 3 Pin 6 L Terminal 4 Pin 3 K Terminal 5 Pin 4 with TCS Figure 15 51 1995 99 Legacy 1998 04 Impreza 2001 04 Forester and 2003 04 Baja ABS Diagnostic Connector Location 1993 96 Impreza Coupe Sedan and Wagon P To retrieve trouble codes 1 aR oN Locate the ABS diagnostic connector under the dash near the steering column Figure 15 52 Switch the ignition off Ground the ABS Check connector terminal L Switch the ignition on Read the trouble codes on the ABS warning lamp Code 08 Figure 15 47 The following condition apply to testing these vehicles Code 11 displays first then the
315. ack Sedan or Wagon models or any 2006 model except Baja use manual code gathering only The How To Get Codes selection from the Code Functions menu displays manual code gathering instructions see How to Get Codes on page 11 The Airbag system is placed in the diagnostic mode by performing vehicle specific diagnostic routines These routines consist of connecting a grounded jumper or a diagnostic terminal to a specific pin of the diagnostic connector 15 4 2 Airbag SRS Code Types Detailed information for reading code types can be found in Code Type 08 on page 176 Subaru airbag SRS systems use the following code types Code 08 Straight Count on page 176 e Code Type 08c on page 179 for most 1992 2005 Subaru airbag SRS systems Manufacturer Specific Codes for 2005 Subaru Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon airbag SRS systems 15 4 3 Airbag SRS Code Reading and Connector Locations 1992 1997 SVX Figure 15 56 e 1995 1999 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 57 e 1998 2004 Impreza Coupe Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 57 1998 2004 Forester and Wagon Figure 15 57 e 2000 2004 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 58 2003 2006 Baja Figure 15 58 2005 Forester Figure 15 59 2005 Impreza Figure 15 59 2005 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon Figure 15 60 2006 All Models except Baja Figure 15 60 192 Subaru Testing Airbag SRS Systems 1992 97 SVX P To re
316. acy Outback All All OBD II Wagon 158 Subaru Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 9 of 9 Testing Engine Systems Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers o OIS Code Reading Read 2 Year Model Engine system S B Codes connectors Memory connector 2 za Connector Connectors l ocalons Baja All All OBD II Forester All All OBD II Impreza Sedah All All OBD II Impreza All All OBD II 2005 Wagon Legacy Outback All All OBD II Sedan Legacy Outback All All OBD II Wagon B9 Tribeca All All OBD II Baja All All OBD II Forester All All OBD II Impreza Sedah All All OBD II Impreza 2006 Wagon All All OBD II Legacy Outback All All OBD II Sedan Legacy Outback All All OBD II Wagon Subaru Vehicle Connection Diagrams The following procedures contain directions and diagrams for connecting various subaru Check connectors to the scan tool NOTE Procedures are specific to each type of connector Some procedures are specific down to the pin number and color of the Check connector Be sure that the connector you are using matches the description before you proceed See Table 15 9 for a guide to the correct vehicle application P To read codes on vehicles with a 7 pin Check connector e Connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to Check connector pi
317. ad ENGINE MOUNT Range IDLE TRVL Indicates the state of the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed and the vehicle speed The parameter reads as follows with the engine running e idle with vehicle stopped IDLE All other conditions TRVL ENGINE OIL LIFE Range not available No additional information is available for this parameter ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Range variable Indicates engine oil pressure as kilo Pascal kPa millimeters of mercury mmHg inches of mercury inHg and kilograms per square centimeter kgf cm2 ENGINE RPM RPM Range 0 to engine max Indicates engine speed which the PCM computes from the ignition reference pulses Engine speed should remain close to desired idle under various engine loads with the engine idling ENGTRQ SIGNAL Range 0 to 100 Indicates engine torque as calculated by the ECM based on the MAP sensor value The ECM transmits the signal to the motor control module 376 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EOP SENSOR V EOP SENSOR kgf cm2 Range 0 0 to 9 9 kgf cm2 or 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the engine oil pressure either as the engine oil pressure sensor signal voltage or as an ECM calculated pressure This value is used for the VPS EOT SENSOR F Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F EOT SENSOR V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the engine oil temperature either as the engine oil temperature sensor signal voltage or as an ECM c
318. afety iii iv safety information iii Santa Fe 2001 2004 connector locations 78 Scion See Toyota Scoupe 1991 1995 connector locations 78 SCS 56 Sebring 1995 2000 connector locations 34 Sebring Coupe 2004 connector locations 34 Sephia 1995 1997 ABS code reading 100 2000 2001 ABS code reading 100 Sigma 1988 1990 connector locations 118 SLX 1996 1997 ABS connector locations 23 1996 1999 engine connector locations 13 1996 1999 transmission connector locations 20 Sonata 1989 2004 connector locations 78 troubleshooting 523 Spectra 2000 2001 ABS code reading 100 Spectrum 1989 46 1989 engine code reading 46 SPI 1986 Read Memory and D Check connectors 169 1987 1990 Read Memory and D Check connectors 170 Sportage 1994 2001 ABS code reading 99 Starion 1984 1989 connector locations 118 540 Index Stealth 1991 1996 connector locations 34 Storm 1990 1994 46 1990 1994 engine code reading 46 1992 1994 1 81 transmission code reading 47 Stratus Coupe 2004 connector locations 34 Stylus 1990 1993 ABS connector locations 89 1990 1993 engine connector locations 81 1990 1993 transmission connector locations 82 Subaru 143 196 1983 1984 turbo connector locations 144 Code Reading Connector Locations 143 Testing ABS Systems 184 Code Information 184 Code Reading and Connector Locations 185 Code Types 184 Testing Airbag SRS Supplemental Restraint Systems 191 Code Information 192 Code Reading and Connector Locations 192 Code Ty
319. alculated pressure EPC V Range 2 0 to 14 5 V Indicates the average operating voltage of the pulse width modulated electronic pressure control solenoid A low average voltage reading indicates a higher EPC pressure a higher reading indicates a lower EPC pressure EPS EPS SIGNAL Range LOW HIGH Indicates the voltage level of the EPS signal line It only reads HIGH when electrical load of the EPS becomes higher than the specified value EQ RAT Range not available Indicates the desired equivalence ratio Lambda EQ RAT11 Range not available Indicates the A F ratio as commanded by the ECM for bank 1 sensor 1 ESC ACTIVE Range YES NO Indicates whether the ECM is controlling spark advance it should read YES after the engine starts and the ECM controls timing NO when the engine is cranking the ignition module controls timing and electronic spark timing is disabled ESC COUNTER Range 0 to 255 Indicates the relative duration and magnitude of spark knock as a count Any number greater than 0 indicates that knock occurred A low number means short duration a higher number indicates longer duration and magnitude ESC FAILURE Range YES NO Indicates whether an electronic spark control failure was detected it should read YES when any of the ESC components fail usually accompanied by trouble code 43 NO when the system is working properly 377 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EST
320. alve VSV that actuates the intake manifold runner control valve Reads ON when the VSV is activated to open the valve INTAKE CTRL SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the intake air duct runner control solenoid valve Reads ON when the solenoid is activated this reduces the sound of the intake air INTEGRATR Range 0 to 255 Indicates whether the ECM is commanding a rich or a lean mixture as part of the short term fuel metering correction strategy The integrator number can range from 0 to 255 An integrator number higher than 128 indicates the ECM is commanding a short term rich mixture An integrator number lower than 128 indicates that the ECM is commanding a short term lean mixture Compare integrator numbers to injector on time A number above 128 indicates increased on time A number below 128 indicates decreased on time Integrator corrections operate only in closed loop In open loop the integrator number goes to a fixed value usually 128 The block learn multiplier BLM is a long term fuel metering correction factor BLM is derived from the integrator correction Block learn and integrator indicate the same directions of fuel metering correction High numbers indicate rich mixtures low numbers indicate lean mixtures Refer to BLM on page 353 for more information ISOLT1 Range 0 0A 0 7A Indicates the torque converter clutch solenoid valve output current ISOLT2 Range 0 8A 0 0A Indicates the pressure cont
321. ameters CYL 1 96 CYL 2 CYL 3 CYL 4 CYL 5 CYL 6 CYL 7 CYL 8 CYL x MISFIRES Range 0 to 100 Indicates the misfire rate detected in cylinders 1 to 8 expressed as a percentage the previous 1000 crankshaft revolutions A 0 reading means no misfires occurred during the past 1000 crankshaft revolutions The x in CYL x MISFIRES is a variable from 1 to 8 indicating the cylinder being monitored CYL 1 CYL 2 CYL 3 CYL 4 CYL 5 CYL 6 CYL 7 CYL 8 Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates misfire ratio of cylinder 1 to 8 This item displays only when idling CYL 1 DEACT SOL COMMAND Range ON OFF Indicates the current status of cylinder 1 Reads OFF if the cylinder is being commanded to deactivate By default the cylinder is normally activated CYL 4 DEACT SOL COMMAND Range ON OFF Indicates the current status of cylinder 4 Reads OFF if the cylinder is being commanded to deactivate By default the cylinder is normally activated CYL 6 DEACT SOL COMMAND Range ON OFF Indicates the current status of cylinder 6 Reads OFF if the cylinder is being commanded to deactivate By default the cylinder is normally activated CYL 7 DEACT SOL COMMAND Range ON OFF Indicates the current status of cylinder 7 Reads OFF if the cylinder is being commanded to deactivate By default the cylinder is normally activated CYL ALL MISS RATE Range Min 0 Max 2
322. amp Connect the vehicle diagnostic connector terminals together and switch on the ignition Start codes by When done Turn the ignition off disconnect the connectors then clear codes 0 5 Sec iit Code 3 Code 4 Codes Repeat Figure 16 7 Code Type 10 Table 16 2 Toyota Code Type 10 Pattern Straight count Read codes on Check Engine lamp Connect the vehicle diagnostic connector terminals together and switch on the ignition Start codes by When done Turn the ignition off disconnect the connectors then clear codes Code 1 is pass code system Ok 16 2 5 Actuator Tests Some Toyota Lexus and Scion models have interactive bidirectional actuator tests Though most actuator tests are best performed with the key on and engine running the Fuel Pump and Fuel Pump Relay tests must be performed with the key and the engine off Most tests automatically display data parameters to help determine actuator or system performance Some tests like the Fuel Pump Test do not display parameters For these tests monitor the selected actuator using a digital multimeter or listen for actuator activation For most tests scrolling up and down switches the actuator on and off Test completion does not mean that the actuator was activated 200 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Transmission Systems IMPORTANT Do not enter any actuator test while driving unless the specific tes
323. ample Table 18 11 Transmission range switch logic chart Gear Selector Position TFP SW A TFP SE B TFP SW C TFP SW P Park P LO HI HI LO Reverse R LO LO HI HI Neutral N HI LO HI LO Drive 4 4TH HI LO LO HI Drive 3 3RD LO LO LO LO Drive 2 2ND LO HI LO HI Drive 1 1ST HI HI LO LO HI Ignition voltage LO 0 volts INV Invalid will display if any other combination is received TR SWITCH Range see below Indicates the decoded status of the four transmission range TR switch signals The switch A B C and P status determines what gear the transmission is operating in and the current gear PARK NEUT REV 4TH 3RD 2ND 1ST or INV An INV invalid reading means the PCM does not recognize a valid combination of inputs 519 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters Switch logic is shown in Table 18 12 Table 18 12 Transmission range switch logic Gear Selector Position TRSWA TRSWB TRSWC TRSWP Park LOW HI HI LOW Reverse LOW LOW HI HI Neutral HI LOW HI LOW Drive 4 HI LOW LOW HI Drive 3 LOW LOW LOW LOW Drive 2 LOW HI LOW HI Drive 1 HI HI LOW LOW Invalid All other combinations HI Ignition voltage LOW 0 voltage FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a transmission range fault TR POS Range actual Indicates the transmission range TRANS CTRL LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission control indic
324. an Medium Speed 3 0 V 6 CAN High speed 2 5V ISO 7 0 V or greater f KW2000 12 0 V 10 J1850 5 0 V 11 Can Medium Speed 2 0V 14 Can High Speed 25V NOTE Voltages may vary with BUS terminal activity Figure A 1 Data link connector No Communication for 1987 90 Nissan For a communication problem with all 1987 90 Nissan models except the 1987 Sentra and 1990 300ZX gather codes manually by placing the ECM in the diagnostic mode and observing two flashing LEDs This also applies to 1991 Maxima Axxess Van and Pickup models See Code Types 07 on page 125 for detailed instructions Troubleshooting A 5 GM Control Systems on Isuzu and Isuzu built Geo GM Control Systems on Isuzu and Isuzu built Geo Some Isuzu and Isuzu built Geo models have General Motors control systems These vehicles may display a No Communication message when the scan tool and the control module cannot communicate with each other for some reason Common problems that prevent a vehicle from performing a test or communicating with the scan tool are listed below If the Check Engine lamp passes the bulb check put the ECM into the field service mode by turning the ignition on and jumpering pin B to pin A in the 12 pin ALDL connector or pin A to pin C on the 3 pin ALDL connector Figure A 2 E fe fe fw LY Figure A 2 Jump these pins to flash codes on the Check Engine lamp The Check Engine lamp should fla
325. ange ON OFF Indicates the status of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve Reads ON when the TCC solenoid valve is energized When the solenoid valve is energized modulator pressure and lockup are controlled electronically ABS ACTIV Range ON OFF No additional information is available for this parameter ACCEL SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the accelerator pedal The transmission control module TCM uses this parameter to determine gear engagement when the vehicle is stopped It reads e with the vehicle stopped and the pedal completely released causing the to engage 2nd gear creep mode OFF when the vehicle is stopped and the pedal is depressed causing to engage 1st gear ACCS A C Range ON OFF Indicates the air conditioning status ACT VLV TMNG Range variable Indicates the actual valve timing AFSA AFSB Range LOW HIGH Indicates an ECM request to the PGM FI ECM to retard the ignition timing in order to reduce shift shock during gear changes Normal reading is LOW A HIGH reading indicates that an ignition timing retard request signal has been sent simultaneously the FAS parameter should read LOW AP SENSOR V AP SENSOR A AP SENSOR B AP SENSOR1 V AP SENSOR2 V AP SENSOR A VOLT AP SENSOR B VOLT Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the accelerator pedal position APP as voltage it should read e About 0 35 0 95 V at idle Above 4 0 V at wide open
326. ange YES NO Indicates the torque converter clutch fault TCCMACT RPM Range actual Indicates the torque converter slip actual TCIL Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission control indicator light TCIL_FAULT TCILFault Range YES NO Indicates the transmission control indicator light fault TCS Range ON OFF Indicates the overdrive cancel switch hold switch status TCS ACTIVE Range YES NO or ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the status of the traction control system TCS it reads YES or ACTIVE when the TCS is operating e or INACTIVE at all other times TFP SW Range PARK REV NEUT 4 3 d 2nd LOW INV Indicates the decoded status of the three A B C inputs from the transmission fluid pressure TFP manual valve position switch The TFP RANGE reading should match the current gear Park P Reverse R Neutral N Drive 4 4th Drive 3rd Drive 2 2nd Drive 1 1st INV will display when the PCM does not recognize a valid combination of inputs See Table 18 10 for example 516 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters Table 18 10 Transmission fluid pressure manual valve switch logic chart Gear Selector Position TFP SW A TFP SE B TFP SW C Park P HI LO HI Reverse R LO LO HI Neutral N HI LO HI Drive 4 4TH HI LO LO Drive 3 3RD HI HI LO Drive 2 2ND HI HI HI Drive 1 1ST LO HI HI Invalid INV LO HI LO Drive 1 1ST LO LO LO
327. antilock brake system codes Refer to Figure 6 4 and Table 6 1 on page 42 to read the codes P To read engine codes manually Flash Codes e Jump pins shown in Figure 6 3 and turn the ignition on Engine and ABS codes flash the same See Figure 6 7 and Table 6 1 for manual code reading information Figure 6 3 Jumper Engine connector Pins as shown for flash codes Flash Codes P To read ABS codes manually Flash Codes from a 1991 92 Rocky e Jump pins as shown in Figure 6 4 and turn the ignition on ABS codes and Engine codes flash the same See Figure 6 7 and Table 6 1 on page 42 for manual code reading information Figure 6 4 Jumper ABS 6 pin connector pins shown for flash codes Daihatsu Testing Transmission Systems lt gt gt Codes Code3 1 5 Repeat Figure 6 5 Daihatsu engine and antilock brake system code flash pattern Table 6 1 Daihatsu engine and ABS codes Pattern Straight count Read codes on Depending on the control system flashes Check Engine lamp or ABS lamp Start codes by Jumper two terminals in a connector then turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Code 1 is a pass code system OK After repairing problem clear codes and drive car then check for other codes 6 2 Testing Transmission Systems The VCS allows 1989 92 Daihatsu Charade transmission testing 6 2 1 Code Reading Connector Locations Transmission
328. anual for instructions on selecting a system to test Operations 3 4 Connecting to the Vehicle Connecting to the Vehicle A Connection Instruction screen tells you how to connect the supplied vehicle test adapters to the test vehicle you identified Each test adapter plugs into a specific vehicle diagnostic connector and attaches to one end of the data cable The other end of the data cable attaches to the scan tool The following adapters are available to connect the scan tool to Asian Import vehicles See the manufacturer specific chapters of this manual for connector locations Figure 3 6 NISSAN 1 adapter 12 pin EE Figure 3 8 HON 1 adapter Figure 3 9 HYUNDAI 2 adapter Operations Connecting to the Vehicle Figure 3 10 MITSU 1 adapter A TT 22 lt gt S Figure 3 11 Terminal Converters Figure 3 12 Ground adapter 1 Ground 2 Mazda amp Ford 2E 3 Isuzu amp Geo with GM system 2D 4 Subaru 2C 5 Mazda amp Ford 2B 6 Special applications 2A Figure 3 14 MULTI 2 Asian adapter Operations Main Menu Selections Follow the on screen instructions to connect the scan tool to the vehicle Then select to continue and the Main menu for the identified vehicle displays 3 5 Main Menu Selections Depending on the vehicle the following main menu options may be available Code Functions lets you read and interpret electronic control module ECM diagnostic trou
329. apter with Personality Key 165 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 15 1 4 D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations D Check connectors are used on some 1995 models and most 1994 and earlier models D Check connectors can be identified easily as a mating pair and are green in color Read Memory connectors are used on some 1995 models most 1986 94 models with fuel injection and some carbureted engines Read Memory connectors are similar to the D Check connectors but are typically black in color Connector locations vary by model and may be difficult to locate and identify Figure 15 32 shows some typical locations where connectors may be found Read Memory Conenctor ECU D Check Connectors Fuel Pump D Check Connectors 9 Pin Diagnostic Connector Read Memory Conenctor D Check Connectors Figure 15 32 Common locations for D Check and Read Memory connectors Included in this section are the following connector location diagrams Vehicles without ECM memory D Check only 1983 ECC carbureted on page 167 Figure 15 33 1984 ECC carbureted on page 167 Figure 15 34 1983 84 EGI MGI Turbo 1985 87 all except XT on page 168 Figure 15 35 1985 89 ECC overhead cam on page 168 Figure 15 36 1986 87 XT on page 169 Figure 15 37 Vehicles with ECM memory D Check amp Read Memory 1986 SPI connectors on page 169 Figure 15 38 1987 Justy on page 170 Figure 15 39 16
330. ar door ajar status RR ID Range actual Indicates the right rear tire transmitter identifier RR LRN Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the right rear learn status RR MES Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the right rear measure status RR NORM Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the right rear normal status RRIDPRG Range YES NO Indicates the right rear sensor programmed status RRLOBAT Range LOW OK Indicates the right rear low battery status RRO REC Range YES NO Indicates the right rear transmit received after learn status RRO PSI Range actual Indicates the right rear outer tire pressure status P W Func Key Range ON OFF Displays the setting for the driver door key window switches Reads ON when the driver key window feature is active and reads OFF when it is disabled P W Func Remote Range ON OFF Displays the setting for the wireless transmitter window switches Reads ON when the remote window feature is active and reads OFF when it is disabled 327 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters P W Down Wireless P W Up Wireless Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the wireless transmitter window switches Reads ON when the windows are commanded up or down with the remote reads OFF at all other times Seat Belt Indicator Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the seatr belt indicator lamp Reads ON if the lamp is on belt unlatched and OFF if the lamp is off belt
331. ased on the knock sensor signal 3 to 28 Crank Angle Driving at 44 mph 70 km h KNOCK CRRT VAL Range 64 CA to 1 984 CA Indicates the correction learning value of knocking When driving 44 mph a reading of 0 to 22 CA is considered normal KNOCK CTRL EGR Range not available Indicates the ignition timing correction the ECM is applying to compensate for engine knock caused by the EGR system being active 405 Data Parameters Engine Parameters KNOCK FB Range 64 Max 1 984 CA Indicates the feedback value of knocking 25 to 0 Crank Angle Driving at 44 mph 70 kph KNOCK FB VAL Range 64 CA to 1 984 CA Indicates the correction learning value of knocking When driving 44 mph a reading of 22 to 0 CA is considered normal KNOCK RET KNOCK RETARD KNOCK RETARD CYL 1 KNOCK RETARD CYL 2 9 KNOCK RETARD CYL 9 KNOCK RETARD CYL 4 9 KNOCKR Range 0 to 90 Indicates the additional spark retard angle the ECM is applying to compensate for knock The value does not indicate that timing is retarded after top dead center It indicates the amount of advance that has been taken away KNOCK SENSOR KNOCK SNSR 1 V KNOCK SNSR 2 V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage signal of the knock sensor KS The normal range is 0 8 to 1 0 V higher voltage indicates increased knock There are 2 types of KS currently being used broadband sensors and flat sensors Broadband sen
332. at all other times Mirror Fold Sw Retractable Mirror Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the retractable mirror switch Reads ON when the switch is set to retract the mirror reads OFF at all other times Mirror Pos Sw Right Mirror Pos Sw Left Mirror Pos Sw Up Mirror Pos Sw Down Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the power mirror position switch is in the indicated position right left up or down Reads ON when the switch is in the indicated position OFF at all other times Mirror Return Sw Retractable Mirror Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the retractable mirror switch Reads ON when the switch is set to extend the mirror reads OFF at all other times 322 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Mirror Sel Sw Right Mirror Sel Sw Left Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the power mirror select switch Reads ON when the switch is in the indicated right or left position off at all other times N Sw Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the gear selector lever is in neutral range Reads ON when in neutral range reads OFF in all other ranges N Sw C Sw P N Pos Sw P N Position Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the park neutral position PNP switch or neutral start switch Reads ON when the gear selector lever is in the park or neutral range reads OFF in all other ranges Press Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the oil pressure warning lamp
333. at can be tested with this instrument we cannot possibly anticipate or provide advice or safety messages to cover every situation It is the automotive technician s responsibility to be knowledgeable of the system being tested It is essential to use proper service methods and test procedures It is important to perform tests in an appropriate and acceptable manner that does not endanger your safety the safety of others in the work area the equipment being used or the vehicle being tested Itis assumed that the operator has a thorough understanding of vehicle systems before using this product Understanding of these system principles and operating theories is necessary for competent safe and accurate use of this instrument Before using the equipment always refer to and follow the safety messages and applicable test procedures provided by the manufacturer of the vehicle or equipment being tested Use the equipment only as described in this manual Read understand and follow all safety messages and instructions in this manual the accompanying safety manual and on the test equipment Safety Message Conventions Safety messages are provided to help prevent personal injury and equipment damage All safety messages are introduced by a signal word indicating the hazard level Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury to the operator or to bystanders Indicates a potentially haza
334. ations CONNECTOR LOCATION ECVT D Check and Read Memory connectors by ECVT module ECM D Check and Read Memory connectors by ECM module ECVT control module ECM control module left of steering column 9 pin diagnostic connector left of fire wall area 6 pin and 9 pin diagnostic connectors 14 2 3 left of ECM 4 5 6 left of fire wall area Figure 15 4 Loyale common connector locations Table 15 4 Loyale connector locations part 1 of 2 4 5 CONNECTOR LOCATION ECM 1 under steering column D Check amp Read Memory connectors carbureted some MPFI and SPI 2 next to ECM connector 17 pin or 13 pin Check connector 3 next to ECM connector Transmission control module is located inside the left quarter panel 4EAT only 145 Subaru Table 15 4 Loyale connector locations part 2 of 2 Testing Engine Systems CONNECTOR LOCATION 17 pin or 13 pin Check connector alternate location amp D Check connectors 4 left side of fire wall area 9 pin Check connector some models 5 left side of fire wall area Transmission control module TCM is located inside the left quarter panel 4EAT only Figure 15 5 7990 94 Legacy and 1993 95 Impreza 1 81 common connector locations Table 15 5 Legacy and Impreza 1 8L connector locations
335. ator light TRANS SLIP CNT Range 0 1 2 Indicates the number of times the P0894 diagnostic test has identified a slipping condition In order to set DTC P0894 Transmission Component Slipping the diagnostic test must identify a slipping condition three times in a row SNSOR V TransRange ACTUAL GEAR TransRange V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the transmission range TransRange D TRD Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission range switch TRIP Range YES NO Indicates the on board diagnostic trip has completed TRIP CouNT TRIP CNT Range 0 to 255 Indicates the number of on board diagnostic trips completed 520 Data Parameters TRL Range Indicates the transmission L range switch TrnAxleRLRN Range Transmission Axle Relearn TrnCtrlindLamp Range Indicates the transmission control warning indicator TrnCtriSw Range Indicates the transmission control switch range TrnFluidTmp V Range Indicates the transmission fluid temperature TRR Range Indicates the transmission R range switch TRS Range Indicates the transmission S range switch TS_SRC TSS RPM TurbSpdS RPM Range Indicates the turbine shaft speed TSLIPRAT 1000 1 Range Indicates the transmission slip ratio TSS_FAULT Range Indicates a turbine shaft speed fault UP SHIFT SWITCH UP SHIFT SWT Range Transmission Parameters ON OFF not available ON OFF ON OFF 0 0 to 5 0 V ON
336. ause of the personalized selection of optional equipment and trim packages available some BCM parameters displayed may not be supported by the vehicle as identified Some BCM parameters may appear inactive or invalid A thorough understanding of vehicle specific BCM operation will prevent lost time or an inacurate diagnosis based on incorrect interpretation of data for the vehicle being tested For example An inactive FRONT DOOR LOCK RELAY parameter is noticed by a technician diagnosing an intermittent power door lock problem while sitting in the driver seat and pushing the door lock button However the REAR DOOR LOCK RELAY parameter switches as expected By thinking that this indicates a fault a lot of time could be wasted looking for an open in the FRONT DOOR LOCK RELAY circuit or replacing a BCM In fact this would be normal operation if the vehicle has a driver door module with an incorporated power door lock switch The FRONT DOOR LOCK RELAY parameter is a device the BCM can command but this may not be the primary method used to command its operation The switch activates the FRONT DOOR LOCK RELAY direct without BCM interaction therefore the parameter does not change At the same time the door module sends a lock request input signal to the BCM to command activation of the REAR DOOR LOCK RELAY therefore the rear parameters change The BCM commanded the operation of the REAR DOOR LOCK RELAY but does not need to command the FRONT DOOR LOC
337. aximum highest engine speed the engine has ever achieved MC DWL 9 Range 0 to 60 Indicates the duty cycle or on time of the mixture control MC solenoid on a carbureted engine It usually is based on a 6 cylinder dwell scale of 0 to 60 degrees expect Alow dwell reading when the ECM is commanding a rich mixture A high dwell reading when the ECM is commanding a lean mixture 414 Data Parameters Engine Parameters On a 4 cylinder 90 scale the midpoint of the dwell range is 45 which indicates a 5096 duty cycle On a 6 cylinder scale the midpoint of the range is 30 which indicates a 50 duty cycle MCM STANDBY Range OK NG Indicates the MCM standby status and the status of motor ECM When OK the MOT ECM works to control assist and regenerative power of the IMA motor MFC Range ON OFF Indicates the medium fan control status MFC FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a medium fan control fault MFCYLM MISFIRED CYL Range not available Indicates random B engine misfire information MFPINS Range not available Indicates engine misfires This is the latched MFPLS signal low period when the ECM detects misfires 1 LSB 16 microseconds MFPLSRF MFPLSR Range LOW HIGH Indicates the status of the front F or rear R misfire pulse This is the misfire pulse signal from the 2VI unit to the ECM MFPMAX Range not available Indicates engine misfires It displays the maximum data of MFPINS in mic
338. ble 15 3 Figure 15 3 Loyale common connector locations on page 145 Table 15 4 Figure 15 4 1990 94 Legacy and 1993 95 Impreza 1 8L common connector locations on page 146 Table 15 5 Figure 15 5 SVX common connector locations on page 147 Table 15 6 Figure 15 6 XT and XT6 common connector locations on page 147 Table 15 7 Figure 15 7 1995 Legacy 1995 Impreza 2 21 and 1996 06 Subaru common connector locations on page 148 Table 15 8 Figure 15 8 See also D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations on page 166 143 Subaru Testing Engine Systems Figure 15 1 Carbureted engine common connector locations Table 15 1 Carbureted engine connector locations CONNECTOR LOCATION D Check connectors next to ECM Check connectors 2 and 3 next to ECM Check connector 4 next to ECM Check connector 1 R F strut area ECM 1 2 3 4 5 under steering column Figure 15 2 1983 84 Turbo common connector locations Table 15 2 1983 84 Turbo connector locations CONNECTOR LOCATION ECM under steering column D Check connectors Check connectors 1 2 and 3 next to ECM Check connector 4 1 2 3 4 next to ECM front of R F strut tower 144 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 2 5 6 Figure 15 3 Justy common connector locations Table 15 3 Justy connector loc
339. ble 4 7 Key On Pulse Code 5 Code Repeats Figure 4 16 Acura transmission Code Type 02 Table 4 6 Acura transmission Code Type 02 Pattern Straight count Read codes on Red LED on TCM Start codes by Turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Only one code displays at a time except on some late model cars After repairs clear codes and test drive then check for other codes Second Digit Code Code 25 Repeats First Digit Figure 4 17 Acura transmission Code Type 03 Table 4 7 Acura transmission Code Type 03 Pattern Long and short Read codes on Red LED on TOM or gear indicator lamp on dash Turn the ignition on except for 1991 and later Vigor Legend and NSX jumper the check connector then turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Only one code displays at a time except on some late model cars After repairs clear codes and test drive then check for other codes Start codes by 21 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS 4 3 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS Acura antilock brake system ABS testing includes the following Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 22 ABS Codes and Data Testing on page 23 Manual Code Reading ABS Codes and Clearing Codes on page 25 4 3 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Diagnostic connector locations and test adapt
340. ble codes DTCs Codes and Data lets you read input and output signals if applicable switches sensors and actuators See the manufacturer sections of the manual for specific information Functional Tests provides specific subsystem and component tests Tests vary by make and model see the manufacturer specific sections of the manual for specifics Actuator Tests lets you check the operation of certain actuators such as solenoid valves and relays Tests vary by make and model see the manufacturer specific sections of the manual for specifics Custom Setup lets you customize certain scan tool functions See the manual for your diagnostic tool for details Movies lets you record and view data See the manual for your diagnostic tool for details 3 6 Code Functions Selecting Code Functions displays the Code Functions menu Depending on the vehicle type six primary Code Functions selections may be available Auto Code Read reads all available electronic codes automatically How To Get Codes helps you to locate the test connectors or code lamps for getting codes and helps you identify the code type Clear Codes clears erases trouble codes from the vehicle ECM memory Print Codes prints selected trouble code definitions Manual Code Entry lets you read codes that can be identified by visual observation of a flashing lamp LED and manually entering data into the scan tool Review Codes lets you review codes stored in scan tool
341. button of the driver information center DIC switch as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC A closed switch is displayed as ON DIC TRIP INFO SWITCH Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the trip information button of the driver information center DIC switch as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC A closed switch is displayed as ON DISPLAY COOLANT TEMP Range 100 to 260 F or 38 to 128 C Indicates the displayed coolant temperature gauge value in the instrument panel cluster IPC This value may differ slightly from the monitored coolant temperature DISPLAYED FUEL LEVEL 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the displayed fuel level gauge value in the instrument panel cluster IPC This value may differ slightly from the monitored fuel level DISPLAYED ODOMETER Range 0 to 999999 MI or 0 to 999999 KM Indicates the displayed odometer value in the instrument panel cluster IPC DR BUKL Range BUCKLED UNBUCKLED Indicates the status of the driver s seat belt buckle DISPLAYED OIL PRESSURE Range 0 to 99 psi or 0 to 682 kPa Indicates the displayed oil pressure gauge value in the instrument panel cluster IPC This value may differ slightly from the monitored oil pressure DRAJLMP IC Range OFF ON Driver door ajar lamp status DRIV DR Range OFF ON Driver door ajar switch status 477 Data Parameters Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters ENGINE RPM Range 0 to 9999 Indicates engine
342. ccelerator pedal position APP sensors Table 18 2 APP sensor voltage Parameter Accelerator Pedal At 0 Accelerator Pedal At 100 Pedal At Rest Pedal Fully Depressed APP1 V Less than 1 1 V More than 2 0 V APP2 V More than 3 9 V Less than 3 0 V More than 3 2 V Less than 3 5 V APP2 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the accelerator pedal position sensor 2 348 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ARPMDES Range variable Indicates the desired RPM ARPMDES Range not available Indicates the PCM desired ancillary RPM which is the engine speed required to maintain the vehicle speed being commanded by the speed control system ASCD OD CUT OD CUT 1 Range ON OFF Indicates a command to shift the transmission from overdrive into a lower gear while operating in cruise control mode This command may be initiated by the driver pressing the acceleration switch on the cruise control console or by the ECM after sensing a loaded engine condition caused by up hill acceleration Reads ON when shifted into a lower gear ASD RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the auto shutdown relay it should read ON whenever the engine is running The ASD relay provides power to the fuel pump ignition coil and fuel injectors AST Range actual Indicates the time since start in seconds ASYNCH PULSE Range YES NO Indicates the asynchronous pulse to the fuel injectors which provides extra f
343. ch inputs or other signals that the ECM has not received These may include codes 23 24 and 31 or others Operate switches as explained in steps 6 and 7 to verify code status For most models a Depress and release the accelerator b Move the gear selector from neutral through the drive ranges and back to neutral automatic transmission or from neutral to the highest gear position and back to neutral manual transmission c Turn the air conditioner switch or heater blower switch from OFF to ON to OFF d Proceed to step 8 For 1985 89 300ZX a Start the engine b With an automatic transmission apply the service brakes and shift the transmission from neutral to drive and back to neutral c Forturbo models drive at a speed above 6 mph d For all models turn the A C switch or heater blower switch from OFF to ON to OFF with the engine running e For models without A C turn the headlamp and rear demister switches from OFF to ON to OFF Observe the LEDs on the ECM for flashing codes If no faults are present the LEDs should flash code 31 for vehicles without A C or code 44 for vehicles with A C Any other codes flashed at this point are valid trouble codes that should be diagnosed Turn the rotary diagnostic switch fully counterclockwise or move the slide switch to OFF 10 Turn the ignition off Code Type 07a Five Mode System Gather codes manually from these systems by placing the ECM in the diagnostic mod
344. changing patterns of the short term fuel trim corrections Long term fuel trim ranges from 100 to 100 25 to 25 or 0 to 200 depending the vehicle Depending on which scale is used zero or 100 percent serves as the midpoint A number above the midpoint indicates the PCM is commanding a long term rich mixture correction A number the midpoint indicates the PCM is commanding a lean mixture Long term fuel trim numbers follow the short term fuel trim numbers to make long term fuel metering corrections in response to a pattern of short term corrections Compare Long term fuel trim values to injector on time Numbers above the midpoint indicate increased on time while numbers below the midpoint indicate decreased on time Fuel trim corrections operate only in closed loop In open loop they revert to a fixed value 409 Data Parameters Engine Parameters LT FUEL TRIM COUNTS LT FUEL TRIM B1 COUNTS LT FUEL TRIM B2 COUNTS Range 0 to 255 Indicates the status of the long term fuel trim as a step count This is derived from the short term fuel value and it is used for long term correction of fuel delivery A value below 128 counts or 0 indicates O2S feedback shows a rich condition and the vehicle control module VCM is commanding a lean mixture in response value above 128 counts or 0 indicates O28 feedback shows a lean condition and the VCM is commanding a rich mixture in response Numbers 1 and 2 refer to the
345. cli gm 575 ineo M EENE EEEE Select Switch 263 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters SELF DIAG LAMP ae SEETESTDTG n ROS eerie dantem enituit e 433 A 482 SENS RANGE INE 5 nr n ade nte enn ep anie iie obe me nte iam isl 477 iS ER 330 SERVICE AWD ise iE en bid n HER ea ee beide iere b ES 482 SET ae aoe aa 433 Temp D m 300 Set Temp P E P AN 300 SET VEGL SPD 421 anite eiit etie a ee n eec pe dan hir e EE is 433 SET ERROR CODE te Fh ede ta CI b t COM ce e E t ce t dde 512 SETGOMD H iret nte ote eie en en Here n eni 433 1 OA 433 SETRIM 2 jasmen Reime een eb ia e Pt teme teh Mad eei e reet eb 433 SHIFT a con o p a Foe e e M E bM UON Ha d UE OL be a Na pet head di dba td ra o ees SHIFT A 1 96 SHIFT B SHIFT B 2 96 SHIFT C S A senaat 434 SHIFT CONTROL nasen an a en enne en mia anid 513 SHIF FINDIGATO Revisor scarce caves aave a EN EE AAA NEE 434 mE
346. code will flash 0 3 second pulses followed by more flashes if code is greater than 1 Clearing codes See Code Clearing on page 71 When done Clear codes If the SCS connector is shorted and SRS has no stored DTC the SRS light remains on continuously 68 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 1 2 2 0 3 0 Indications are repeated in case of continuous failure ERN 1 3 1 1 1 4 4 9 Pulse Code24 Code 1 3 Code 1 1 Most recent Second most Third most problem recent problem recent problem Figure 8 22 Honda SRS Code Type 06 Continuous Failure SRS indicator blinks like this Table 8 13 Honda SRS Code Type 06 Continuous Failure Pattern Main code and sub code Read codes on SRS warning lamp Short the SCS and turn key on SRS warning light will turn on then off after 3 0 seconds Code will then flash for the most recent problem followed by the second most recent problem followed by the third most recent problem Indications are repeated in case of continuous failure Start codes by Clearing codes See Code Clearing on page 71 When done Clear codes 2001 04 Civic 2002 04 CR V Insight and S 2000 2003 04 Element Indications stay on in case of intermittent failure Key On i 2 1 Pulse Code 2 1 Figure 8 23 Honda ABS Code Type 06
347. codes are present P To place the TCM in diagnostic or code display mode 1 Start and warm the engine to operating temperature 2 Switch the ignition off and set the 1st gear Hold switch to off The Hold switch is on center console adjacent to gear selector 3 Place the gear selector in Park and start the engine The Power lamp on the instrument panel should light for about 2 seconds Switch the ignition off place the gear selector in Drive and switch the 1st gear Hold switch on 5 Switch the ignition on without starting the engine wait at least 2 seconds and then move the gear selector to 3rd 6 Switch the 1st gear Hold switch off move the gear selector to 2nd and then switch the 1st gear Hold switch on 7 Fully depress and release the throttle to begin manual code gathering The Power lamp flashes Code Type 8b Figure 15 46 15 2 3 1990 96 4EAT Transmission Version 2 Use this procedure to test the 4EAT transmission in 1990 1995 Legacy 1992 1996 SVX and 1993 95 Impreza P To determine if any current codes are present e Turn the ignition on engine off Current codes are present if the Power lamp flashes four times after the 2 second bulb check If the lamp remains on there is a problem in the lamp circuit or with the control module If the lamp remains off after the 2 second lamp check no current codes are present however history codes may still be in memory See 1990 96 4EAT Transmission Version 2 Hi
348. codes repeat three times and are followed by a 1 2 second pause Code 12 always flashes first to confirm the system is in the diagnostic mode Any current codes follow code 12 Code 13 indicates the presence of history codes which then follow If only history codes are present the diagnostic sequence will first flash code 12 then code 13 followed by the history codes The code display cycle repeats as long as the system is in the diagnostic state 1 3 Sec i 1 3 6 1 1 3 0 1 1 Sec Tu Sec Start of gt 4 Next Code Key On H 3 r2 Pulse 1 4 Code 32 gt Figure 4 25 Acura ABS Code Type 06 Table 4 11 Acura ABS Code Type 06 Pattern Main code and sub code Read codes on ABS warning lamp Short the SCS connector and turn key on ABS indicator light will stay on for 2 seconds then turn off main code will flash then pause 1 second sub code will flash and pause 5 seconds stored codes will flash only one time per ignition cycle cycle key at least once to verify codes To clear codes remove ABS B2 15 fuse in the ABS fuse box for 10 seconds NSX only Remove 2 and 3 ABS fuse for 10 seconds Start codes by When done 27 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 1 Sec 1 Sec 2 Ignition On Code 43 Code 2 Figure 4 26 Acura ABS Code Type 12 Table 4 12 Acura ABS Code Type 12 Pattern Main code and
349. commanding a rich or a lean mixture as part of the long term fuel metering correction strategy Similar to short term fuel trim SFTRIM the LF TRIM number can range from 35 to 43596 with 000 as the midpoint A number above zero percent indicates the PCM has commanded long term rich mixture correction A number below zero percent indicates the PCM is commanding a lean mixture The LF TRIM number follows the short term fuel ST FUEL number and makes long term corrections to the fuel metering in response to a pattern or trend of short term fuel changes Compare LF TRIM numbers to injector on time Numbers above zero percent indicate increased on time Numbers below zero percent indicate decreased on time LF TRIM corrections operate only in closed loop In open loop the number goes to a fixed value LG FL IDLE mS Range not available Indicates the long term fuel correction being applied at idle LIFT SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the lift switch it reads ON when the lift switch is turned on LINE PRES 6 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the line pressure solenoid status in percentage LINE PRESS A Range not available Indicates the line pressure solenoid status 407 Data Parameters Engine Parameters LO SPEED CUT Range NON CUT Indicates the vehicle cruise condition NON Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed e CUT Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with
350. connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds of the lamp switching on Within 4 seconds of the lamp switching off remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector The SRS lamp flashes twice to indicate memory has been erased Switch the ignition off and wait two to three seconds Turn the ignition switch on again The SRS indicator light should come on and go out after about 6 seconds Continue to monitor the SRS indicator and confirm that it does not come on again after 30 seconds Turn ignition switch off 10 4 Testing Transfer Case Body Control Module BCM and Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Control Systems The OBD II data link connector DLC is the used for testing the transfer case BCM and IPC 97 This chapter contains information for testing Kia vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Kia systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission e Antilock Brake System ABS Airbag 11 1 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems Kia engine transmission ABS and airbag testing includes Code Reading page 98 e Manual ABS Code Reading on page 101 11 1 1 Code Reading P To read engine codes with a 20 pin connector e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with red terminal converters as shown in Figure 11 1 red lead to terminal 19 blue lead to terminal 11 and black lead to terminal 4 or 12 ERES Le
351. connectors and adapters are shown in Figure 16 8 on page 202 201 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing ABS Systems 1 Positive meter lead to pin DG 2 Jump to ground ignition and OD switches on 3 Use TOY 1 adapter 4 Use TOY 2 adapter Figure 16 8 Transmission connectors 16 4 Testing ABS Systems Toyota Lexus and Scion ABS provides code information 16 4 1 Code Reading Connectors ABS diagnostic connectors are shown in Figure 16 9 9 0 1 Use 2 adapter 2 Use TOY 1 adapter 3 Use OBD II adapter Figure 16 9 Antilock brake system connectors 202 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Some early systems require disconnecting a service wire or installing a jumper wire in order to initiate a flash code display Figure 16 8 1 Disconnect service wire some models 2 Disconnect Wa to Wb jumper some models Figure 16 10 Antilock brake system connectors NOTE When reading codes or data using TOY 1 or TOY 2 connectors use the battery pack or an external power source 16 5 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Toyota Lexus and Scion SRS provides code information 16 5 1 Reading SRS Codes For all models except 2000 and later Celica Echo and MR2 use Auto Code Read while connected to the diagnostic link connector P To read codes for all vehicles except 2000 and later Celica Echo and MR2 1 Turn the key on with the engine o
352. cortices Sieve hese Drm rte me A to a n Rie cd etre d Ee A UII Rte dE NR SIM UE I REN RO YE EH D dde EORAD 96 OR RR OH EAR ERE FR re eed Lock Posit Sw 2 weds LOCKS WAS noo ie eite ee EP RE yet EO rato ERE E UA e RE Ern Er e TER eel ep a a a a DPI i En rn DUTY 90 els dani MM 505 LONG FT1 LONG FT2 LONG FT3 LONG FT4 LONGFT1 LONGFT2 M A ete LOW BATTERY LOW BEAM DUTY CYCLE ipta ated D Dade A 323 LOW CLNT LEVEL i 24410 ah e LAM LM Lt 410 e VB QN 1 ERN RR RR 481 AOS ANIA Oe Stacie tae Sete 505 505 HOLD eu CMM DO LU 505 LOW OIL LEVEL LOW OIL PRESS POWRADFAN S Uer eto LOW RERBA ES seed d Best 411 LOW SPE Css DL M ML DM DCUM 411 LOW WASHER FLUID aiat ri esee de ce ceto e
353. ctive connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC 306 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Com Tire Pressure Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the tire pressure ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Car Finder Range ON OFF Displays the status of the car finder of the wireless remote Reads ON when the car finder feature is active and reads OFF when it is disabled When active the car horn sounds when the remote button is pressed CCNT TPMS Range actual Indicates the number of continuous codes COURTESY LAMP SW Courtesy Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the courtesy lamp switch The reading should be ON when the switch is turned on and OFF at all other times The BCM uses this data in controlling the courtesy lamp operation Curr Com Rain Range OK STOP Indicates current communication between the rain sensor ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC D Door Cty Sw Hood Courtesy Sw P Door Cty Sw Rear Door Courtesy Sw RL Door Courtesy Sw RR Door Courtesy Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the indicated door courtesy lamp switch D is driver
354. ctum o uel re ies oxides dap 184 ABS Code Reading and Connector 185 Testing Airbag SRS 191 Airbag SRS Code 192 Airbag SRS Code 192 Airbag SRS Code Reading and Connector 192 Chapter 16 Toyota Lexus and Scion 197 Identifying 1995 and Earlier 197 Testing Engine Systems aad erre dede a cd Ve doe ee 197 Code Reading Connectors and 198 Code Sensitivity OBD II and some 199 DataNo GOdes tse ianitor aede rv te Mee al 199 Manual Code Reading rne eere ten eee epe ded de dede aie c sete ee 200 Actuator TESE eona tette o etico ier e Pr me eri tuns 200 Testing Transmission 201 Code Reading 201 Testing ABS Systems sesi crt eere a OR Pec o 202 Code Reading 2
355. cy ABS diagnostic connector location 189 Subaru Testing ABS Systems P To clear code memory 1 2 Disconnect the diagnosis terminal from diagnosis connector terminal 2 Connect the diagnosis terminal to diagnosis connector terminal 2 for at least 0 05 second and then disconnect it Repeat step 2 an additional two times 3 times total within twelve seconds 2000 04 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon P To retrieve trouble codes 1 Locate the ABS diagnosis connector and diagnosis terminals near the heater assembly on the driver side Figure 15 54 Switch the ignition off Connect a diagnosis terminal to the diagnosis connector terminal 8 Switch the ignition on Read the trouble codes on the ABS warning lamp Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 The following condition apply to testing these vehicles 11 displays first then the stored codes display in order beginning with the most recent stored codes The code display repeats for up to five minutes P To clear code memory 1 2 3 Disconnect the diagnosis terminal from diagnosis connector terminal 8 Connect the diagnosis terminal to diagnosis connector terminal 8 for at least 0 2 second and then disconnect it Repeat step 2 an additional two times 3 times total within twelve seconds 1 Diagnostic connector 2 Diagnosis terminal 3 8 terminal 4 5 terminal Figure 15 54 2000 04 Legacy ABS diagnosis co
356. d OFF when closed HOOD OPEN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the hood ajar switch signal circuit An open switch door open is displayed as ON High Mount STOP Light transistor Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the high mounted stop lamp transistor Reads ON when the transistor is on brake pedal depressed and off at all other times brake pedal released Hist Com Rain Range OK STOP Indicates history communication between the rain sensor ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Horn Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the horn switch Reads ON when the horn switch is on horn sounding and off at all other times HORN TPM Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the horn output I Key Hatch Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the hatch button on the Intelligent Key remote transmitter Reads ON only when the hatch button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times Lock Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the lock button on the Intelligent Key remote transmitter Reads ON only when the lock button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times Trunk Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the trunk button on the Intelligent Key remote transmitter Reads ON only when the trunk button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times 315 Data Parameters B
357. d switch in less than 100 milliseconds to monitor the pre converter O2S The PCM performs a fuel control routine and examines the pre converter sensor readings during known air fuel mixtures The PCM looks for specific sensor values based on the mixture levels it provides 211 Generic OBD II Main Menu Selections The post converter check is significantly different The PCM sees almost no switching when the converter is functioning properly To test the sensor the PCM forces a fuel control routine that the converter cannot compensate for and then monitors the sensor response Both sensors are also monitored continuously for open and short circuits To perform an O2S Monitors test 1 Select 05 06 07 Display Test Param Results from the Select Service menu 2 Select 05 Oxygen Sensor Monitoring from the submenu A test options menu displays 3 Selecta test from the list What the sensor response signal tests measure are shown in Figure 17 3 Rich C 1 Test 1 Rich to lean sensor threshold voltage 2 Test 2 Lean to rich sensor threshold voltage 3 Test 3 Low sensor voltage for switch time calculation 4 Test 4 High sensor voltage for switch time calculation 5 Test 5 Rich to lean sensor switch time 6 Test 6 Lean to rich sensor switch time 7 Test 7 Minimum sensor voltage for test cycle 8 Test 8 Maximum sensor voltage for test cycle 9 Test 9 Time between sensor transitions
358. d in the ECM The PROM is a replaceable electronic device that contains the operating program and calibration values for a specific vehicle engine and accessory package combination PROMs are often revised and new PROMs are issued to cure a driveability problem or otherwise improve operation Because PROMs are interchangeable it is possible for the wrong or outdated PROM to be installed The PROM ID may be a 2 3 4 or 5 digit number depending on year and model Compare the PROM ID to the manufacturer s specifications to determine if the correct PROM is installed Some service manuals refer to the PROM as the MEMCAL because it contains both memory and calibration functions PSMOTTRQ PSSOC PSTBAT PSVBATPT Range ON OFF Indicates the IMA power saving information when an individual voltage of the BCM is out of suitable range Reads ON when in power save mode PSVBATAL Range ON OFF Indicates the IMA power saving information when all voltage of the BCM is out of range It reads ON when in power save mode PULSE CAL ST PULSER CAL STATUS Range 1 0 Indicates the CRK pulser learn calculation status which is used for misfire detection It reads 1 if is under calculation the ECM is calculating the pulser tolerance compensation value PULSER F B LEARN Range variable Indicates the status of the CRK pulser feedback learn condition It reads OK or COMPLETED if this learning is completed NG or NOT COMPLETED if not To
359. d odo ee 327 Rear Door Courtesy SW noie Re ec e eei ec poe er eet 309 REAR FOG LAMP SW hi 327 Pear mede 327 Rear lock PoSIUSW c sre eive ERREUR Y M DEP E p I EP EG i T d a C e Na 313 REAR MOTOR AMPS 286 REAR MOTOR EBK qu P M 286 REAR O2 MV anneanne dn diate ean is ae a aia Aa i ae Rin 422 REAR O2 HEATERS 2 008 aea e i ette co e ae n Ha n dee c M A Re Hn goce diee eg etg dei d rd 430 REAR OZ STATUS xni treo etin ee e ic me nee etre etiem eet 383 REAR O2 Rear Shade Sw Rear Washer SW ere pete n deo b 327 Rear Wiper it emere e rer ener be ir e E e Pie ee ee eo ue iE Ee EE HERE 327 327 Rear Wiper ee tit Ee etii ener RR idi ee o ve te e HE e ento 327 RED TIMING SQL 2 tei ttti ee I tti e UP D e etl Ld Ho LT ITE DL oed dan 511 REDUCE TORQ Tisno iien nii nien he n eR E P na b C n vet 430 REDUCE TORQ p unio eri del cite aera ecient 430 260 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters REDUCED POWER REF 1 V STATUS 430 REEF REF 2 V STATUS 20 2 R g Girl Gutrr A err teme i de e di Nadine die ide e rece ebbe ur e
360. d operation duty cycle 10 to 50 during a requested intrusive operation at idle is considered normal VVT OCV DUTY 1 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT OCV bank 1 intake cam commanded operation duty cycle 10 to 50 during a requested intrusive operation at idle is considered normal VVT OCV DUTY 2 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT OCV bank 2 intake cam commanded operation duty cycle 10 to 50 during a requested intrusive operation at idle is considered normal VVTL ANGL 1 96 Range Min 0 9e Max 100 96 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT aim angle bank 1 0 96 Idling VVT duty signal value during intrusive operation VVTL ANGL 2 Range Min 0 Max 100 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT aim angle bank 2 0 Idling duty signal value during intrusive operation WAC_FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a wide open throttle A C cut off fault WAC WOT A C Range ON OFF Indicates whether the PCM is preventing the A C system from operating due to undesirable engine conditions These include operation during engine cranking and wide open throttle On most vehicles OFF means that the PCM senses undesirable conditions and is currently preventing the A C clutch from energizing ON means the PCM is allowing A C operation VAPOR PRESS PUMP Range Min 33 853 kPa Max 125 596 kPa Indicates the pressure inside fuel tank
361. d run the engine to warm it to normal operating temperature 3 Select to initiate the test 4 Asinstructed accelerate the engine and hold it at 2000 RPM Lean and Rich indicate the condition of the exhaust LED 3 flashes to indicate that the scan tool is receiving a signal from the exhaust gas oxygen sensor P To perform a switch test 1 From the Functional Tests menu select Switch Test 2 Select to initiate the test NOTE Not all switches displayed apply to every vehicle Refer to Mazda service procedures and specifications for availability of specific switch tests As you test each switch the Switch State parameter should alternately display High or Low each time a switch status changes Also LED 4 turns on when this parameter displays Low and off when High See Table 12 1 for individual switch test instructions 104 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems Table 12 1 ndividual switch test instructions SWITCH TEST INSTRUCTIONS With the key on and engine off Switch State alternates High Low as the clutch is Clutch depressed and released Neutral Switch State alternates High Low when switching from a drive state to a park neutral state S A T only Make sure the engine is off Switch State alternates High Low as the Inhibitor transmission is placed gear and returned to neutral Idle Switch State alternates High Low as the accelerator pedal is pressed a
362. de and sub code Read codes on SRS warning lamp Short the SCS and turn key on SRS warning light will turn on then turn off after 2 0 seconds main code will flash and pause 1 2 seconds and flash again if code Start codes by is greater than 1 add the flashes together for main code after a 2 0 second pause sub code will flash in 0 3 second pulses and flash again if code is greater than 1 add the flashes together for sub code Clearing codes See Code Clearing on page 71 Clear codes If the SCS connector is shorted and SRS has no stored it s When done normal to see the SRS light remain on continuously Some models will flash SRS lamp continuously without pausing Computer can store up to three most recent codes 70 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 3 oI _ YW HBE BOE ALe eo s 4 15 16 1 Data link connector DLC 2 Jumper wire Figure 8 26 1996 2002 Passport SRS code clearing 8 3 3 Code Clearing P To clear SRS DTCs on all models except Passport 1 Switch the ignition off 2 Connectthe SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 001100 to the yellow 2 pin MES connector A common jumper wire can also be used as long as you maintain good contact between the terminals 3 Switch the ignition on The SRS indicator lamp lights for about 6 seconds then goes off 4 Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seco
363. des 4 Turn the ignition off after completing the SRS data tests Codes Only This section has information on retrieving SRS codes using the scan tool To gather codes 1 Select Codes Only A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue An initializing communication message displays NOTE The initializing communication screen means the scan tool is attempting to start the test however it does not mean the vehicle has responded If the message stays on the screen more than a few minutes the test did not start 3 The Code List which shows all codes in memory displays if codes are present Clear Codes This section has information on clearing SRS codes using the scan tool To clear codes 1 Select Clear Codes A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue 3 When the confirmation message displays select to clear ABS codes The DTCs Cleared message displays 4 Select to exit Manual Code Reading SRS There are 2 types of manual SRS codes Type 06 see Figure 4 27 and Table 4 13 on page 30 Type 07 see Figure 4 28 and Table 4 14 on page 30 29 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 0 1 Sec 1 2 Sec 0 3 Sec 1 1 1 1 y 1 Y 1 14 91 i La Start of Next Code 3 0 2 0 Key On 10 10 2 1 131 gt 1 44 MP 1 1 1 Pulse 10s Digit isDigi
364. des and Soft Codes on page 51 e Clearing Codes on page 51 e Field Service Functional Tests on page 52 e Prizm Actuator Tests on page 52 7 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Code reading test connector location procedure and adapter use varies by model P To read 1989 95 Prizm engine codes e Connect the TOY 1 adapter to the connector in the box marked diagnosis on either fenderwell Figure 7 1 44 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems 1 Connector 2 TOY 1 adapter Figure 7 1 1989 95 Prizm connector location P To read 1989 95 Prizm engine codes optional e Jump diagnosis connector pins as shown in Figure 7 2 1 Terminal E1 2 Terminal T TE or TE1 Figure 7 2 Jump pins for flash codes P To read 1989 92 Metro except 1992 1 3L engine codes e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with red terminal converters to the connector near the left side of the engine Figure 7 3 45 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems 5 1 Connector 2 MULTI 1 adapter 3 Green 4 White 5 Black Figure 7 3 1989 92 except 1992 1 3L connector and adapter P To read 1989 Spectrum and 1990 94 Storm engine codes e Connect the MULTI 2 D adapter to the connector near the passenger kick panel Figure 7 4 1 Connector 2 MULTI 2 adapter 3 MULTI 2 D Figure 7 4 1989 Spectrum and 1990 94 Storm connector and adapter P
365. des are read from the check engine light on 1990 94 Legacy and Impreza and SVX Two types of codes can be read memory codes and active codes Codes are on 1992 95 read by hooking test connectors together and following a step by step procedure Code Type 08a flashes a two digit long short code on the check engine lamp Figure 15 45 Each 10s digit displays as 1 2 second pulses with 0 3 seconds between each pulse Each 1s digit displays as 0 2 second pulses with a 0 3 second pause between each digit With multiple codes there is a 1 8 second pause between codes Additional information for testing other systems that use this code type can be found in each System s testing section 177 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 2 Sec 0 2 Sec First Digit Second Digit Ir n 1 1 ova 1 1 Off 2 T First Digit Second Digit i 8 1 4 4 23 5 4 Code 12 gt Figure 15 45 Subaru Code Type 08a Table 15 11 Subaru Code Type 08a Pattern Long and short Read codes on Check Engine lamp for engines panel lamp for transmissions Start codes by Follow the appropriate Subaru procedure When done Clear codes according to the Subaru procedure Code Type 08b Code 080 Figure 15 46 on page 178 consists of a 2 second flash followed by a 1 second pause followed by a series of 0 1 second flashes Front wheel drive FWD vehicles have ten
366. dicates the state of the starter relay it reads ON with the starter engaged STARTER SWITCH STARTER SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the starter motor switch it reads ON with the starter engaged STOP LAMP SW Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the stop lamp switch it reads ON when the brake pedal is depressed and OFF when released SUB BRAKE SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the idle stop sub brake switch it reads ON when idle is stopping SVSM SVSOUT SVSP Range 12V 0V Indicates the voltage applied by the ECU to the SVS terminals SWITCH STATE Range HIGH LOW Indicates the position of a specific actuator switch when conducting certain functional tests A circuit is generally LOW when actuated SYS GUARD Range ON OFF Indicates the system guard SYS GUARD Range OFF ON Indicates the status of the ETCS system guard SYSFAIL Range variable Indicates a count of system failures a count is recorded when a DTC is set TAC MTR CMD Range 0 to 100 Indicates the required duty cycle to maintain a desired throttle position The scan tool will display a higher value if more effort is required to move the throttle to the desired position such as 437 Data Parameters Engine Parameters physical resistance The scan tool will display a lower value if less effort is required to move the throttle to the desired position TAC PCM COMM FLT Range OK FLT Indicates the communicat
367. dicates wide open throttle Closed throttle readings vary because of the idle speed control ISC motor position and throttle body adjustments When a percentage displays a reading of 0 indicates a closed throttle and 100 indicates a wide open throttle A percentage usually displays on a system with an autoranging TP sensor The ECM resets the 0 to 100 range in relation to TP sensor voltage as new minimum and maximum TP sensor voltages are sensed by the system THROTTLE MTR Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not throttle actuator control permitted ON Idling read value with engine switch on IG Do not start engine THROTTLE MTR Range Min 0 Max 100 Indicates throttle actuator 0 5 to 40 Idling THROTTLE MTR AMPS Range Min 0 Max 19 92 A or Min 0 A 80A Indicates throttle actuator current 0 to 3 0 A Idling 441 Data Parameters Engine Parameters THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR V TP V TPS ECM TPS ETS TPS V MIN TPS V TPS 1 V TPS 2 V TPS1 V TPS2 V Range 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the throttle position TP sensor signal voltage which determines throttle opening a 1 or 2 in the name indicates the vehicle uses more than one TP sensor Readings should be Low voltage at closed throttle High voltage at wide open throttle The full range of the TP sensor voltage readings available to the ECM is 0 to about 5 1 V and typical readings are as follows 0 5V clos
368. ding Connectors and Locations on page 33 ABS Manual Code Reading on page 36 Clearing Codes on page 36 Codes and Data Slow on page 37 Actuator Tests on page 37 5 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Figure 5 1 below and Table 5 1 on page 34 provide Chrysler Import diagnostic connector location information Figure 5 1 Common connector locations 33 Chrysler Imports Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Table 5 1 Common connector locations VEHICLE YEAR LOCATION Avenger Sebring 1995 2000 2 Next to console 1994 96 5 Near firewall Colt Turbo 1987 88 4 Near firewall Colt Wagon 1988 90 3 Near ECM at center console Colt Summit 1989 96 1 Next to fuse panel 1984 86 8 Engine compartment Conquest 1987 89 7 Next to glove box striker Laser Talon 1990 94 1 Next to fuse panel Raider 1989 7 Behind glove box Stratus Coupe 2004 4 Near firewall Sebring Coupe 2004 4 Near firewall 1991 93 1 Next to fuse panel Stealth 1994 96 2 Next to console Talon 1995 98 2 Next to console Truck 1990 94 1 Next to fuse panel Vista 1987 91 6 Next to latch at lower glove box Vista Summit Wagon 1992 96 1 Next to fuse panel Connectors and adapters for reading Chrysler Import codes are shown in Figure 5 2 Engine codes for most vehicles before 1987 e Figure 5 3 Engine and transmission codes for most OBD I vehicles after 1988 e Figure 5 4 Airbag
369. ding applies only to linear or wide range sensors PTO STAT Range ON OFF Indicates the operating status of the power take off PTO The reading is OFF when PTO is off and ON when PTO is on RPM Range 0 to engine max Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute The RPM value is computed internally by the PCM based on signals from the ignition system or a crankshaft sensor RUNTM SEC Range 0 to 65535 seconds Indicates the engine running time since startup in seconds The counter stops if the engine stalls It resets when power is applied to the PCM or the ignition key cycles SHRTFT1 SHRTFT2 SHRTFT3 SHRTFT4 Range 100 to 100 Indicates the operation and short term correction of the fuel mixture on the vehicle with 0 as the midpoint Values above zero indicate a short term rich mixture correction command from the PCM which increases fuel injector duration Values below zero indicate a lean mixture command from the PCM which decreases fuel injector duration The SHRTFT corrections lead the long term trim LONGFT numbers When a pattern or trend of short term corrections to fuel metering occur the LONGFT parameters respond with a similar correction 462 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters SHRTFT11 SHRTFT12 SHRTFT13 SHRTFT14 SHRTFT21 SHRTFT22 SHRTFT23 SHRTFT24 SHRTFT31 SHRTFT32 SHRTFT41 SHRTFT42 Range 100 to 100 Indicates the sho
370. displays 2 Make sure the ignition is switched on then select to continue The self test initiated screen displays NOTE Some systems require the ignition to be cycled on after the test is selected Follow on screen Screen instructions 3 Atthe end of the test the service code list displays Memory Codes This selection displays the continuous codes of intermittent faults from the ABS ECM Some models automatically gather memory codes at the end of the KOEO self test Continuous codes should be serviced last To gather memory codes 1 Select Memory Codes A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue The self test initiated screen displays When the ABS ECM finishes the test the service code list displays If no codes are detected during the test a 0000 no faults present message displays Clear Codes This selection erases any continuous codes from the ABS ECM memory On some systems the KOEO test repeats and the scan tool then interrupts the self test input to clear memory Some systems require the vehicle to be driven above 25 mph to clear codes Note the following when clearing codes Some systems prioritize DTCs After repairing and clearing a DTC always recheck for additional faults that may be present 114 Testing Antilock Brake Systems e Only continuous codes can be cleared Codes from a KOEO self test are on demand codes that
371. dule e 0200 H Vehicle SPD ERROR Vehicle speed data in ECM is error e 0400 H e 0800 H e 1000 H Accel ERROR Abnormal acceleration or deceleration 1ST GEAR Drive with 1st gear position IHCC request Cancellation request from IHCC 355 Data Parameters Engine Parameters 2000 H ENGINE PROBLEM Engine problem 4000 H Vehicle SPD ERROR Vehicle speed memory in ECM is error e 8000 H ERROR control module failed CACBYP Range ON OFF Indicates the charge air cooler solenoid valve CALC B1 TWC Range 572 to 1949 F or 300 to 1065 C Indicates the temperature of the bank 1 catalytic converter as calculated by the control module based on various systems inputs The scan tool will display a higher value at higher catalytic converter temperatures The scan tool will display lower values at lower catalytic converter temperatures CALC B2 TWC Range 572 to 1949 F or 300 to 1065 C Indicates the temperature of the bank 2 catalytic converter as calculated by the control module based on various systems inputs The scan tool will display a higher value at higher catalytic converter temperatures The scan tool will display lower values at lower catalytic converter temperatures CALC CAT TMP Range 572 to 1949 F or 300 to 1065 C Indicates the PCM calculated catalytic converter temperature on some vehicles The calculations are based on sensor inputs for exhaust oxygen content engine c
372. e di n e a Eo ng e 477 FL VSC STATUS atrini ip Tb eta eH eire Pd dtc t eld bic baie ree tede de a 283 FL W G SEN dte reni oi male nine alan e heit eai 283 FL exci Se 283 FEWHEELACCEL m S2 5 7 niente etie rper eet ente i o e t Rey ee eb 284 cete a eee eed d EE e Og E Od HE ete tapez ee Da C o ted 284 FLASH TO PASS SW ARR ale ee eremi 315 FlexFuel Hz do es He ei ii Baia a enti ated ae aye tele Nala FL O iiie iie noinine deut elem eee t BP SW PEE FLUID TEM V FLUID TEMP 9 FLUIDTEMB5 M t re Eri EP rh e et et eL EE EE v innen niit eene ERE RERO RR NEED DERE ETE EE ie FOG e FOGREY ene RR ED nre E E ER VE ee eet e riens Foot Ait Leak osi neon o C v e e E Ne ede Dd be EA b be c o D be e D td FootLights tea eme RE eR mE Foot Def Auto Mode FORWARD amp REAR G m s2 FORWA
373. e 334 Generic OBD II Parameters dre ro rte E t bert edt E genae 456 Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters sse 465 OBD II Readiness 473 Occupant Classification OCC 475 Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters sse 476 Tire Pressure Monitor 482 Transfer Case Parameters sss nnne nen 484 Transmission 488 Appendix A Troubleshooting523 Slow Codes for Many 1988 and Later Mitsubishi Chrysler Imports and Hyundai Sonata 523 Codes and Data for 1989 and Later Toyota Cressida and Lexus LS400 523 1996 2006 Mazda 16 Pin DLC Voltage 523 No Communication for 1987 90 Nissan sess 524 GM Control Systems on Isuzu and Isuzu built 525 Glossaiy Seats uius 528 pnm ES 536 1 1 1 1 1 Using This Manual This manual contains instructions for testing Asian import vehicles Some of the Illustrations shown in this manual may contain modules and optional equipment that are not included on
374. e Off 1 4 First Digit 1 4 Second Digit Code 24 1 1 5 1 5 i i i i i i On 1 Off No Codes to Output Figure 5 6 Chrysler Imports antilock brake Code Type 11 Table 5 2 Chrysler Import ABS codes type 11 Pattern For code output long and short Read codes on ABS warning lamp Start codes by 16 pin OBD II DLC jumper terminal 1 to ground or analog meter across terminals 4 or 5 to terminal 8 12 pin connector analog meter across terminals 4 and 12 When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Code display cycle repeats as long as system is in the diagnostic state A battery surge that causes the ABS system to fail may cause Code 16 to set 5 1 3 Clearing C odes Trouble codes can be cleared from PCM memory with the scan tool on most 1988 and later models Select If code clearing Clear ECM Codes from the main menu fails for any reason the previous codes reappear at the top of the data list If this happens repeat code clearing 36 Chrysler Imports Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS 5 1 4 Codes and Data Slow Some 1988 and later models with the 3 0L SOHC V6 engine transmit data at a 63 baud rate The Main Menu for these vehicles displays Codes and Data Slow 5 1 5 Actuator Tests The Actuator Tests selection is available from the Main Menu for most pre OBD II models All actuator tests are key
375. e A positive number indicates a firm or fast shift where the actual shift time was shorter than the desired shift time A negative number indicates a soft or slow shift where the actual shift time was longer than the desired shift time This value is only accurate if the shift was adaptable 1 2 SHIFT SEC 2 3 SHIFT SEC 3 4 SHIFT SEC Range variable Indicates the actual time of the last adaptable 1 2 2 3 or 3 4 shift The shift time is based on the gear ratio change after the commanded 1 2 2 3 or 3 4 shift 1 2 SOLENOID 2 3 SOLENOID Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM commanded valve state of the 1 2 and 2 3 solenoids All the shift solenoids are normally closed This means that no fluid passes through when the solenoid is commanded OFF When commanded ON the solenoid opens and allows fluid to flow As shown in Table 18 8 the solenoid ON and OFF states match certain gear positions Check the factory manual for a chart for the specific transmission being serviced Table 18 8 1 2 and2 3 solenoid parameter readings 1 2 Solenoid 2 3 Solenoid Gear ON ON 1st OFF ON 2nd OFF OFF 3rd ON OFF 4th 488 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters 1 2 SOL CKT STATUS 2 3 SOL CKT STATUS 3 2 SOL CKT STATUS TCC DUTY SOL CKT STATUS TCC ENAB SOL CKT STATUS Range see below Indicates the status of the solenoid valve driver feedback voltage signal circuit OPEN SHORTED displays if the voltage is l
376. e ON OFF Indicates the status of the Air conditioner switch reads ON when switched on and OFF when off Unlock Opn Cls Range o ONOFF Indicates the setting of the all unlock system Reads ON when the system is active all doors unlock when the driver door is opened Reads OFF when the system is disabled Alt L Term Sig Range ON OFF Indicates the signal status of alternator terminal L Should read OFF when the starter is cranking reads ON at all other times Armed State Indicator Range ON OFF Displays the on off status of the alarm system Reads ON when armed and off when disabled AT HORN Range ON OFF Indicates the anti theft horn status Auto Light Sw Headlamp Auto Signal Light Auto Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the lighting control switch Reads ON when the switch is set to the auto position and reads OFF at all other times AUTO LIGHT SW Range OFF This Nissan parameter displays but cannot be monitored AUTOLMP Range ON OFF Indicates the autolamp switch status 301 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Auto Lock Delay Range 30 60 Displays the delay setting of the automatic door lock system in seconds Auto Lock Shift Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the automatic lock shift system Reads ON when the system is active all doors lock when the gear selector lever is shifted from park into any other position Auto Unlock Shift Ran
377. e 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 26 Hatchback All All X Figure 15 27 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Figure 15 17 z Justy All All X X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 1988 Figure 15 24 x 1 8L H4 SPI X Figure 15 25 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 30 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 24 5 3 Wagon 1 8L H4 SPI X Figure 15 25 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 30 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 24 XT All All X Figure 15 25 Figure 15 41 Figure 15 41 Table 15 7 18LH4 spl Figure 15 17 Ei ure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Coupe i Figure 15 18 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 30 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 26 All X Figure 15 27 Figure 15 36 Table 15 1 Figure 15 17 2 Justy All All XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 Figure 15 17 1 1 8L H4 SPI XX Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1989 Sedan Figure 15 18 9 9 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 30 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Touring 18LH4 spr X X Es Lu Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 W MF X Figure 15 30 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 17 Wagon 1 8L H4 SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 1 8L H4 T MFI X Figure 15 30 Figure 15 42 Figure
378. e ABS instrument panel light has illuminated on 1990 Legacy Touring Wagon 1990 1992 Sedan and 1992 1997 SVX Only current or active codes can be read No memory codes are available Codes are read by counting flashes on the ABS LED under the right front seat If the ignition switch is turned off the codes will be lost The vehicle must then be driven following the step by step procedures to cause them to reset Code Type 08 Straight Count flashes the LED in a straight forward counting sequence the code number digits display as 0 4 to 1 0 second pulses with 0 4 to 1 0 seconds between each pulse A pause of 5 2 to 13 seconds indicates the end of flashes to count and the code will be repeated again Only one code is displayed at a time After repairs perform a test drive and check for any additional codes that need attention 176 Subaru Testing Engine Systems I Il 1 1 19 1 0 4 to 1 0 Sec 5 2 to 13 Sec Code 3 lt P 0 4 to 1 0 Sec 5 2 to 13 Sec Code 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 4 to 1 0 Sec Figure 15 44 Subaru Code Type 08 Straight Count Table 15 10 Subaru Code Type 08 Straight Count Pattern A straight counting of the number of flashes Read codes on ABS LED under right front seat Start codes by Counting flashes of LED after the ABS lamp has illuminated When done Clear codes occurs every time the ignition switch is turned off Code Type 08a Type 08a engine co
379. e and observing two flashing LEDs Figure 14 4 on page 128 These systems flash the first digit on the red LED 10s digit The second digit flashes on the green LED 15 digit For example Red Red pause Green Green Green indicates code 23 127 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Engine Systems Code 21 Followed by Code 32 Red LED Green LED OO0 OOO0 00 Figure 14 4 Nissan Code Type 07a five mode system Table 14 2 Nissan Code Type 07a Used on Nissan 1990 and earlier models Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on Red LED 10s and green LED 1s on ECM Start codes by Follow the appropriate diagnostic code reading procedure Turn the ignition off turn the diagnostic switch off or counterclockwise and clear When done codes Code 44 or 55 are pass code system OK for models with A C Code 31 may be a pass code for models without A C P To read codes for five mode control systems with Code Type 07a 1 Locate the ECM below the passenger seat Table 14 2 2 Turn the ignition on do not start the engine 3 Verify that the LEDs light briefly for a bulb check If the LEDs do not light correct the problem before proceeding 4 While observing the two LEDs on the ECM turn the diagnostic selector switch on the ECM fully clockwise 5 After the LEDs flash three times turn the diagnostic selector switch on the ECM fully counterclockwise IMPORTANT Do not allow the LEDs to flash
380. e and should increase as the throttle opens APP D APP E APP F Range 0 to 10096 Indicates absolute accelerator pedal position The output signal is a proportional percentage to the input voltage when proportional or 10096 minus the proportional percentage when inverse proportional BARO kPa BARO inHg Range variable Indicates barometric pressure Readings may be obtained directly from a BARO or MAP sensor or calculated by the ECM from other sensor signals On some systems the BARO value is stored in ECM memory at ignition key on and also under certain driving conditions Clearing the memory may result in inaccurate BARO values 11 CATEMP21 CATEMP12 CATEMP22 Range variable Indicates the temperature of the catalyst substrate for the indicated cylinder bank or oxygen sensor 025 For example CATEMP11 is the reading from bank 1 sensor 1 which is the upstream O2S CATEMP12 is the reading from bank 1 sensor 2 which is the downstream O2S Readings may be obtained directly from a dedicated sensor or calculated by the ECM from other sensor signals 456 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters CLR DIST km or mi Range 0 to 65535 Indicates the distance accumulated since the diagnostic trouble codes were cleared using a scan tool or possibly when the battery was disconnected If the distance exceeds 65 535 km 40 722 mi traveled then the value will remain at 65 535 km and wi
381. e availability of power at the indicated terminal of the windshield wiper switch Reads ON when power is available at the terminal and OFF when power is not available Wireless Buzzer Response Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the wireless door lock buzzer response system Reads ON when the System is active and reads OFF when the system is disabled Wireless Door Lock Operation Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the wireless entry system Reads ON when the system is active and the doors can be unlocked without a key reads OFF when the system is disabled WPINT FRT Range ON OFF Indicates the front wiper interval auto wiper switch status WPFAST FRT Range ON OFF Indicates the front wiper relay fast speed status WPRLY LOW Range ON OFF Indicates the front wiper relay low speed status WPRLY REAR Range ON OFF Indicates the rear wiper relay status 332 Data Parameters WPINT REAR Range Indicates the rear wiper interval position switch status WPRPRKSTS Range Indicates wiper in park position status 333 Body Control Module BCM Parameters ON OFF ON OFF Data Parameters Engine Parameters Engine Parameters This section defines engine data parameters available from the engine control module ECM powertrain control module PCM or the vehicle control module VCM To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page
382. e for testing e 1988 92 Charade Engine 1990 92 Rocky Engine e 1989 92 Charade Transmission e 1991 92 Rocky ABS e Manual Code Reading 6 1 Testing Engine Transmission and ABS Testing Daihatsu engine systems and ABS includes e Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 40 e Manual Code Reading on page 41 Code Reading Connector Locations Transmission on page 42 6 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Diagnostic test connector location varies by model On the 1990 92 Rocky it is on the right fender panel and on the 1988 92 Charade it is on the upper section of the transmission P To read engine codes automatically Auto Code Read e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with black terminal converters to the 6 pin connector as shown in Figure 6 1 6 Pin Connector Multi 1 Adapter 1 2 3 1 White 2 Black 3 Blue Figure 6 1 Engine connector and MULTI 1 adapter Auto Code Read 40 Daihatsu Testing Engine Transmission and ABS P To read ABS codes from a 1991 92 Rocky automatically Auto Code Read Connect the MULTI 1 adapter with black terminal converters to the 6 pin connector located near the battery with a gray cover Figure 6 2 6 Pin Connector Multi 1 Adapter 2 3 1 White 2 Blue 3 Black Figure 6 2 Daihatsu Rocky 6 pin diagnostic connector and MULTI 1 adapter 6 1 2 Manual Code Reading Jump the appropriate connector pins to manually access Daihatsu engine and
383. e fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned onboard correction When engine is running specification range is indicated in SPEC 350 Data Parameters Engine Parameters 151 AMPS B1S2 HTR AMPS 251 HTR AMPS B2S2 AMPS Range 0 0 to 1 5 A Indicates heated oxygen sensor HO2S B1S1 B1S2 B2S1 and B2S2 heater element current which is low when heater circuit resistance is high The heater current is high when circuit resistance is low B1S1 L R Sec B2S1 L R Sec B1S1 R L Sec B2S1 R L Sec Range 0 to 1 000 sec Indicates the lean to rich L R and rich to lean R L oxygen sensor O2S switching times for bank 1 B1 and bank 2 B2 The ECM monitors for fluctuations in voltage ranging from greater than 0 600 V to less than 0 400 V The quicker the switching time the better the condition of the O2S BACK UP LIGHT SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the back up light switch it reads ON when the back up lights are on BARO 5 BARO Sensor BARO TCM BAROPRES Range 10 to 125 kPa 400 to 850 mmHg or 0 to 37 0 inHg Indicates the ECM calculated barometric pressure expressed as kilo Pascal kPa millimeters of mercury mmHg or inches of mercury inHg the value is based on the BARO sensor voltage signal Readings vary by altitude and ambient weather expect to see about 100 kPa 29 6 Hg at sea level 60kPa 17 8 Hg at 14 000 feet Compare BARO voltage
384. e of the wireless entry system in seconds F Fog Light Sw FOG F SW Front Fog Light Sw FRONT FOG LAMP SW Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the front fog lamp switch Reads ON only when the front fog lamp switch is activated with the park lamps or low beam head lamps turned on Front Fog Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the front fog lamp switch reads ON when the switch is on Front Washer Switch Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the windshield washer switch reads ON when the switch is on Front Wiper High Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the front wiper switch Reads ON only when the switch is in the high speed position Front Wiper Int Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the front wiper switch Reads ON only when the switch is in the intermittent position 312 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Front Wiper Int Volume Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the front wiper switch Reads ON only when intermittent volume is selected on the switch Front Wiper Low Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the front wiper switch Reads ON only when the switch is in the low speed position Front Wiper Stop Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the front wiper switch Reads ON only when the switch is in the off position and the wipers are parked FLASH TO PASS SW High Flasher Sw Passing Light Sw PASSING SW Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the f
385. e pie tr Hr ege i o dv een e dc ER oet dee 305 Communication FE Seat E RE ter PRETI Eier det 307 Communication ER Seat eds e ee UE RUE DRESS CUP e YER CH eva 307 Communication RE Seat A C siint de Prep eee eese E 306 Communication RR Seat ect t Ee ed eH M eee e PEN ER SE Hr e d eee AI 306 COMP MON COMP MON GOMPONENT MONITOR repere rete et en eti ete e Wr e eb 360 COMPONENT MONITOR ore e e t etr D he ege DE e ee d e He EY ee E Te 365 GOMPONEHNINTS tn thiet ere er Ete E EE DEPRECOR EFE E EE EE ERE 475 Compressor eed eee 299 Gomprs Det Operas e ehe trei de d ie mE RE e e Eten ee Ee ete HH P RD 300 COND FAN EO etit rene te tee tete ec e rM EN EDI CE Y b EN ve e OI d 365 COND EAN AIR SUR eium atenta 365 CONVERTER TEMP dis T s GOOICFAN 96 pere rd ih REDE Eo IU er teen arc re deter tree DP t PR COOLANT 9 torti re bebe eei Y E M cue ate oto eh eec dani edv eb M c nt rri bei m mtm te m ende iim iot ie eel eros I II COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP T TT nie 2 COOLANT 9
386. eads ON when the throttle is fully closed and OFF at all other times TP V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the throttle position in voltage TP FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a throttle position sensor fault TP MODE Range not available Indicates a throttle position status TP TPS V Range 0 0 to 5 1 V Indicates the throttle position TP sensor voltage signal which is proportional to the throttle plate opening Expect to see low voltage at closed throttle and high voltage at wide open throttle The 445 Data Parameters Engine Parameters full range of TP voltage available to the PCM is 0 to approximately 5 1 volts A typical TP voltage range might be about 0 5 volt at idle to 4 5 volts at wide open throttle TP1 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the status of throttle position sensor 1 TP1 V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the throttle position sensor 1 output voltage TP2 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the status of throttle position sensor 2 2 Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the throttle position sensor 2 output voltage TPS1 LRN MIN V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the learned minimum voltage for TP sensor 1 as determined by the control module this ignition cycle TPS2 LRN MIN V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the learned minimum voltage for TP sensor 2 as determined by the control module this ignition cycle TRACTION CTRL Range YES NO Indicates whether the vehicle has a traction control
387. ear left pressure sensor signal Typical readings range from 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released RL VSC STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the rear left wheel VSC control status Reads ON when VCS is active reads OFF at all other times RL W C SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the rear left wheel cylinder pressure sensor open circuit detection Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected reads OPEN when the circuit is open RL WHEEL ACCEL m s2 Range 200 84 m s2 to 199 27 m s2 Indicates the rear left wheel rate of acceleration RL WHEEL SPD Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the rear left wheel speed sensor reading Actual wheel speed similar speed as indicated on the speedometer RR ABS STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the rear right wheel ABS control status Reads ON when ABS is active reads OFF at all other times RR OPERATE TORQ Range 0 N m to 4 080 N m Indicates the rear regenerative operation torque RR PRS SEN V RR W C SENS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the rear right pressure sensor signal Typical readings range from 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released RR RQST Range 0 N m to 4 080 N m Indicates the rear regenerative request torque 287 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters RR VSC STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the rear right wheel VSC control status Reads ON when VCS is active reads OFF at all other ti
388. earns during the break in period on a new vehicle or after being reset on a vehicle in service During the first 500 miles after an EMCC reset there is no EMCC During miles 500 to 1500 the gradually decreases from a 200 RPM to a 60 RPM slip 5 1 9 4ITE F4AC1 Battery Disconnect Selecting Battery Disconnect momentarily interrupts the power supply B signal to the TCM This resets all of the TCM learned values without resetting the clock or radio presets 5 1 10 4ITE F4AC1 Pinion Factor The TCM used with the 4ITE F4AC1 transmission store a programmable value called pinion factor The Pinion Factor selection provides a way to adjust speedometer calibration to compensate for a tire size change P To reprogram the pinion factor 1 Select Pinion Factor A tire size screen displays 2 Press Y if the displayed tire size is not correct A tire size selection screen displays 3 Select the correct tire size Pinion factor programming takes about ten seconds then the tire size screen displays 38 Chrysler Imports Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS 5 1 11 4ITE F4AC1 Clutch Volume Index Display When available selecting CVI Display displays wear parameters for the automatic transmission clutches The numbers next to each parameter represent the volume of fluid required to pressurize each clutch circuit The CVI values change as the TCM learns or updates clutch fill volumes during normal use
389. ecseesaesseeeaessaeeaesseesaeeseeaacaeesaeaeeaesaeesaeeaeeeaesaeeeaeseeeeaeeaeeeae 320 Key Cyl Unlock Swan iae e pede e Ee Ee ae E Ete dread qu ce 320 KEY GY E Lee MAE MM Ape E EA D ET UT 320 KEY INIGNITION e 320 Key Insert On Sw Me 320 KEY ON i e ee o e DER E i MAA eee ete Een ce Pops PR 320 Key SWIEOCK cer ms meti EA M TEL Ia IPM UM ANT ome SEL UE 311 WnlOCk MM C HM 311 Dm 311 Key SweUnlock Ren ERE oe RE eee ae i ERE a EUR d 311 Key Unlock Wari SW 320 Keyless Koop du M M 320 Keyless Keep Unlock ccsccssccssosersseseseecssnenseensaeecncesoseesstesseensseecstansceesseenecescncesensesseasosgenseessseseoeenstensdesensesonsesatensees 320 Keyless Lock at 320 Keyless ete rir c rM e ALIUD EET 321 Keyless Pwr Rear Hatch 321 Keyless Pwr Rear 321 Keyless Pwr Sliding Lett DOOr iiss tr Dd hs o RO A ie aS a eee eu t 321 Keyless Pwr Sliding Right DOO
390. ect engine operation and vehicle control In Field Service mode the scan tool grounds the diagnostic pin B in the ALDL connector The ECM does not transmit data in this mode and new trouble codes cannot be set On some models Field Service can be selected to check or adjust ignition timing or the idle minimum air rate With the key on and the engine off the instrument panel Check Engine lamp flashes stored trouble codes if any are present or code 12 if no codes are present The ECM also energizes all solenoids you can use Field Service mode to test solenoid operation Field Service mode works differently depending on the engine e With a carbureted engine running the Check Engine lamp stops flashing code 12 and new trouble codes cannot be set The ECM also sets ignition timing to a fixed degree of advance which lets you check and adjust timing for some models You also can use the Field Service mode for a system performance check on a carbureted engine Refer to a vehicle service manual for details e For some fuel injected engines the instrument panel Check Engine lamp flashes rapidly when the engine is running in open loop and slowly when in closed loop Additionally in closed loop the length of the lamp flash indicates whether the exhaust is rich or lean The lamp flash is longer if the exhaust is rich 10 2 Testing Antilock Brake System ABS Isuzu ABS testing includes ABS Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page
391. ector P To clear 2000 2004 Legacy Outback and 2003 2006 Baja SRS codes 1 With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 2 of the airbag SRS diagnostic connector Figure 15 56 2 When the SRS or airbag warning light is flashing trouble codes install the other diagnostic terminal into pin 3 of the diagnostic connector for at least 3 seconds 3 Codes are cleared when the SRS or airbag warning light resumes a normal flashing rate of 0 6 seconds On and 0 6 seconds Off 194 Subaru Testing Airbag SRS Systems Figure 15 58 2000 04 Legacy and 2003 06 Baja Airbag SRS Diagnosis connector 1 Pins 2 and 3 2 Airbag SRS Diagnostic connector 3 Diagnostic terminals 2005 Forester 2005 Impreza Sedan and Wagon P To retrieve 2005 Impreza Sedan and Wagon and 2005 Forester SRS codes 1 2 3 With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 2 or the airbag SRS diagnostic connector The connector is located in the left lower dash panel area Figure 15 59 Read the trouble codes on the SRS or airbag warning light Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 Turn the key off and remove the diagnostic terminal from the diagnostic connector P To clear 2005 Impreza Sedan and Wagon and 2005 Forester airbag SRS codes 1 With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 2 of the airbag SRS diagnostic connector Figure 15 59
392. ector Use the NISSAN 2 adapter Figure 14 2 Nissan diagnostic connectors 14 1 2 Code Types 07 NOTE For transmission codes on models with the 4EAT transmission see Testing Transmission Systems on page 132 If the test vehicle has a diagnostic connector for code gathering the scan tool displays vehicle connection instructions at the end of the vehicle ID sequence See To read codes on page 124 If the vehicle does not have a diagnostic connector for code gathering select How To Get Codes from the Code Functions menu and manual code gathering instructions display see How to Get Codes on page 15 You can also gather codes manually on some vehicles with a diagnostic connector 125 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Engine Systems The scan tool displays the control system name and code type Nissan uses three basic types of control system Two mode system that outputs Code Type 07a e Five mode system that outputs Code Type 07a Two mode system that outputs Code Type 07b Both code types flash 2 digit 10s and 1s codes Code Type 07a Two Mode System On models that use Code Type 07a two mode system the ECM is placed in the diagnostic mode by activating a rotary or slide switch on the ECM as follows Figure 14 3 Table 14 1 Rotary and slide switch functions SWITCH MODE Clockwise diagnostic mode Rotary Switch Counterclockwise normal vehicle operation 3 diagnostic
393. ectors white single pin connector near ECVT ECM Place the gear selector in neutral and switch the ignition on engine off On 2WD models the ECVT lamp on the instrument panel should light On 4WD models the Clutch Temp lamp should light While holding the throttle fully depressed move the gear selector from neutral to reverse and then back to neutral 6 Release the throttle and start the engine If there are no codes are present the ECVT 2WD or Clutch Temp 4WD lamp flashes evenly twice per second If codes are present the lamp flashes Code Type 8a long short Figure 15 45 on page 178 IMPORTANT Perform the following procedure only in an area where the vehicle can safely coast to a stop from 25 mph without applying the brakes To perform the Justy D Check for current codes proceed as follows 1 With the ignition switched off mate the check mode connectors white single pin connector near ECVT ECM Start and warm the engine to operating temperature Switch the ignition off and place the shift lever in Park Switch the ignition on engine off On 2WD models the ECVT lamp on the instrument panel should light On 4WD models the Clutch Temp lamp should light Start the engine The ECVT or Clutch Temp lamp flashes the ID number of the TCM using a Code Type 8a long short pattern 8 With the engine running firmly depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever in this sequence Park to Reverse
394. ectrical current to the EACV the variable solenoid valve that controls engine idle speed The current increases with intake airflow The EACV is duty cycle controlled EC IGN RLY Range ON OFF Indicates the commanded state of the engine control EC or PCM ignition relay control circuit The scan tool will display On or OFF On indicates the EC ignition relay control circuit is being grounded by the control module allowing voltage to the ignition system OFF indicates the EC ignition relay is not being commanded by the control module EC IGN RLY FBK Range variable Indicates the voltage signal sent to the control module from the engine control EC or PCM ignition relay The scan tool will display battery voltage when the engine is running The scan tool will display no voltage when the relay is OFF ECONO LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the economy light The light is turned ON when the fuel system is in the lean burn zone ECRK1 ECRK2 Range not available Indicates the crankshaft sensor 1 or 2 disconnect noise counter for V6 engines ECT Range 40 to 399 F or 40 to 199 C Indicates the engine coolant temperature ECT 1 9 ECT SENSOR Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 Indicates the engine coolant temperature ECT as degrees The reading is calculated by the ECM based on the resistance value change of the NTC thermistor ECT sensor Typical readings at idle are 70 C to 100 C 158 F to
395. ed throttle engine at idle e 4 0V full throttle engine under heavy acceleration The MIN TPS voltage is the base throttle position value used at idle THROTTLE SW Range CLSD OPEN Indicates the position of the throttle switch inside the idle speed control ISC motor CLSD indicates the throttle is closed and the engine should be at idle speed TP sensor should be less than 209 OPEN indicates the engine is off idle TP sensor should be more than 209 THROTTLE VLV Range 0 to 180 Indicates the status of the throttle valve position ETCS which is the relative throttle valve angle controlled by the TACV module ThrPosMODE Range see below Indicates the throttle closed position as calculated by the PCM based on the throttle position TP sensor signal It should read C T closed throttle at idle and during deceleration P T part throttle at cruise or during moderate acceleration and WOT Wide Open Throttle at de choke crank A C cutout or during maximum acceleration THRTL CMD VAL V Range 0 0 to 4 98 V Indicates the ETCS commanded throttle position value THRTL CMND VAL Range Min 0 V Max 4 9804 V Indicates throttle position command value 0 5 to 4 8 V THRTL LEARN VAL V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the ETCS throttle valve fully closed learned position value 442 Data Parameters Engine Parameters THRTL LEARN VAL V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the throttle valve fully clo
396. ee EE ERE 436 speed Meter E ere tee ana eevee 482 266 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters Speed Mode SPEED RATIO SPRKADV hes Mc ie xe SRECAN A SES LAMB a E aot low IA SS MODE SIN IT 515 Ss ten hc A LAT 515 SS SHIFT SENSOR V 473 SS SUT SENSOR cer EE crux UM D M MN LEM D 473 MAN PTT 515 RCGNUM 515 SSA SS1 FAULT T Tem E 515 SSP SSAI NN INE NE 515 SSBS techs nar on CLOS DI 515 ES CEES ete A LL ELA M UNE LA Ei RM Mu MeL MU 515 NEN PR 515 850 554 SSE 555 SOEUR DeL pM m LI RE E SSF SS6 BSA S GT AND EUA Yield a AN LOU DN a NA ea tei MER Dee MP STALPHA MM MM UR D AS ST FUEL TRIM COUNTS qd Aud c ST FUEL TRIM B1 COUNTS ST FUEL TRIM B2 COUNTS Ne m
397. ee Rer ders Hep e te pai He et fud 466 2293 9 6 466 TRIM B2794 96 5 niet nte diede e nei i nep p i i e e en ete ist 466 TRIP ace wade addi nein an erie elie diaries Aerie eateries 449 TRIP COUNT 522 482 aha ia ee cae Ae en 482 TRIP RESET SWITCH rao E 482 uer L HR TRIP Serie 29i eret ne ier te elo ie DR Uie mE xou ner eren ear e are e RE eit nemici ele i tU ERE TRIPS Wot EE TELE etta ER RR ERU enm TAXI RLR N TrnCtrllndLamp TrnCtrlindLamp gt Het ede enia ie eee niei elei ee m ei Missa iT TENFIUIDTMP V p M Y TrnFluidTmp V Hit a Ure D TRUNK BTN SIG Tribe core iie ti d to rti eene diete ni An een A a
398. ee eL eal ie Eur PEEL EHE 293 TRAGIION GIRL 2 2 Rente rette Ue e d tea fene bei iei de vedete iet Aan 448 TRACTION SIGNAL ur tern tte poe ue pede eb v bnt M e eue ege dde Ne erp i deoa 448 TRAK zit rtr teta erui e is etaient 298 522 TRANS EEUI 3 9 net a OR Be t eia gre te aan 496 TRANS SLIP Men ier 522 Trans Status x2 rna ere e RE CT ede e RM 485 TRANS TEMP 9 T we 496 TransRange V 5 eo etit teatri riri ror rr C ee ese d hn is eh o rer cde farei E eret 522 TransRange ACTUAL GEAR ti tte eta ca t tede v Dr er eel LE Maree uu D oa doa 522 TransRange D cde nene nien en nit nre ER t FUSE e I D DER a PE ed d 522 Lb 522 272 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters TRIM B1 S1 96 we 437 TRIM BT ST 96 nre iE eee rer te e eee em dotum dine a te HE HE EIE 466 TRIM B1 S2 90 iiia tenir terret tate n ee eid ba e eb ta De ca eder i ic d a C ee pd dede 437 TRIMIBTI S2 96 nint ne nier mene ip nn Fd th e e e e eet 466 1293 96 E 466 TRIM BI SA etti Ir ena de E EP emitte p icm ete ee pei tet 466 Ell ELE M 437 TRIM B27S1 96 5 nini obe nee ven IR ner i e eR A Peeters 466 TRIM B2 S2 90 we 437 TRIMB2 S2 96 5 irn Haie b nne
399. eee EC SERE VENERE UHR TM EYE XY DISCHARGE RQOST SQQG W iiie tree i e t etit e eii e e erbe pierre satel 468 DISPLAY COOLANT TEMP teret te eee i rt he e tends e tr vie bte b et e DR e RE We da 479 Display EX OFF Ser 1 inde be RR e ede nee o Nd des 310 Display Ext ON Sens 2 310 DISPEAYED F EEL EEVEL 96 iiiter titer eee Ere rr rre eren e rr re Ee E eee 479 DISPLAYED ODOMETER tiere tetti oeste n br e ene YU TEN ED ge VN ene D P e dle c eda 479 DISPLAYED OIL PRESSURE i th en earl 479 DIST DIG CLEAR ene 371 DIST DTC 468 DISTANGE SINGE DTG GEEARED etit t no eeepc it lan te a cd e Pond e t pede ted pe deed 371 eR ER PER EORR EI ABIRE NEAR EO 310 DEIDULSW E 310 DOMEEMSSW 3 eiit ren teet irent n RE Eidem deme 311 Door Key Linked Lock SW coe tpe b a e o te td vba ee de cu ED Det 311 Door Key Linked Unlock SW spriin nte tein eh e d p REA Een Ee P 311 Door Lock Ree JS M 311 Door Eock Unlock 5 5 err rtr rt tere rrr ter Ee E Ht a EE ni ce ERE Prats 311 Door Lock SW dE DA He E T E E Wed eds 311 Door LOCK SW ione nine 311 Door Lock Sw LOCK p 311
400. eet ee ie 378 ENG STOPABOST n RIED e ee dateien e enitn 469 ENG TORQAUNEM T 378 ENG WARM UP RQST nre t ente e eor e ben die e en 469 ENGINE LOAD 96 p H 378 ENGINE MOUNT HH 378 ENGINE OIL BITE 378 ENGINE Oll PRESSURE ie reae tertii Sie a ela ede ae eine RR 378 ENGINE RPM 378 auelsliug 459 ENGINE RPM 480 Engine Fi nning cien a Ehren RE ERU eer Ere eri EE a 314 ENGINE SPD RPM 469 ENGINE SPEED RPM iren iiiter eere riri eel i te n le edd 501 ENGINE SPEEDJ2 RRM catene tertie i eoe t dee a t te d Alo Lt v y Ede D bale 501 Engine Status ENGTRQ SIGNAL 96 Entry Delay EOP SENSOR kgf Cmm2 1rd rec i eet cen i Ng e te Hc Ut MEE De dee toe d 379 EOP SENSOR V iii tren nui EE T n eee tice n oT trea e neben eie 379 EOT SENSOR M E ON 379 EOT SENSOR Veet idet eem dan Gnd iie bie en ie ich 379 234 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters EQ
401. efore doing this D Check To perform a D Check 1 Connect the scan tool data cable to the vehicle 2 Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature 3 Stop the engine and connect the green D Check connectors see D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations on page 166 together 4 Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine The ECS lamp should light and the ECM transmits a specific vehicle identification code The scan tool recognizes these codes 5 Start the engine The ECS lamp should go off 6 Drive the vehicle at least 60 feet and let the engine idle for at least 20 seconds This may be done carefully on a service rack if necessary Snap the throttle fully open two times 8 Runthe engine at 2500 RPM until the ECS lamp lights A flashing lamp indicates the system is OK A continuously lit lamp indicates trouble codes are present The scan tool reads these codes 173 Subaru 9 Testing Engine Systems Select Code Functions Auto Code Read from the Main Menu and follow the connection instructions earlier in this chapter 10 Separate the D Check connectors Pre 1987 MPI D Check Use this D Check procedure for 1983 86 vehicles with multipoint injection 1 If the ECS lamp is lit perform the ECS check U Check first P To perform a D Check 1 2 9 Connect the scan tool data cable to the vehicle Connect the two green D Check connectors see D Check and
402. ehicle is loose or the ignition is turned off This message stays on the screen until communication is reestablished or the operation is canceled Codes Only This selection displays DTCs in a standard 5 character alphanumeric format The first character a letter defines the system where a code was set or displays U if there is a communication fault Table 17 2 Table 17 2 First DTC character indications 15 DTC Character System Where a Code Set P Powertrain B Body C Chassis U Network The second character will be a 0 1 2 or 3 Table 17 3 The meaning of a 2 or 3 varies according to the system character P B C or U Table 17 3 Second DTC character indications 2 d DTC Character Type of Code 0 SAE defined generic code 1 Manufacturer defined enhanced code P2 SAE defined generic code P3000 P3399 Manufacturer specifications 2 amp 3 P3400 P3899 Reserved by SAE for future use B2 amp C2 Reserved for manufacturers B3 amp C3 Reserved by SAE for future use 210 Generic OBD II Main Menu Selections The third DTC character indicates the system where the fault occurred Table 17 4 Table 17 4 Third DTC character indications 3 d DTC Character System Where Fault Occurred 1 Fuel or air metering problem Ignition malfunction or engine misfire Auxiliary emission control system problem Vehicle or idle speed control system
403. ei e E EE HE Press Sers iio tem tea rdc epe ee de E he bic a Da etd ve vdd REGEN COOP T REGEN CO OPRT REGEN EXEC TORQ Nem rite errem deed er e e i E ue EE ved Ee 472 REGEN REQUEST oti etre te ce tee td ie Dre ted n ded e dte Io rp de dn dea 472 REGEN TORQ Nem eem e eine RR e e e ER EP e Re enr ec 288 HEGEN TORQY ER arent ete ere eget ege ted dee edo tie eden Ede DER 288 REGEN TORQ eerie ete ien ne er tede t De tete ipie t Perte 288 RR N I bic a a Ce ree edet e e eb deb a ro tede otc a EU Ae edge p a ext 288 Regit ID T Codema niente i eR RR RR UE ee a eie 484 Regit ID 2 Code 484 Regit ID 3 Code wisn nr e e it Ee beta n en e tire edid ede dean HE e e etit 484 ID 4 Codes E 484 Regit ID 5 G0d6 niin en tha Idee eund e ai eth ei eben eed 484 RELTP F P 430 RELTP SENSOR 96 9 tite eir i eme ter tp weit idee eene 430 REL VIEC PETS 429 RELIEF VALVE SOL 5 n ET we 430 E E HEU eee E ee VH EAE dE ete d 327 REMOTES eR pi qe eet i n ibt E eir E et E ete Ree 327 REQ TORQUE tratte ace betta tco ter ld n Pa e T bud sg ba t ede Coe 430 RESERVOIR x inier le din tenen e
404. en preferable or Yellow 5 Black 6 Engine Green preferable or Yellow 7 Transmission Green or Yellow Figure 13 2 Diagnostic connectors for most 1987 and earlier vehicles Connecting to 1988 and Later OBD I Vehicles P To read engine and transmission codes from most 1988 and later OBD I vehicles Use the HYUN 2 adapter Figure 13 3 1 HYUN 2 adapter 2 Connector Figure 13 3 Connector and adapter for SRS system on most 1994 and earlier vehicles 119 Mitsubishi Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Connecting to OBD II Vehicles P To read codes from OBD II vehicles with 12 and 16 pin connectors e Use the MITSU 1 adapter with the OBD II adapter attached Figure 13 4 on page 120 1 16 pin connector 2 12 pin connector 3 Mitsu 1 adapter 4 OBD II adapter Figure 13 4 connectors and adapters for most OBD II vehicles NOTE Most OBD II vehicles have 16 pin and 12 pin connectors and use the MITSU 1 adapter connected through the OBD II adapter The MITSU 1 lead with the 12 pin connector is not connected on all vehicles Follow instructions on the scan tool for correct hookup 13 1 2 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Code Reading P To read SRS codes from most 1994 and earlier vehicles e Use the HYUN 2 adapter and red terminal converters Figure 13 5 1 HYUN 2 adapter 2 12 pin connector Figure 13 5 Connector and adapter for most 1994 and earlier SRS 120 Mitsubishi Te
405. en the shift selector lever is in the D3 position 04 INDICATOR D4 D5 D INDICATOR D5 INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the highest drive position lamp D 04 D5 on the instrument panel It should only read ON when the lamp is lighted When the shift lever is shifted to the highest D position the D4 D5 D indicator reads ON D5 SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the D5 switch It reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the D5 position DCCSV DC 96 Range 0 to 100 0 DCCSV SLIP RPM Range 0 to 510 rpm Indicates the TCM calculated damper clutch control solenoid valve DCCSV slip rate An RPM value is the speed difference between the input and output vanes of the torque converter A percentage is the duty cycle of the pulse width modulated PWM signal being applied to the solenoid This solenoid applies hydraulic pressure to the torque converter 496 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters DFT ERROR CODE XX Range see below Indicates the cause of a direct function test DFT error as a hex value 00 Not under testing NOT TST 01 Oil temperature too low EOT LO e 02 Oil temperature too high EOT 03 Engine speed too low RPM LO 04 Engine speed too high RPM HI 05 Wrong throttle condition TPS 06 Throttle position too low TPS LO e 07 Throttle position too hi TPS HI e 08 Wrong vehicle speed condition VSS
406. engine The sensor is a variable resistor with a pin that rests on the idle speed control servo plunger As the plunger extends output voltage and idle speed increase As the plunger retracts voltage and idle speed decrease MOTTQLMTX kgfm Range 0 to 5 kgfm Indicates the state of the MOTTQLMTX MOUNT CTRL SOL MT CTRL SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the mount control solenoid valve The valve is turned ON to decrease the engine vibration at idle MP LRN Range YES NO Indicates the learned misfire correction profile status MTSW Range AT MT Indicates the manual transmission automatic transmission discrimination signal NCRKMF Range not available Indicates the crankshaft sensor for misfire detection noise counter ND WHL SPD Range 0 to 158 mph or 0 to 255 kph Indicates the non drive ND wheel speed as seen by the electronic brake traction control module EBTCM NLVL NLVL 1 NLVL 2 NLVLAD Range not available Indicates the engine base noise level NLVLAD Range not available Indicates the knock sensor signal for KCX type detection N SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of park neutral switch NEUT SW MTX Range ON OFF Indicates the clutch pedal position switch neutral switch circuit status 418 Data Parameters Engine Parameters NO OF MISFIRES Range 0 to 255 Indicates the total number of cylinder firing events detected as misfires during the last 200 crankshaft re
407. engine coolant temperature ECT sensor reading at the moment the ECM is turned on The ECM then stores this reading in memory until the next time the engine is stopped and restarted If the engine has not run for several hours the coolant temperature may be close to ambient air temperature It will be much higher on a hot restart Compare the START CLNT reading to the coolant temperature reading immediately after startup With a cold engine the two readings should be equal The coolant temperature reading should rise as the engine warms up The START CLNT reading should not If both readings stay the same there is a problem in the sensor circuit START ENRICH WARMUP ENRICH Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM control status mode of the fuel injection system During start or warm up mode the ECM monitors ignition coolant and air temperature airflow throttle position and O2S data to control injection pulse width timing and idle speed START IAT Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F Indicates the intake air temperature IAT at start up when the ignition switch is turned on 436 Data Parameters Engine Parameters START RPM Range not available Indicates the engine speed when the starter is engaged STARTER CONTROL STARTER CTRL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the starter control It reads ON when the starter cut relay is turned on which allows the starter motor to engage STARTER RELAY Range ON OFF In
408. epeats as long as the system is in the 92 Isuzu Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 10 2 3 Clearing ABS Codes Use this procedure to clear ABS codes on the 1996 99 Isuzu Oasis The following conditions must be met before DTC erasure mode will complete The SCS check connector or jumper wire must be connected to the 2 pin service connector before the ignition switch is turned on See Figure 10 19 on page 91 for connector location The brake pedal must be depressed before the ignition switch is turned on Vehicle speed must be 6 mph 10kph or less P To clear ABS codes 1 PaRON Connect the SCS service connector to the 2 pin service connector located under the glove box See Figure 10 19 on page 91 Depress the brake pedal Turn the ignition switch On while keeping the brake depressed After the indicator comes on depress the brake pedal again After the indicator goes off release the brake pedal again After a few second the ABS indicator blinks twice and the DTC is erased If the indicator does not blink twice repeat steps 1 through 6 if the indicator stays on after the indicator blinks twice check the DTC because a problem was detected during the initial diagnosis before shifting to DTC erasure mode Turn the ignition switch off and remove the SCS service connector ABS Indicator OFF Depressed L LL LZ 22274 Released He Ignit
409. er Figure 12 3 Figure 12 3 6 pin and 1 pin connectors and MULTI 2 adapter IMPORTANT When connecting to a vehicle with the above configuration make sure the 1 pin connector is properly identified Failure to identify the right connector may result in scan tool damage NOTE Some vehicles retrieve transmission codes from the engine control module 12 1 2 Manual Code Reading Refer to Figure 12 4 for reading manual codes 103 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 1 2 Sec 0 4 Sec IT in 1 1 1 1 6 4 0 Code Separaton Off i First Digit Second Digit 1 1 1 ae Code 23 9 L4 Code 12 1 Figure 12 4 Mazda engine transmission and ABS flash codes 12 1 3 Functional Tests 1983 95 models These functional tests apply to all models except 1991 94 Navajo 1994 B Series 1994 95 626 with 2 0L engine and automatic transmission NOTE Operations described in this section are not available on all tool platforms The following Functional Tests may be available for 1983 95 Mazda vehicles Oxygen Sensor Test monitors the feedback signal from the oxygen sensor 025 Switch Test checks certain switch circuits Base Timing Check commands the ECM to place the engine in the base timing mode for ignition timing checks and adjustments P To perform an oxygen sensor test 1 From the Functional Tests menu select Oxygen Sensor Test 2 Start an
410. er cylinder pressure sensor 1 circuit Reads OPEN only when an open circuit is detected reads NORM normal at all other times M C SEN 2 Range NORM OPEN Indicates whether and open exists on the master cylinder pressure sensor 2 circuit Reads OPEN only when an open circuit is detected reads NORM normal at all other times MTR RELAY 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the motor relay 1 status MTR RELAY 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the motor relay 2 status PARKING BRAKE SW PKB SW Range ON OFF Indicates the parking brake switch status Reads ON when the parking brake is applied and OFF when the parking brake is released PATTERN DRIVE Range ON OFF Indicates that a pattern drive is under enforcement Reads ON only during pattern drive operation and OFF during normal operating conditions 285 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters PDL STROKE V PEDAL STROKE V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the signal voltage of the brake pedal stroke sensor Typical readings range from 0 7 to 1 3 V when the brake pedal is released PDL STROKE 2 V PEDAL STROKE 2 V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the signal voltage of the brake pedal stroke sensor 2 Typical readings range from 3 7 to 4 3 V when the brake pedal is released PMP MTR PMPSTAT Range ON OFF Indicates the hydraulic pump motor operating status PUMP V Range 0to 16 V Indicates the voltage signal being supplied to drive to the ABS pump
411. er information for Acura ABS are shown in Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 and Figure 4 20 1 ABS indicator lamp 2 Service check connector 3 Jump wire Figure 4 18 1991 95 NSX 1992 94 Vigor 1991 94 Legend ABS controller and service check connector locations Figure 4 19 1986 90 Legend ABS controller and service check LED location 22 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS 1 4 door 2 3 door 3 Access cover Figure 4 20 1990 93 Integra ABS controller and service check connector locations I bo A GE A Le 13 14 esie 1 Jump pin 4 to pin 12 2 DLC Figure 4 21 1996 97 SLX ABS controller and service check connector locations 4 3 2 ABS Codes and Data Testing The following selections are available for ABS testing ABS Main Menu on page 23 Codes and Data Menu on page 24 Data No Codes on page 24 Codes Only on page 24 e Clear Codes on page 25 ABS Main Menu After selecting ABS from the System Selection menu the Main Menu ABS is displayed Selections vary by model and year 23 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS The following main menu selections are discussed e Codes and Data Menu Movies Custom Setup and Troubleshooter are discussed in detail in the user manual for your diagnostic tool Codes and Data Menu When Codes and Data Menu is selected a submenu with the fol
412. er the ABS indicator goes off again release the brake pedal After a few seconds the ABS indicator will blink twice and the DTC is cleared Turn ignition off and un short the SCS connector For other models With the SCS shorted cycle key on with brake pedal pressed ABS light will turn on then shut off release pedal and light will turn on press brake pedal until light turns off and release pedal Start codes by 26 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS in 2 Sec 0 4 1 mm N o 3 A NM 1 1 Repeats Repeats Repeats Repeats 1 3 Tmes 1 3 Tmes 3 Tmes 3 Tmes 1 1 1 1 1 Current Current History History Code 12 Code 23 Code 13 l Code 25 1 1 Begin 1 Begin 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 4 24 Acura ABS Code 5a Table 4 10 Acura ABS Code Type 5a Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on ABS warning lamp After bringing the vehicle to a complete stop and making sure the brake pedal is Start codes by not depressed turn the ignition switch to the off position Connect terminals 12 and 4 on the OBD II 16 pin DLC Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Within three seconds after entering the diagnostic mode pulsate the brake switch on and off at least six times Clear codes by When done Turn the ignition off disconnect connectors then clear codes All
413. ering occur long term fuel LT FUEL responds with a similar correction 431 Data Parameters Engine Parameters Compare ST FUEL numbers to injector on time Numbers above zero indicate increased on time below zero indicates decreased on time The ST FUEL corrections operate only in closed loop In open loop it goes to a fixed value SHIFT A 1 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the shift solenoid A 1 SHIFT B 2 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the shift solenoid B 2 SHIFT C 3 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the shift solenoid C 3 SHIFT SOL A Range ON OFF Indicates the status of shift solenoid 1 SHIFT SOL B Range ON OFF Indicates the status of shift solenoid 2 SHIFT SOL C Range ON OFF Indicates the status of shift solenoid 3 SHIFT SOL D Range ON OFF Indicates the status of shift solenoid 4 SHIFT SOL E Range ON OFF Indicates the status of shift solenoid 5 SHIFT INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the shift up indicator light on the instrument panel It is turned ON when the ECM judges that driving conditions request shift up for fuel economy SHIFT CLUTCH SW SHIFT CLUTCH SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cruise A T shift position Reading should be ON switch electrically closed when the A T shift position switch indicates D3 or D4 ShiftSol1 ShiftSol2 ShiftSol3 ShiftSol4 Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM commands for the 1 2 and 3 shift solenoids it reads ON when the
414. ers 5TH GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module A C ENABLED Range ON OFF Indicates the air conditioning switch A T 1 SWITCH A T 1 SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T 1 position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the 1 position A T 2 SWITCH A T 2 SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T 2 position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the 2 position A T 2 1 SWITCH A T 2 1 SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T 2 1 position switch Reads ON when the shift selector lever is in either the 1 or 2 position A T C P C SOL VLV A ACTUAL C P C SOL VLV B ACTUAL A T C P C SOL VLV C ACTUAL SOL A ACT SOL B ACT SOL C ACT Range not available Indicates the actual current being applied to clutch pressure control solenoid valves A B and C in amperes A T C P C SOL VLV A COMMAND A T C P C SOL VLV B COMMAND A T C P C SOL VLV C COMMAND SOL A CMD SOL B CMD SOL C CMD Range not available Indicates the TCM commanded current being applied to the clutch pressure control solenoid valve A in amperes A T D SWITCH A T D SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T D position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the D position 491 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters A T D3 SWITCH A T D3 SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T D3 position switch Reads ON only when
415. es using the scan tool To clear codes 1 Select Clear Codes A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue A code clearing confirmation screen displays 61 Testing ABS 3 Select to clear ABS codes The Cleared screen appears 4 Selectto exit 8 2 2 Manual Code Reading There are several types of manual codes for Honda ABS Type 02 see Figure 8 13 and Table 8 6 on page 62 Type 04 see Figure 8 14 and Table 8 7 on page 63 Type 04a see Figure 8 15 and Table 8 8 on page 63 Type 05a see Figure 8 16 and Table 8 9 on page 64 Type 06 see Figure 8 17 and Table 8 10 on page 64 1 0 Sec 1 0 Sec 1 0 Sec qc up 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Code 4 21 Code 1 Figure 8 13 Honda ABS Code Type 02 Table 8 6 Honda ABS Code Type 02 Pattern Main code and sub code Read codes on ABS warning lamp Short the service check connector and turn the ignition switch on but do not start the engine The ABS indicator will stay on for 1 seconds then turn off main code Start codes by will flash then pause 1 second sub code will flash then turn off for 5 seconds main code will flash then turn off for 5 seconds main code will flash and then turn off for one second sub code will flash Disconnect the ABS B2 15A fuse in the under hood fuse relay box for at least three seconds to erase the ABS control unit s memory Then turn the ignition key on a
416. est 1 Fuel level sensor R Manual mode shift down Manual mode shift up Manual mode Not manual mode Seat belt buckle switch R Stop lamp switch R 5343 332 a a Steering angle sensor R T Front wiper stop position R High beam status R Hood switch R Low beam status R 433 Rear window defogger control switch R 142 Subaru This chapter contains information for testing Subaru vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Subaru systems may be available for testing or troubleshooting Engine Transmission Antilock Brake System ABS Airbag SRS Supplemental Restraint System 15 1 Testing Engine Systems The following sections include information for testing Subaru engine systems Subaru engine testing includes Code Reading Connector Locations on page 143 Connecting the Scan Tool to the Vehicle Reading Engine Codes on page 150 D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations Automatic Code Reading on page 172 Code Type 08 on page 176 15 1 1 Code Reading Connector Locations This section contains locations for diagnostic connectors for the following Subaru vehicles Carbureted engine common connector locations on page 144 Table 15 1 Figure 15 1 1983 84 Turbo common connector locations on page 144 Table 15 2 Figure 15 2 Justy common connector locations on page 145 Ta
417. eters Tire Pressure Monitor Parmeters Tire Pressure Monitor Parmeters This section defines data parameters that are available from the tire pressure monitor electronic control module ECM This section applies only to models with a stand alone tire pressure monitor ECM Parameters for systems incorporated into the body control module BCM are defined in the BCM section 2nd Tire Range see below Indicates the number of second tire identifications to be registered Possible readings are INV invalid 4 or 5 Batt Volt 1 Batt Volt 2 Batt Volt 3 Batt Volt 4 Batt Volt 5 Range OVER LESS Indicates the status either over or less than battery voltage of the voltage signal for each of the monitored tires Ini Threshold 1 gauge Ini Threshold 2 gauge Ini Threshold 3 gauge Ini Threshold 4 gauge Ini Threshold 5 gauge Range 0 to 637 5 kPa or 0 to 92 2 psi Indicates the initial threshold of low pressure for each of the monitored tires Initial Switch Range ON OFF Indicates the on off status of the initialization switch Initial Switch Info Range WITH WITHOUT Indicates the initialization switch setting information Main Tire Range see below Indicates the number of main tire identifications to be registered Possible readings are INV invalid 4 or 5 Mode Status Range NORM TEST Indicates the tire pressure warning mode status Regit ID 1 Code Regit ID 2 Code Regit ID 3 Code Regit ID 4 Code Regit ID 5 Code
418. ey off status of the EVAP system pump VAF RESET SIG Range ON OFF Indicates the vane airflow VAF reset status During warm engine idling the reading should be ON at 2500RPM it should be OFF VAPOR PRES CALC Range 5 632 kPa to 715 264 kPa Indicates the calculated fuel vapor pressure inside the fuel tank on monitored inputs from the vapor pressure sensor With the fuel tank filler cap removed a reading of 0 kPa is normal VAPOR PRES CALC Range Min 5 632 kPa Max 7153264 kPa Indicates the vapor pressure calculated 0 kPa Fuel tank cap removed Pressure inside fuel tank monitored by vapor pressure sensor VAPOR PRES VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command to the vacuum switching valve VSV used to actuate the vapor pressure valve The vapor pressure valve lets the EVAP system detect and isolate leaks it reads ON when the VSV opens the valve VAPOR PRESS TANK Range Min 4 125 kPa Max 2 125 kPa Indicates the pressure inside fuel tank monitored by vapor pressure sensor e Vapor pressure 0 kPa Fuel tank cap removed VARI INTAKE VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the vacuum switching valve VSV for intake runner control 448 Data Parameters Engine Parameters VBAT V Range 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the battery positive voltage LOAD Range Min 0 9e Max 25700 Indicates the vehicle load Actual vehicle load VEH SPEED VEHICLE SPEED Range 0 to vehicle max
419. failure s the SRS indicator light will indicate each of the DTC s one time then it will stay on see Figure 10 26 Incase of both continuous and intermittent failures the DTC of the continuous failure only is indicated repeatedly After troubleshooting it first recheck to make sure that the problem has disappeared and that there are no other codes Then erase the codes from memory Incase the system is normal no DTC the SRS indicator light blinks see Figure 10 27 95 Isuzu Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Code Type 03 Tens Ones Flashes a 2 digit trouble code with a noticeable pause between each digit The first set of flashes is the 10s digit the second set of flashes is the 1s digit For example Flash Flash pause Flash Flash Flash is Code 23 Figure 10 28 suzu vehicles with orange SRS diagnostic connector and jumper pins Figure 10 29 1996 and newer Isuzu vehicles with 16 pin OBDII style connector and jumper wire Table 10 9 suzu SRS Code Type 03 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on INFL REST or SRS indicator lamp With ignition switch on jumper two terminals in a diagnostic connector together Only current codes will be flashed Figure 10 28 Figure 10 29 Start codes by Codes cannot be cleared manually on these vehicles A factory scan tool must Clear codes by be used to clear SRS codes When done Disconnect jumper amp turn ignition off
420. ff and 20 seconds 2 Select Code Functions gt Auto Code Read NOTE Pay attention to the terminal connecting position to avoid a malfunction P To read codes for 2000 and later Celica Echo and MR2 and most 2001 and later models 1 Turn the ignition switch on and wait for approximately 20 seconds 2 Connect DLC3 terminal Tc to terminal CG Figure 16 11 203 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Figure 16 11 DLC3 1 Terminal 4 CG 2 Terminal 13 TC P To read codes for 2000 and later Celica Echo and MR2 1 Connect a jump wire between terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 Figure 16 11 2 Turn the ignition switch on and wait for approximately 20 seconds No Codes Set Confirmation The following signs indicate that the airbag system functions properly The SRS lamp is unlit prior to connecting the scan tool e After selecting Auto Code Read the SRS lamp flashes continuously and the display reads No Codes Present e After exiting Auto Code Read the SRS lamp turns off Low Source Voltage The following signs indicate low source voltage in the airbag system The SRS lamp flashes or is continuously lit before connecting e After entering Auto Code Read the SRS lamp flashes continuously and the display reads No Codes Present e After exiting Auto Code Read the SRS lamp resumes flashing or turns on continuously NOTE A discharged battery or a faulty
421. for 1990 Justy MPI see Code Type 08 on page 177 Depress the accelerator to the floor then slowly release it Start the engine The ECS lamp should go off With a manual transmission depress the clutch and then release it Switch the parking lamps rear window defogger and heater fan on and then off Drive the vehicle at 30 mph above 2500 RPM This may be done carefully on a service rack if necessary Run the engine at 2700 RPM until the ECS lamp turns on A flashing lamp indicates the system is OK A continuously lit lamp indicates trouble codes are present The scan tool reads these codes Read codes visually on ECM LED for 1990 Justy MPI see Code Type 08 on page 177 Select Code Functions Auto Code Read from the Main Menu and follow the connection instructions earlier in this chapter After verifying the repair repeat the D Check with the Read Memory connectors connected to clear codes from ECM memory Separate the D Check and Read Memory connectors 1986 94 SPI and 1987 92 MPI D Check except Justy Use this D Check procedure for 1986 94 single point injection SPI vehicles except Justy and 1987 92 multipoint injection 1 vehicles If the ECS lamp is lit perform the ECS check U Check before doing this D Check 175 Subaru Testing Engine Systems P To perform a D Check 1 Connect the scan tool data cable to the vehicle 2 Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature
422. formance check on carbureted engines Refer to a vehicle service manual for details e For some fuel injected engines the instrument panel Check Engine lamp flashes rapidly when the engine is running in open loop and slowly when in closed loop Additionally in closed loop the length of the lamp flash indicates whether the exhaust is rich or lean The lamp flash is longer if the exhaust is rich 7 1 5 Prizm Actuator Tests The 1996 and later Geo Prizm offers interactive bidirectional actuator tests Most of the actuator tests are best performed with the key on and the engine running The Fuel Pump and Fuel Pump Relay tests must be performed with the key and engine off Most tests automatically display data parameters to help determine actuator or system performance but some tests do not display parameters and require you to monitor the selected actuator Measure the signal using a digital multimeter or listen for activation For most tests scrolling up and down switches the actuator on and off Test completion does not mean that the actuator was activated IMPORTANT Do not enter any actuator test while driving a vehicle on a road test unless the specific test requires you to do so PCM changes to ignition timing fuel delivery and other engine functions may affect engine operation and vehicle control For engine testing a typical list of actuator tests includes e Injector volume 52 Testing Engine Transmission and Anti
423. four times with the selector switch fully clockwise or the trouble codes will be erased The ECM is now in the diagnostic mode see Table 14 2 Write down any codes present Code 55 is a pass code All codes flash only once Repeat steps 3 through 6 to observe any missed codes Clear codes a Turn the diagnostic selector switch on the ECM fully clockwise b After the LEDs flash four times turn the diagnostic selector switch on the ECM fully counterclockwise Repeat steps 3 through 6 to verify that no more codes are present 128 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Engine Systems Code Type 07b Two Mode System The system that outputs Code Type 07b is also placed in diagnostic mode by activating a switch on the ECM Codes then simultaneously flash on the check engine lamp and a single LED on the ECM These models flash codes as a series of long and short pulses 10s and 1s on the LED and on the CHECK engine lamp on the dash Figure 14 5 and Table 14 3 For example Long Long Long pause Short Short indicates code 32 Longer Pause 1 1 Short 1 4 Code 32 1 4 Code 21 gt Figure 14 5 Nissan Code Type 07b Tens Long Flashes i 1 LI 1 1 Table 14 3 Nissan Code 7b Used on Nissan 1990 and later models without a connector for hook up Pattern 10s and 1s Long and short Read codes on Check Engine lamp or LED on ECM
424. from the MAP sensor before startup to the MAP voltage while the engine is running to determine intake manifold vacuum MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Range variable Indicates the manifold absolute pressure MAP sensor that detects the intake manifold pressure and converts it into voltage and sends it to the ECM The MAP sensor data is used along with other sensor inputs to determine basic Fuel injection timing 412 Data Parameters Engine Parameters MAP MAP SENSOR Range 0 to 255 kPa 0 to 75 3 inHg or 0 to 1913 mmHG Indicates the ECM calculated a manifold absolute pressure MAP which is based on the MAP sensor signal voltage When MAP is displayed in kPa the reading should be approximately 100 to 102 with the engine off and manifold pressure is close to atmospheric pressure at sea level When the engine is running and manifold vacuum is high the kPa reading drops On a turbocharged engine the reading rises above 100 as boost is applied When MAP is displayed as inches of mercury inHg or Hg the reading should be about 29 9 with the engine off and the manifold close to atmospheric pressure at sea level When the engine is running with high manifold vacuum the MAP reading in drops On a turbocharged engine the reading rises above 30 as boost is applied Table 18 5 MAP voltage to pressure relationship Voltage High Low MAP kPa 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 MAP 21 18 15 12 9 6 3 MAP mmHG 533 457 381 3
425. fthe value is 205 C 401 F Open or GND short in sensor circuit MG1 REV RPM Range Min 16 383 rpm Max 16 383 rpm Indicates MG1 revolutions in RPM MG1 TORQ N m Range Min 500 Nm Max 500 Nm Indicates MG1 torque in Newton Meters 468 Data Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters MG1 TORQ EXEC VAL N m Range 512 Nm 508 Nm Indicates MG1 torque execution value when 1 second has elapsed after the engine was started automatically with READY light ON engine stopped A C fan Hi headlight ON and the P position Less than 20 of MG1 TORQ MG2 INVERT TEMP Range Min 50 C Max 205 C Indicates MG2 inverter temperature e Undisturbed for 1 day at 25 C 77 F 25 C 77 F e Street driving 25 to 80 C 77 to 176 F e If the value is 50 58 F B short in sensor circuit e If the value is 205 C 401 F Open or GND short in sensor circuit MG2 REV RPM Range Min 16 383 rpm Max 16 383 rpm Indicates MG2 revolutions in RPM MG2 TORQ N m Range Min 500 Nm Max 500 Nm Indicates torque in Newton Meters MG2 TORQ EXEC VAL N m Range 512 Nm 508 Nm Indicates MG2 torque execution value after full load acceleration with READY light ON and engine stopped Less than 20 of MG2 TORQ MIL ON RUN DIST Range Min 0 km Max 65 535 km Indicates the drive distance after malfunction occurrence MIL ON RUN T
426. fuel system monitor FUEL TANK CAP L Range 0 to 34 gallons or 0 to 128 liters Indicates the capacity of the fuel tank in liters or in gallons FUEL TEMP 9 Range 30 to 224 C or 22 to 435 Indicates the ECM calculated fuel temperature within the intake manifold fuel rail The ECM uses this parameter to fine tune engine management FUEL VOLATI Range LO HI Indicates the rate that the fuel can vaporize in the cylinder as calculated by the control module HI displays when calculated fuel volatility is high LO displays when the fuel volatility is low FUEL PSI Range 35 to 120 psi Indicates the fuel pressure FUEL GAUGE Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel gauge indicator control FUEL LEVEL 6 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the fuel level in percentage FUEL mon ready Range YES NO Indicates the fuel monitor has successfully completed FuelLviInp 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the fuel level in percentage FuelLvlInp V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the fuel level in voltage FuelPumpA Range ON OFF Indicates the actual state of the PCM commanded fuel pump output FuelPumpA should read the same as the fuel pump monitor and fuel pump command output readings all three should be ON or OFF at the same time 389 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FUELPW FUELPW mS Range 0 0 to 99 9 mS Indicates the current commanded pulse width of the fuel injectors FUELPW1 mS FUELPW2 mS Ran
427. g cruising and acceleration It reads ON when the VSP is active the ECM command is to not to lift the valve VPS STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the valve pause system It reads ON when the valve action has been overridden by a PCM command 449 Data Parameters Engine Parameters VREF V Range 0 0 to 5 12 V Indicates the reference voltage that system sensors operate on Nominal reference voltage is 5 0 V Depending on system calibration and charging system voltage readings may vary a few tenths of a volt Some models normally read about 6 5 V verify with DVOM VRIS SOL VALVE Range ON OFF Indicates the variable resonance induction solenoid valve VRISV1 VRIS SOL VLV 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the variable resonance induction solenoid valve 1 VRISV2 VRIS SOL VLV 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the variable resonance induction solenoid valve 2 VSA REQ Range 0 to 180 Displays the throttle position in degrees as requested by the vehicle stability assist VSA control module vss Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates vehicle speed as determined by ECM input pulses from the vehicle speed sensor VSS The ECM calculates the actual speed The ECM uses vehicle speed primarily for torque converter clutch TCC engagement although it also is an important value for electronic cruise control systems Manual transmission vehicles without cruise control and some automatic transmission vehicles wit
428. gain and recheck The memory is erased if the connector is disconnected from the ABS control unit Before starting the engine disconnect the jumper wire from the service check connector or else the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL will stay on with the engine running When done 62 Testing ABS 3 0 Sec Start of Next Code 1 L Ka On e a I Fee I 4 Code 34 Figure 8 14 Honda ABS Code Type 04 Table 8 7 Honda ABS Code Type 04 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on ABS warning lamp Short the service check connector and turn key on ABS indicator will stay on for 2 seconds then turn off main code will flash then pause 0 4 seconds sub code will flash and pause 3 6 seconds stored codes will flash only one time per ignition cycle cycle key at least once to verify codes Do not press the brake pedal when retrieving codes or the system will go into code clear mode Clear codes with SCS connector shorted Cycle key to the ON position with When done brake pedal pressed ABS light will turn on then shut off release pedal light will turn on press brake pedal until light turns off release pedal Start codes by 1 3 Sec 0 4 Sec 1 2 0 36 40 Sec IY AA Sec 5 D gt Start of Next Code 1 1 Pulse ie Code 34 Figure 8 15 Honda ABS Code Type 04a Table 8 8 Honda ABS Code Type
429. ge 0 to 99 9 mS Indicates the current commanded pulse width of the injectors affected by 0251 and 0252 The displayed value is the pulse width that was commanded at the time of the last update On some vehicles updating may occur only when a position indicator pulse PIP signal is being received and the last updated value is retained after the PIP signal stops In these cases a value greater than zero may display during KOEO FuelTankPrs V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates signal voltage from the fuel tank pressure sensor The EVAP monitor requires input from this sensor With the gas cap removed signal voltage should be between 2 4 and 2 8 V During the evaporative emissions test expect voltage to decrease while the PCM applies vacuum to the fuel tank GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module GEAR POSITION Range variable Indicates the estimated gear position calculated from both the Main shaft speed sensor and the countershaft speed sensor GEN L TERMINAL Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the generator L terminal and reads as follows ON under normal operating conditions OFF if the PCM detects incorrect voltage in the terminal circuit GEN LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates the generator warning light status GEN OUT V Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the generator output voltage GEN FIELD Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the generator field reads ON when the
430. ge ON OFF Indicates the status of the automatic unlock shift system Reads ON when the system is active all doors unlock when the gear selector lever is shifted into park from any other position Auto Wiper Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the automatic windshield wiper system Reads ON when the system is active and reads OFF when the system is disabled B AJAR Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the hood switch ajar status Back Door Open Sw BACK DOOR SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the power back door switch Reads ON when the switch is depressed to open the back door reads OFF at all other times BACKUPLMP Backup Light Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the back up lamp switch status Reads ON when the gear selector lever is in reverse position reads OFF at all other times Back Up Light Transistor Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the back up lamp transistor Reads ON when the transistor is on gear selector lever is in R position and off at all other times BACK DIM DUTY CYCLE Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the pulse width modulated PWM signal distributed by the BCM to the PWM controlled instrument panel IP backlighting The reading is based on the position of the IP dimmer switch rheostat The display reads 096 when the head lamp switch is in the Auto position and the daytime running lamps DRL are on or when the IP dimmer switch is in the Full Dim position The display reads abo
431. ge 80 Manual Code reading Engine on page 86 Clearing Codes on page 87 Road Test No C amp D on page 87 Field Service Functional Tests on page 88 10 1 1 Engine And Transmission Code Reading Connectors and Locations Figure 10 1 and Table 10 1 show common engine diagnostic connector locations for Isuzu vehicles Figure 10 2 and Table 10 2 show common transmission diagnostic connector locations The following engine and transmission code reading procedures are included To read codes from 1986 87 Trooper on page 82 To read codes from 1984 95 Pickup 1988 95 Amigo and 1991 95 Rodeo on page 84 To read codes from vehicles with a 12 pin connector on page 85 To read codes from 1988 89 Impulse on page 85 To read codes from 1985 2 89 and 1990 and later Impulse on page 85 To read codes from 1988 89 Impulse optional on page 86 To read codes from 1985289 I Mark and 1990 and later Impulse optional on page 86 80 Isuzu Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 3 and 4 Under the Console Figure 10 1 suzu common engine connector location Table 10 1 Common engine connector locations VEHICLE YEAR CONNECTOR LOCATION Amigo 1990 94 1 ECM Ascender 2003 04 1 Axiom 2002 04 1 1984 89 5 1984 89 5 1990 92 1 ECM Pickup 1990 95 1 ECM 1990 95 1 ECM Rodeo 1996 2004 1 Stylus 1990 93 1 ECM
432. gher heater temperature The lower the percent the less time the heater circuit is ON resulting in lower heater temperatures O2 B1S1 HTR ma O2 B1S2 HTR ma O2 B2S1 HTR ma O2 B2S2 HTR ma Range not available Indicates the current of the heated oxygen sensor HO2S heater circuit B1 and B2 refer to banks 1 and 2 Bank 1 is always the bank containing the number 1 cylinder S1 indicates a pre catalyst 025 S2 indicates a post catalyst O2S O2 CROSSCOUNTS Range 0 to 255 Indicates the number of times the O2S voltage crossed from the lean region below 450 mV to the rich region above 450 mV within the last second The reading indicates how well the O2S is responding to changes in fuel metering and exhaust oxygen content It does not indicate how well the sensor is operating On some engines the O2S may cool off at idle and the system may go to open loop In this case the sensor does not provide a varying voltage to the ECM and the reading is 0 Run the engine at fast idle to warm the sensor return to closed loop and restore the reading O2 HEATER O2 HEATER B1 S1 O2 HEATER B1 S2 O2 HEATER B1 S3 O2 HEATER B2 S1 O2 HEATER B2 S2 O2S HEATER S1 OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER Range ON OFF Indicates the O2S heater status it reads ON when the heater is on usually at idle with a cold exhaust B1 and B2 refer to banks 1 and 2 Bank 1 is always the bank containing the number 1 cylinder S1 indicates a pre catalyst 025 S2 indicates p
433. gle FR From Rest bank 1 intake cam 0 to 5 at idle during a requested intrusive operation is considered normal VVT EX CHG ANG1 9 Range Min O FR Max 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT exhaust change angle bank 1 0 from rest Idling VVT EX CHG ANG2 Range O FR to 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT change angle FR From Rest bank 2 intake cam 0 to 5 at idle during a requested intrusive operation is considered normal VVT EX CHG ANG2 Range Min 0 FR Max 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT exhaust change angle bank 2 0 from rest Idling VVT EX HOLD B1 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT exhaust hold duty ratio learning value for the bank 1 exhaust cam 30 to 70 at idle during a requested intrusive operation is considered normal 453 Data Parameters Engine Parameters VVT EX HOLD B2 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT exhaust hold duty ratio learning value for the bank 2 exhaust cam 30 to 7096 at idle during a requested intrusive operation is considered normal EX OCV D 1 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT OCV bank 1 exhaust cam commanded operation duty cycle 10 to 50 during a requested intrusive operation at idle is considered normal VVT EX OCV D 2 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable valve timing VVT OCV bank 2 exhaust cam commande
434. gure 10 11 on page 86 85 Isuzu Testing Engine and Transmission Systems CSE 1 Diagnostic connector 2 MULTI 2 D 3 MULTI 2 adapter Figure 10 11 1985 5 89 I Mark 1990 and later Impulse connector and adapter 10 1 2 Manual Code reading Engine Use one of the following procedures to manually read codes on I mark and Impulse models Isuzu engine and transmission systems flash Type 05 codes refer to Figure 10 14 and Table 10 3 on page 87 for Type 05 code information P To read codes from 1988 89 Impulse optional e Jump pins 2 and 3 as shown in Figure 10 12 Figure 10 12 1988 89 Impulse jump pins P To read codes from 198572 89 I Mark and 1990 and later Impulse optional Jump pins as shown in Figure 10 13 ey Figure 10 13 19851 89 I Mark 1990 and later Impulse jump wire 86 Isuzu Testing Engine and Transmission Systems Code Type 05 On Off First 1 Second 1 111 1 2 1 i Digit 2 Digit 3 ial i i 14 Code 23 gt 1 4 Code 12 39 1 Figure 10 14 suzu engine Code Type 05 Table 10 3 Engine Code Type 05 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on Check Engine lamp Connect two diagnostic connector terminals or jumper two terminals in a connector and turn the ignition on Start codes by When done Turn the ignition off disconnect the connectors and clear codes Code 12 always appears first Each code repeats three times includi
435. h is turned on and electrically closed The Cruise Control light on the dash should also be on CRUS REQ TH Range 0 to 180 or 0 to 10096 Indicates the throttle valve position requested by the cruise control module CTP CTP APS CTP SW Range ON OFF or OPEN CLOSED Indicates the closed throttle position CTP status it should read e CLOSED with a closed throttle OFF or OPEN whenever the throttle is opened The ECM uses this parameter to cut fuel delivery and lean the mixture during deceleration within certain RPM ranges This parameter may be ECM calculated based on the throttle position TP sensor or it may have a separate CTP switch integrated into the TP sensor CURRENT SENSOR V Range not available Indicates the voltage signal from the air pump electric current sensor CYL Range 654321 Indicates each cylinder The displayed number shows each cylinder CYL 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 MISFIRE Range actual Indicates the cylinder misfire counter counts It indicates the number of misfires that occurred at the specific cylinder Cyl DEACT PERFORMANCE TST Range OFF ON Indicates ON if all the Displacement On Demand DOD enabling conditions are met The parameter displays OFF if one or more enabling conditions are out of range CYL DEACT SYSTEM COMMAND Range V4 V8 Indicates the current status of the total number of cylinders being commanded to be active 366 Data Parameters Engine Par
436. has failed FAIL 2 Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the fail safe function executed ON ETCS has failed FAN 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the FAN1 control signal FAN 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the control signal FAN 3 Range ON OFF Indicates the control signal FAN CTRL ECT F V Range variable Indicates the status of the fan control engine coolant temperature sensor as voltage or temperature Voltage at idle should be from 1 4 to 0 6 V H LIMIT 158 F to 212 F L LIMIT 70 C to 100 C and possible variance range is 8 C at 100 C and 14 F at 212 F FAN HIGH CTRL FAN LOW CTRL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the fan high control When the 2 stage radiator fan is controlled to high low mode by the ECM the fan high control indicates ON FAN DUTY 6 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the variable fan duty cycle FAST IDLE SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the fast idle solenoid valve It reads ON at low engine coolant temperatures when the PCM transmits a command to raise the idle RPM FAN MOTOR Range actual Indicates the status of the electrical fan motor for active test data support FAN SPEED RPM Range 0 to fan max Indicates the fan speed in RPM The PCM controls the fan by modulating the fan clutch and monitoring the fan speed sensor 382 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FAT Range ON OFF Indicates the DLC FAT terminal FAULT
437. have history codes stored in memory gt To place the TCM in the diagnostic history code display mode 1 2 3 Start and warm the engine to operating temperature Drive the vehicle above 12 mph Switch the ignition off and set the Manual switch to off The Manual switch is on center console adjacent to gear selector Place the gear selector in Park and start the engine The instrument panel Power lamp should light for about 2 seconds Switch the ignition off place the gear selector in 1st and set the Manual switch to on Place the gear selector in 2nd and set the Manual switch to off Place the gear selector in 3rd and set the Manual switch to on Place the gear selector in Drive and set the Manual switch to off Fully depress and release the throttle to begin manual history codes If no codes are present the Power lamp flashes evenly 2 times per second If codes are present the lamp flashes Code Type 8a long short Figure 15 45 on page 178 182 Subaru Testing Transmission Systems 15 2 5 1989 94 Justy ECVT Transmission gt Use this procedure to test the 1989 94 Justy electronic constant velocity transmission ECVT On ECVT models you must perform the memory code diagnostic check before checking for current codes D Check Failure to do so results in the loss of memory codes To place TCM in diagnostic memory code display mode 1 With the ignition off mate the check mode conn
438. he current needed to keep the hot wires of the MAF sensor at a constant temperature 411 Data Parameters Engine Parameters MAF V MAF V Range 0 to 5 00 V Indicates mass airflow MAF which is the amount of air entering the engine expressed as voltage This is the MAF sensor signal readings should increase along with throttle opening MAF PERF TST Range FAIL PASS Indicates mass airflow performance MAF FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a mass airflow fault MAIN RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the main relay which supplies power to the fuel tank internal solenoid valve and fuel pressure regulator shut off solenoid value Reads ON when energized MAIN RELAY FP Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the main relay for the fuel pump reads ON when energized The main relay contains two relays this is the second of the 2 relays MAINRLY Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM control relay MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP MIL MIL STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the malfunction indicator lamp MIL MAN VAC kPa inHg Range 0 to 205 kPa or 0 to 60 7 inHg Indicates the ECM calculated manifold vacuum based on manifold absolute pressure MAP sensor signal voltages The reading should be Close to 0 inHg or kPa with the engine off and the manifold close to atmospheric pressure at sea level High on an engine running at idle The ECM compares the barometric BARO pressure reading taken
439. he driver side seat ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com D Seat Sw Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the driver side seat switch ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Double Lock Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the double lock ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Entry amp Start Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the entry and start ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com FL Seat A C Communication FL Seat A C Com FR Seat A C Communication FR Seat A C Range WITH WITHOUT Indicates current communication between the indicated FL left FR right front seat climate control ECM the and the main BCM Reads WITH when there is a connection reads WITHOUT when unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Master Sw Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the power window master switch ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when
440. he instrument panel It should only read ON when the N position lamp is lighted 504 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters N SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the park neutral status NC 0 RPM NC 2 RPM Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the direct clutch engagement RPM These clutches rotate in forward gears and are held in reverse and overdrive NEUT SW MTX Range ON OFF Indicates the neutral switch circuit N SHIFT SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the N Shift solenoid O D OFF INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the dash mounted OD lamp reads ON when the lamp is off O D OFF HOLD SW OD OFF SW Range ON OFF Indicates the overdrive cancel switch hold switch O D SW O D SWITCH OVERDRIVE SW Range ON OFF OD ENABLED Range YES NO Indicates the position of the overdrive control switch YES or ON when the switch is on overdrive allowed OFF when the switch is off overdrive prevented O D SOLENOID Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the overdrive solenoid reads ON when the solenoid is energized OD CUT 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the dash mounted overdrive switch it reads ON when the switch contacts are closed This prevents the transmission from shifting into overdrive and turns on a panel lamp OD INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the dash mounted OD lamp reads ON when the lamp is on OD OFF LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates the transmis
441. he shift selector lever is in the sequential sportshift mode position SSA SS1 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid 1 SSA_SS1 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the state of shift solenoid 1 percentage SSA_SS1_FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the state of shift solenoid 1 status SSB SS2 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid 2 SSB_SS2 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the state of shift solenoid 2 percentage SSB SS2 FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the state of shift solenoid 2 status SSC SS3 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid 3 SSC_SS3 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the state of shift solenoid 3 percentage SSD_SS4 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid 4 SSE_SS5 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid E 5 SSF_SS6 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of shift solenoid F 6 513 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters SSF A Range 0 to 5 A Indicates the amp draw of shift solenoid F 6 SSG A Range 0 to 5 A Indicates the amp draw of shift solenoid G START SIG Range ON OFF No additional information is available for this parameter T CASE RATIO Range variable Indicates the ratio of the transfer case calculated by engine speed divided by transmission output speed based on transmission commanded gear TARG LINE Range 60 to 300 psi Indicates the target modifier pressure target pressure control solenoid
442. he specified Personality Key device Figure 9 3 1 16 pin DLC 2 Personality Key device 3 OBD II adapter Figure 9 3 OBD II DLC and adapter 78 Hyundai Testing Engine Transmission ABS SRS NOTE Always use the Personality device specified in the on screen instructions 9 1 2 Clearing Codes Most 1988 and later Hyundai models let you clear codes from PCM memory using the Scanner When codes are cleared the scan tool returns to the previous test mode and the No Codes Present message displays to indicate codes are cleared If code clearing fails for any reason the previous codes display at the top of the data list when you return to Codes and Data If this happens repeat code clearing 9 1 3 Actuator Tests The Actuator Tests selection is available from the Main Menu for most models and most 2001 2006 OBD II models All actuator tests are key on engine off tests except for the injector and timing tests See also in Injector Tests Engine Running Only Selecting Actuator Tests for these vehicles displays a list of available tests The available tests vary by year and model During testing monitor the selected actuator with a voltmeter ammeter or by listening for actuator activation A completed test does not mean that the actuator was activated The scan tool only monitors the engine control module ECM commands to the actuato
443. he status of all segments ALTERNATOR Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the rate of alternator charging voltage as a percentage of maximum output This indicates the magnetization ratio of the alternator ALTF Range 0 to 100 Indicates the generator field current control duty signal status ALTT V Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the generator output voltage AMBIENT TEMP Range 40 to 419 F 40 to 215 C Displays the air temperature outside of the vehicle A fixed reading of 40 F or 40 C indicates an open sensor circuit A fixed reading of 419 F or 215 C indicates a shorted sensor circuit AMBIENT TEMP Range Min 40 F Max 258 F or Min 40 C Max 215 C Indicates the ambient temperature actual outside atmospheric temperature APP 1 V APP 2 V APP 3 V APS APP SENSOR 1 V APP SENSOR 2 V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the accelerator pedal position APP as voltage it should read e About 0 35 0 95 V at idle Above 4 0 V at wide open throttle Some models use three APP sensors they are located in a module at the base of the accelerator pedal The ECM only requires information from one sensor the other two serve as a fail safe APP 1 amp 2 AGREE APP1 APP2 AGREE APP1 APP3 AGREE APP2 APP3 AGREE Range YES NO Indicates the results of a control module test that compares signals from one specific accelerator pedal position APP sensor to another specific APP sensor it reads
444. hicles that require the use of the K 2A key NOTE Not all platforms may support tests P To activate an actuator test 1 Select Actuator Tests from the main menu 2 Select the test you wish to activate and follow the on screen instructions if any 14 4 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Most 2000 and later Nissan and Infiniti SRS or airbag codes can be read and cleared using the scan tool Manual codes are available on other models 14 4 1 Manual Code Reading Nissan and Infiniti vehicles transmit Type 07b SRS codes Figure 14 10 and Table 14 5 on page 136 135 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Longer Pause Tens Long Flashes Short i 1 H4 Code 32 lt i Code 21 gt Figure 14 10 Nissan Code Type 07b Table 14 5 Nissan Code Type 7b Used on Nissan most 1990 and later models Pattern 10s and 1s Long and short Read codes on Check Engine lamp or LED on ECM Start codes by Follow the appropriate diagnostic code reading procedure 2000 and Earlier Vehicles NOTE Diagnosis mode activates only when a malfunction is detected P To read SRS codes for 2000 and earlier vehicles 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press the driver side door switch at least 5 times within 7 seconds P To clear codes for 2000 and earlier vehicles 1 Repair the malfunction 2 Sw
445. hift Range see below Indicates the ambient temperature shift Possible readings are INV invalid 3 C 2 C 1 NORMAL 1 C 2 C 3 Auto Blow Up Range NO OFF Indicates the status of the Foot Defrost automatic blow up function Blower Level Range 0 to 31 Indicates the level of the blower motor speed Buttom Prs Buzz Range ON OFF Indicates the on off status of the button press buzzer Compressor Mode Range AUTO MANUAL Indicates the operating status of the compressor 297 Data Parameters Air Conditioning A C Parameters Comprs Def Oper Range LINK NORMAL Indicates the compressor and defroster operation mode Coolant Temp Range 1 3 to 90 55 C or 34 to 195 Indicates the engine coolant temperature Emiss Gas Sens Range 0 to 255 Indicates the status of the emissions gas sensor reading should increase as the amount of gas emissions increases Evap Ctrl Range AUTO MANUAL Indicates the status of the evaporator control Evap Temp Range 29 7 to 59 55 C or 21 to 139 Indicates the temperature of the evaporator as determined by an evaporator sensor Foot Air Leak Range ON OFF Indicates the status of a foot air leak Foot Def Auto Mode Range ON OFF Indicates the on off status of the foot defrost automatic mode Hand Free Tel Range ON OFF Indicates the on off status of the hands free telephone operating mode NOX Gas Sens Range 0 to 255
446. hout a TCC do not have a VSS The scan tool may display a parameter for these models but the reading will always be 0 VSS FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a vehicle speed fault VT 1 VT ACT2 Range variable Indicates actual valve timing VT DIFF1 VT DIFF2 Range variable Indicates the difference between the target and the actual valve timing VT_DUTY1 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the camshaft position commanded duty cycle 1 status 450 Data Parameters Engine Parameters VT_DUTY2 Range 0 to 100 Indicates the camshaft position commanded duty cycle 2 status VTC SOL DUTY Range 0 to 100 Indicates the duty cycle of the VTC control solenoid valve It reflects the drive percentage required to make the CMP actuator achieve a target angle VTC STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the VTC system it reads ON when the VTC system is active VTD AUTOLRN TMR Range ON OFF Indicates whether the vehicle theft deterrent VTD system is in learn mode and has not timed out 10 minutes It reads ON during learn mode VTD F_DISUNTIL Range ON OFF Indicates ON if the vehicle theft deterrent VTD system has detected a fault with the ignition turned on and a valid theft deterrent DTC present until the ignition is turned off The vehicle may be disabled on the next ignition cycle if the fault remains current OFF will display if the system is OK and the theft deterrent system is inacti
447. hrottle opening THROTL IDL POS Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not throttle position sensor detecting idle ON Idling THROTL POS 96 Range Min 0 9e Max 100 96 Indicates the throttle position 10 to 22 96 Idling Calculated value based on THROTL MTR OPN DUTY Range 0 to 100 Indicates the ETCS throttle sensor opener position value Number 1 The normal value range is 0 to 40 when idling When the accelerator pedal is depressed the duty cycle increases THROTL MTR CLSD DUTY Range 0 to 100 Indicates the ETCS throttle sensor opener position value Number 1 The normal value range is 0 to 40 when idling When the accelerator pedal is released quickly the duty cycle increases 440 Data Parameters Engine Parameters THROTL POS 96 Range Min 0 9e Max 100 96 Indicates the throttle sensor position Recognition value for throttle opening angle on ECM 0 Accelerator pedal released e 641096 Accelerator pedal fully depressed THROTL SSR 1 AD V Range Min 0 V Max 4 98 V Indicates throttle sensor opener position Number 1 AD 0 6 to 0 9 V THROTTLE THROTTLE THROTTLE POS TP SENSOR TP TPS TPS1 TPS2 Range 0 to 180 or 0 to 100 Indicates the ECM calculated throttle opening as degrees or percent based on input from the throttle position TP sensor signal voltage Some vehicles display these values as degrees A reading of 82 or more in
448. idth modulation As the commanded state increases so does the percentage of ON time the duty cycle percent is proportional to the fan speed e A low reading indicates a low fan speed Ahigh reading indicates a high fan speed 0 indicates the fan is off 363 Data Parameters Engine Parameters COOLANT 5 COOLANT TEMP ECT Range 40 to 199 or 40 to 389 Indicates the ECM calculated engine coolant temperature ECT in degrees based on the ECT sensor signal The sensor is a thermistor installed in the engine coolant passages Typical readings for a fully warmed engine running at idle are 185 to 220 F 85910 105 C A reading of 40 C or 40 F may indicate an open in the sensor or the sensor circuit A reading above 185 C or 366 F may indicate a short in the sensor or the sensor circuit COOLANT V Range 0 0 to 5 1 V Indicates the voltage signal from the engine coolant temperature ECT sensor Sensor voltage and temperature are inversely related A low temperature produces a high voltage signal and a high temperature produces a low voltage signal COOLANT TEMP Range Min 40 F Max 258 or Min 40 Max 140 C Indicates the engine coolant temperature 80 to 105 C 176 to 221 F After warming up e f value 40 C 40 F sensor circuit open e f value 140 C 284 F sensor circuit shorted COOLING FAN LOW RAD FAN FAN CTRL HIGH RAD FAN Range ON OFF or OFF LO
449. ift control module command status to the 4WD high indicator lamp on the instrument panel 4WDINP SW 4X4M Range OFF OFF FAIL ON ON B Indicates the 4WD switch status 4WD LOW ACTV Range YES NO Indicates whether 4WD LOW is the current commanded mode in which the automatic transfer case ATC is operating 4WD LOW LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case shift control module command status to the 4WD low indicator lamp on the instrument panel 4WDLOWLMP 4X4M Range OFF OFF FAIL ON ON B Indicates the four wheel drive LOW warning indicator ATC SLIP RPM SLIPPAGE RPM Range ON OFF Indicates whether slip has been detected by the transfer case shift control module AUTO 4WD LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case shift control module command status to the Auto 4WD indicator lamp on the instrument panel BOO Range ON OFF Indicates the brake ON OFF COPENPLAT_4X4M Range ERROR A B AB C AC BC ABC D AD BD ABD CD ACD BCD ABCD Indicates the currently open contact plates 484 Data Parameters Transfer Case Parameters CUR SLIP ADAPTS Range 0 to 65 025 No information is currently available for this parameter ENCODER GEAR Range see below Indicates the mode the transfer case is currently operating in readings are INVLD invalid signal e NEUT neutral 2WD two wheel drive 4WD L four wheel drive low 4WD H four wheel drive high AUTO 4 automatic four wheel drive
450. ift solenoid status SHIFT CONTROL Range variable Indicates the shift position that the TCM intends to control the automatic transmission with SHIFT LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates an output command from the ECM to the instrument panel lamp on some vehicles with a manual transmission It reads ON when the panel lamp should be lit SHIFT LOCK Range LOW HIGH Indicates the status of the shift lock unit which prevents the shift selector lever from moving out of the P position unless the brake pedal is depressed and the throttle pedal is released SHIFT LOCK SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the shift lock solenoid valve it reads ON when the solenoid is energized this releases the shift lock SHIFT MAP SHIFT MAP NUMBER Range not available Indicates changing the speed data number used for internal calculations 511 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters SHIFT SOL A SHIFT SOL B Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command state of the shift solenoid valves A and B Reads ON when the solenoid is energized Compare readings to the table that follows Table 18 9 Shift solenoid relationships 1st Gear 2nd Gear 3rd Gear 4th Gear Shift Solenoid A ON OFF OFF ON Shift Solenoid B ON ON OFF OFF SCS Range OPEN SHORT Indicates the status of the service check signal It reads SHORT when the SCS line is grounded After turning on the ignition switch the indicator light flashe
451. igure 14 8 Other systems require a jumping pins on a test connector 1 1 pin check connector jumper terminal L to ground 2 6 pin check connector jumper terminal 3 to ground Figure 14 7 Nissan diagnostic connectors 1 16 pin DLC jumper terminal 9 to ground 2 14 pin DLC jumper terminal 9 to ground Figure 14 8 Nissan diagnostic connectors These connectors may be found either under dash near the steering column or behind the driver side kick panel 134 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 14 3 2 Manual Codes P To read manual codes 1 Select Codes from the Codes and Data menu or select How to get codes from the Codes Functions menu The scan tool will indicate the connector location and connector type Please refer to section 14 3 1 for more information 2 Locate the connector and follow the on screen instructions Codes will flash on the ABS warning lamp as a series of long and short pulses 10s and 1s Multiple codes if present will be separated by a long pause Longer Pause Tens Long Flashes Ones 1 ra Short 1 1 14 Code 32 i 4 Code 21 3 Figure 14 9 Nissan ABS codes For repair instructions or if no codes flash refer to the service manual 14 3 3 Actuator Tests Nissan and Infiniti ABS actuator tests selection is available for 2000 and later ve
452. il or head position and reads OFF at all other times Tail Light Transistor Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the tail lamp transistor Reads ON when the lighting control switch is in the tail or head position and OFF at all other times AJAR Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the liftgate ajar switch status 329 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters TNSMT CMD Range actual Indicates the last remote control transmission TNSMTR ID Range actual Indicates the last received transmitter ID code reference TRUNK AJAR Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the trunk switch status Trunk Opener Sw Trunk Back Door Open Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the trunk or rear gate opener switch Reads ON when the switch is activated to open the trunk or gate TRUNK BTN SIG Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the trunk or back door unlock switch signal from a remote transmitter Trunk Cyl Sw TRUNK KEY SW Range ON OFF Displays the trunk key switch status Reads ON when the trunk is being unlocked Trunk Key Unlock Range ON OFF Indicates the trunk lock status Reads ON if the trunk is locked reads OFF when unlocked Trunk Lid Operation Range 1 TIME 2 TIMES 0 8S Displays the setting of the wireless trunk opener switch Interpret as follows 1 TIME trunk opens when the button is pressed once 2 TIMES trunk opens when the button is pressed twice 0 8S trunk opens
453. in The ECM calculates the target angle from the accelerator position sensor input and the driving conditions 438 Data Parameters Engine Parameters TARGIDL RPM Range variable Indicates the target idle which is the idle speed the ECM is attempting to maintain TAT TERMINAL Range ON OFF Indicates the DLC tat terminal TC TE1 Range ON OFF Indicates the connection status of the TC TE1 terminals of the DLC 3 OBD II connector TC SDL Range ON OFF or YES NO Indicates the status of the transaction control serial data link 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the pulse width modulated PWM signal output to the torque converter clutch TCC solenoid Reads 096 with the TCC solenoid closed TCC not applied Reads 100 with the TCC solenoid fully open TCC applied TCC COMMAND Range ON OFF Indicates the torque converter clutch modulated status TCC SOL Range 0 to 100 Indicates the torque converter clutch control solenoid TCC CC BRAKE SW Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the current state of the torque converter clutch TCC cruise brake pedal switch This is used to control stop lamps and as a redundant cruise control disengagement TCCFault Range YES NO Indicates the presence of a PCM detected fault in the torque converter clutch circuit Reads YES only when a fault is present TCCMACT RPM Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates a PCM calculated value of torque converter slippage The va
454. incl A STTRIM BT MER igs Sache M IT ST INNS het ec eae ge CU I SI TRIBU e eL e M a E UN P NN ant ch a ean cece ata Mahle ST TRIM 1 TATUNG ona Nt M DU D M ME a iach anal UM EA HAUT START ENRICH START ETC 9 START 9 iE EI Tu lcc STARTER CONTROL edt tiende nie dett eei a d d rr e e e EE eec d e STARTER C TR e M 267 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters STARTER RELAY i sith 2 439 STARTER Bonin Mai eie ee ni Dd i hee Ala aped SIARTER SWITGEL tetra to tee t devil i te Ie e tdeo oce te eee ted det STARTER SW 4t ritieni ie note ER Hn en EE eiie ale femmes STARTER I ETE I m 9 5 erre erre ie i ere Pe ede ien ib en E Er Eo t ee e pete e STEERING ANGLE cti tta coe tege t e ete dee P e rep bc ED n tee STEERING SEN STEERING WHEEL CONTROL V STEERING WHEEL SW PWH eie e tt ete ecd ee
455. ine Transmission ABS and 5 5 33 Code Reading Connectors and 33 ABS Manual Code 36 36 Godes and Data Slow et iso et 37 37 EVAP Monitoring rome etie e pec eei ei oen d ed 37 4ITE FAACI 38 AITE FAACAT EMQGQG ee e t p 38 4ITE F4AC1 Battery 38 A4ITE F4AC1 Pinion Factor igno iain ie 38 4ITE FAAC1 Clutch Volume Index 39 Chapter 6 Daihatsu iier Dre coire Iaceo hone Se eet tenis 40 Testing Engine Transmission and 5 40 Code Reading Connectors and Locations sese 40 Manual Code 41 Testing Transmission 5 44 4000110 42 Code Reading Connector Locations 42 Chapter 760 C 44 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems
456. ine neni aai 288 RESET ee 327 328 RESTART FAN Getestet bride Lat He HU V dc gd NN ald ae rh ec eae hea c D ead 431 RETARD ACTON ninen enen etii Nd EP ee eren ev ciel est 431 RETARD REQUEST 2 431 REV POS SWITGEL c irre eo UR Rit dee p e Ro E oem Rente Hn e le estin 511 REV SELECTED C tehy REV SW inene a ei entitatem Rewipe RF MOTOR AMPS RE MOTOR EBK dei ten ont ie te E meiden e D ERE nter e e ein RF WHEEL MPH itemm nnt er nene en na e en a er e eo Pr E P en e HE E zd MS RM 261 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters RFIDPRG 328 RFLOWBAT 328 an gae LE C 285 R FRONT SOL iiid ent aa a eun nien ntelemin anam 285 RETURNGIND nee eae i eels 329 cmo
457. ing options displays Data No Codes begins communication with the SRS module and displays data parameters e Codes Only gathers and displays SRS trouble codes Clear Codes clears SRS memory codes from the SRS ECM memory Review Codes allows you to view codes This menu item appears only after code gathering Print Codes allows you to print codes This menu item appears only after code gathering Data No Codes This section has information on viewing SRS data using the scan tool P To enter and exit SRS data 1 Enter in the vehicle ID 2 Turn the ignition on 3 Select Data No Codes 4 Turn the ignition off after completing the SRS data tests Codes Only This section has information on retrieving SRS codes using the scan tool 66 8 3 2 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS To gather codes 1 Select Codes Only A key verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue and the initializing communication screen displays NOTE The initializing communication screen means the scan tool is attempting to start the test however it does not mean the vehicle has responded If the message stays on the screen more than a few minutes the test did not start 3 The Code List which shows all codes in memory displays if codes are present Clear Codes This section has information on clearing SRS codes using the
458. ion Switch ON Figure 10 23 1996 99 Isuzu Oasis ABS DTC erasure mode 10 3 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Isuzu SRS or airbag testing includes Manual Code Reading SRS on page 94 Clearing SRS Codes on page 97 93 Isuzu Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 10 3 1 Manual Code Reading SRS Isuzu models use 2 types of SRS codes Type 02a see Figure 10 25 Figure 10 26 and Figure 10 27 and Table 10 8 on page 95 Type 03 see Figure 10 28 and Figure 10 29 and Table 10 9 on page 96 Code Type 02a Long Short Flashes a 2 digit trouble code with the 10s digit pulses staying on longer than the 1s digit pulses For example Long Long pause Short Short Short is Code 23 1 SRS indicator lamp 2 2 Pin Service Check connector 3 Special tool O7PAZ 0010100 or equivalent Figure 10 24 1996 99 Oasis 2 pin service check connector location Indications are repeated in 12 2 0 20 case of continuous failure 1 E 1 1 o 144 934 Pulse Code24 1 1 3 ICode 1 1 Most recent Second most Third most problem recent problem recent problem Figure 10 25 suzu SRS Code Type 02a Continuous Failure SRS indicator flashes like this 94 Isuzu Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Indications stay on in case of intermittent failure Key On i 2 1 1 Pulse Code 2 1 Figure 10 26 suzu SRS Code Type 02a Intermittent Failure SRS indicat
459. ion status between the TAC Module and the PCM it reads OK under normal operating conditions FLT if a failure is detected TACHO_GAUGE Range actual Indicates the tachometer Displays the engine rpm TACM RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the throttle actual control relay which supplies power to the TAC module It reads ON when the relay is energized TANK BYP VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the tank bypass vacuum switching valve for active test support data TANK PRES V TANK PRESS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the output signal of the fuel tank pressure sensor as voltage When tank pressure equals atmospheric pressure the reading is about 1 3 to 1 7 V The higher the voltage the greater the pressure TANK PRES TANK PRS kPa inHg mmHg Range variable Indicates the difference between fuel tank pressure or vacuum and the outside air pressure TANK TEMP Range 30 to 224 C or 22 to 435 F Indicates the fuel temperature within the fuel tank The PCM uses this parameter to accurately test and monitor the evaporative emissions system TARG LINE Range variable Indicates the target modifier pressure target pressure control solenoid pressure status TARGET ENG SPD Range variable Indicates the desired rpm TARGET TH VALVE TARGET TH VLV ETCS Range 0 to 180 Indicates the target throttle valve position which is the valve position the ECM is attempting to mainta
460. is P To manually place the Nissan 4EAT control system in diagnostic mode 1 Start and warm the engine to operating temperature 2 Switch the ignition off move the gear selector to Park set the A T Mode switch optional to Auto and the O D switch to On 3 Turn the key on engine off Depending on the vehicle either the Power lamp the A T Check lamp or the O D lamp illuminates for approximately 2 seconds This is the lamp that flashes codes 4 Turn the ignition off place the gear selector in Drive and set the O D switch to Off 133 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS 5 Turn the key on engine off wait 2 seconds and move the gear selector to 2nd 6 Setthe O D switch to On move the gear selector to 1st and set the O D switch to Off 7 Fully depress and release the throttle to begin gathering manual codes The lamp flashes Code Type 7c Figure 14 6 If no codes are present the lamp flashes evenly 10 times after a long start flash 14 3 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS Nissan and Infiniti ABS system testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 134 e Manual Codes on page 135 e Actuator Tests on page 135 14 3 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Nissan and Infiniti ABS systems use several types of connectors for code reading and functional tests Most 2000 and later Nissan and Infiniti ABS codes can be read and cleared using the OBD II connector in F
461. is complete During this waiting period the cylinder identification displays along with instructions to press the brake pedal turn the steering wheel or snap the throttle These actions are not necessary however doing them speeds the self test IMPORTANT If any service codes other than 11 faults present are displayed after the engine running test correct any code problems before proceeding with the idle adjustment P To conduct an idle speed adjustment test 1 Select Idle Speed Adjust The test initiation screen displays If another test was performed before this one a warning screen may display because the self test output STO circuit is still energized from the previous test For some vehicles it is safe to ignore this message and enter the test If you are uncertain turn the key off wait 10 seconds and restart the engine before entering the test 2 Start the engine and run at 2000 RPM for two minutes A timer displays in the lower right corner of the screen Skip this warm up if the engine is already warm 3 Select and the test initiated screen displays Once the test is complete the scan tool sends a start idle test signal to the PCM The screen changes as the scan tool waits for a response from the PCM After the PCM response is received the throttle stop screw adjustment screen displays The display indicates if idle speed is too high too low or correct If the display reads TPS out of 108
462. is cranking The ECM uses this information to calculate fuel metering for the best air fuel ratio at starting You this parameter to check cranking performance or troubleshoot starting problems CRUISE BRAKE SW Range ON OFF Indicates state of the brake switch for cruise control it reads ON when the brake pedal is depressed CRUISE CANCEL SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cruise control cancel switch it reads ON when the cruise control cancel switch is pressed CRUISE CONTROL Range ON OFF Indicates the cruise control state it reads ON when the cruise control is active CRUISE INDICATOR CRUISE LAMP CRUISE LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates whether the cruise control lamp is on or off When using cruise control ECM turns on the cruise control light on the instrument panel CRUISE MAIN SW CRUISE MASTER MAIN SWT CRUISE SW MAIN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cruise control main switch it reads ON when the switch is turned on and electrically closed When this switch is on it sends a signal to the throttle actuator control TAC Module that allows all other cruise control functions 365 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CRUISE RESUME SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cruise control resume switch it reads ON when the switch is turned on and electrically closed CRUISE SET SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cruise control set switch it reads ON when the switc
463. isplays the passive mode status Reads ON if passive mode on and OFF if passive mode off PD LOCK Range ON OFF Indicates the power door lock status PD UNLOCK Range ON OFF Indicates the power door unlock status PWR Condition Range ALL ACC ON IG1 ON IG2 ON ST ON Displays the status of various system relays all relays are off e ACC ON the accessory relay is energized GN1 ON the ignition 1 relay is energized e GN2 ON the ignition 2 relay is energized ST ON the start request relay is energized PRK BRK Range ON OFF Indicates the parking brake status PRK BRAKE Range ON OFF Indicates the parking brake switch status Push Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the push button ignition switch Reads ON when the button is depressed PWM ILLU Range ON OFF Indicates the illuminated pulse width modulated PWM value R Shade Close Range YES NO Indicates the status of the read sun shade limit switch Reads YES if the switch is off shade lowered and NO if the switch is on shade raised 324 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters R Shade Delay Time Range OFF 0 7S 0 9S 1 2S Indicates the status of the read sun shade delay setting Reads OFF when the system is disabled other readings are the programmed delay in seconds RDEF_RLY Range ON OFF Indicates the rear defrost relay status Rear Def Sw RDEF_SW Range ON OFF Indicates the rear defogger switch s
464. it 325 Mirror Sel Sw Right to ado Dee NM nae td cte be ub Da Cut ve de ed 325 MISFIRE CMPL E mE c MISEIRE GMPE 2 ERRARE Ga Rete Dae RE auto Hed tete En iR MISEIRE GYCEE COUNTS tte dtd et ee det e cde s a a id de D tee te d E edes 418 MISFIBE CYGLEES 5 5 ti HR ER ep OUR ER e rA ep ARE ein 418 MISFIRE CYL FT 418 MISFIRE CYL 2ra ie ase aed nesters 418 MISEIBE QY 3t oe ttt ict tectae ner coe eo ee nena d e t eco dnd ve da 418 MISFIRE CYL 4 418 MISFIRE CYL M 418 MISEIBRE CY RE rite m Re te re er be eerte re test ee 418 MISFIRE GN der 418 2 550 tite RE UHR ner aie 418 MISFIRE ENA s 418 d reri ertet et eite i eei eet tede ette hem eite Pete 419 MISEIRE MARGIN 96 2 2 christ ete bote hi EE DUE UR e IUE ie beet e e EN dre 419 MISEIRE MONTEOR s n iniecta ie He tn HH E te a e e ene e Nod a 360 MISFIRE MONITOR uosa oic ce Rte ee p E ee e epe linen a de WE PE VE Doe e ee NR Re UR 419 MISEIBRE RPM 2252 n RE mee e aii e he Rete i E Ee ee iie Sonat dean 41
465. itch the ignition off for at least 1 second then switch it back on 2001 Vehicles NOTE If SRS does not enter diagnosis mode even though malfunction is detected in user mode check the vehicle battery voltage If the battery voltage is less than 9 V charge the battery P To read SRS codes for 2001 vehicles 1 Turn ignition switch on 2 After the Airbag warning lamp lights for 7 seconds turn ignition switch off within 1 second 3 Wait more than 3 seconds 4 Repeat the previous steps 1 to times 5 Turn ignition switch on SRS is now in diagnosis mode 136 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Body Control Module BCM Systems P To clear codes for 2001 vehicles 1 Open driver side door 2 Turn ignition switch on 14 5 Testing Body Control Module BCM Systems The BCM monitors various electrical components such as door locks windshield wipers keyless entry Intelligent Key headlamps and accessories located on the body interior and exterior Codes and data are available from BCM and are accessed through the DLC 14 6 Testing Controller Area Network CAN Systems The CAN ia a multiplex communication system that transfers data between the various electronic control modules ECMs on the vehicle Two data lines CAN H and CAN L connect the ECMs together to form the main line of the network A termination circuit is used for the ECM on either end of the CAN network additional ECMs are on branch lines that splice into the
466. ith a noticeable pause between multiple codes The first flash may be long or short depending on when diagnostics were entered Include long or short first flash as part of count For example a long first flash and seven equal flashes or eight equal flashes is code 8 0 2 Sec i 0 2 i Sec 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 31i Code Repeats 124 Code 3 y P Figure 10 18 suzu RWAL ABS Code Type Table 10 5 suzu RWAL ABS Code Pattern Straight Count Read codes on Rr Antilock or ABS indicator lamp With ignition switch on and indicator illuminated jumper ABS diagnostic Start codes by connector terminal to ground First flash may be long or short Include the long or short first flash as part of code number count Figure 10 17 Clear codes by Codes are cleared every time the ignition key is turned off When done Disconnect jumper amp turn ignition off Only the first fault that occurred during the current ignition cycle will set a code Vehicle may need to be driven to cause some codes to set amp turn on the indicator 90 Isuzu Testing Antilock Brake System ABS Code Type 02 The diagnostic connector and warning lamp locations are shown in Figure 10 19 Long Short Indicator flashes a 2 digit trouble code with the 10s digit pulses staying on longer than the 1s digit pulses For example Long Long pause Short Short
467. ition D M Dual Mode 529 Glossary DAB Driver Airbag DCCSV Damper Clutch Control Solenoid Valve D Check Dealer check DECEL Decelerate DIS Direct distributorless Ignition System A system in which the ignition coil secondary circuit is dedicated to specific spark plugs without the use of a distributor Also referred to as the Electronic Ignition El system DRVR Driver DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code An alphanumeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the on board diagnostic system ECC Electronically Controlled Carburetor ECCS Electronic Concentrated Control System ECM Electronic Control Module ECON Economy ECS Electronic Control System or Evaporative Control System ECU Electronic Control Unit EFC Electronic Feedback Control EFE Early Fuel Evaporation Enhancing air fuel vaporization during engine warmup EGI Electronic Gasoline Injection 530 Glossary EI Electronic Ignition system A system in which the ignition coil secondary circuit is dedicated to specific spark plugs without the use of a distributor Also referred to as the Direct or Distributorless Ignition System DIS ELEC Electric or Electronic EMB Electromagnetic Brake ENG Engine EOT Engine Oil Temperature FC Fuel Cut or Fan Control FT Fuel Trim GEN Generator Hz Hertz cycles per second IAC Idle Air Control Electrical or mechanical control of throttle bypass air IAT Intake
468. ives signal from the CAN network STRG Steering angle sensor module F Transmits signal to the CAN network TCM Transmission control module Table 14 7 CAN Type 1 communication signal identification part 1 of 2 Signal Control Unit ECM BCM M amp A ABS IPDM E A C Compressor feedback T R A C Compressor request T R Accelerator pedal position T R ASCD CRUISE lamp T R ASCD SET lamp T R Cooling fan speed request T R Engine coolant temperature T R Engine speed T R R Fuel consumption monitor T R Malfunction indicator lamp T R A C switch R T Blower fan motor switch R T Buzzer output T R Day time running light request T R Door switch T R R Front wiper request T R High beam request T R R Horn chirp T R 138 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Controller Area Network CAN Systems Table 14 7 CAN Type 1 communication signal identification part 2 of 2 Control Unit M amp A ABS IPDM E R Signal E ECM ius Ignition switch Low beam request Position lights request R R R Rear window defogger switch R Sleep request 1 Sleep request 2 Theft warning horn request 2 Turn indicator A a a A A A a af 4 a Wake up request 1 Fuel level sensor R Seat belt buckle switch Vehicle speed sensor ABS warning lamp 2 D D D A a x d
469. k learn multiplier BLM is responding to the fuel integrator corrections Use this reading to double check the block learn response Reads YES when block learn is responding or will respond to integrator corrections e NO when block learn is not responding to the integrator In most cases YES should display when the engine is in closed loop and NO in open loop However this may vary with a few engine calibrations If the fuel integrator reaches its limit and block learn is not enabled NO the vehicle may have a driveability problem or it may return to open loop Refer to INTEGRATR on page 404 and BLM on page 353 for more information A F LEFT V A F RIGHT V TARGET A F V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the amount of correction necessary to the basic fuel injection duration to maintain the desired air fuel ratio A F LEFT and A F RIGHT provide air fuel correction information for vehicles with two banks of injectors V type engines TARGET A F provides air fuel correction information for vehicles with a single bank of injectors in line engines The ECM responds to this correction information according to five programmed routines Table 18 1 A F program routines Data ECM Compensation Engine Condition 0 00 V Go leaner 10 20 Rich 1 25 V Go leaner 4 10 Normal 2 50 V Lean rich 3 Normal 3 75 V Go richer 4 1090 Normal 5 00 V Go richer 10 2090 Lean 337 Data Parameters Engine Paramete
470. l control 458 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters OL DRV Open loop due to driving conditions rapid accelerations or decelerations e OLFLT Open loop due to a fault in the system Closed loop but failure with one or more oxygen sensors one sensor may be controlling fuel delivery During open loop the PCM ignores the main O2S signal The PCM uses main O2S feedback to correct fuel injection duration during closed loop On a cold engine OL should display until a reliable feedback signal is received from the O2S On a warm engine running either at idle or at 2500 RPM with no load CL should display Power enrichment during hard acceleration or deceleration during fuel cutoff should cause an OL DRV reading An OL FLT reading indicates the system is operating in open loop due to a detected failure A CL FLT reading indicates a failure has been detected by at least one 25 but the system is still capable of maintaining closed loop operation IAT Range variable or Indicates the temperature of the intake air entering the engine Readings may be taken directly from an intake air temperature IAT sensor typically installed in the air cleaner or calculated by the ECM based on input from other sensors The PCM converts the sensor voltage to temperature readings IGN TIMING Range variable Indicates the degrees of ignition timing advance or retard If timing is retarded a minus sign appear
471. l metering occur LT TRIM responds with a similar correction Compare ST TRIM readings to injector on time Numbers above zero indicate increased on time while numbers below zero indicate decreased on time LT TRIM corrections operate only in closed loop In open loop they revert to a fixed value ST TRM 1 ST TRM AVG2 20 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the average of all long term fuel trim cells as percentage The short term fuel trim cells are rated for the amount of which they are used For example an idle cell is rated higher than a wide open cell If a fueling malfunction occurs in the idle cell and the wide open cell the average would be more affected by the idle cell than the wide open cell A low value indicates that the fuel system is rich and fuel delivery is being reduced A high value indicates that a lean condition exists and the PCM compensates by adding fuel When the average of the cells reach a predetermined high or low a fuel trim DTC sets ST1 Range OFF ON Indicates the status of the ignition switch starter signal ON indicates cranking STA SIGNAL STARTER STARTER SIG Range ON OFF Indicates whether the starter is engaged it reads ON when the engine is cranking The ECM increases fuel injection volume during engine cranking START CLNT START ETC Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F Indicates the engine coolant temperature ETC at startup On some vehicles the ECM checks the
472. lash codes Figure 16 3 Toyota Lexus diagnostic connector requiring TOY 2 adapter 1 Jump T to E1 to flash codes 2 CG Chassis Ground 3 A B 4 TS 5 TC Figure 16 4 Toyota Lexus diagnostic connectors other 198 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Engine Systems 1 Check connector short to activate code 2 Blue 3 Service connector 4 Black Figure 16 5 1983 84 Supra and Cressida connectors use MULTI 1 adapter 16 2 2 Code Sensitivity OBD ll and some Some Toyota and Lexus vehicles can be placed in a test mode where the ECM is more sensitive to diagnostic trouble codes DTCs The ECM stays in this mode until the ignition is turned off For more details see Fast Track Troubleshooter Reference 044 NOTE This mode will not work for evaporative emissions systems or misfire DTCs 16 2 3 Data No Codes The Data No Codes selection displays for vehicles that transmit PCM operating data to the scan tool Use of this mode is very similar to the Codes and Data mode except that codes must be read separately using the Code Functions selection 199 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Engine Systems 16 2 4 Manual Code Reading Off First Second First Second Digit Digit Digit Digit Repeat Code 22 Code 31 Figure 16 6 Code Type 09 Table 16 1 Toyota Code Type 09 Pattern 10s and 1s continuous flashing means system OK Read codes on Check Engine l
473. lash to pass or passing light switch Reads ON only when the switch is held to momentarily activate the high beams reads OFF when the switch is released FOGRLY F Range ON OFF Indicates the front fog lamp relay Foot Lights Range ON OFF Displays the on off setting for the foot lights FR FOG SW Range OFF This Nissan parameter displays but cannot be monitored FR WASHER SW WASH SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the windshield washer switch FR WIPER HI FR WIPER INT FR WIPER LOW FR WIPER STOP Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the windshield wiper switch Reads ON when the switch is in the indicated high speed intermittent low speed or off position FRONT WIPERS ACTIVE Range YES NO Indicates the state of the wiper motor Reads YES when the wipers are operating after about 3 cycles of the wiper blades reads NO at all other times 313 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters FRWPPRKSW Range WIPE PARK Indicates the front windshield wiper status Fuel Lid Open Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the fuel lid opener remote switch Reads ON when the switch is pressed to open the fuel lid reads OFF at all other times H Level Warning Sig Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the headlamp level warning system reads ON when the warning lamp is activated reads OFF at all other times HAZARD Hazard Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the hazard switch status reads
474. le TPM The Codes Menu selection from the Main Menu for the specific system offers the choices available for the test vehicle The Data Display selection is available on most 1996 and later vehicles It operates similarly to Data No Codes for engine testing 116 Mitsubishi This chapter contains information for testing Mitsubishi vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Mitsubishi systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission Antilock Brake System ABS Airbag SRS 13 11 Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Mitsubishi engine transmission and SRS airbag testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 117 Transmission Manual Code Reading on page 121 ABS Manual Code Reading on page 121 Codes and Data Slow on page 122 Clearing Codes on page 122 Actuator Tests on page 122 13 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Refer to Figure 13 1 and Table 13 1 on page 118 for diagnostic connector locations 117 Mitsubishi Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Figure 13 1 Common connector locations Table 13 1 Common connector locations VEHICLE YEAR LOCATION 1991 93 4 Next to fuse panel 3000 GT P 1994 99 2 Next to console Cordia Tredia 1984 88 8 Near firewall 7 1992 96 4 Next to fuse panel Diamante 1997 04 2 Nex
475. le identification codes The scan tool recognizes these codes Start the engine and the ECS lamp should go off Drive the vehicle at least 60 feet and let the engine idle for at least 20 seconds This may be done carefully on a service rack if necessary 174 Subaru Testing Engine Systems Switch the parking lamps rear window defogger and heater fan on and then off A flashing lamp indicates the system is OK A continuously lit lamp indicates trouble codes are present The scan tool reads these codes Select Code Functions Auto Code Read from the Main Menu and follow the connection instructions earlier in this chapter Separate the D Check connectors 1988 90 Justy EFC or 1990 91 MPI D Check Use this D Check procedure for 1988 90 Justy models with an electronic feedback carburetor EFC and 1990 91 Justy models with MPI If the ECS lamp is lit perform the ECS check U Check before doing this D Check To perform a D Check 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 Connect the scan tool data cable to the vehicle Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature Stop the engine and connect the green D Check connectors see D Check and Read Memory Connector Locations on page 166 together Turn the ignition but do not start the engine The ECS lamp should light and the ECM transmits specific vehicle identification codes The scan tool recognizes these codes Read codes visually on the ECM LED
476. le is operating in the power or economy mode These modes affect when shifts occur as well as how smoothly the transmission shifts Reads ON when operating in the power mode PNP Range ON OFF Indicates the clutch pedal position switch neutral switch circuit status 508 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters PULSE GEN A PULSE GEN B Range 0 to engine max rpm Indicates input and output shaft speeds calculated by the TCM based on the signals from two pulse generator sensors installed on transmission e PULSE GEN A represents input shaft speed e PULSE GEN B represents output shaft speed The TCM uses these signals to control shift pattern and hydraulic pressure during shifting Pulse generator A is activated by holes in the kickdown drum Therefore generator A does not pulse when the kickdown drum is held in 2nd gear or 4th gear PWR ECON SW Range PWR ECON Indicates the position of the power economy shift pattern switch The display should change to agree with the current switch position If the switch is in the economy position the transmission shift pattern is altered to economize fuel consumption R INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the instrument panel R indicator lamp Reads ON if the lamp is on R SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission R range switch RED TIMING SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the reduction timing solenoid REV POS SWITCH REV_SW REVERSE SWITCH Range ON OFF
477. lean around 0 ideal Positive value rich Sensor 1 S1 is upstream closest to the engine HO2S AF B1 S1 HEATER HO2S AF B2 S1 HEATER HO2S S 1 HEATER HO2S B1 S2 HEATER HO2S B2 S2 HEATER Range ON OFF Indicates the HO2S heater circuit status it turns off if the battery voltage is above 16 volts Reads ON when the heater is on usually at idle with a cold exhaust Cylinder bank 1 B1 contains cylinder 1 Sensor 1 S1 is upstream closest to the engine HO2S 1 HEATER HO2S 2 HEATER HO2S 3 HEATER Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command status to the HO2S 1 28 2 and HO2S 3 heater circuits 392 Data Parameters Engine Parameters HO2S B1 H CUR HO2S B2 H CUR HO2S B1 HEATER CURRENT mA HO2S B2 HEATER CURRENT mA HO2S B1 S2 HEATER CURRENT mA HO2S B2 S2 HEATER CURRENT mA HO2S B1 S2 H CUR HO2S B2 S2 CUR HO2S B2 S2 C A HO2S S2 H C A HO2S S2 HEATER CURRENT mA HO2S S2 HEATER HO2S S2 HTR Range not available Indicates the current applied by the ECM to the HO2S heater as amperes or milliamperes HO2S HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR A F Range 13 9 to 15 5 Indicates the air fuel ratio A F as determined by HO2S feedback signals HO2S B1 S1 V HO2S B2 S1 V HO2S B1 S2 V HO2S B2 S2 V 25 S1 V HO2S S2 V HO2S S3 V Range 0 0 to 1 4 V Indicates heated oxygen sensor HO2S output as volts Cylinder bank 1 B1 contains cylinder 1 Sensor 1 S1 is upstream closest to the engine a
478. lected the scan tool saves the codes in memory but the Clear Codes selection must be used to clear the ABS module memory Print Codes This selection is available on the Service Code menu following either a KOEO self test or a memory code test All printouts of the code list include the vehicle ID P To print the service code list from memory 1 Connect the scan tool to a compatible printer 2 Select Print Codes 115 Testing Airbag Transfer Case and Body Module Systems through the 16 Pin Connector ABS Data Communication Guidelines NOTE ABS functions are disabled during data communication If the vehicle is driven ABS will not function The ABS lamp may flash rapidly during data transmission Follow these steps to enter and exit ABS data To Verify that the ignition is off when entering the vehicle ID Turn the ignition on Select Data Display Turn the ignition off after completing ABS data tests 12 3 Testing Airbag Transfer Case and Body Module Systems through the 16 Pin Connector For applicable 1996 2008 models Airbag Body Module or Transfer Case systems may be selected In Body Modules the applicable modules may be selected including Body Control Module BCM Electronic Automatic Temperature Control EATC Electronic Power Steering EPS Generic Electronic Module GEM Instrument Cluster Module ICM Parking Aid Module PAM Passenger Junction Box PJB Tire Pressure Modu
479. lenoid and reads as follows 514 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters 90 the TCC solenoid is fully energized 0 the TCC solenoid is off TCC EFFICIENCY Range 0 0 to 2 0 1 Indicates a ratio which is calculated by multiplying the speed ratio by a value related to the K factor of the torque converter The K factor is the looseness or tightness of the torque converter for a given torque The nearer the torque converter is to full coupling 1 0 1 the closer the torque converter efficiency number will be to 1 TCC ENABLED TCC ENABLE SOL TCC SOL Range YES NO Indicates the PCM commanded state of the torque converter clutch TCC solenoid and reads YES when the TCC solenoid id energized TCC GROUNDED Range YES NO Indicates the state of TCC solenoid voltage available at pin F of the ALDL connector on some models This parameter is not part of the serial data list and does not appear in a data movie Interpret the voltage at pin F as follows YES means no voltage circuit closed to ground NO means high voltage circuit open e fpin is not present or is open TCC GROUNDED continuously reads YES YES indicates that the ECM has grounded its side of the circuit it does not indicate that the circuit is complete The circuit is not complete until all other switches in series are closed This parameter is useful to eliminate the ECM as the cause of a TCC solenoid that does not energize TCC RELEASE
480. ll X Power Pac Figure 15 43 Figure 15 43 Table 15 6 Figure 15 17 2 Wagon All All XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 155 Subaru Table 15 9 Subaru Vehicle Connections Table part 6 of 9 Testing Engine Systems Vehicle Identification Number Adapter User s Manual Section and Figure Numbers o Code Reading Read 5 Fuel Be D Check Reading Year Model Engine alza Codes Memory System 5 a Connectors Connector Connector Connectors Locion Impreza All All x PowerPac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 Wagon Figure 15 17 2 7 12113 2BBL Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 1 2L L3 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 3 Legacy Figure 15 17 4 Wagon All All XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 5 1 8L H4 MFI X Power Pac Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 1994 Figure 15 17 5 1 8L H4 SPI XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15 40 Figure 15 40 Table 15 4 Sedan Figure 15 17 2 2L H4 MFI X X Figure 15 18 Figure 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 22 x x Figure 15 17 15 42 Figure 15 42 Table 15 4 Figure 15 18 SVX All All X Power Pac Figure 15 43 Figure 15 43 Table 15 6 Figure 15 17 J Wagon All All XX Figure 15 18 Figure 15
481. ll not reset to zero This is used for Inspection Maintenance information purpose COOLANT Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F Indicates engine coolant temperature ECT which is supplied to the PCM by the ECT sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor installed in the engine coolant passages The PCM converts ECT sensor voltage signals to temperature readings Typical readings with a fully warmed engine running at idle are 185 to 220 F 85 to 105 C A reading of 40 C or 40 F may indicate an open in the sensor or the sensor circuit A reading above 185 C or 366 F may indicate a short in the sensor or the sensor circuit ECT Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F Indicates engine coolant temperature ECT Readings are typically supplied directly to the PCM by the ECT sensor On some models the ECM calculates the reading based on a cylinder head temperature CHT or engine oil temperature EOT sensor signal Typical readings for a fully warmed engine running at idle are 185 to 220 F 85 to 105 C A reading of 40 C or 40 F may indicate an open in the sensor or the sensor circuit A reading above 185 C or 366 F may indicate a short in the sensor or the sensor circuit EGR ERR Range 100 to 99 22 Indicates exhaust gas recirculation EGR error rate as a percentage The EGR system control and feedback devices differ therefore an actual or commanded status cannot be shown The value is calculated as act
482. lock Brake Systems Idle air control duty cycle EGR system Fuel pump relay Fuel pump A C clutch relay For transmission testing a typical list of actuator tests includes O D cut switch Converter lock up Shift P To perform an EGR system test 1 2 4 From the Actuator Tests menu select EGR System Select to continue when the activation screen displays The EGR Test screen displays Raise the engine RPM to 2500 By scrolling up and down you control the PCM command to the valve that switches sense vacuum to the EGR valve on and off The EGR TEMP and ST TRIM parameters on the screen make it easy to determine if exhaust gas is indeed being recirculated With EGR SYS OFF expect low EGR TEMP With the EGR SYS__ON the EGR TEMP should rise and the ST TRIM values should change After testing the EGR press N to return to the menu P To perform a Fuel Pump test 1 2 From the Actuator Tests menu select Fuel Pump Select to continue when the activation screen displays The Fuel Pump test screen displays The test runs for 30 seconds then the pump shuts off and a test completed message displays Exit to return to the menu 53 Honda This chapter contains information for testing Honda vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Honda systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission Antilock Brake System ABS Airbag SRS 8 1 Testing Engine a
483. low zero indicate decreased on time LT TRIM corrections operate only in closed loop PCT Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the throttle actuator control TAC status as a percentage of total throttle opening A reading of 0926 indicates a fully closed throttle and 100 indicates a wide open throttle THROTTLE Range 0 to 100 Indicates the PCM calculated throttle opening based on the throttle position TP sensor voltage A reading of 0 indicates a fully closed throttle and 100 indicates a wide open throttle Closed throttle readings vary because of the idle speed control ISC motor position and throttle body adjustments 463 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters TP TP B TP C Range 0 to 100 Indicates the PCM calculated absolute throttle position TP of the TP sensors The display shows the sensor output signal in proportion to the input signal as a percentage TP R Range 0 to 100 Indicates the relative or learned position of the throttle position TP sensor The display shows the PCM calculated TP based on adaptive strategy as a percentage TRIM B1 S1 TRIM B2 S3 TRIM B1 S4 TRIM B2 S4 TRIM B2 S1 TRIM B1 S2 TRIM B2 S2 TRIM B1 S3 Range 100 to 99 2 Indicates the operation and short term correction of the fuel metering based on oxygen sensor 025 signals The TRIM numbers indicate whether the PCM is commanding a rich or a lean mixture in response to in
484. lowing options displays Data No Codes begins communication with the ABS module and displays data parameters e Codes Only gathers and displays ABS trouble codes Clear Codes clears ABS memory codes from the ABS ECM memory Review Codes allows you to view codes This menu item appears only after code gathering Print Codes allows you to print codes This menu item appears only after code gathering Data No Codes This section has information on viewing ABS data using the scan tool To enter and exit ABS data 1 Enter in the vehicle ID 2 Turn the ignition on 3 Select Data No Codes 4 Turn the ignition off after completing the ABS data tests Codes Only This section has information on retrieving ABS codes using the scan tool To gather codes 1 Select Codes Only A key on verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue An initializing communication screen appears while the scan tool establishes communication with the vehicle NOTE The initializing communication screen means the scan tool is attempting to start the test however it does not mean the vehicle has responded If the message stays on the screen more than a few minutes the test did not start If no codes are detected during the test a 0000 no faults present message displays 3 The Code List which shows all codes in memory displays if codes are present 24
485. lue is derived by subtracting the turbine speed from the engine RPM The reading should be less than 50 RPM when the TCC is applied TCC parameter reads 95 or greater TCILFault Range YES NO Indicates whether a fault has occurred in the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp circuit TCINH Range LOW HIGH Indicates the status of the traction control inhibitor signal 439 Data Parameters Engine Parameters TCS FUEL CUT Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel cut control request from the TCS control unit to the ECM which results from wheel slippage being detected by the TCS The request is to reduce engine power in order to restore traction TCS INH Range ON OFF Indicates the torque reduction inhibit signal traction control system status TCS PGM FI Range ON OFF or YES NO Indicates the status of the traction control serial data link TCS STANDBY Range LOWHI Indicates a request from the TCS control unit to the ECM to reduce engine power in order to restore traction which results from wheel slippage being detected by the TCS It reads LOW when wheel slip is detected TEMP GAUGE Range 40 to 399 F or 40 199 C Indicates the temperature gauge TEN TERMINAL TEST Range ON OFF Indicates the TEN terminal data link connector status TGT VLV TMNG Range ON OFF Indicates the target valve timing status THIDLL 9 Range 0 to 180 Indicates the ECM learned throttle position as degrees of t
486. lyst oxygen sensor while suffix S2 indicates a post catalyst sensor During closed loop operation the sensor signals should range from 100 mV to 900 mV A lean condition causes both sensors to read below 400 mV while a rich condition causes readings above 600 mV At 2500 RPM readings should switch between high and low at least six to ten times every ten seconds O2S11 V 02512 02513 O2S14 V 02521 02522 02523 02524 02532 02541 02542 0 0 10 1 0 Indicates the signal voltage for each oxygen sensor 025 on the vehicle For example 02511 is the signal for bank 1 sensor 1 upstream and 02512 is for bank 1 sensor 2 downstream An O2S generates a voltage signal ranging from 0 to 1 volt or a little over 1 volt A high signal above 0 45V indicates a rich condition a low signal below 0 45V indicates a lean condition 461 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters The O2S must be hot above 500 260 C and the system must be operating in closed loop before the PCM corrects the fuel mixture in response to the O2S signal O2S11 mA O2S12 mA O2S13 mA O2S14 mA O2S21 mA O2S22 mA O2S23 mA O2S24 mA O2S31 mA O2S32 mA O2S41 mA O2S42 mA Range 128 to 128 Indicates the current for each oxygen sensor 025 in milliampere mA For example 02511 shows the signal for bank 1 sensor 1 upstream 02512 is the signal for bank 1 sensor 2 downstream The mA rea
487. mal operating conditions REDUCE TORO 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the reduce torque signal 1 status REDUCE TORQ 2 Range ON OFF Indicates the reduce torque signal 2 status REF 1 V Range 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage sensed on the 5 volt reference 1 circuit at the control module REF 1 V STATUS Range PASS FAIL No definition is available for this parameter at this time REF 2 V Range 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage sensed on the 5 volt reference 2 circuit at the control module REF 2 V STATUS Range PASS FAIL No additional information is available for this parameter REL TP 96 REL TP SENSOR Range 0 to 100 or 0 to 180 Indicates the status of the relative throttle position sensor on a drive by wire DBW system The reading is the ECM calculated throttle opening as percent or degrees it should increase as the throttle opens RELIEF VALVE SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the relief valve solenoid To avoid the abnormal pressure rising and surge noise the ECM controls the solenoid valve to ON open REQ TORQUE Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the amount of torque that is requested by the PCM as a percentage 428 Data Parameters Engine Parameters RESTART FAN Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the restart fan control which runs to remove heat from the engine compartment after the engine shuts down It reads ON when the main fan is running RETARD ACTION Range NO
488. manual code gathering only The How To Get Codes selection from the Code Functions menu displays manual code gathering instructions see How to Get Codes on page 11 The ABS system is placed in the diagnostic mode by performing vehicle specific diagnostic routines These routines consist of driving the vehicle over a specified speed driving for a specified time or connecting a grounded jumper to a specific pin of the diagnostic connector 15 3 2 ABS Code Types Detailed information for reading code types can be found in Code 08 at the end of the Testing Engine Systems Subaru ABS systems use the following code types Code Type 08 Straight Count on page 176 for ABS systems without memory Code Type 08 on page 179 for ABS systems with memory Code 08d on page 179 for ABS systems with TCS Manufacturer Specific Codes for 2005 2006 Subaru ABS systems ABS Code Types by Model e 1990 Legacy Touring Wagon Code 08 Straight Count Figure 15 44 e 1990 92 Legacy Wagon Code 08 Straight Count Figure 15 44 184 Subaru Testing ABS Systems 1990 92 Sedan 2 2L Code Type 08 Straight Count Figure 15 44 1992 97 SVX Code Type 08 Straight Count Figure 15 44 1993 04 Others Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 1995 97 Legacy Sedan with TCS Code Type 08d Figure 15 48 1995 97 Legacy Outback with TCS Code Type 08d Figure 15 48 1995 97 Legacy Wagon with
489. mer switch is in the Full Dim position The display reads 0 V when the park lamps or the head lamps are on and the IP dimmer switch is in the Full Bright position DIMMING LEVEL Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the signal distributed by the BCM to the pulse width modulated PWM door switch backlighting based on the position of the IP dimmer switch rheostat It reads 096 when the head lamp switch is in the Auto position and the daytime running lamps DRL are on or the IP dimmer switch is in the Full Dim position It reads 10096 when the head lamps or park lamps are on and the IP dimmer switch is in the Full Bright position Display Ext ON Sens Range 2 A NORM 1 2 Displays the extinction luminous intensity Display Ext OFF Sens Range 2 1 NORM 1 2 Displays the extinction release luminous intensity DLIDLKSW Range ON OFF Indicates the trunk liftgate lock relay status DLIDULSW Range ON OFF Indicates the trunk liftgate unlock relay status 308 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters DOMELM SW Range ON OFF Indicates the dome light switch status Door Key Linked Lock Sw Key Sw Lock Key Sw Lock Range ON OFF Indicates if the driver door is being locked with a key Reads ON if the door is being locked with a key reads OFF at all other times Door Key Linked Unlock Sw Key Sw Unlock Key Sw Unlock D Door Key Sw UNLOCK P Door Key Sw UNLOCK Rang
490. mes RR W C SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the rear right wheel cylinder pressure sensor open circuit detection Reads NORM normal unless an open circuit is detected reads OPEN when the circuit is open RR WHEEL ACCEL m s2 Range 200 84 m s2 to 199 27 m s2 Indicates the rear right wheel rate of acceleration RR WHEEL SPD Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the rear right wheel speed sensor reading Actual wheel speed similar speed as indicated on the speedometer RR WSPD Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the right rear wheel speed sensor SCSS Range ON OFF Indicates the stroke simulator solenoid SCSS status ON when in operating mode e OFF when not operating mode SIDE G Range 24 3 to 24 1 m s2 Side forces indicated by side G sensor Approximately 0 m s2 when vehicle is stopped When vehicle is moving 24 3 to 24 1 m s2 SLAFL CUR SLAFL CURR A Range Min 0 A Max 3A Indicates the SLAFL solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A when brake pedal is released SLAFR CUR SLAFR CURR Range Min 0 A Max 3A Indicates the SLAFR solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A when brake pedal is released SLARL CUR SLARL CURR Range Min 0 A Max 3A Indicates the SLARL solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A when brake pedal is released SLARR CUR SLARR CURR A Range Min 0 A Max 3A Indicates the SLARR solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A
491. meters STEERING WHEEL CONTROL V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates if voltage is supplied to the steering wheel controls STEERING WHEEL SW PWR Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage of the steering wheel controls power supply Stop Light Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the stop lamp switch Reads ON when the brake pedal is depressed brake lamps illuminated reads OFF when the brake pedal is released Stop Light Transistor Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the stop lamp transistor Reads ON when the transistor is on brake pedal depressed and OFF at all other times brake pedal released Str Unlock Sw Range ON OFF Displays the status of the steering wheel lock Reads ON when the steering is unlocked and OFF when the ignition is switched off and the steering lock is engaged STSW1 STSW2 Range ON OFF Displays the status of start switch 1 and start switch 2 Reads ON when the indicated switch is depressed and reads OFF at all other times Tail Cancel Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the tail cancel switch of the light control rheostat Reads ON when the tail cancel switch is on and reads OFF at all other times Tail Light Sig Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the tail light signal Reads ON when the tail lamps are on and reads OFF at all other times Tail Lamp Tail Light Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the light control switch Reads ON when the switch is set to the ta
492. mixture There are no definite specifications for injector pulse width but the reading should change as engine speed and load change Typical readings at idle are 2 2 to 3 0 mS and 2 1 to 2 9 mS at 3000 rpm The x in INJ x is a variable from 1 to 8 depending on the cylinder INJ PW B1 mS INJ PW B2 mS Range 0 to 1000 mS Indicates the amount of time the PCM commands each injector ON during an engine cycle in milliseconds A longer injector pulse width causes more fuel to be delivered The injector pulse width increases as the engine load increases represents cylinder bank 1 cylinders 1 5 and 7 B2represents cylinder bank 2 cylinders 2 4 6 and 8 402 Data Parameters Engine Parameters INJ1Fault INJ2Fault INJ3Fault INJ4Fault INJ5Fault INJ6Fault INJ1_ Fault INJ2_ Fault INJ3_Fault INJ4_ Fault INJ5_Fault INJ6_Fault Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM has detected an injector circuit fault it reads YES when the PCM detected a fault INJECTOR MODE Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the injector mode control operation It reads ON right after the ignition Switch is turned on under cold circumstances INLET AIR TEMP Range HOT COOL Indicates the state of the intake air temperature switch HOT when air temperature is approximately 60 F 15 or more COOL when air temperature is about 40 4 or less INPUT RPM Range 0 to 8192 rpm Indicates the rotational speed
493. mode Slide Switch Off 2 normal vehicle operation Pathfinder Pickup and Van Others Sight Window for LED Monitor Lamps Top View Side View 1 Diagnostic mode switch 2 ECM 3 Mode selector 4 LED monitor lamps Figure 14 3 ECM switch locations With the diagnostic switch in the normal vehicle operation position the LEDs can be used to check oxygen sensor operation and air fuel ratio control Refer to Nissan service procedures When the ECM is first placed in the diagnostic mode the LEDs flash several codes These codes indicate that the ECM has not yet received input signals from several switches The codes may be valid or false For accurate diagnosis verify the code status by operating the appropriate switches to send input signals to the ECM 126 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Engine Systems P To read codes for two mode control systems with Code Type 07a 1 9 Verify that the diagnostic switch is in the normal vehicle operation position slide the switch to the OFF position and the rotary switch fully counterclockwise Turn the ignition on Verify that the LEDs light for a bulb check If the LEDs do not light refer to Nissan test procedures for diagnosis Codes cannot be displayed if the LEDs do not light for a bulb check Turn the rotary diagnostic switch fully clockwise or move the slide switch to ON Observe the LEDs At this point the LEDs flash several codes for swit
494. mode functions A can be captured in one driving event by connecting the scanner and selecting SCS mode from the main menu on applicable vehicles For scan data usage during SCS mode manually jump the DLC from the backside while the scanner is connected to the DLC Connect Jump Wire Between Terminals 1 and 12 Figure 4 10 Data connector from the wire side Honda numbering not the same as SAE 4 1 4 Code Type For those systems that rely on manual code reading you must interpret a DTC from a flashing indicator lamp The code flash sequence varies by model and system The Scanner therefore refers you to a certain code type for example Code Type 03 Code type is a specific labeling System that identifies the appropriate section in this manual for each subsystem 4 1 5 Manual Code Reading Engine Codes There are 2 types of manual engine codes Type 02 see Figure 4 11 and Table 4 3 Type 03 see Figure 4 12 and Table 4 4 17 Testing Engine Systems Key On Pulse Code 5 Code Repeats Figure 4 11 Acura engine Code Type 02 Table 4 3 Acura engine Code Type 02 Pattern Long and short Read codes on Red LED on ECU Start codes by Turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off and clear codes Only one code displays at a time except on some late model cars After repairs clear codes and test drive then check for other codes
495. monitored by vapor pressure sensor WARM UPS CYC DTC CLEAR Range 0 to 255 counts Indicates the warm up cycle after DTC cleared Number of warm up cycles after DTC cleared 454 Data Parameters Engine Parameters WARM UPS W O NON EMISSION FAULTS Range 0 to 255 counts Indicates the number of warm up cycles without a detected non emission fault The parameter will increment to 255 then resets to 0 unless a fault occurs Odisplays if a fault occurs and remains until the fault is corrected Clearing codes or disconnecting PCM power resets the counter to 0 WARM UPS W O EMISSION FAULTS Range 0 to 255 counts Indicates the number of warm up cycles without a detected emission fault The parameter will increment to 255 then resets to 0 unless a fault occurs Odisplays if a fault occurs and remains until the fault is corrected Clearing codes or disconnecting PCM power resets the counter to 0 WASTEGATE SOL Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the drive percentage of the wastegate solenoid valve which regulates turbocharger boost pressure WIDE OPEN THROT Range YES NO Indicates the status of the wide open throttle switch it reads YES when the throttle is completely open The engine must be running for this parameter to change from NO to YES With the key on and the engine off a fully open throttle should produce a maximum throttle position TP sensor voltage indication but this parameter should read NO WOT SW Range
496. n 10 seconds after codes begin to display remove the jumper b Wait up to 3 seconds for the ABS warning lamp to light up 205 Toyota Lexus and Scion Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS c Reconnect the jumper between terminals 4 and 13 of the DLC3 within 2 to 4 seconds after ABS warning lamp lights d Disconnect the jumper after the ABS warning lamp is on for 2 to 4 seconds 4 Switch the Ignition off while jumper wire is till in place 206 17 1 Generic OBD II This chapter explains how to test 1994 later OBD II vehicles Most vehicles are equipped with two testing modes Generic OBD II and Enhanced OBD II The EPA requires all 1996 later vehicles sold in the USA to meet OBD II standards Some 1994 95 vehicles may appear to be OBD II equipped they may not be fully compliant Check the VECI label to determine if a 1994 95 vehicle is an OBD I or OBD II model The following information and procedures are specific testing in Generic OBD II mode For general scan tool testing information see the user s manual for your diagnostic tool OBD II and What it Means The term stands for On Board Diagnostics OBD II is a system that the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE developed in order to standardize automotive electronic diagnosis so technicians could use the same scan tool to test any make and model without special adapters The SAE established guidelines that provide the following Auniversal diagn
497. n 295 2 ZERO DECEEERAT m S2 oe teen hte 295 ZERO STEERING ZERO YAW RATE 2 ZEROSYAWBATE ADAE 277 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters This section defines data parameters available from the antilock brake systems ABS To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page 1 SYS BRAKE Range BEFORE DURIN Indicates the 1 Sys Brake DURING During operation 2 FRAMES Range YES NO Indicates when there are two or more frames for freeze frame data YES when there are two or more frames for freeze frame data 4WD ACTIVE Range YES NO Indicates the operating status of the 4WD system on models with a and a 4WAL or RWAL System It reads YES when the disables antilock braking e under normal operating conditions ABS BATT V ABS IGN V Range 0 0 to 13 50 V Indicates the switched ABS IGN and unswitched ABS BATT voltages to the ABS ECM ABS LAMP Range ON OFF FLSH Indicates the current status of the ANTILOCK ABS lamp on the instrument panel OFF means the lamp should be off and ABS is fully operational FLSH means the lamp is flashing due to a detected fault ABS remains operational ON means the lamp is continuously on due a detected fault ABS ope
498. n 3 Figure 15 15 Use the ground extension on the MULTI 1 black wire 159 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 7 pin Check connector color brown 2 Pin 3 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 15 7 pin Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with a 9 pin Check connector Connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to Check connector pin 4 Figure 15 16 1 9 pin Check connector color yellow 2 Pin 4 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 16 Yellow 9 pin Check connector P To read codes on vehicles with a 9 pin Check connector e Codes can be read using a MULTI 2C or a MULTI 1 adapter To read codes connect the MULTI 2C adapter to the Check connector Figure 15 17 or connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to pin 8 of the Check connector Figure 15 18 1 9 pin Check connector color varies 2 MULTI 2 adapter Figure 15 17 9 pin Check connector and MULTI 2C 160 Subaru Testing Engine Systems 1 9 pin Check connector color varies 2 Pin 8 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15 18 9 pin Check connector and MULTI 1 P To read codes on vehicles with an 11 pin Check connector e Connect the blue wire of the MULTI 1 adapter to Check connector pin 13 Figure 15 19 1 11 pin Check connector color brown 2 Pin 13 connect the MULTI 1 blue wire here 3 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 15
499. n in Figure 10 21 12 3 3 12 5 i p uM UR 1Code 12 1 Code23 1 13 1 1 Code 25 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 repeats 1 repeats 1 repeats i 1 repeats 13 3times 3times 1 i 3 times i 1 1 1 1 t Current Codes gt 1 4 History Codes gt Figure 10 22 suzu ABS CodeType 05a Table 10 7 suzu ABS Code Type 05a Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on ABS warning lamp Start codes by After bringing the vehicle to a complete stop and making sure the brake pedal is not depressed turn the ignition switch to the off position Connect terminals 12 and 4 on the OBD II 16 pin diagnostic link connector Figure 10 16 Turn the ignition switch to the on position Clear codes by Within three seconds after entering the diagnostic mode pulsate the brake switch on and off at least six times When done Turn the ignition off disconnect the connectors and clear codes diagnostic state All codes repeat 3 times and are followed by a 1 2 second pause Code 12 always flashes first to confirm the system is in the diagnostic mode Any current codes follow code 12 After the current codes have flashed code 13 may flash Code 13 indicates the presence of history codes which then follow If only historical codes are present the diagnostic sequence first flashes code 12 then code 13 followed by the historical codes The code display cycle r
500. n maximum and minimum values of SOC READY light ON engine stopped and no electrical load 0 to 6096 DISCHARGE RQST SOC W Range Min 20 480 W Max 20 320 W Indicates discharge request to adjust SOC Uniform on board charging 4 400 W e Usually 0 W DIST DTC CLEAR Range Min 0 km Max 65 535 km Indicates the drive distance after clearing DTCs 466 Data Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters DTC Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates the number of stored DTCs DRIVE CONDITION Range MG1 MG2 Indicates the driving condition MG1 load MG1 MG2load MG2 DRIVE CONDITION ID Range Min 0 Max 6 Indicates the drive condition ID Engine stopped 0 Engine about to be stopped 1 Engine about to be started 2 Engine operated or operating 3 e Generating or loading movement 4 e 6 Revving up with P position 6 DRIVING MILEAGE Range 0 km to 65 535 km Indicates the accumulated driving mileage after the malfunction occurrence ECU CTRL MODE Range Min 0 Max 4 Indicates the ECU control mode ECU TYPE Range HV ECU EV ECU Indicates the type of ECU ENG RUN TIME Range Min 0 s Max 65 535 s Indicates the elapsed time after starting engine that key cycle ENG STOP RGST Range NO YES Indicates the engine stop request Requesting stop YES ENG WARM UP RGST Range NO YES Indicates the engine warm up request Requesting engine warm up Y
501. n sensor 11 Bank 1 Upstream 12 Bank 1 Downstream 21 Bank 2 Upstream 22 Bank 2 Downstream PULLY RPM I P PULLY SPD rpm Range 0 to engine max Indicates the engine speed computed from the turbine revolution sensor signal 394 Data Parameters Engine Parameters IAB CTRL SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the intake air bypass control solenoid valve it should be ON at idle and OFF at all other times IAB HI CTRL SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the intake air bypass high control solenoid valve it should only be ON during high RPM operation IAB LOW CTRL SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the intake air bypass low control solenoid valve it should only be ON during low RPM operation IAC 96 ISC 96 IAC AAC 96 1 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the pulse width modulated PWM signal being applied to the idle air control IAC valve As the duty ratio exceeds 5096 the valve shaft moves in to open the air bypass passage At a duty ratio less than 5096 the shaft moves to close the air bypass passage IAC COM IAC COMMAND COUNTS Range not available Indicates the PCM commanded status of the idle air control valve as a count IAC DIRECTION IVSMDIR1 IVSMDIR2 Range FWD REV Indicates the direction the ECM is commanding the idle air control IAC motor to move FWD to reduce idle airflow e REV to increase idle airfl
502. n2 IG2 Relay Mon1 IG2 Relay Mon2 Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ignition relay monitors e G1 Moni ignition 1 inner relay e G1 Mon2 ignition 1 outer relay 316 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters e G2 Moni ignition 1 inner relay e G2 Mon ignition 1 outer relay All should read on when the ignition switch is on and off when the switch is off IGNITION 3 Range ON OFF Indicates the input to the control module from the ignition switch indicating the ignition 3 position Reads ON when the switch is closed in the ON Run position only reads OFF at all other times IGNITION ACCESSORY Range ACTIVE INACTIVE Indicates the input to the control module from the ignition switch accessory circuit Reads ACTIVE when ignition accessory switch circuit is closed in accessory and run positions reads INACTIVE at all other times IG Sw Signal MPX IG Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status if the ignition switch Reads OFF when the switch is in the off position reads ON at all other times On ACC Range ON OFF Indicates the status if the interior lighting with ACC off When on the interior lights illuminate when ACC off is in the on position When off the interior lights illuminate when ACC off is in the off position l Light On Unlock Range ON OFF Indicates the status if the interior lighting with unlock When on the interior lights illuminate when unlock is on When off
503. nd 5 8 77 Code Reading Connectors and 77 Clearing GOd6es x Tae i tidie cdidit aeg et paene 79 Actuator Tests uoc ae ee e e eee ep er op eve de e v dp ee e e 79 vi Table of Contents Chapter 10 ISUZU entered ice 80 Testing Engine and Transmission 80 Engine And Transmission Code Reading Connectors and Locations 80 Manual Code reading 86 Clearing Codes es a 87 Road Test No G amp D uitiis Et iier E OT 87 Field Service Functional TeSts nennen enne nnne nennen 88 Testing Antilock Brake System 88 ABS Code Reading Connectors and Locations 88 Manual Code Reading 8 90 Clearing ABS Codes eis ene ne ra en diee teet te 93 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems 5 5 93 Manual Code Reading 988 kareena ninian are aeaa aaa akaida ia iaa 94 Clearing SRS 97 Testing Transfer Case Body Control Module BCM and Instrument Panel Clus
504. nd S2 is downstream after the converter HO2S mon ready Range YES NO Indicates the heated oxygen sensor HO2S monitor has successfully completed HO2S11 mA HO2S12 mA HO2S21 mA HO2S22 mA Range 8 89 to 8 89 mA Indicates the drive current supplied by the ECM to control the HO2S heater The two digits after 28 position the sensor 11 Bank 1 Upstream e 12 Bank 1 Downstream 21 Bank 2 Upstream 22 Bank 2 Downstream HOT OPEN LOOP Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM has commanded open loop operation due to high engine temperature and reads YES only when in open loop 393 Data Parameters HTD CAT MON CMPL Range Indicates the heated catalyst monitor HTD CAT MON ENA Range Indicates the heated catalyst monitor HTR11 HTR12 HTR21 HTR22 Range Indicates the HO2S heater circuit status for 11 Bank 1 Upstream 12 Bank 1 Downstream 21 Bank 2 Upstream 22 Bank 2 Downstream HTR11Fault HTR12Fault HTR21Fault HTR22Fault HTR11 Fault HTR12 Fault HTR21 Fault HTR22 Fault Range Indicates the HO2S heater circuit fault exists for 11 Bank 1 Upstream 12 Bank 1 Downstream 21 Bank 2 Upstream e 22 Bank 2 Downstream HTRCM11 A HTRCM12 A HTRCM21 A HTRCM22 A Range Engine Parameters COMPLETE INCOMPLETE UNABLE ENABLE ON OFF YES NO ON OFF Indicates the heater current monitor for the heated exhaust oxyge
505. nd Transmission Systems Honda engine system testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 54 SCS mode on page 56 Code Type on page 57 Manual Code Reading 1986 91 ECM LED ONLY on page 59 Manual Code Reading on page 62 8 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Refer to Figure 8 1 for common connector locations for Honda vehicles Connector configurations are shown in Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 and Figure 8 4 on page 55 Refer to Table 8 1 on page 55 to determine which adapter to use to test a specific vehicle Figure 8 1 Common connector locations 54 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems um ER ESAE DEAS Figure 8 2 OBD II data link connector DLC Figure 8 3 3 pin DLC Figure 8 4 2 pin service check signal SCS connector Table 8 1 Common connector locations VEHICLE YEAR SCS 2 PIN DLC 3 PIN DLC 16 PIN 1994 95 2 2 Accord 4 cylinder 1996 97 2 6 1998 2004 9 1995 97 2 9 1998 2004 9 1992 95 1 1 1996 2000 1 9 2001 04 8 1997 2001 4 4 CR V 2002 04 7 1993 95 1 1 del Sol 1996 97 1 4 Element 2003 04 7 Insight 2000 4 Insight 2001 04 7 1995 3 3 Odyssey 1996 98 3 4 1999 2004 8 1994 96 9 9 Passport 1997 2002 9 Pilot 2003 04 7 1992 95 7 7 Prelude 1996 7 D 1997 2001 4 4 2000 01 4 52000 2002 04 7 Remove asht
506. nd cut fuel delivery during deceleration 386 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FUEL ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the fuel system monitor Reads ENABLE when the monitor is active FUEL FRONT FUEL 96 REAR Range 25 to 25 Indicates the adaptive adjustment made to fuel injector pulse width for the front and rear cylinder banks at idle Should read Anegative value if the PCM is decreasing the pulse width from programmed values A positive value if the PCM is increasing the pulse width from programmed values FUEL LEVEL AVERAGE FUEL LEVEL L Range 0 to 72 liters or 0 to 19 gallons Indicates the amount of fuel remaining in the tank FUEL LEVEL mV Range 1000 to 6200 mV Indicates the amount of fuel remaining in the tank as millivolts e 1000mV to 3600 indicates a full tank e 2700 to 6200 V indicates a near empty tank FUEL LEVEL V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the fuel tank level signal voltage FUEL METER CTRL Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the status of the fuel meter control which represents the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank as a percentage of total capacity FUEL MISFIRE Range actual count Indicates the accumulated misfire counter for 2VI method fuel system problems FUEL PMP SP CTL Range LO HI or ON OFF Indicates the current state of the fuel pump relay The fuel pump supply voltage is controlled LO HI by the ECM from the intake manifold pressure
507. nd drive to check for codes 59 Testing ABS 23 1 4 8 13 Code 13 Figure 8 12 Honda engine Code Type 04 Table 8 5 Honda engine Code Type 04 Pattern Binary LEDs assigned numbers 8 4 2 1 add numbers for codes Read codes on Four LEDs on ECM Start codes by Turn the ignition on When done Turn the ignition off then clear codes Only one code displayed at a time except on some late model cars After repairing the problem clear codes and drive car then check for other codes 8 2 Testing ABS Testing Honda ABS includes ABS Codes and Data Testing on page 60 Manual Code Reading on page 62 Code Clearing for 1996 2002 Passport with Rear Wheel ABS on page 65 e Code Clearing for 1996 2002 Passport with 4 Wheel ABS on page 65 8 2 1 ABS Codes and Data Testing The following selections are available for ABS testing e ABS Main Menu on page 60 Codes and Data Menu on page 61 Data No Codes on page 61 e Codes Only on page 61 Clear Codes on page 61 ABS Main Menu After selecting ABS from the System Selection menu the Main Menu ABS displays Selections vary by model and year The following main menu selections are discussed e Codes and Data Menu Movies Custom Setup and Troubleshooter are discussed in detail in the user s manual for your diagnostic tool 60 gt Testing ABS Codes and Data Menu
508. nd released Switch State alternates High Low as the head lamps are turned on and off Turn off the Head lamp head lamps after the test Brake Lamp Switch State alternates High Low as the brake pedal is pressed and released Blower Turn the blower switch to the high position Switch State alternates High Low as the blower switch position changes Turn the blower off after the test With the blower set to low Switch State alternates High Low as the is turned on and off Turn off the blower and air conditioner after the test Rear Switch State alternates High Low as the rear defroster is turned on and off Turn off Defroster the rear defroster after the test Water Switch State alternates High Low as the water thermo switch is disconnected Thermo Reconnect the switch after the test NOTE If coolant is at operating temperature the LED is always on P To perform a Base Timing Check From Functional Tests menu select Base Timing Check The ECM enters base timing mode to allow ignition timing checks and adjustments 12 1 4 Functional Tests All models with EEC IV and EEC V systems NOTE Operations described in this section are not available on all tool platforms Functional Tests are available for Mazda vehicles with EEC IV and EEC V control systems but menu items are completely different for each system See EEC IV Functional Tests on page 106 and EEC V Functional Tests on page 109 for details NOTE
509. nds of the lamp switching off 5 When the SRS indicator lamp lights again connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds of the lamp switching on 6 When the SRS indicator lamp shuts off remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds The SRS lamp flashes twice to indicate memory has been erased 7 Switch the ignition off and wait ten seconds 4 seconds or Less Connected Disconnected gt 1 SRS Indicator Lamp 2 MES Connector Terminal Figure 8 27 SRS code clearing 71 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 1 Memory Erase Signal MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 28 1994 2000 Civic 1992 1997 del Sol SRS code clearing 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 30 1997 2001 Prelude SRS code clearing 72 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 31 1996 98 Odyssey 1995 97 Accord SRS code clearing 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 32 1994 96 Prelude SRS code clearing 1 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 2 MES connector Figure 8 33 1999 2002 Odyssey SRS code clearing left side of dash 73 Honda Testing Sup
510. ng Test is available most 2001 and later models This test will force the PCM to run the evaporative system self test The test can be used to confirm repairs made to the evaporative system without taking the vehicle on an EVAP drive cycle road test If the system fails the test DTCs will be set in Codes 37 Chrysler Imports Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS 5 1 7 AITE FAACI Quick Learn Selecting Quick Learn initiates a quick learn test and is usually performed when battery power to the PCM is interrupted During normal operation the transmission control module TCM continually monitors and learns or updates clutch volume index values Newer clutches require less volume or lower CVI while worn clutches require more volume or a higher CVI If battery power is interrupted the TCM reverts to baseline values and must relearn each clutch circuit The transmission learning that occurs during normal operation is intended to compensate for normal wear However simply driving the vehicle to relearn CVI values is time consuming and typically the transmission shift quality is poor Quick learn allows the TCM to make coarse adjustments quickly before the vehicle is driven 5 1 8 4ITE F4AC1 Reset The EMCC Reset selection resets the electronically modulated converter clutch EMCC logic program The TCM on late model vehicles with a 4ITE or FAAC1 transmission uses an EMCC logic The EMCC logic adapts or l
511. ng code 12 Code display cycle repeats as long as system is in diagnostic state 10 1 3 Clearing Codes Some 1987 and later models allow clearing trouble codes using the Scanner If the code clearing operation fails for any reason the previous codes will reappear at the top of the data list when you return to Codes and Data If this happens repeat code clearing 10 1 4 Road Test No C amp D Many Isuzu models offer a Road Test No C amp D mode This option removes the scan tool resistive load applied to the vehicle ECM in Codes and Data so you can safely drive the vehicle with the scan tool connected NOTE No codes or data are transmitted when operating in this mode Some Isuzu vehicles particularly with carbureted engines provide a Road Test mode of ECM operation but do not transmit data For these vehicles a Road Test No C amp D selection is available on the menu 87 Isuzu Testing Antilock Brake System ABS 10 1 5 Field Service Functional Tests NOTE Operations described in this section are not available on all tool platforms The Field Service functional test is available for some 1980 2 95 Isuzu models with General Motors control systems Selecting Field Service opens a confirmation screen accepting the confirmation begins the test IMPORTANT Do not enter Field Service mode while driving a vehicle on a road test ECM changes to ignition timing fuel delivery and other engine functions may aff
512. ngine run time Time after engine start that cycle ENG OIL PRESS SW Range OFF ON Indicates the presence of engine oil pressure This should remain on from engine start to engine shut off ENG OIL TEMP Range 40 to 419 F 40 215 C Indicates the engine oil temperature in degrees Celsius or fahrenheit which the PCM uses to control the cooling fans ENG ON RUN TIME Range 0 to 65 535 sec Indicates the time lapse since the engine was started during this key cycle 375 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ENG SPD Range 0 to engine max Indicates engine RPM On most vehicles the ECM relies on the engine speed sensor for this value On others the TCM internally calculates this parameter by directly monitoring the pulses of the ignition coil to determine engine speed ENG SPD FROM EFI IAT FROM EFI ECT FROM EFI TPS FROM EFI ACCEL POS FROM EFI Range varies by system Min Max Indicates processed data received from the Engine control module by the Transmission control module and is used to process upshift and downshift decisions This should match data collected when monitoring Engine control module parameters ENG TORQ N M Range 0 to 65025 Nm Indicates engine torque as calculated by the PCM ENGINE LOAD 96 Range 0 to 16096 Indicates relative engine load based on engine speed RPM the number of cylinders and manifold airflow A high number indicates a heavy load a low number a light lo
513. nitor O2S11 mV 02512 mV O2S21 mV 02522 mV Range 0 to 1800 O2S11 V O2S12 V 02521 V 02522 V Pande not available Indicates the exhaust oxygen sensor O2S signal voltage The O2S is the primary sensor that indicates whether the engine is running rich or lean The voltage signal typically ranges from 0 to 1000 millivolts mV A high millivolt signal indicates a rich exhaust a low signal indicates a lean exhaust In normal operation O2S voltage ranges from 100 to 1000 mV An 25 must be hot above 500 F and the PCM must be operating in closed loop before the PCM responds to the sensor signal The 2 digits after O2S identify the sensor location 422 Data Parameters Engine Parameters e O2S11 The upstream sensor for bank 1 O2812 The downstream sensor for bank 1 O2S21 The upstream sensor for bank 2 e O2822 The downstream sensor for bank 2 02511 FAULT O2S21 FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a heated exhaust oxygen sensor fault The 2 digits after O2S identify the sensor location e O2S11 The upstream sensor for bank 1 e O2S21 The upstream sensor for bank 2 OBDSID Range not available Indicates the on board system identification OCT ADJ Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the octane adjust status OD INHIBIT Range ON OFF Indicates the overdrive cancel switch hold switch status OD OFF LIGHT Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission control indicator light OIL LIFE 96
514. nnector e Connect the positive voltmeter lead to connector pin E and the negative lead to either pin A or a good ground With the ignition on voltage should be 5 V or fluctuating between 3 5 and 5 0 V If the circuit is open the ECM cannot transmit data to the scan tool 527 Numerics Glossary 2WD Two wheel drive 4EAT 4 speed Electronic Automatic Transmission 4WD Four Wheel drive Air Conditioner A F Air Fuel AAT Ambient Air Temperature Air temperature surrounding the vehicle ABS Antilock Brake System ACCEL accelerator ACTV Active ADJ adjust or adjustment ADV advance ALDL Assembly Line Diagnostic Link ASYNCH Asynchronous ATC Automatic Transfer case 528 Glossary BARO Barometric pressure Pertaining to atmospheric pressure or the results obtained by using a barometer Baud rate The speed at which the scan tool communicates with a vehicle ECM and records data movies The baud rate depends on the vehicle ECM it is not controlled by the scan tool BCM Body Control Module BLM Block Learn Multiplier C OFF Cutoff CAN Controller Area Network CCP Charcoal Canister Purge CHT Cylinder Head Temperature CKP Crankshaft Position CKT Circuit CLSD Closed CMP Camshaft Position Sensor codes A numerical code generated by the vehicle control system to indicate a fault has occurred in a particular subsystem circuit or part CTP Closed Throttle Pos
515. nnector location 190 Subaru Testing Airbag SRS Systems 2005 06 All Subaru Models P To retrieve trouble codes 1 Use the OBD II adapter with the specified Personality Key device Figure 15 55 2 Select Codes Only from the Codes and Data menu and follow any instructions on the scan tool display 1 16 pin DLC 2 OBD II adapter and Personality Key Figure 15 55 16 Pin OBD II connector and common locations P To clear code memory e Select Clear Codes from the Codes and Data menu and follow any instructions on the scan tool display 15 4 Testing Airbag SRS Systems The following sections include information for testing Subaru airbag supplemental restraint systems SRS systems Subaru airbag SRS testing includes the following e Airbag SRS Code Information Airbag SRS Code Types Airbag SRS Code Reading and Connector Locations 191 Subaru Testing Airbag SRS Systems 15 4 1 Airbag SRS Code Information If you select Airbag from the System Selection menu after identifying a 1992 2005 model year vehicle except the 2005 Legacy Outback Sedan or Wagon the scan tool give you instructions for applying power If you select Airbag from the System Selection menu after identifying a 2005 Legacy Outback Sedan or Wagon or any 2006 model except Baja the scan tool gives you instructions for connecting to the OBD II 16 pin connector All Subaru Airbag systems except for 2005 Legacy Outb
516. nnector locations 3 2 TL 1995 connector locations 14 1996 2003 engine connector locations 13 1996 2003 transmission connector locations 2004 engine connector locations 13 2004 transmission connector locations 20 3 5 RL 1996 2003 engine connector locations 13 1996 2003 transmission connector locations 2000 2002 ABS code reading 26 2004 engine connector locations 13 2004 transmission connector locations 20 SRS code reading 30 3000 GT 1991 1999 connector locations 118 300ZX 1985 1989 code reading 127 626 1988 1992 ABS code reading 112 A ABS 184 Accent 1995 2004 connector locations 78 20 20 20 20 20 20 Accord 1986 1989 LXI ECM and LED locations 57 1990 and later connector locations 58 1994 2004 4 cylinder connector locations 55 1995 1997 SRS code clearing 73 1995 2004 V6 connector locations 55 1998 2003 SRS code clearing 74 2004 SRS code clearing 74 Acura 12 32 2 pin service check signal SCS connector 13 3 pin DLC 13 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 12 Common connector locations 12 DLC locations 14 Engine Code Type 03 18 Engine System Testing Multiple Codes 18 Testing Antilock Brake Systems ABS 22 ABS Codes and Data Testing 23 ABS MAIN MENU 23 CLEAR CODE 25 29 67 CODE ONLY 24 29 66 CODES amp DATA MENU 24 28 66 DATA NO CODES 24 29 66 Manual Code Reading and Clearing 25 Code Reading connectors and locations 22 Testing Engine Systems 12 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SR
517. nostic tool for details 17 4 1 Codes and Data Menu This selection is available from the Main Menu in Generic OBD II mode Select Codes and Data Menu and a sub menu of the following choices displays Codes Only displays diagnostic trouble codes DTCs O2 Monitors displays various signal characteristics of O2S response Pending Codes displays codes whose setting conditions occurred once but must occur two or more times before a DTC is set Data No Codes displays various sensor switch and actuator inputs and outputs Freeze Frame displays certain data readings that the vehicle stores when a DTC is set 209 Generic OBD II Main Menu Selections Scan Tool Communication The selections from the Codes and Data Menu require that the scan tool communicate with the powertrain control module PCM The ignition must be on to establish communication After making a selection the scan tool displays a waiting for PCM to communicate message If communication with the PCM is not established within 5 seconds the scan tool displays a no communication message This message stays on the screen until communication is established or the operation is canceled When communication is established the scan tool will go to the selected function Interrupted Communication If communication is interrupted during testing but power remains connected a No Communication message displays This could happen if the connection to the v
518. ns 19 1988 1990 sedan transmission connector locations 19 1991 code reading 18 1991 1994 ABS connector locations 22 Lexus See Toyota Loyale 1987 1992 transmission code reading 181 connector locations 145 LS400 troubleshooting 523 L Series 1987 1990 Read Memory and D Check connectors 171 Mazda 102 116 engine system testing 102 Functional Test Computed Timing Test 106 Wiggle Engine OFF test 106 Functional Tests 106 109 Idle Speed Adjustment Test 108 Output State Check 107 Output State Test 109 Wiggle Engine Running Test 107 Testing Airbag GEM ICM amp Transfer Case Systems through the 16 Pin Connector 116 Testing Antilock Brake Systems 111 ABS Main Menu 113 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 102 Code Reading 102 EEC IV Functional Tests 106 EEC V Functional Tests 109 Functional Tests 104 105 Manual Code Reading 103 Transmission Code Retrieval 110 transmission system testing 102 MDX 2001 2004 engine connector locations 13 2001 2004 transmission connector locations 20 Metro 1989 1992 engine code reading 45 1992 1994 1 0L transmission code reading 48 1992 1995 1 3L transmission code reading 48 1992 1995 engine code reading 47 1995 1 0L transmission code reading 48 Mirage 1989 2002 connector locations 118 Mirage Turbo 1985 1988 connector locations 118 Mitsubishi 117 2 Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Systems 117 ABS Manual Code Reading 121 Actuator Tests 122 Clearing Codes 122 Code Reading
519. nt classification system OPS ST Range Indicates the front passage occupant classification system P ABAGR Ohms Range Indicates the passenger side airbag module resistance P ABAGR2 Ohms Range Indicates the passenger side airbag 2 resistance P Airbag Ohms Range Indicates the passenger side airbag module resistance P AirBAG2 Ohms Range Indicates the passenger s side airbag resistance P PReTNR Ohms Range Indicates the passenger retractor pretensioner circuit resistance PABAGR Ohms Range Indicates the passenger side airbag module resistance 295 actual actual 0 0 to 22 5 Q 0 0 to 22 5 Q 0 0 to 22 5 Q 0 0 to 22 5 0 0 to 22 5 Q 0 0 to 22 5 Q Data Parameters PASS IMPACT ID Range Indicates a two digit ID number and typically reads 43 PBSW C A Range Indicates the passenger buckle switch current measurement PS AB Ohms Range Indicates the passenger side impact air bag resistance PS BUKL Range Indicates the passenger buckle switch status PS PTENS Ohms Range Indicates the passenger s seat belt retractor pretensioner resistance PSBELTR Ohms Range Indicates the passenger s seat belt pretensioner resistance SEAT TRAC TRAK SW Range Indicates the seat track position TIME ON HOURS Range Airbag SRS Parameters 10 to 99 actual 0 0 to 22 5 Q IN OUT 0 0 to 22 5 Q 0 0 to 22 5 Q FORWARD REVERSE 0
520. nt left wheel rate of acceleration FL WHEEL SPD Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the front left wheel speed sensor reading Actual wheel speed similar speed as indicated on the speedometer FLUID LEV SW Range OFF ON Indicates brake fluid level ON indicates fluid level is low OFF indicates fluid level is sufficient FORWARD amp REAR m s2 Range min 25 11 m s2 to max 24 91 m s2 Indicates the forward and rearward G force FPCM Range LOWHI Indicates the control condition of the fuel pump control module Reads HI when cranking and reads LOW when running at idle and the engine temperature is above 10 C 50 F FR ABS STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the front right wheel ABS control status ON during the control FR OPERATE TORQ Range 0 N m to 4 080 N m Indicates the front regenerative operation torque FR PRS SEN V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the front right pressure sensor 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released FR RQST TORQ Range 0 N m to 4 080 N m Indicates the front regenerative request torque FR VSC STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the front right wheel VSC control status ON during the control FR W C SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the front right wheel cylinder pressure sensor open detection NORMAL when in normal condition FR W C SENS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the front right wheel cylinder pressure sensor 282 Da
521. ntrusive operation at idle is considered normal VVT CHNG ANGL 1 9 Range Min 0 FR Max 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT change angle bank 1 0 from rest Idling Displacement angle during intrusive operation 452 Data Parameters Engine Parameters VVT CHNG ANGL 2 Range Min 0 FR Max 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT change angle bank 2 0 from rest Idling Displacement angle during intrusive operation VVT CHNG ANGL 1 Range to 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT change angle FR From Rest for the bank 1 intake cam 0 to 5 idle during a requested intrusive operation is considered normal VVT CHNG ANGL 2 Range O FR to 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT change angle FR From Rest for the bank 2 intake cam 0 to 5 at idle during a requested intrusive operation is considered normal VVT CONTROL Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the variable valve timing VVT system which is used to advance or retard camshaft timing it reads ON when VVT is active The VVT uses a hydraulic motor to change camshaft gear position VVT CTRL B1 Range ON OFF Indicates the variable valve timing VVT control bank 1 status VVT CTRL B2 Range ON OFF Indicates the variable valve timing VVT control bank 2 status VVT EX CHG ANG1 Range O FR to 60 FR Indicates the variable valve timing VVT change an
522. o a known good ground connect directly to the negative battery terminal if possible The meter should read 50 millivolts 0 050 V or less for a good ground Figure A 5 on page 527 Higher readings indicate a high resistance ALDL ground connection Ifthe meter reads 5 V the ALDL ground connection is open 526 Troubleshooting GM Control Systems on Isuzu and Isuzu built Geo e wv e v 1 Voltmeter 2 Jump pin B to pin A 3 Jump pin A to pin C Figure A 5 Ground continuity for the ALDL connector P To check voltage on the test terminal e Connect the voltmeter positive lead to pin B of the 12 pin ALDL connector or to pin A of the 3 pin connector and the negative lead to the ALDL ground pin or a good ground With the ignition on voltage should be 5 V If the test terminal pin B or pin A circuit is open a 160 baud ECM cannot switch into diagnostic mode P To check voltage on pin B of the 3 pin connector Check Engine lamp e Connect the voltmeter positive lead to ALDL pin B and the negative lead to the ground pin or a known good ground With the ignition on and the engine off voltage on pin B should be less than 1 V 0 7 to 0 8 V when the lamp is on When the lamp is off with the engine running the meter should read battery voltage If the circuit to pin B is open the ECM cannot transmit data to the scan tool P To check voltage on pin E of the 12 pin co
523. ody Control Module BCM Parameters Panic Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the panic button on the Intelligent Key remote transmitter Reads ON only when the panic button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times Pwr Window Down Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the power window down feature of the Intelligent Key system Reads ON when the unlock button of the remote transmitter is pressed and held to lower the windows I Key Unlock Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the unlock button on the Intelligent Key remote transmitter Reads ON only when the unlock button is pressed and reads OFF at all other times IGKEY ILLU Range ON OFF Indicates illuminated entry Ign On Sw IGN ON SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ignition switch Reads ON when the switch is in the ON position and reads off at all other times IGNITION 0 Range ON OFF Indicates the ignition O position Input to the control module from the ignition switch indicating the ignition O position Reads ON when ignition 1 switch circuit is closed reads OFF at all other times Positions are UNLOCK ACC e ON Run e START IGNITION 1 Range ON OFF Indicates the input to the control module from the ignition switch indicating the ignition 1 position Reads ON when ignition 1 switch circuit is closed reads OFF at all other times Ignition 1 switch closed positions are ON Run e START IG1 Relay Mon1 IG1 Relay Mo
524. of the input shaft INT AIR CTL VSV INTAKE AIR VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the vacuum switching valve VSV that actuates the second turbocharger intake air control valve When ON the VSV should be activated and the control valve should be open INT V SOL B1 SOL B2 96 Range 0 to 99 Indicates the control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve It should read 0 to 2 at idle 0 to 80 when revving the engine up to 2000 RPM quickly INT V SOL B1 INT V SOL B2 Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the intake valve timing control solenoid 403 Data Parameters Engine Parameters INT V TIM B1 INT V TIM B2 Range 127 to 128 Indicates the intake camshaft advance angle It should read e 5 to 5 at idle 0 to 45 when revving the engine up to 2000 RPM quickly INTAKE AIR Range Min 40 F Max 258 F or Min 40 Max 140 C Indicates the intake air temperature equivalent to ambient air temperature e If value 40 C 40 F sensor circuit open f value 140 C 284 F sensor circuit shorted INTAKE CNTRL Range 0 to 255 Indicates the position of the intake tuning valve stepper motor inside the intake manifold runner as a step count The greater the count the wider the intake tuning valve opening INTAKE CTL VSV1 INTAKE CTL VSV2 INTAKE VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the vacuum switching v
525. og values or as a pulse width modulated PWM signal Parameters are presented as they appear on the screen Most parameter descriptions are in alphabetical order but there are exceptions Often the same parameter goes by a different name when used on more than one make model engine or control system In these instances all of the applicable parameter names are listed in alphabetical order before the description The scan tool may display names for some data parameters that differ from names displayed by a factory tool and other scan tools The data parameter descriptions in this manual were created from a combination of sources For most parameters some basic information was provided by the respective manufacturers then expanded through research and field testing Parameter definitions and ranges may expand as more test results become available For some parameters no information is currently available Always use a digital multimeter power graphing meter or lab scope to further validate the displayed values If data is corrupted on multiple data parameters not assume that the control module may be faulty This corrupt data may be caused by improper communication between the scan tool and the control module See the troubleshooting sections of the user s manual for the diagnostic tool you are using for more details on communication problems 214 Data Parameters Interpreting Pressure Parameters Interpreting Pressure Parame
526. omentarily The ECBM may display a code in mid count when the diagnostic lead is first grounded Allow the lamp to flash its sequence several times to be sure you are reading the code accurately Remember a long flash starts the code and the rest are short flashes The ECBM stores only one code at a time even if there is more than one problem Repair the first code clear memory then test drive to check for any other codes i 1 3 Sec 1 3 6 1 1 3 0 1 Sec Sec Start of pe 4 9 Next Code Key On P4 3 9 le gt Pulse NE 1 4 Code 32 31 Figure 8 17 Honda ABS Code Type 06 Table 8 10 Honda ABS Code Type 06 Pattern Main code and sub code Read codes on ABS warning lamp Short the SCS and turn key on ABS indicator light will stay on for 2 seconds then turn off main code will flash then pause 1 second sub code will flash and pause 5 seconds stored codes will flash only one time per ignition cycle cycle key at least once to verify codes Clear codes by removing the ABS B2 15 fuse from the ABS fuse box for 10 seconds Start codes by When done 64 Testing ABS 8 2 3 Code Clearing for 1996 2002 Passport with Rear Wheel ABS P To read 1996 2002 Passport with RWAL codes e Jump pins 4 and 12 as shown in Figure 8 18 1 2 10 14 13 14 15 e 1 Data Link Connecto
527. on 1 Service check connector 2 Jump wire Figure 4 13 1991 95 NSX 1992 95 Vigor transmission service check connector locations 1 1987 90 Legend Coupe 2 1988 90 Legend Sedan 3 1990 95 Integra 4 LED display Figure 4 14 Acura transmission service check connector locations 19 Testing Transmission Systems Figure 4 15 shows common transmission diagnostic connector locations for Acura vehicles Figure 4 15 Common transmission connector locations for 1995 2003 vehicles Refer to Table 4 5 to determine which adapter to use to test a specific model Table 4 5 Common connector locations VEHICLE YEAR SCS 2 PIN DLC 3 PIN DLC 16 PIN 2 2 CL 1997 3 5 2 3 CL 1998 99 3 5 2 5 TL 1995 98 2 5 3 0 CL 1997 99 3 S56 2001 02 5 2003 7 1996 98 2 5 3 2 TL 1999 02 5 2003 7 3 5 RL 1996 2003 2 5 Integra 1996 2001 1 MDX 2001 04 NSX 1995 2003 1 3 RSX 2002 04 7 SLX 1996 99 6 TSX 2004 3 2 TL 2004 NSX T 2004 3 5 RL 2004 3 5 Remove ashtray Remove the DLC cover 20 Testing Transmission Systems NOTE To retrieve codes with the scan tool use the 16 pin connector To retrieve codes manually use the SCS connector 4 2 2 Manual Code Reading Transmission Codes There are 2 types of manual transmission codes Type 02 see Figure 4 16 and Table 4 6 Type 03 see Figure 4 17 and Ta
528. onds main code will flash pause 1 2 seconds and flash Start codes by again if code is greater than 1 add the flashes together for main code after a 2 0 second pause sub code will now flash in 0 3 second pulses and flash again if code is greater than 1 add the flashes together for sub code When done Clear codes Computer can store up to 3 most recent codes If the SCS connector is shorted and SRS has no stored it s normal to see the SRS light remain on continuously 1995 96 2 5 TL models are different if no DTCs are stored the SRS lamp will flash continuously without pausing 30 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 4 4 3 Code Clearing SRS Codes P To clear DTCs from the SRS unit on all models except SLX and NSX 1 Switch the ignition off 2 Connect the SCS service connector Acura 07PAZ 0010100 to the yellow 2 pin MES connector Figure 4 29 A jumper wire can be used as long as you maintain good contact between the terminals 3 Switch the ignition on The SRS indicator lamp lights for about 6 seconds then switches off 4 Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds of the lamp switching off 5 When the SRS indicator lamp lights again connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds of the lamp switching on 6 When the SRS indicator lamp switches off remove the SCS service connector from the MES connect
529. oolant temperature load speed and other values CALC LOAD Range Min 0 Max 100 Indicates the calculated load by ECM 15 0 to 35 0 Idling e 10 0 to 30 0 Running without load 2 000 rpm CALC VACUUM Range 0 to 80 kPa or 0 to 24 inHg Indicates the PCM calculated intake manifold vacuum which is directly related to engine load The lower the displayed value the greater the engine load CAL ID Range 1111111 to 9999999 Indicates the ECM calibration ID number which is used for service identification CAL LD VAL CAL LD VALUE CALC LOAD Range 0 to 10096 Indicates a PCM calculated relative engine load which is derived by dividing the actual manifold airflow volume by the maximum possible manifold airflow volume A high number indicates a heavy load a low number a lighter load 356 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CALC CLSD THRT IDLE SW IDLE SWITCH Range ON OFF or CLSD OPEN Indicates the position of the idle switch CLSD or at closed throttle typical of a stationary idling engine OPEN or OFF when the throttle is off idle Idle speed control on engines using the IDLE SW parameter are not regulated by the ECM The CALC CLSD parameter is calculated by the ECM based on throttle position sensor input CAM HI TO LO CAM LO TO HI Range 0 to 65535 Indicates a count of the number of camshaft position CMP sensor signal changes as voltage goes from low to high
530. or flashes like this System is normal m adi indicator will blink Key On 1 1 1 1 Pulse i 1 1 No Codes Figure 10 27 suzu SRS Code Type 02a Normal no failure SRS indicator flashes like this Table 10 8 suzu SRS Code Type 02a Pattern Long Short Main code sub code Read codes on SRS indicator lamp With ignition switch off connect SCS service connector OEM 07PAZ 0010100 or jumper wire to the 2 pin service check connector Turn ignition switch on Start codes by Following the procedure in the Clearing SRS Codes section of this manual Procedure includes connecting and disconnecting the SCS service connector or jumper wire to the MES Memory Erase Signal connector several times while monitoring the SRS indicator flashes Clear codes by Switch the ignition off and wait two to three seconds Turn the ignition switch on again The SRS indicator light should come on and go out after about six seconds Continue to monitor the SRS indicator and confirm that it does not come on again for another 30 seconds Turn ignition switch off When done Turn the ignition switch on The SRS indicator light comes on for about six to thirty seconds and goes off Shortly after the time depends on which is confirmed by the self diagnosis system it will indicate the DTC Incase of continuous failure s the DTC s will be indicated repeatedly see Figure 10 25 Incase of intermittent
531. or within 4 seconds The SRS lamp flashes twice to indicate memory has been erased 7 Switch the ignition off and wait ten seconds Figure 4 29 SCS Service Connector Use Acura tool 07PAZ 0010100 or use jumper wire equivalent 4 seconds or Less Connected Disconnected LI LI T 1 SRS indicator lamp 2 MES connector terminals Figure 4 30 585 code clearing 31 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 1996 1998 3 2 TL 1999 2003 3 2 TL 1996 2004 3 5 RL 2001 2003 3 2 CL 2002 2004 RSX 1 Memory Erase Signal MES 2P connector 2 SCS Service connector Acura 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 4 31 Acura SRS MES connector 1 of 2 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Acura 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 4 32 2004 TSX TL SRS code clearing left side of dash 1997 2 2 CL 1997 1999 3 0 CL 1998 1999 2 3 CL 1996 2001 Integra 2001 2004 MDX 1 MES 2P connector 2 SCS Service connector Acura 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 4 33 Acura OBD II SRS MES connector location 2 of 2 32 Chrysler Imports This chapter contains information for testing Chrysler Imports vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Chrysler Import systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission Antilock Brake System ABS Supplemental Restraint System SRS 5 1 Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Chrysler Import testing includes Code Rea
532. ost catalyst O2S and S3 indicates sensor 3 The parameter O2 HEATER refers to that O2S in the B1 S1 position O2 MON O2 MON B1 S2 O2 MON B2 S1 O2 MON B2 S2 Range RICH LEAN Indicates whether a particular O2S senses a rich or lean condition with the engine running in closed loop Should read 421 Data Parameters Engine Parameters RICH when the PCM is shortening the fuel injector pulse width to lean the mixture LEAN when the PCM is lengthening the pulse width to enrich the mixture B1 and B2 refer to banks 1 and 2 Bank 1 is always the bank containing the number 1 cylinder 51 indicates a pre catalyst O2S and S2 indicates a post catalyst O2S The parameter O2 MON refers to the O2S in the B1 S1 position O2B1 S1 CMD O2B1 S2 HTR CMD O2B2 S1 HTR CMD O2B2 S2 HTR CMD Range YES NO Indicates the commanded state of the heater control circuit for oxygen sensors on banks 1 and 2 The read as follows YES when the sensor heater command is on NO when the sensor heater command is off O20EVAP Range actual Indicates that the EVAP purge leak check monitor has competed 025 A FS CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the O2S A FS heater monitor O2S A FS HTR ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the O2S A FS heater monitor 025 A FS MONITOR Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the O2S A FS monitor 025 A FS MONITOR Range NOT AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Indicates the O2S A FS mo
533. ostic test connector known as the data link connector DLC with dedicated pin assignments e standardized location for the DLC visible under the dash on the driver s side e A standardized list of diagnostic trouble codes DTCs The ability of the vehicle system to record a snapshot of operating conditions when an emissions related fault occurs Expanded diagnostic capabilities that record a code whenever a condition occurs that affects vehicle emissions The ability to clear stored codes from vehicle memory with the scan tool A glossary of standard terms acronyms and definitions used for system components In addition SAE has published hundreds of pages defining a standard communications protocol that establishes the hardware software and circuit parameters of OBD II systems Unfortunately the vehicle manufacturers have different interpretations of this protocol As a result the generic OBD II communications scheme used varies depending on the vehicle SAE publishes recommendations not laws but the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and the California Air Resources Board CARB made many SAE recommendations legal requirements which were phased in over a three year period Beginning in 1994 vehicles with a new engine management computer were supposed to comply with OBD II standards For 1995 OBD II systems were to appear on about 40 of the new vehicles sold The government granted waivers for some 1994 95 OBD II
534. ottle position percentage TP V Range Indicates the throttle position voltage FAULT Range Indicates a throttle position sensor fault Range No additional information is available for this parameter TP TPS V Range Indicates the throttle position voltage TPCT V Range Indicates the lowest closed throttle voltage TPS Range Indicates the throttle position percentage TPS V Range Indicates the throttle position voltage TPS 8 Range Indicates throttle position angle in 8 increments read as follows Oindicates a closed throttle 4indicates half open throttle B8indicates a wide open throttle 518 actual 0 to 100 0 0 to 5 0 V YES NO 0 to 100 0 0 to 5 0 V 0 0 to 5 0 V 0 to 100 0 0 to 5 0 V 0 108 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters TR Range actual Indicates the transmission range TR SW A TR SW B TR SW C TR SW P Range HI LO TR SW A B C P Range HI LO INV Indicates the HI high or LO low status of the four inputs A B C P from the transmission range switch to the PCM Hl indicates ignition voltage e LO indicates no voltage e INV indicates an invalid signal The PCM detects the selected gear range by deciphering the combination of the voltage signals The PCM compares the actual voltage combination of the switch signals to a TR switch combination table stored in memory See Table 18 11 for an ex
535. ow IAC STEPS IAC AAC STEPS IDLE AIR CONTRL ISC STEP IVSMSTP DEC MOTOR POS STEPS Range 0 to 125 or 0 to 255 Indicates the position of the idle air control IAC valve as a step count Stepper motor IAC valves have either 125 or 255 positions and readings vary from 0 to 125 or from 0 to 255 e 0 means the motor has moved to its outer limit to close the IAC valve 125 or 255 means the motor has moved to its inner limit to fully open the IAC valve 395 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FAULT IACFault Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM detects a fault in the idle air control IAC system reads YES if a fault is present IACV Range 0 to 100 Indicates the idle air control percentage IACV mS Range not available Indicates the idle air control in milliseconds IAR SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the intake air resonator solenoid valve When the engine RPM is in the mid range the valve is turned ON to decrease air intake noise IASV Range ON OFF Indicates the intake air shutter valve IAT Range 40 to 399 F or 40 to 199 C Indicates the intake air temperature IAT V IAT 1 IAT 2 IAT SENSOR 1 IAT SENSOR 2 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage signal from the IAT sensor which is typically installed in the air cleaner A 5 V reference signal is applied to the sensor resistance decreases as temperature increases IAT F
536. ow when the solenoid is commanded off SHORT TO VOLTS display if the voltage is high when the solenoid is commanded on OK displays if no circuit fault is present INDETERMINATE displays if the control module cannot determine the circuit status or an invalid signal was received 1ST GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module 2 INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the 2 indicator lamp on the instrument panel It should only read ON when the 2 position lamp is lighted 2 POS SWITCH 2ND SELECTED Range ON OFF Indicates whether the contacts to the 2nd gear position switch are closed or open Reads ON when the switch contacts are closed and the vehicle is in 2nd gear 2 3T CCS Range ON OFF Indicates the coast clutch solenoid 2 4 BRK PRS SW Range ON OFF Indicates the 2 4 brake pressure switch 2 4 BRK SOL Range 0 to 100 Indicates the 2 4 brake solenoid 24B Range 0 to 100 Indicates the 2 4 brake solenoid 2ND GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH 2nd PRESSURE SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the 2nd gear pressure switch Reads ON when the transmission is operating in 2nd gear it reads OFF at all other times 489 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters 3 2 DWNSHIFT SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM commanded valve state of the 3 2 downshift solenoid The solenoid commanded state
537. pM UL LLL AE 402 IMTV 96 IMTV IMTV cae AL ee 403 INADVERTENT POWER RELAY ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt Dott 319 INODBNGAOUNOER 22 iden cus lo ot ait cabs cabs ne thu ako ecu iter tales 403 INDICATOR DIMMING RR 320 INDICATORS rec DL D UA dM DNE athe M LM INDLRNG ON OFF INDNRNG ON OFF INDPRNG ON OFF INDRRNG ON OFF INGEAR ttem ile eR eom abite nien eame ON OFF P P INFESW2 ON OFRF i iini it emt e pengoetitene tei e RE Ee i tat INA SWI ON OFF medetur tic ptc eee ic e e Co hte b a ret ve vd INH SW3M ON OFF 403 INFESWA4 ON OFF eee 403 eti RC E ied i e te iier er etit 404 INECGCOOLE TMP 404 iiiter tienen He n ni Ph m ee e ad een ear nd 404 InP Threshold gauge 484 Ini Threshold 2 GAUGE 484 Ini Threshold 3 gauge irte terit te deer t rere d ey T cv eds 484 Ini 4
538. peration the PCM only uses the APP1 sensor input the other two serve as fail safe sensors ACCEL SSR 1 AD V Range 0 0 to 4 98V Indicates the ETCS accelerator sensor fully closed value Number 1 AD ACIS VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the current state of the ACIS Acoustic Control Induction System vacuum switching valve This valve controls the ACV Intake Air Control Valve in response to engine load This increases intake efficiency when the throttle is open 6096 or more and RPM is above 4 700 During this time the IACV is open VSV OFF all other times the IACV is closed VSV ON ACG Control ALT CTRL Range 0 0 to 14 5 V Indicates the calculated output control signal that regulates the charging system rate The PGM FI detects electric power consumption then calculates and controls charging using the generated electric power signal ACGF from During discharge the ON time of the generated electric power signal increases The charging system is at maximum output 14 5 V when the reading is 0 V and minimum output 12 5 V when the reading is battery voltage B The battery charging voltage is controlled in either 12 5V mode or 14 5V mode depending on the electric load conditions 342 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ACG Output Signal E ACG Control Signal 14 5V gt 12 5 Figure 18 2 ACG output signal and ACG control signal ACM Range 0 to 100 Indicates the ECM signal to the ac
539. pes 192 Testing Engine Systems 143 Code Reading Connectors Locations 143 Connecting the scan tool to the vehicle 148 Reading Engine Codes 150 Code Type 08 176 Subaru Vehicle Connection Table 151 Vehicle Connection Diagrams 159 Testing Transmission Systems 180 1987 to 1992 4 Transmission Version 1 181 1989 to 1994 Just ECVT Transmission 183 1990 to 1996 4 Transmission Version 2 181 1990 to 1996 4 Transmission Version 2 History Codes 182 1996 to 2005 Subaru Models with an OBD II connector 184 Code Reading 180 Summit 1989 96 connector locations 34 Summit Wagon 1992 1996 connector locations 34 Supra 1983 1984 connectors 199 SVX 1992 1996 transmission code reading 181 182 connector locations 147 541 T Talon 1990 1994 connector locations 34 1995 1998 connector locations 34 Testing 19 Tiburon 1997 2004 connector locations 78 Toyota Lexus Scion 197 206 1995 and earlier vehicle ID 197 actuator tests 200 airbag SRS system testing 203 antilock brake system ABS testing 202 engine system testing 197 Testing ABS Systems Code Reading Connectors 202 Testing Engine Systems 197 Actuator Tests 200 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 198 Code Sensitivity 199 Data No Codes 199 Manual Code Reading 200 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 203 Reading SRS Codes 203 Testing Transmission Systems 201 Code Reading Connectors 201 Testing ABS Systems 202 transmission system testing 201 vehicle ID
540. plemental Restraint Systems SRS 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 34 1998 2003 Accord 2000 03 S2000 SRS code clearing left side of dash 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 35 2004 S2000 SRS code clearing left side of dash 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 36 2004 Accord SRS code clearing left side of dash 74 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 1 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 2 MES connector Figure 8 37 1997 2001 CR V SRS code clearing left side of dash 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 38 2002 04 CR V SRS code clearing left side of dash 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 39 2001 04 Civic 2003 04 Element SRS code clearing 75 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 7 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 40 2000 04 Insight SRS code clearing left side of dash 1 MES connector 2 SCS service connector Honda 07PAZ 0010100 Figure 8 41 2003 04 Pilot SRS code clearing 76 Hyundai This chapter contains information for testing Hyundai vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Hyundai systems may be available for testing
541. puts from O2S B1 S1 and B2 S1 Trim number prefixes B1 and B2 correlate to banks 1 and 2 Bank 1 is the bank that contains the number 1 cylinder TRIM number suffix S1 indicates a pre catalyst oxygen sensor input while suffix S2 indicates a post catalyst sensor input Values typically range from 20 to 20 with 000 as the midpoint Any number above 0 indicates that the PCM commands a short term rich mixture correction A number below 096 indicates the PCM commands a lean mixture During closed loop operation these numbers should closely follow ST TRIM B1 and ST TRIM B2 If N A displays the PCM is not supported VEH SPEED MPH VEH SPEED KPH Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the PCM calculated vehicle speed based on the vehicle speed sensor VSS signal VPWR V Range variable Indicates the vehicle power VPWR applied to the ECM as voltage Readings vary and do not always equal battery voltage VSS KPH VSS MPH Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the vehicle speed Readings are calculated by the PCM based on input from the vehicle speed sensor VSS or from input from other sensors WARM UPS Range 0 to 255 Shows the number of warm up cycles since a DTC set A valid warm up cycle is when engine coolant temperature ECT is at least 40 F 22 C at startup and reaches at least 160 F 70 for a gas engine or 140 60 for a diesel engine The value resets when DTCs are cleared 464 Data Parameters Hyb
542. r When an actuator test is selected the scan tool commands the ECM to activate it About 5 seconds later the ECM deactivates the actuator and a test completed message displays NOTE All actuator tests except for injector tests must be performed with the key on and engine off KOEO If you select a KOEO test with the engine running a warning screen displays Injector Tests Engine Running Only The injector tests available from the actuator test menu are performed with the key on and engine running KOER and are available on most pre OBD II vehicles The number of injector tests available varies by the number of cylinders and type of fuel injection system a 4 cylinder MPI system has four tests a six cylinder system has six When you select an injector test the scan tool commands the ECM to disable the selected injector About 5 seconds later the ECM stops the test and the injector is returned to operational 79 Isuzu This chapter contains information for testing Isuzu vehicles with the Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software VCS The following Isuzu systems may be available for testing Engine Transmission Antilock Brake System ABS Supplemental Restraint System SRS Transfer Case Body Control Module BCM Instrument Panel Cluster IPC 10 1 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems Isuzu engine and transmission system testing includes Engine And Transmission Code Reading Connectors and Locations on pa
543. r DLC 2 Pins 4 and 12 Figure 8 18 1996 2002 Passport with RWAL system 8 2 4 Code Clearing for 1996 2002 Passport with 4 Wheel ABS P To clear ABS DTCs from a 1996 2002 Passport with 4WAL 1 2 3 With the ignition off jump pins 4 and 12 of the 16 pin DLC Figure 8 19 Switch the ignition on and allow the ABS lamp to flash at least once before proceeding Depress the brake pedal by hand until you hear the solenoid click then release the pedal Repeat eight times within three seconds After the eighth pedal cycle the ABS lamp stops flashing lights for one second then begins flashing code 12 no codes Memory is erased once code 12 flashes 4 times 1 2 Si ee T 1213 BOE 1 DLC 2 Jump wire Figure 8 19 1996 2002 Passport with 4WAL system 65 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 8 3 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Testing Honda SRS includes e SRS Main Menu on page 66 e Manual Code Reading on page 67 Code Clearing on page 71 8 3 1 SRS Main Menu After selecting SRS from the System Selection menu the Main Menu SRS displays Selections vary by model and year The following main menu selections are discussed e Codes and Data Menu Movies Custom Setup and Troubleshooter are discussed in detail in the user s manual for your diagnostic tool Codes and Data Menu When Codes and Data Menu is selected a menu with the follow
544. r Fuel Check Mode 2 The Air Fuel Check lets you monitor the air to fuel ratio by comparing the oxygen sensor 025 signal to the fuel injector control signal P To perform an Air Fuel check 1 Select Air Fuel Check from the Functional Tests menu A test initialization screen displays 2 Start the engine and warm it to normal operating temperature then select to continue 130 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Engine Systems As instructed increase and hold engine speed at 2000 RPM The Exhaust parameter displays Lean when the O2S detects a lean exhaust and Rich when the exhaust is rich The Compensation parameter displays the response sent to the fuel injection system Typically when the O2S feedback signal Exhaust is Lean the fuel injection system is commanded to go rich and the Compensation parameter displays Rich Similarly when the O2S feedback signal Exhaust is Rich the fuel injection system is commanded to go lean and the Compensation parameter displays Lean LED on the scan tool flashes as it receives a signal from the 025 and LED 4 flashes as it receives the signal from the Compensation circuit When both readings are the same and the LEDs flash simultaneously the O2S signal and the fuel injection command are in balance Self Diagnosis Mode 3 Nissan mode 3 is the Auto Code Read selection from the Code Functions menu on the scan tool display see Automatic Code Reading on page 10 Switch Test Mode 4
545. r may not turn on even though the switch is closed Several other switch or sensor signals may prevent the PCM from engaging the A C compressor ACM BATTERY VOLTAGE Range 0 0 to 14 5 V Indicates the battery input voltage supplied to the ACM control module ACMRLY Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the AC main relay ACP Range OPEN CLOSED Indicates the air conditioning pressure switch ACSW Range ON OFF Indicates the air conditioning switch ACT VLV TMNG Range not available Indicates the actual valve timing 341 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ACT VSV ON OFF Range ON OFF Indicates the A C cut status for active test data support ACTUAL CKP Range 0 to 255 Indicates whether the 7X synchronization pulses from the ignition module are being received by the PCM ACTUAL CMP Range 0 to 255 Indicates a count of the signal pulses to the PCM from the camshaft position CMP sensor The count changes continually as the engine runs ACCEL POS1 96 ACCEL POS2 APP APP1 APP2 APP3 APP SENSOR 1 APP SENSOR 2 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the accelerator pedal position APP as a percentage it normally reads 0 atidle 100 at wide open throttle WOT The value should increase smoothly as the accelerator pedal moves from closed to full throttle Some models use three APP sensors they are located in a module at the base of the accelerator pedal During normal o
546. r testing Engine Transmission Antilock Brake System ABS Airbag SRS 41 Testing Engine Systems Acura engine system testing includes Code Reading Connectors and Locations on page 12 ECM Locations 1986 to 1990 with ECM LED on page 14 SCS mode on page 16 Code Type on page 17 Manual Code Reading Engine Codes on page 17 Multiple Codes on page 18 4 1 1 Code Reading Connectors and Locations Refer to Figure 4 1 for common diagnostic connector locations for Acura vehicles Connector configurations are shown in Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 and Figure 4 4 Figure 4 1 Common connector locations 12 Figure 4 3 3 pin DLC Refer Table 4 1 to determine which adapter to use to test a specific model Au B uu SSAx um ER ESAE DEAS Figure 4 2 OBD II data link connector DLC Table 4 1 Common connector locations Figure 4 4 2 pin service check signal SCS connector Testing Engine Systems VEHICLE YEAR SCS 2 PIN DLC 3 PIN DLC 16 PIN 2 2 CL 1997 3 57 2 3 CL 1998 99 3 5 2 5 TL 1995 98 2 5 3 0 CL 1997 99 3 5 32 CL 2001 02 5 2003 7 1996 98 2 5r 3 2 TL 1999 2002 5 2003 7 3 5 RL 1996 2003 2 5 1992 95 1 1 1996 2001 1 4 MDX 2001 04 7 NSX 1995 2003 1 3 RSX 2002 04 7 SLX 1996 99 6 3 2 TL 2004 6 NSX 2004 2 3 TSX 2004 6 3 5 RL 2004 3 5 Remove a
547. rameters BBP SENSOR Range variable Indicates the brake boost pressure sensor booster pressure signal expressed as kilo Pascal kPa millimeters of mercury mmHg or inches of mercury inHg 352 Data Parameters Engine Parameters BLM BLOCK LEARN Range 0 to 255 Indicates whether the ECM is commanding a rich or a lean mixture The block learn multiplier BLM number represents the operation and long term correction of the fuel metering of some fuel injected engines Like INTEGRATR on page 404 the BLM number can range from 0 to 255 The midpoint is 128 A BLM number higher than 128 indicates that the ECM commanded a long term rich mixture correction A BLM number lower than 128 indicates that the ECM is commanding a lean mixture Figure 18 3 The BLM number follows the integrator number and makes long term corrections to fuel metering in response to short term integrator changes For example integrator and block learn may both start at 128 The integrator number may move up toward or above 130 At that point the BLM number may move up to 129 The integrator then returns to 128 to indicate that it is controlling fuel metering at the midpoint of an overall richer operating condition A similar action occurs when the ECM commands a leaner mixture and the numbers move downward Refer to INTEGRATR on page 404 for more information 255 13 194 Rich 64 Lean 128 Figure 18 3 Rich lean correction from ba
548. ration is limited If the fault affects the front ABS the rear ABS operates with the front brakes in a non ABS condition If the fault affects the rear ABS or other critical parts of the system ABS is completely disabled Brakes at all four wheels operate in a basic non ABS mode If the reading does not match the condition of the warning lamp on the instrument panel a lamp circuit fault may exist ABS SRI STATUS Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ABS service repair lamp reads ON when ABS service is needed ABS STOP Range YES NO Indicates whether the ABS has been activated during the current braking event It only reads YES when ABS is activated during braking and reads NO at all other times ABS VOLT Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the battery positive voltage 278 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters ABSLAMP ABS WARN LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the ABS warning light status ON indicates the warning light is on e OFF indicates the warning light is off ACC PRESS SENS ACC PRESS SENS 1 V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the accumulator pressure sensor Specified value is 3 2 to 4 0 V ACC SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the accumulator pressure sensor open status NORMAL when in normal condition ACCELERATOR Range 0 to 128 Indicates the accelerator opening angle 096 when the accelerator pedal is released ACCEL POS SIG Range 0 to 10096 Indicates throttle po
549. ray Remove the DLC cover Remove the beverage cover 55 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 8 1 2 SCS mode Purpose of SCS Service Check Signal mode Enables a diagnostic mode Flash out DTCs stored for the PCM ABS TCS and SRS modules Code clearing on certain ABS systems Bypass two trip detection mode for II drive cycles NOTE Certain OBD II vehicles use a separate 2 pin SCS connector Other OBD II models use a SCS pin in the 16 Pin DLC Both function the same way For specific applications refer to Code Reading Connectors and Locations Models with a separate 2 pin SCS connector Select How to get codes from the codes menu then follow the on screen instructions Models with the SCS in the 16 pin DLC The scan tool grounds the appropriate pin of the DLC which enables the SCS mode Follow the on screen instructions Two trip detection bypass Use SCS mode to bypass ODB two trip detection and re create certain DTCs during diagnosis Some codes require a back driving sequence two road tests where the fault must occur in a similar operating condition NOTE On ODB II vehicles with the separate 2 pin SCS connector jumper the 2 pin connector for the SCS mode functions A DTC can be captured in one driving event by connecting the Scanner and selecting SCS mode from the main menu on applicable vehicles For scan data usage during SCS mode you can manually
550. rdous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury to the operator or to bystanders Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in moderate or minor injury to the operator or to bystanders Safety Information Important Safety Instructions Safety messages contain three different type styles Normal type states the hazard Bold type states how to avoid the hazard e type states the possible consequences of not avoiding the hazard An icon when present gives a graphical description of the potential hazard Example Risk of unexpected vehicle movement Block drive wheels before performing a test with engine running A moving vehicle can cause injury Important Safety Instructions For a complete list of safety messages refer to the accompanying safety manual SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Table of Contents validum iii Safety Message iii Important Safety iv Table of Contents e eee ree cerei eset eu IE v Chapter 1 Using This Manual eren eren rene nenne nnn 1 1 Bold
551. re monitor status MISFIRE RPM Range Min 0 rpm Max 6 375 rpm Indicates engine RPM for first misfire range 0 rpm Misfire O MISFIRE RPM Range 0 to 6375 Indicates the engine RPM at the time the last misfire code set MISFIRE TEST Range COMPL INCMPL Indicates check mode result for misfire monitor MISS HISTORY 1 MISS HISTORY 2 MISS HISTORY 3 MISS HISTORY 4 MISS HISTORY 5 MISS HISTORY 6 MISS HISTORY 7 MISS HISTORY 8 Range 0 to 65535 Indicates the total number of misfires detected on each cylinder These parameters do not update or show any activity until a misfire DTC P0300 becomes active then they update every 200 cylinder firing events MMODE Range ON OFF Indicates whether the transmission is in Manual mode pertains to the Slap Shift ON when manual shift gate position neutral e OFF when in position other than the above MOT BATT TEMP 9 Range 30 to 60 C or 22 to 140 F Indicates the motor battery or battery module temperature MOT ECM SIGNAL Range OK NG Indicates the state of the motor ECM signal This shows the status of the communication link between the FI ECM and the MOT ECM MOTOR DUTY Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the duty cycle of the TACM output signal to the motor 417 Data Parameters Engine Parameters MOTOR POS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates a feedback signal from the idle speed control motor position sensor on vehicles with a SOHC Mitsubishi
552. red fuel level input from the fuel pump driver module A typical reading is 0 027 V values above 0 050 V indicate high resistance CAT CMPL Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE Indicates the catalyst monitor status CAT MON TEMP CAT MONITOR CONDITION CAT MONITOR CONDITION B1 CAT MONITOR CONDITION B2 Range OK NG Indicates the catalytic monitoring system temperature condition which indicates the capability to detect catalytic system deterioration CAT ENA Range UNABLE ENABLE Indicates the catalyst monitor status CAT MONITOR COMPONENT MONITOR EVAP MONITOR FUEL SYS MONITOR MISFIRE MONITOR O2S A FS MONITOR SEC AIR MONITOR Range COMPLETE INCOMPLETE or AVAILABLE NOT AVAILABLE These parameters are part of the readiness monitors used to determine if the OBD II self diagnostics test has been run and or the resulting status of the test 358 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CAT OT FC 1 CAT OT FC 2 CAT OT FC CYL 3 CAT OT FC 4 CAT OT 5 CAT 6 CAT 7 CAT FC 8 Range OFF ON Indicates if Catalyst Over Temp protection Fuel Cut for that cylinder is active reads ON CAT TEMP B1S1 CAT TMP 151 CAT TEMP B1S2 CAT TMP B1S2 CAT TEMP 2521 CAT TMP B2S1 CAT TEMP B2S2 CAT TMP B2S2 Range 40 to 11 756 3 F or 40 to 6 513 5 Indicates the calculated temperature of the catalyst substrate for the indicated cylinder bank or oxygen sen
553. ressure calculated by the ECM AIR PUMP Range Indicates secondary air injection pump amperage The reading is based on the electric current sensor signal AIR PUMP Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the AIR pump relay control circuit it reads ON when the PCM grounds the AIR pump relay control circuit OFF when the PCM disables the ground circuit AIR PUMP RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the AIR pump relay it reads ON when the pump motor is on AIR PUMP SIGNAL Range LOW HIGH Indicates the output voltage of the AIR pump motor it reads LOW when the pump is on AIR SWITCH SOL Range PORT CONV Indicates the ECM command to the air injection switching solenoid it reads PORT when the solenoid has been commanded to move the valve to direct air to the exhaust ports or manifold CONV when the solenoid has been commanded to move the valve to direct air downstream to the catalytic converter 345 Data Parameters Engine Parameters AIR TEMP 9 IAT 9 IAT 1 IAT 2 IAT SENSOR 1 IAT SENSOR 2 INTAKE AIR 9 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 Range variable Indicates the intake air temperature IAT in degrees Degree readings are PCM calculated from the IAT sensor 1 or 2 signal Typical ranges are 58 F to 360 F 50 C 185 C Readings should be low on a cold engine and rise as the engine warms up AIRFLOW Hz Range 0 to 1600 Hz
554. reten eer te rer teet eee te n eri EE ERE e t DS 416 MAP BARQO SOL et iet gi i eet ye P OD e Meta ete e ee rt d dg e eds 416 MAP BARQO SOEENOID data ERE TE ER HERE HERE Ree eee 416 MAP BARO CHQg ER Pre ici ere EP EHE PW TR UNE E Pe MEE No ee M ee 416 MAP BARG M eerte eee OR Atrei taa bee D rs 416 FAULT 416 MAS CYE PRESS JA iiit inneren rre eere Ya P Re m n ia nien RE ER 287 MAS CYL PRESS 2 287 iiss Rite ERR PE E ER PED 287 MAS CYL BPRS2 eiit tee eve t i Eg V EU P d e etae recen v He co a a e iva edes 287 MAT 416 MAX BAT BLOCK te haber col aire VEO CY Ne TURO VE nea eis 470 MAX ENG SBBARBM trei rte mre ope ERR Rad Ee Per ere rers 416 T 416 MG ta Rieti RUDI RE Co ri e atat inerte ERIS 287 jer A 287 MGM STANDBY eere ree e e n EFE HE Pete rei cages 417 Nim iere ten eere cete Ite d y IE d E CI Y QUA ENSE WEE Oe He 472 MEAS SSC A MEAS SSD A MEAS S
555. rid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters B VOLTS Range Constant Auxiliary battery voltage 3 V CODES Range Min 0 V Max 65 535 V Min 0 Max 127 Indicates the number of emission related powertrain DTCs A C CONSMPT PWR KW Range Indicates the A C consumption power AUX BATT V Range Equivalent to auxiliary battery voltage ACCEL DEG Range Min 0 kW Max 5 Kw 0 to 25 4V Min 0 Max 100 Indicates accelerator pedal depressed angle accelerator pedal depressed Changes with accelerator pedal pressure ACCEL POS1 Range Min 0 Max 100 Indicates the Number 1 accelerator pedal position sensor Changes as accelerator pedal moves ACCEL POS2 Range Min 0 Max 100 Indicates the Number 2 accelerator pedal position sensor Changes as accelerator pedal moves AMBIENT TEMP Range Min 40 C Max 215 C Indicates the ambient air temperature with Power switch ON IG Same as ambient air temperature BATT INSIDE AIR Range 327 68 C to 327 67 C Indicates the temperature of ambient intake air to battery pack Undisturbed for 1 day Same as ambient air temperature BATTERY BLOCK MAX V Range Indicates the battery block maximum voltage SOC 55 to 60 23 V or less BATTERY BLOCK MINIMUM V Range Indicates the battery block minimum voltage SOC 50 to 60 12 V or more
556. ring the entire key on drive cycle P S PRESS SW PSP SW Range ON OFF Indicates the power steering pressure switch PARK NEU POS ParkNeuPos Range P N or R DL Indicates whether an automatic transmission is in park or neutral or in one of the drive ranges It should read e P N if the transmission is in either park or neutral e R DL if the transmission is in any forward gear or reverse The park neutral switch is closed in park or neutral and open in any forward gear or reverse PART LOAD Range not available Indicates part load Monitors the 25 and it will set a code Rich or Lean PCM IN VTD FAIL Range YES NO Indicates the ECM received a good password from the passlock module the vehicle has started and a failure has occurred The ECM continues to enable fuel 424 Data Parameters Engine Parameters PCM RESET Range YES NO Indicates the internal PCM reset status it reads YES only when an internal PCM reset occurred and NO under normal operating conditions PDSW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the variable capacity A C compressor pressure switch PFINH Range LOW HIGH Indicates the status of the output voltage level of the PFINH line PNP Range ON OFF Indicates the clutch pedal position switch neutral switch circuit status PNP SWITCH Range P N GEAR Indicates the status of the park neutral position PNP switch on an automatic transmission With the shift lever is in or
557. rn to Codes and Data If this happens repeat code clearing 51 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems 7 1 4 Field Service Functional Tests NOTE Operations described in this section are not available all tool platforms The Field Service functional test is available for most 1980 and later Geo models with General Motors control systems IMPORTANT Do not enter Field Service mode while driving a vehicle ECM changes to ignition timing fuel delivery and other engine functions may affect engine operation and vehicle control During Field Service the VCS grounds diagnostic pin B in the ALDL connector The ECM does not transmit data in this mode and new trouble codes cannot set You can use Field Service to check or adjust ignition timing or the idle minimum air rate on some models With the key on and the engine off the instrument panel Check Engine lamp flashes stored trouble codes if any are present or code 12 if no codes are present With the key on and the engine off the ECM also energizes all solenoids You can use Field Service mode to test solenoid operation Field Service mode works differently depending on the engine e With a carbureted engine running the Check Engine lamp stops flashing code 12 and new trouble codes cannot be set The ECM also sets ignition timing to a fixed degree of advance which lets you check and adjust timing You also can use the Field Service mode for a system per
558. rol solenoid valve A line pressure solenoid valve output current 404 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ISOLT3 Range 0 8 to 0 0 A Indicates pressure control solenoid valve B secondary pressure solenoid valve output current ISTPIM Range not available Indicates whether the ECM is in the IACV step motor inspection mode IVS Range IDLE OFF IDLE Indicates the idle validation switch status IVS Range YES NO Indicates the idle validation switch IVS state which verifies reads YES that the accelerator pedal AP is in the idle position on diesel powertrain control systems The IVS provides a check on the AP sensor The MIL lights if the IVS signal does not match the AP sensor signal A faulty IVS or AP sensor allows the engine to run at low idle speed only IXREF IXREF QXREF Range not available Indicates the status of the learned ICMD at idle KAMFUSE Range FAULT OK Indicates the status of the keep alive memory power KNOCK Range YES NO Indicates whether the ECM is actively making adjustments to compensate for spark knock This value is based on knock sensor KS signal it reads YES if the sensor indicates knock if the sensor does not indicates engine knock KNOCK ADVANCE gt KNOCK CTRL Range not available Indicates the corrected spark advance angle the ECM is applying to compensate for knock KNOCK CRRT Range 64 Max 1 984 CA Indicates the correction learning value b
559. roseconds MIL DIST Range actual distance Indicates how far the vehicle has traveled with the MIL turned on MIL ON RUN DIST Range Min 0 mile Max 110 950 mile or Min 0 km Max 65 535 km Indicates the distance the vehicle has been driven since the malfunction indicator lamp MIL was switched on by the PCM The display reads 0 unless the MIL has been commanded on Once activated the accumulated kilometers or miles display When the PCM memory is cleared or if 40 warm up cycles occur without the MIL setting conditions reoccurring the display resets MIL ON RUN TIME Range 0 to 65 535 sec Indicates the time lapse since the MIL was triggered by a DTC being set MIL ON RUN TIME MIN Range Min 0 minute Max 65 535 minutes Indicates running time from MIL command ON after DTC detected 415 Data Parameters Engine Parameters MIL REQ by DTC Range YES NO Indicates YES only when the MIL is requested as a result of an A or B type DTC If the MIL is illuminated for another reason such as transmission DTCs NO will display DTC types A and B are emissions related to DTCs that will update freeze frame failure records The difference between type A and type B are as follows Atype A DTC will illuminate the MIL when the diagnostic runs and fails Atype B DTC will illuminate the MIL on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails MILFault Range ON OFF Indicates whether a fault
560. rs A F RATIO A F 1 Range 0 0 to 99 9 Indicates the calculated desired air fuel ratio that the PCM expects during a closed loop operation on some fuel injected vehicles This is not a measured value but the calculated value of the ratio that the PCM wants to be delivered based on sensor input signals Although the measurement range is from 0 0 to 99 9 the displayed value should be near 14 7 in most cases Lower numbers indicate a rich ratio commanded for startup Higher numbers indicate a leaner ratio A F RATIO Range Min 0 Max 1 999 Indicates the air fuel ratio Typical readings range from 0 8 to 1 2 with the engine running at idle A F SSR TEST B1 Range COMPL INCMPL Indicates check mode result for air fuel ratio sensor bank 1 A F SSR TEST B1 Range COMPL INCOMPL Indicates the check mode test results for the bank 1 air fuel ratio sensor A F SSR TEST B2 Range COMPL INCOMPL Indicates the check mode test results for the bank 2 air fuel ratio sensor A F SSR TEST B2 Range COMPL INCMPL Indicates check mode result for air fuel ratio sensor bank 2 A T D SWITCH A T D SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T D position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the D position A T D3 SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T D3 position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the D3 position A T D4 SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates
561. rt term fuel trim for each oxygen sensor O2S used For example SHRTFT11 shows the signal for bank 1 sensor 1 upstream and SHRTFT12 is the signal for bank 1 sensor 2 downstream Displayed values represent the operation and short term correction of the fuel mixture with 096 as the midpoint Values above zero indicate a rich mixture correction command from the PCM Values below zero indicate a lean mixture command from the PCM SPARKADV 9 Range 64 to 63 5 Indicates the ignition spark advance applied to cylinder 1 by the PCM The PCM calculates the advance required based on input from various sensors The displayed value is in addition to base timing A positive value indicates the PCM is commanding timing advance a negative value indicates the PCM is commanding timing retard ST TRIM 1 96 ST TRIM 2 96 ST TRIM Range 20 to 20 Indicates the operation and short term correction of fuel metering The ST TRIM number range from 20 to 20 with 000 as the midpoint A number above zero percent indicates that the PCM has commanded a short term rich mixture correction A number below zero percent indicates the PCM is commanding a lean mixture The ST TRIM numbers lead the long term trim LT TRIM numbers When a pattern or trend of short term corrections to fuel metering occur LT TRIM responds with a similar correction Compare ST TRIM to injector on time A number above zero indicates increased on time while those be
562. run the learn program test drive the vehicle on a level road decelerate with the throttle fully closed from an engine speed of 5000 rpm to 3000 rpm with the 1st gear a t m t PURGE CUT SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the canister drain cut valve control signal PURGE CUT VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command for the vacuum switching valve VSV that closes the evaporative emissions EVAP purge valve If the EVAP system operates properly ON means the system has stopped purging PURGE DENSITY Range 50 to 350 Displays the evaporative purge density during system operation Normal range is 40 to 0 at idle 426 Data Parameters Engine Parameters PURGE DUTY Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the evaporative emission canister purge valve duty cycle PURGE FLOW Range 0 to 102 4 Indicates the presence of purge flow from the canister to the engine Percent reading should increase as purge flow increases PURGE VOL STPS Range 0 to 65 Indicates the position of the purge volume control valve motor as a step count The valve regulates the amount of airflow through the EVAP canister during purge As the stepper motor count increases canister airflow increases During heavy load expect a high stepper motor count during warm idle expect a low count QCKMIL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the quick MIL If two trip or driving cycle is canceled then the MIL turns on and a DTC is stored once failure is
563. running IGNITION SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the ignition switch ON when the switch is on the engine is running and not cranking OFF when the switch is in any position other than run IGRTNE V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the signal voltage on the IGRTNE circuit IGRTNI V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the signal voltage on the IGRTNI circuit ILLUMINAT Range 0 to 100 Indicates the dimming control command as a percentage IMA V Range 0 08 to 4 92 V Indicates the status of the idle mixture adjuster volts This is a variable resistor that controls the idle mixture IMA OUTPUT kw Range not available Indicates the Integrated Motor Assist IMA output current the ECM requests of the Motor Control Module MCM for assist or regeneration 399 Data Parameters Engine Parameters IMA REQUEST kW Range not available Indicates the target value which the ECM requests of the motor control module for assist or regeneration IMA STANDBY Range YES NO Indicates the status of the Integrated Motor Assist IMA standby status Reads NO if the IMA cannot assist the engine and reads YES at all other times IMA TORQUE Range 15 to 15 kgfm or 147 to 147 N m Indicates the status of the Intergraded Motor Assist IMA motor torque IMMOBILIZER Range BAN RUN Indicates the status of the immobilizer system BAN the immobilizer module prevents ECM from starting the engine RUN
564. s e Connect the MULTI 1 adapter as shown in Figure 7 11 1 Diagnostic connector 701 pink wire and black white wire 2 Diagnostic connector 705 black wire and pink black wire 3 Black 4 White 5 Green 6 Steering column 7 MULTI 1 adapter Figure 7 11 1992 94 1 0L Metro transmission connector and adapter 48 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems P To read 1992 Prizm with 4AGE and 1993 95 Prizm with 7AFE transmission codes e Connect the TOY 1 adapter to the connector shown in Figure 7 12 1 Connector 2 TOY 1 adapter Figure 7 12 1992 Prizm with 4AGE and 1993 95 Prizm with 7AFE transmission P To read 1990 95 Tracker Kelsey Hayes RWAL ABS codes 1 Locate the connector under the dash left of the steering column near the fuse box 2 Turn the key on with the engine off 3 Release the parking brake and jump pins 3 and 5 Figure 7 13 for two seconds then remove the wire to flash codes Figure 7 13 1990 95 Tracker ABS connector jump pins Manual Code Reading Several different types of manual code display are used for Geo models Type 01 engine codes see Figure 7 14 and Table 7 1 Type 09 engine codes see Figure 7 15 and Table 7 2 Type 01 transmission codes see Figure 7 16 and Table 7 3 Type 09 transmission codes see Figure 7 17 and Table 7 4 ABS codes see Figure 7 18 49 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems
565. s 50 58 F Open or B short in sensor circuit e Ifthe value is 205 C 401 F GND short in sensor circuit NUMBER OF BATT BLOCK Range Min 0 Max 255 Indicates the number of battery blocks always 14 OBD CERT Range 2232 0802 Indicates compliance regulation OBD2 CARB POWER RGST W Range Min 0 W Max 320 000 W Indicates the engine power output request value in Watts PWR RESOURCE VB V Range Min 0 V Max 510 V Indicates the HV battery voltage READY light ON and P position 150 to 300 V PWR RESOURCE IB AMP Range Min 256 Max 254 A Indicates the HV battery current RAISING PRES RATIO 96 Range Min 096 Max 10096 Indicates the boost ratio the pre boost voltage and post boost voltage are equal 0 to 1096 REGEN EXEC TORQ N m Range Min 0 Nm Max 186 Nm Indicates regenerative brake execution torque REGEN REQUEST TORQ N m Range Min 0 Nm Max 186 Nm Indicates regenerative brake request torque Vehicle speed 30 km h 19 mph and master cylinder hydraulic pressure 200 Nm Changes with brake pedal pressure 470 Data Parameters Hybrid HV ECU and Battery System Parameters S SHIFT SENSOR V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the output voltage of the shift position sensor sub Selector lever in home position 2 0 to 3 0 V Shifting into position 4 0 to 4 8 V Shifting into B or D position 0 2 to 1 0 V SBLW RQST Range ON OFF
566. s compensation factors 459 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters for pressure and temperature are also used in the calculation A high number indicates a heavy load a low number a lighter load LONG FT3 LONG FT2 LONG FT1 LONG FT4 Range 100 to 99 2296 Indicates the long term fuel trim FT for each of the fuel banks on the engine Displayed values represent the operation and long term correction of the fuel mixture on the vehicle with 096 as the midpoint Numbers above zero indicate the PCM is commanding a long term rich mixture correction which increases fuel injector duration Numbers below zero indicate the PCM is commanding a lean mixture which decreases fuel injector duration A reading of 10096 indicates the maximum lean mixture and 99 22 indicates the maximum rich mixture The LONG FT numbers follow short term trim SHRTFT numbers to make long term fuel metering corrections in response to a pattern of short term corrections LT TRIM B1 LT TRIM B2 Range 25 to 25 Indicates the operation and long term correction of the fuel mixture for bank 1 and bank 2 The midpoint of the range is 0 Numbers above zero indicate the PCM is commanding a rich fuel mixture correction Numbers below zero indicate the PCM is commanding a lean fuel mixture correction The LT TRIM numbers follow the short term trim ST TRIM numbers to make long term fuel metering corrections in response to a pattern of shor
567. s DTCs SLIP DES Range not available Indicates the desired torque converter slip in rpm SLN SOLENOID Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command status for the modulated accumulator back pressure solenoid which assures smooth shifting Reads ON when the solenoid is energized SLT SOLENOID Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command status for the SLT solenoid which modulates main line pressure Reads ON when the solenoid is energized SLU SOLENOID Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the torque converter clutch TCC Reads ON or YES when the ECM commands the TCC to engage and OFF or NO when the TCC is commanded off SNOW MODE INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command status for the Snow Mode indicator lamp on the instrument panel it should read ON when the lamp is on SNOW MODE SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the snow mode switch on the instrument panel it should read ON when the switch is on SOL SUPPLY V Range variable Indicates the status of the supply voltage to the solenoid valves SPARK ADV Range actual Indicates the spark advance in degrees 512 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters SPEED RATIO Range 0 00 1 to 8 00 1 Indicates the ratio of engine speed to transmission speed This value is used by the TCM to estimate gear ratios SS MODE SWITCH SS MODE SWT Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the sequential sportshift mode switch It reads ON when t
568. s ON if the door is unlocked with the switch reads OFF at all other times DOOR SW AS DOOR SW DR Range ON OFF Indicates the door switch signal status for the driver DR and passenger AS doors Door Sw LF Door Sw LR Door Sw RF Door Sw RR Range ON OFF indicates the status of the door switch for the left front LF left rear LR right front RF and right rear RR doors Reads ON when the indicated door is open and OFF when closed DOOR SW RR Range Not Available Indicates the door switch signal status for the rear door This Nissan parameter displays even on models without a rear door with remote release Door Unlock Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the electric lock unlock switch Reads ON when the switch is pressed to unlock the doors and reads OFF at all other times Down Door Key Up Door Key Range ON OFF Displays the power window settings Read on if the system is active reads OFF when disabled When active all of the power windows go down or up if the driver door key is held in the lock position for 1 5 seconds DRIVER LR DOOR AJAR SW D Door Warning Sw PASS RR DOOR AJAR SW Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the applicable door reads OFF when the door is fully closed and reads ON when the door is open or ajar Driver PSD Sw Pass PSD Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the driver and passenger power slide door main switches Reads ON when the switch is activated to open the door
569. s from the flashing LED The following condition apply to testing these vehicles Both the instrument panel lamp and LED remain active as long as the ignition is on There is no memory so trouble codes are lost if the key is switched off Only one code displays at a time repair and road test until all problems are corrected Ifthe LED does not flash codes and the panel lamp is on check the power supply circuit 185 Subaru Testing ABS Systems 1 Right front seat 2 LED Figure 15 49 1990 92 Legacy and 1992 97 SVX ABS LED location 1993 94 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon P To retrieve trouble codes 1 Remove the lower trim panel from the driver side front pillar or kick panel 2 Next switch the ignition on 3 Ground the ABS Check connector terminal L Figure 15 50 4 Read the trouble codes on the ABS warning lamp Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 The following condition apply to testing these vehicles Code 11 displays first then other stored codes beginning with the most recent The code display repeats for up to five minutes there no codes in memory only code 11 displays P To clear code memory 1 Disconnect the ABS Check connector terminal L from ground Figure 15 50 2 Connectterminal L to ground for at least 0 05 second and then disconnect it 3 Repeat step 2 an additional two times 3 times total within twelve seconds 1 Terminal K 2 Terminal L Figure 15 50 1993 94
570. s the driver s airbag resistance to ground D_PReTNR Ohms Range 0 to 22 50 Indicates the driver s seat belt pretensioner resistance DAB PAB Range FIRE NO FIRE Indicates the deployment status of the driver airbag DAB and the passenger airbag PAB It normally reads NO FIRE a FIRE reading means the airbag was deployed DEPLOYMENTS Range 0 1 Indicates a count of the number of times the airbags have been deployed DR_PTENS Ohms Range 0 to 22 50 Indicates the driver s seat belt retractor pretensioner resistance DRV IMPACT ID Range 01 to 99 Indicates the driver SIS ID a 2 digit number This information is sent to the SDM when the ignition first turns on DRVR BELT PASS BELT Range BUCKLED UNBUCKLED Indicates the status of the driver DRVR and passenger PASS seat belts 294 Data Parameters DS AB Ohms Range Indicates the driver s airbag resistance DSBELTR Ohms Range Indicates the driver s seat belt retractor pretensioner circuit resistance DTC CNT Range Indicates the number of trouble codes set EXTXRSH Range Indicates the external crash sensor test voltage IGN V Range Indicates the RCM ignition voltage LAMP SRS LAMP Range Airbag SRS Parameters 0 to 22 50 0 to 22 50 not available 0 0 to 17 0 V 0 0 to 17 0 V ON OFF Indicates the PCM command status to the Airbag or SRS lamp on the instrument panel OCS Range Indicates the occupa
571. s the position of the courtesy dome lamp override switch Reads ON only when the switch is activated which indicates a BCM to override the normal interior lamp activation inputs and deactivate the interior lighting Interior Light ON Unlock Range ON OFF Displays the remote wireless entry system setting for the interior lamps Reads ON and the interior lights illuminate when the doors are unlocked with the remote When OFF the interior lights do not illuminate when the doors are unlocked Key Cyl Lock Sw KEY CYL LK SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the door key switch reads ON when locking the doors with a key Key Cyl Unlock Sw KEY CYL UN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the door key switch reads ON when unlocking the doors with a key KEY IN IGNITION Range YES NO Key Insert On Sw Key Unlock Warn Sw Range ON OFF Indicates whether the ignition key is inserted into the ignition switch Reads YES or ON with key in the ignition switch NO or OFF when there is no key in the ignition switch KEY ON SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the key switch Keyless Keep Lock Keyless Keep Unlock Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the keep lock unlock feature of the keyless entry system Reads ON only when both the lock unlock buttons on the remote transmitter are pressed and held Keyless Lock Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the lock button on the keyless entry remote transmitter Reads ON only
572. s the switch is closed or the ECM has been commanded to turn on the when all other conditions permit Refer to CLUTCH on page 335 for compressor clutch feedback signal information A C SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the air conditioning switch A C SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the air conditioning switch it reads ON when the air conditioning switch is on and all other in series switches are closed OFF when any series switch in the air conditioning circuit is open A C SWITCH Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the air conditioning switch The FI computer activates the compressor when a driver request for A C ECU is received While the compressor is operated the engine load correction is performed 336 Data Parameters Engine Parameters A C TEMP S V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the air conditioner evaporator temperature sensor output voltage A C TEMP S Range variable Indicates the ECM calculated air conditioner evaporator temperature A F ADJ B1 A F ADJ B2 Range 0 330 to 0 330 Indicates the correction of factor stored in ECM The factor is calculated from the difference between the stored target air fuel ratio and the air fuel ratio calculated from A F sensor 1 A F ALPHA B1 A F ALPHA B2 Range 50 to 150 Indicates the mean value of the air fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle A F LEARNED Range YES NO Indicates whether the bloc
573. s with the reading INTAKE AIR Range variable or Indicates the temperature of the intake air The intake air temperature IAT sensor is a thermistor typically installed in the air cleaner A 5 volt reference is applied to the sensor As temperature increases sensor resistance decreases providing the voltage signal to the PCM The PCM converts the sensor voltage to temperature readings The engine control module uses the temperature parameter to control the amount of injected fuel based on the density of the incoming air LOAD Range 0 to 100 Indicates the relative engine load The PCM calculates this value by dividing the actual manifold airflow volume by the maximum possible manifold airflow volume A high number indicates a heavy load a low number a lighter load LOAD ABS Range 0 to 25700 Indicates the pumping efficiency of the engine expressed as a percentage The PCM calculates this value based on the mass of the air entering the cylinders on the intake stroke High numbers indicate heavy loads low numbers indicate lighter loads Readings reflect the volumetric efficiency of the engine at wide open throttle LOAD PCT Range 0 to 100 Indicates the relative engine load The value is determined by dividing the actual manifold airflow volume by the maximum possible manifold airflow volume for gas engines Actual fuel flow is substituted for manifold airflow volume for diesel engines For all engine
574. scan tool To clear codes 1 Select Clear Codes A key verification screen displays Make sure the ignition is switched on 2 Select to continue and a code clearing confirmation screen displays 3 Select to clear ABS codes The DTCs Cleared screen displays 4 Select to exit Manual Code Reading There are several types of Honda SRS codes 03 see Figure 8 20 and Table 8 11 on page 68 Type 06 see Figure 8 21 and Table 8 12 on page 68 Type 06 with a continuous failure see Figure 8 22 and Table 8 13 on page 69 Type 06 with an intermittent failure see Figure 8 23 and Table 8 14 on page 69 Type 06 with no failure see Figure 8 24 and Table 8 15 on page 70 07 see Figure 8 25 and Table 8 16 on page 70 67 Honda Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 1 Sec 0 4 Sec V 1 2 Sec p Sec 1 1 1 12 3 1 3 1 12 5 urere ME c EL p fia VIETATA 1Code 12 1 Code23 1 13 1 1 Code 25 1 1 1 1 1 1 repeats repeats repeats i 1 repeats 13 3times 3times 1 i 3 times 1 1 1 1 I 4 Current Codes 14 History Codes Figure 8 20 Honda SRS Code Type 03 Table 8 11 Honda SRS Code Type 03 Pattern 10s and 1s Read codes on SRS warning lamp With key switch off connect terminals 13 and 4 on the OBD II 16 pin DLC Figure 8 26 Turn ignition switch to the ON position Clearing codes Clearing codes can only be done
575. se midpoint 0 Depending on the vehicle block learn is stored in either volatile or nonvolatile ECM memory If BLM is stored in volatile memory the values are erased when the engine is turned off and returned to 128 when the engine is restarted If BLM is stored in nonvolatile memory the values are retained when the engine is turned off and returned to the stored values when the engine is started Disconnecting the battery or removing the ECM fuse erases nonvolatile memory and returns BLM value to 128 Compare BLM numbers to injector on time Numbers above 128 indicate increased on time while numbers below 128 indicate decreased on time BLM corrections operate only in closed loop In open loop the number goes to a fixed value usually 128 BLM CELL Range 0 to 15 Indicates which block learn multiplier BLM cell the engine is operating in at the moment The BLM is divided into 16 cells numbered from 0 to 15 The cells are arranged in a theoretical grid four or five high and four or five wide The height represents engine load from low to high and the width represents engine speed from low to high Any combination of engine load and 353 Data Parameters Engine Parameters speed fits into one of the 16 cells in the theoretical grid Some fuel control programs do not use all 16 cells BLOCK F INFO Range not available Indicates the block F Information H data BLOWER FAN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the blower motor switch
576. sed learned value 0 4 to 0 8 V THRTL MTR CLOSE 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the ETCS throttle motor opening duty ratio The normal value range is 0 to 40 when idling When the accelerator pedal is released quickly the duty cycle increases THRTL MTR CLOSE Range Min 0 9e Max 100 96 Indicates throttle actuator closed duty ratio O to 40 96 Idling When accelerator pedal is released quickly duty ratio increases THRTL MTR OPEN 96 Range Min 0 9e Max 100 Indicates throttle actuator opening duty ratio O to 40 96 Idling When accelerator pedal is depressed duty ratio increases THRTL MTR OPN 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the ETCS throttle motor opening duty ratio The normal value range is 0 to 4096 when idling When the accelerator pedal is depressed the duty cycle increases THRTL POS1 V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates throttle position Number 1 0 5to 1 2 V Throttle fully closed 3 2 to 4 8 V Throttle fully open THRTL POS2 Range Min 0 9e Max 100 96 Indicates the throttle sensor positioning 2 Calculated value based on VTA2 THRTL POS2 V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates throttle position Number 2 e 2 0102 9 V Throttle fully closed 3 2 to 4 8 V Throttle fully open THRTL RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the throttle relay THRTL POS V Range Min 0 V Max 5 V Indicates the throttle requirement position 0 5 to
577. sensor 2 oxygen sensor heater circuit 433 Data Parameters Engine Parameters SO2S H CUR mA Range variable Indicates the amount of current the ECM is applying to the bank 1 sensor 2 oxygen sensor heater circuit SOAK TIME min Range actual time Indicates the soak time time since the engine last ran in minutes SOC 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the battery charge status which is the remaining capacity of the battery module SOL V Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cold start solenoid The solenoid should be ON when engine coolant temperature ETC is above 95 intake air temperature IAT is above 80 C and the engine has been running for about 1 it should be OFF at all other times SOLMON1 Range 0 0A 0 6 to 0 7A Indicates the torque converter clutch solenoid valve monitor current SOLMON2 Range 0 8 A 0 3 to 0 6 A Indicates the pressure control solenoid valve A line pressure solenoid valve monitor current SOLMON3 Range 0 6 to 0 7 A 0 4 to 0 6 A Shows the pressure control solenoid valve B secondary pressure solenoid valve monitor current as amperage SPARK ADV SPK ADV BTDC SPRKADV Range 25 to 50 Indicates the spark advance status SPD NC SPD NCO SPD NC2 SPD NC3 Range 0 to 12750 RPM Indicates the RPM of the trans internal direct clutch Main Number 2 or Number 3 clutch drum assemblies SPD NT Range 0 to 12750 RPM Indicates the RPM of
578. sh code 12 three times It then flashes any other codes present in ECM memory or it flashes code 12 again Code 12 appears on the Check Engine lamp as in Figure A 3 NON IL Z NN IL Z 4 sf NN NN NN Flash Pause Flash Flash Figure A 3 Code 12 on Check Engine lamp Several different symptoms and problems may occur at this point e If the Check Engine lamp lights for a bulb check but stays off and does not flash any codes check the continuity between pins A and B in the ALDL connector A and C on the 3 pin connector e If the Check Engine lamp flashes rapidly with no code pattern check the ECM Verify that a PROM is installed Refer to the troubleshooting procedure for the test vehicle e Ifthe Check Engine lamp lights steadily and does not flash with ALDL pins A and B jumpered refer to the factory troubleshooting chart for the specific vehicle e Watch for code 51 or other 50 series codes that indicate a PROM or ECM problem Code 51 means there is either a PROM failure or a missing PROM Many carbureted engines do not transmit a code 51 on the data stream and if the PROM is missing the ECM for these systems does not communicate with the scan tool However some do flash code 51 on the Check Engine lamp Most communication problems can be found and corrected by checking the points listed in this section In a few cases communication failure may be due to ECM failure In all cases check and verif
579. shtray Remove the DLC cover 13 Testing Engine Systems 4 1 2 ECM Locations 1986 to 1990 with ECM LED Figure 4 5 LED Locations Table 4 2 LED locations VEHICLE YEAR LED LOCATION Integra 1986 89 1 Legend Sedan 1986 90 2 1 2 1 1995 2 5 3 2 TL 2 1995 5 3 16 Data Link Connector DLC Use OBD II adapter Figure 4 6 Acura data link connector DLC locations 14 Testing Engine Systems 1 16 pin DLC 2 OBD II adapter Figure 4 7 Acura DLC and adapter 1 1986 89 Integra 1986 90 Legend Sedan 2 1990 91 Integra 1987 90 Legend Coupe Figure 4 8 Acura control module locations for LED code flashers 1991 94 NSX 1991 95 Legend 1992 95 Vigor 1993 95 Integra 1 Service check connector 2 Jump wire 3 ECM 4 TCM Figure 4 9 Acura check connector locations for Check Engine Lamp code flashers Testing Engine Systems 4 1 3 SCS mode Purpose of SCS Service Check Signal mode Enables a diagnostic mode Flash out DTCs stored for the PCM ABS TCS and SRS modules Code clearing on certain ABS systems e Bypass two trip detection mode for ODB II drive cycles NOTE Certain OBD II vehicles use a separate 2 pin SCS connector Other ODB II models use a SCS pin in the 16 PIN DLC Both function the same way For specific applications refer to Code Reading
580. sion control indicator light 505 Data Parameters ODOMETER km miles Range Indicates the distance driven since the TCM PCM was last reset OP SW Range Indicates the oil pressure switch OP SW 24B Range Indicates the 2 4 brake pressure switch OP SW LRB Range Indicates the oil pressure switch OS SRC Range Indicates the output shaft speed OSS RPM Range Indicates the output shaft speed OSS FAULT Range Indicates the output shaft speed status OutShftSp RPM Range Indicates the output shaft speed OUTPUT RPM Range Indicates the speed of the transmission output shaft OVERRUN CLUTCH Range Transmission Parameters actual distance ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 to vehicle max 0 to vehicle max YES NO 0 to vehicle max 0 to vehicle max ON OFF Indicates the ECM command status for the overrun clutch solenoid valve The solenoid valve should be open when the reading is ON P INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the P indicator lamp on the instrument panel It should only read ON when the P position lamp is lighted P E HOLD SW Range PWR ECON HOLD Indicates the position of the power economy shift pattern switch The display should change to agree with the current switch position If the switch is in the economy position the transmission shift pattern is altered to economize fuel consumption 506 Data Parameters P N PO
581. sion output speed gear ratio Estimated turbine speed is calculated from engine speed and engine torque ETR 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the electric control lock up clutch slip ratio A 10096 reading indicates the lock up clutch is fully engaged FAS Range LOW HIGH Indicates an ECM request to the PGM FI ECM to retard the ignition timing in order to reduce shift shock during gear changes Normally reads HIGH A LOW reading means an ignition timing retard request signal has been sent the AFSA or AFSB parameter should also read LOW FAT TERMINAL Range ON OFF Indicates the DLC fat terminal FLG_OTLK Range YES NO Indicates the transmission over temperature lock up mode FLUID TEMP FLUID TEMP V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the transmission fluid temperature FORWARD SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the forward position switch It reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in any forward position it reads OFF in P R or N GEAR Range actual Indicates the gear commanded by the module GEAR MAX Range variable Indicates the highest gear allowed 499 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters GEAR RA GEAR RAT Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the transmission gear ratio GEAR RATIO GR RATIO Range 0 000 to 8 00 1 Indicates the TCM calculated actual gear ratio of the current commanded gear The value is the input shaft speed divided by the output speed in R D4 D3 D2 and D1
582. sition Cooling fan speed request Engine coolant temperature Engine speed Fuel consumption monitor Malfunction indicator lamp 5343343 3344334 a a m Wide open throttle position 2 A T shift schedule change demand ABS operation ABS warning lamp Brake warning lamp SLIP indicator lamp VCD OFF indicator lamp a Vehicle speed sensor A T CHECK indicator lamp A T position indicator R T D D 2 141 Nissan and Infiniti Testing Controller Area Network CAN Systems Table 14 9 CAN Type 4 and 5 communication signal identification part 2 of 2 Control Unit ECM ABS TCM M amp A STRG IPDM E self diagnosis R Signal Manual mode gear position Manual mode indicator Output shaft speed 4 a 4 4 m Turbine speed A C switch Blower fan motor switch Buzzer output Day time running light request Door switch Front wiper request High beam request Horn chirp Ignition switch Low beam request Position lights request D D D D D D D D d Rear window defogger switch Sleep request 1 Sleep request 2 Theft warning horn request Tire pressure Turn indicator a al ay al ay al ay A a a a a a ay A a Wake up requ
583. sition 096 when not pressed 1 to 10096 when pressed ASCD SIGNAL Range OFF ON Indicates ASCD signal status ON indicates the signal is on OFF indicates signal is off BOO Range ON OFF Indicates the brake on and off status BRAKE LAMP Range ON OFF or CKT OPEN Indicates the status of the brake lamp circuits it reads ON when the circuit is closed and the brake lights are on Compare this parameter to the BRAKE LAMP CMD parameter BRAKE LAMP CMD Range ON OFF Indicates the commanded ABS control module output signal to the brake lamps BRAKE SW Range ON OFF OPEN CLSD or ON OFF CKT OPEN Indicates the status of the brake switch on most vehicles it reads OPEN when the brakes are applied e CLSD when the brake pedal is released On some vehicles the ABS module monitors the condition of the brake switch circuit A CKT OPEN reading means the module detected an open circuit which may result in the ABS being fully or partially disabled 279 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters BRAKE WARN LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the brake warning light status ON when the warning light is on OFF when the warning light is off BUZZER Range ON OFF Indicates the skid control buzzer status ON when the buzzer is on OFF when the buzzer is off CCNTABS Range 0 to 255 Indicates ABS continuous codes DECELE SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the decelerator sensor open status NORM
584. sor For example B1S1 B2S2 is the reading from bank 1 sensor 1 which is the upstream O2S B1S2 B232 is the reading from bank 1 sensor 2 which is the downstream 028 Temperature readings of 400 C to 800 C indicate a properly warmed up catalyst CAT mon ready Range YES NO Indicates that the catalyst efficiency monitor has successfully completed CATEMP11 Range 40 to 11 756 3 F or 40 to 6 513 5 C Indicates the catalyst temperature for bank 1 sensor 1 21 Range 40 to 11 756 3 or 40 to 6 513 5 Indicates the catalyst temperature for bank 1 sensor 2 CC ENGAGED Range YES NO Indicates the status of the cruise control switch it reads YES when the cruise control switch is on and the set coast switch is activated e NO when the cruise control switch is on and the set coast switch is released CC INHIBITED Range YES NO Indicates the PCM commanded operating state of the cruise control system it reads YES when cruise is inhibited NO when cruise is not inhibited 359 Data Parameters Engine Parameters CC ON OFF SW CC RES ACC CC RES ACC SW CC SET CST SW Range ON OFF or YES NO Indicates the current state of the cruise control switches it should read YES when the circuits are closed OFF or NO when the circuits are open The resume RES accelerate ACC and the set coast CST switches are in parallel to each other and in series with the On Off switch
585. sors have a single wire and the flat sensors have two wires Broadband and flat sensor signals are processed differently by the PCM Both systems constantly monitor the KS system for a signal that is not present or falls within the noise channel range KSOK Range OK NG Indicates the status of the knock sensor circuit it reads OK during normal operation and NG if a fault is detected L SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission Low range switch LCHSTS Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the latched starter switch signal it reads ON when STS is turned on LDP EVAPCP A Range not available Indicates the EVAP control system incorrect purge flow detection valve status LDP IDL A Range not available Indicates the EVAP system leak detection idle current 406 Data Parameters Engine Parameters LDP MON A Range not available Indicates the EVAP system leak detection pump monitoring current LDP REF A Range not available Indicates the EVAP system leak detection pump reference current LDP SLDV A Range not available Indicates the EVAP control system small leak detection valve LDP VSLD V Range not available Indicates the EVAP control system very small leak detection valve LFC Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the electrically driven fan LFC FAULT Range YES NO Indicates a fan control low speed fault LFTRIM 1 96 LFTRIM 2 96 Range 35 to 35 Indicates whether the ECM is
586. ssory position LBEAM AUTO Range ON OFF Indicates the auto low beam out relay LEFT FRONT SOLAR SNSR V LIGHT SENSOR V R FRONT SOLAR SENSOR V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the output voltage of the applicable ambient light sensor based on the intensity of light detected As the light intensity increases the sensor voltage decreases In the Light state a low voltage of more than 1 75 volts is present and the DRL will be on In the Dark state a high voltage of up to 4 9 volts is present and the head lamps will be on Left Turn Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the turn signal switch reads ON when the switch is in the left turn position 319 Data Parameters LF PW A Range Indicates the left front power window amperage draw LF AJAR Range Indicates the left front door ajar status LF ID Range Indicates the left front tire transmitter identifier LF LRN Range Indicates the left front learn status LF MES Range Indicates the left front measure status LF NORM Range Indicates the left front normal status LF PSI Range Indicates the left front tire pressure LF REC Range Indicates the left front transmit received after learn LFAWAKE Range Indicates the left front awake status LFDR SW Range Indicates the left front door switch LFIDPRG Range Indicates the left front sensor programmed LFLOBAT Range Indicates the left front low battery LFP
587. sting Engine Transmission ABS and SRS 13 1 3 Transmission Manual Code Reading Mitsubishi models transmit Type 11 manual transmission codes see Figure 13 6 and Table 13 2 1 5 Sec H 0 5 Sec l 1 vu 1 1 1 I I 1 3 Pause Off 1 4 First Digit gt 1 l Code 24 1 5 1 5 i i i i On 1 1 lt Second Digit Off No Codes to Output Figure 13 6 Mitsubishi transmission Code Type 11 Table 13 2 Mitsubishi transmission Code Type 11 For code output long and short Pattern For no code output repeating straight count Read codes on A T oil temp lamp or neutral indicator lamp Start codes by 16 pin OBD II data link connector jump pin 1 to ground When done Remove the jumper wire and clear codes Code display cycle repeats as long as system is in a diagnostic state 13 1 4 ABS Manual Code Reading Mitsubishi models transmit Type 11 ABS codes see Figure 13 7 below and Table 13 3 Off 1 4 First Digit gt 1 24 1 5 1 5 i i i i i On 1 4 Second Digit Off No Codes to Output Figure 13 7 Mitsubishi ABS Code Type 11 121 Mitsubishi Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Table 13 3 Mitsubishi ABS Code Type 11 For code output long and short Pattern For no code output repeating straight count
588. stored codes display in order beginning with the most recent stored codes The code display repeats for up to five minutes If there are no codes in memory only code 11 displays P To clear code memory 1 2 3 Disconnect the ground from the ABS Check connector terminal L Connect the ground to the ABS Check connector terminal L for at least 0 05 second and then disconnect it Repeat step 2 an additional two times 3 times total within twelve seconds 188 Subaru Testing ABS Systems 1 Terminal L 2 Terminal K Figure 15 52 1993 96 Impreza ABS Check connector location 1997 Impreza Coupe Sedan and Wagon 1997 early Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon P To retrieve trouble codes 1 Locate the ABS diagnosis connector and diagnosis terminals near the heater assembly on the driver side Figure 15 53 Switch the ignition off Connect a diagnosis terminal to the diagnosis connector terminal 2 Switch the ignition on Read the trouble codes on the ABS warning lamp Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 The following condition apply to testing these vehicles 11 displays first then the stored codes display in order beginning with the most recent stored codes The code display repeats for up to five minutes 1 ABS control module 2 ABS diagnosis connector 3 Terminal 2 4 Terminal 1 5 Diagnosis terminal Figure 15 53 1997 Impreza and 1997 early Lega
589. story Codes 181 Subaru Testing Transmission Systems P To place the TCM in diagnostic code display mode 1 2 3 Start and warm the engine to operating temperature Drive the vehicle at speeds above 12 mph Switch the ignition off and set the Manual switch to off The Manual switch is on center console adjacent to gear selector Place the gear selector in Park and start the engine The Power lamp on the instrument panel should light for about 2 seconds Switch the ignition off place the gear selector in Drive and turn the Manual switch on Switch the ignition on without starting the engine wait at least 2 seconds and then move the gear selector to 3rd Switch the Manual switch off move the gear selector to 2nd and then switch the Manual Switch on Move the gear selector to 1st and switch the Manual switch off Fully depress and release the throttle to begin manual codes If no codes are present the Power lamp flashes evenly 2 times per second If codes are present the lamp flashes Code Type 8a long short Figure 15 45 on page 178 A TOM that flashes the 2 times per second pass code may still have history codes in memory 15 2 4 1990 96 4 Transmission Version 2 History Codes Use the following procedure to check the 4EAT transmission for history codes on 1990 95 Legacy 1992 96 SVX and 1993 95 Impreza models Be aware a vehicle that flashes the Power lamp twice per second pass code may still
590. switch which is determined by the shift selector lever position it reads ON if the selector is moved to a lower range DRIVE CounT DRIVECNT DTC DTC CNT Range 0 to 255 Indicates the valid drive counter DRIVE POSITION Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the drive position switch It reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in any forward position reads OFF in P R or N DRV SW Range ON OFF Indicates the drive switch DWN SW Range ON OFF Indicates the downshift switch ECL 96 Range 95 to 105 Indicates the status of the clutch slip radio as a percentage Check after warm up in D4 range at a steady cruise speed ECT V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the engine coolant temperature voltage ECT TCM Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the ECT transmission control module ElecPrsCtrl EPC Range 0 to 100 Indicates the electronic pressure control 498 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters EPC V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the electronic pressure control voltage ENGINE SPEED RPM Range 0 to engine max Indicates engine speed as converted from the crankshaft position CKP sensor The value of each 50 RPM is displayed ENGINE SPEED2 RPM Range 0 to engine max Indicates engine speed as converted from the crankshaft position CKP sensor The value of each RPM is displayed ESTIMAT SPD RAT Range variable Indicates the estimated turbine speed divided by the transmis
591. system is charging GEN Range 0 to 100 Indicates the generator field current control duty signal 390 Data Parameters Engine Parameters GEN FAULT Range YES NO Indicates if generator output fault is present Reads YES if there is a charging problem GEN MON Range ON OFF Indicates the generator monitor status GENERATOR Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the level of charge that the PCM is requesting as a percentage GENFDC Range 0 to 100 Indicates the generator field duty cycle GENVDSD V Range actual Indicates the generator voltage desired HAC PRS ZONE Range ON OFF Indicates the high air charging pressure zone signal HEADLIGHT SW Range ON OFF Indicates the headlamp switch HFC Range ON OFF Indicates the fan control high speed status HFC_FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the fan control high speed fault status HI A C PRESS Range YES NO Indicates A C system pressure and reads YES when the pressure is high HI PS PRESS HI PS PRESSURE P S OIL PRESSURE SWITCH P S PRESS SW PSP_SW PSP SWT PSP SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the power steering pressure PSP switch status Reads OFF when the steering wheel directs the wheels straight ahead and reads ON when the steering wheel is turned or held turned in either direction Turning the steering wheel builds pressure in the system 391 Data Parameters Engine Parameters HIGH ALTITUDE Range YES NO Indicates whether the vehicle
592. systems to give manufacturers time to fine tune their systems Beginning with the 1996 model year all new vehicles sold in the USA must be fully OBD II compliant 207 Generic OBD II 17 2 Selecting The Generic Test Mode Selecting The Generic Test Mode The OBDII Generic selection is available from the Manufacturer Selection menu 17 3 NOTE The DLC is a 16 pin connector The female half is on the vehicle and the male end is on the scan tool cable The connector is D shaped and keyed so the two halves mate only one way Pins are Connecting To The Vehicle The 16 pin OBD II adapter is used to connect the scan tool to the DLC Figure 17 1 The adapter attaches to the end of the data cable with captive screws A Personality Key must be inserted into the adapter for testing in the generic mode arranged in two rows of eight numbered 1 to 8 and 9 to 16 Figure 17 1 Figure 17 1 16 pin data link connector DLC test adapter and personality key Table 17 1 16 pin OBD II connector pinout PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION 1 Manufacturer s discretion 9 Manufacturer s discretion 2 Bus Line SAE J1850 10 Bus Line SAE J1850 3 Manufacturer s discretion 11 Manufacturer s discretion 4 Chassis ground 12 Manufacturer s discretion 5 Signal ground 13 Manufacturer s discretion 6 2002 earlier Manufacturer s discretion 14 2002 earlier Manufacturer s discretion 2003 later ISO
593. t 620 1 22 Sub 1 4 Main Code 39 Main Sub Code 22 3 Figure 4 27 Acura SRS Code Type 06 Table 4 13 Acura SRS Code Type 06 Pattern Main code and sub code Read codes on SRS warning lamp Short the SCS connector and turn key on SRS warning lamp will turn on then turn off after 3 0 seconds if the code is greater than 10 four quick flashes 0 1 Start codes by seconds each 10 main code will flash and pause 2 0 seconds and flash again if code is greater than 1 after a 2 0 second pause sub code will now flash in 0 3 second pulses followed by more flashes if code is greater than 1 Clear codes If the SCS connector is shorted and SRS has no stored it s normal to see the SRS light remain on continuously When done Computer can store up to 3 most recent codes The SCS is part of the 16 pin DLC ground pin 9 to activate 3 5 RL only SCS connector is separate from the 16 pin DLC The 2 pin SCS connector is located under the glove box 1 2 Sec 0 3 Sec 1 20 ili i 1 20 Sec ty Sec rStart of Next Code X L H 1 2 i 1 3 1 lt gt lt 1 4 4 23 Figure 4 28 Acura SRS Code 07 Table 4 14 Acura SRS Code Type 07 Pattern Main code and sub code Read codes on SRS warning lamp Short the SCS connector and turn key on SRS warning lamp will turn on then turn off after 2 0 sec
594. t EVAPVM Range 0 to 100 Indicates the evaporative emission vapor management valve status EVAPVM_FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the evaporative emission vapor management valve fault EVAPVMA Range ON OFF Indicates the commanded state of the EVAPVM EVMV A Range not available Indicates the evaporative vapor management current EXH BYPASS VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the vacuum switching valve VSV which actuates the second turbocharger wastegate control valve It only reads ON when the VSV opens the second wastegate valve 380 Data Parameters Engine Parameters EXH CTRL VSV EXH GAS CTL VSV Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the vacuum switching valve VSV which actuates the second turbocharger exhaust gas control valve It reads ON when the VSV opens the valve EXH V T LEARN Range YET CMPLT Indicates the condition of Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning YET Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning has not been performed yet CMPLT Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning has already been performed successfully EXHAUST OXYGEN REAR O2 LEFT O2 RIGHT O2 Range RICH LEAN F BNK UP O2S 1 STATUS O2S 2 STATUS R BNK UP REAR O2 STATUS Range RICH CENTER LEAN Indicates the general rich or lean condition of the exhaust as measured by the oxygen sensor O2S Exhaust oxygen content is related to oxygen content in the intake air fuel mixture and thus indicates the in
595. t NE b YEN Hove t LU eda d uet ipe cnt tU hte 492 3 2cTIMING SQLE Re Cm e RR me 492 3 4 ERROR SEC cu EN 2 490 SEQ nune iia n nma rede Rara 490 336 SRD GEAR dedo nie REI RR nine aditam 492 PRESSURE SWITCH ati oret t o Date st 492 3rd PRESSURE x sii e teet n eee este ei ese ee ed 492 40 6 336 216 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters 4 3 DOWNSHIFT MUN E pau 492 ATH GEAR hag land 336 Ry SEE zo RI RARE ORE RE 492 d PRESSURE DITE Set cachet na aan fare cee ce er Pelee deal 492 4th PRESSURE lec baa piloted eec cu eductus 492 LL UEM LLL MU MD LE 280 AWD ENGAGE oca het up DU DR 336 4WD HIGH LAMP sie T Mi 486 uc ia RN ARS Ce MM in i TEN Con UD IUUD ERU ORT M VPP 486 AW DOWIDAMEBZS scs sepia test 486 ANDLOW 336 AADCPNIMODUS LU ALLE in
596. t Mend a a i RE EE i tdg STOP LAMP SW a o STOP LAMP SW ih niii nie iste te eism nt E ade ein ecient Stop Light Transistor iecore teet HE a Rb n e n ex bc b EE oe et e d ra eed ove STR ANGLE TAC pixel pA REPE 439 PGT 96 RR E RIRs A EAE SERERE Decr cete 465 T rrt ete I eror REF ert EU edere aue rr t UR EHE UR UTER 440 Tacho Meter E 482 TAGHOXGAUGE e ae tec de add ats Note e EM ttd 440 TACM RELAY Tail Cancel Sw Tails Caneel T WAM RSW Tall Light TE jl a eens 331 AJAR TANK BYP VSV Pc cmE MENTEM TANK PRES LR AED DERI SABE RE CORE dE RR SEEDS TANI amp SPRESS V 145 4to c sesiones Hec 440 TANK PRS kPa tinHg mmibg ie e ec REO RR D tee d ed lees 440 TANK TEMP 9 UII NM TARGET A F V 268 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters
597. t b ca dod rd e oe devia 417 tiec rette iic e rt reci t m bre eee die n ber ei dne 471 REQ Ho puo ened aii lie eid a eee ae 418 MIL STATUS es 414 ento tae bl eee bp t t d pde ett dec p Le p bc ub hr ae a a eed c c E bod 471 MIL Status a EORR nete eio eee aie 471 M 471 Ml lives eens MES 414 ea 463 i ir eint o nee coii nie ie ea e on e bn Reds 506 MILF aul tise 418 MIN BAT BEOGISSE cine ter eerte eie Pe ani 471 MIN TPS V ait tct t a ete ev boe tee etd ee co ttl d oce EA D Pede dd rod 444 Mirror Fold Sw Retractable 324 Mirror Pos Sw vetet E e bali a OH cede DE Eee ea 324 PoS SWw Eeft ente edet grammi e e tp etg e tea 324 Mirror Pos Sw Right 2 324 Mirror Pos SW Up s rie erede Remi n mde ete ede n ede endete 324 Mirror Return Sw Retractable Mirror 2 2 2 1 toni rete rece teer oe o re roit pL c edie itae e Ide dea 324 Mirror Sel Sw a eri i et
598. t is still energized from a previous test On some vehicles this message can be ignored If uncertain turn the key off wait 10 seconds restart the engine then enter the test 2 With the engine warm and running at idle select to start the test 3 Checkthe timing with a timing light or timing meter within 2 minutes Wiggle Engine Off Test This test puts the EEC IV system into a program that records intermittent service codes that occur as you wiggle or tap on various engine sensors actuators and wiring connectors with the ignition on and the engine off To conduct a Wiggle Engine Off test 1 Select Wiggle Engine The test initiation screen displays 2 Switch the key on and select to continue After a brief startup message the test displays 106 Testing Engine and Transmission Systems 3 Wiggle or tap the engine sensors actuators and wiring connectors The bottom line of the screen is blank until a fault occurs and a code sets If a code sets the bottom line displays a memory code stored run KOEO test message Always check for memory DTCs after a wiggle test NOTE Do not wiggle the test adapter loose from the self test connector during this test or a false code may set Always exit the test before turning off the ignition or a false code may result To read the service codes from a wiggle test Select Codes Menu gt KOEO Self Test Wiggle Engine Running Test This test places the
599. t mode BATT V BATTERY V Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates vehicle battery voltage The engine control system has no specific sensor to measure battery voltage but some calculate this analog parameter from a sensing circuit across the supply voltage circuit The reading should be close to normal charging system regulated voltage with the engine running This is typically 13 5 to 14 5 V at idle Check the reading against actual voltage measured at the battery or alternator Check vehicle specifications for exact values BATT TEMP V Range 0 0 to 5 1 V Indicates a direct voltage reading from the battery temperature sensor which is a variable resistor in parallel with a 5 V reference signal to the ECM Sensor voltage and temperature are inversely related Low temperature produces high voltage high temperature produces low voltage BATT TEMP gt Range 40 to 199 C or 40 to 389 F Indicates the approximate temperature of the battery The ECM uses the battery temperature sensor signal to regulate the charging system The ECM charges a cold battery at a higher rate than a warm battery The ECM uses the battery voltage parameter for self diagnostics Some ECM functions are modified if voltage falls too low or rises too high For example if voltage drops below a minimum value the ECM attempts to recharge the battery by increasing idle speed This may affect the idle speed control fuel metering and ignition timing pa
600. t requires it Changes to ignition timing fuel delivery and other functions may affect operation and vehicle control The actuator tests may be grouped into the following test categories EGR evaporative emissions secondary air systems Turbocharger and supercharger actuators Transmission solenoids Fuel delivery system Intake air delivery system Ignition timing Air conditioning system P To conduct an EGR system test 1 4 Select Actuator Tests gt EGR System from the Main Menu A test initiation screen displays Select to initiate the test Raise the engine to 2500 RPM Scroll up and down to command the valve that switches vacuum to the EGR valve on and off Use the EGR TEMP and ST TRIM parameters on the screen to determine if exhaust gas is indeed being recirculated When EGR SYS reads Off expect low EGR TEMP When EGR SYS reads On the EGR TEMP should rise and the ST TRIM values should change When you have completed testing the EGR system exit P To conduct a fuel pump test 1 Select Actuator Tests gt Fuel Pump from the Main Menu A test initiation screen displays Select to initiate the test In Progress flashes and an operational pump vibrates and makes noise for 30 seconds after which time the test automatically shuts off 16 3 Testing Transmission Systems Toyota Lexus and Scion transmission systems provide code information 16 3 1 Code Reading Connectors Transmission diagnostic
601. t term corrections Compare LT TRIM numbers to injector on time Numbers above zero indicate increased on time while numbers below zero indicate decreased on time LT TRIM corrections operate only in closed loop In open loop they revert to a fixed value MAF g s Range 0 to 655 35 g s Indicates the flow rate of the intake air entering the engine The display shows airflow volume as grams per second Readings may be taken directly from the mass airflow MAF sensor or calculated by the PCM based on input from other sensors MAP Range 0 to 205 kPa or 0 to 60 7 inHg Indicates the PCM calculated manifold absolute pressure MAP based on the MAP sensor voltage signal When MAP is displayed in kPa the reading should be approximately 100 to 102 kPa with the engine off and the manifold close to atmospheric pressure at sea level When the engine is running manifold vacuum increases and the kPa reading drops The higher the manifold vacuum the lower the kPa reading On a turbocharged engine the kPa reading should rise above 100 as boost is applied When MAP is displayed in inHg the reading should be about 29 9 inHg with the engine off and the manifold close to atmospheric pressure at sea level When the engine is running with high manifold vacuum the MAP reading in inHg drops On a turbocharged engine the reading rises above 30 as boost is applied 460 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters MIL Range ON OFF Indicates the PC
602. t to console 1990 94 4 Next to fuse panel Eclipse 1995 05 2 Next to console Endeavor 2004 05 2 Next to console Expo LRV 1992 96 4 Next to fuse panel 1985 87 6 Next to glovebox striker Galant 1989 93 4 Next to fuse panel 1994 05 2 Next to console Lancer 2002 05 2 Next to console Lancer Sport Back 2004 2 Next to console 1989 96 4 Next to fuse panel Mirage 1997 2002 2 Next to console Mirage Turbo 1985 88 1 Near firewall 1989 7 Behind glovebox 1990 91 5 Next to ECM Montero 1992 2000 4 Near hood release 2001 05 2 Next to console Montero Sport 1997 2004 4 Near hood release Outlander 2003 05 2 Next to console Precis 1990 94 4 In fusebox Sigma 1988 90 6 Next to glovebox striker 1984 86 3 In engine compartment Starion 1987 89 6 Next to glovebox striker Truck 1990 96 4 Next to fuse panel Van Wagon 1987 90 4 Next to fuse panel 118 Mitsubishi Testing Engine Transmission ABS and SRS Connecting to 1987 and Earlier Vehicles P To read codes from most 1987 and earlier vehicles models use the MULTI 1 adapter to connect thew scan tool to the vehicle Use Figure 13 2 to locate and connect to the diagnostic connector for most 1987 and earlier models 4 5 1 3 pin connector located on the inner right front fender 2 9 pin connector located in glovebox next to the latch 3 2 pin connector located under the dash or in engine compartment 4 Gre
603. ta Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released FR WHEEL ACCEL m s2 Range 200 84 m s2 to 199 27 m s2 Indicates the front right wheel rate of acceleration FR WHEEL SPD Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the front right wheel speed sensor reading Actual wheel speed similar speed as indicated on the speedometer G SENSOR V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the output voltage signal from the centrifugal force G force sensor as the vehicle decelerates HV COMM Range NORM OPEN Indicates the HV communication open detection NORMAL when in normal condition IDLE SW Range ON OFF Indicates the main idle switch ON when the accelerator pedal is released e OFF when the accelerator pedal is depressed IG VOLTAGE Range NORM HIGH LOW Indicates the ECU power supply voltage HIGH when 9 5 V or over NORM when 9 5 V LOW when below 9 5 V L FRONT EMB R FRONT EMB Range ON OFF Indicates the present state of the ABS control module output signal to the left and right front electromagnetic brakes EMBs Reads ON when the ABS control module activates the EMBs during front wheel ABS operation L FRONT SOL R FRONT SOL Range ON OFF Indicates the present state of the ABS control module output signal to the left and right front solenoids Reads ON when solenoids are energized during front wheel ABS operation LATERAL G m s2
604. take air fuel ratio The exhaust O2S is the primary sensor that indicates whether the engine is running rich or lean The O2S must be hot above 500 F 260 C and the ECM must be in closed loop before the ECM responds to the sensor signal RICH or LEAN indicates the general condition of the exhaust The O2 voltage indicates the exact sensor signal Refer to O2 mV on page 420 for more information Some vehicles have separate oxygen sensors for the left and right banks or front and rear banks on transverse mounted V6 engines Exhaust conditions from these sensors are shown as LEFT O2 and RIGHT O2 UP or R UP upstream or EXHAUST OXYGEN and REAR 02 Some vehicles that have two sensors display them as O2S 1 and O2S 2 with 1 indicating the bank that contains cylinder number 1 F INJECTOR mS Range variable Indicates the operating status of the fuel injection and displays the open time length in milliseconds of an injector contained in bank 2 during valve pausing as commanded by the ACM control module FAIL 1 FAIL 2 Range ON OFF Indicates whether the PCM has executed a fail safe function 381 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FAIL 1 FAIL 2 Range ON OFF Indicates whether the ETCS fail safe function was executed If ON is displayed then the ETC was is in fail safe mode after detecting ETCS failure FAIL 1 Range ON OFF Indicates whether or not the fail safe function executed ON ETCS
605. tatus reads ON when the switch is on and OFF when off REAR FOG LAMP SW R Fog Light Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the rear fog lamp switch Reads ON when the front fog lamp switch is activated with the park lamps or low beam head lamps turned on and OFF at all other times Rear Hatch Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the rear hatch reads ON when the hatch is open and OFF when closed Rear Shade Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the rear sun shade switch Reads ON when the switch is pressed and reads OFF at all other times Rear Washer Sw RR WASHER SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the rear window washer switch Reads ON when the switch is on Rear Wiper Int Rear Wiper On Rear Wiper Stop RR WIPER INT RR WIPER ON RR WIPER STOP Range ON OFF Indicates the position of the rear window wiper switch Reads ON when the switch is in the indicated position Int intermittent on on stop off 0 Range actual Indicates the remote identification REMOTES Range actual Indicates the number of programmed transmitters RESET SW Range ON OFF Indicates the driver door key cylinder switch status 325 Data Parameters Response Time Range Displays the response time setting in seconds Rewipe Function Range Body Control Module BCM Parameters 0 1 1 0 ON OFF Indicates the status of the automatic windshield rewipe system Reads ON when rewipe
606. te A malfunction sets a DTC Com Body No 4 Com Body No 5 Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the indicated ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com CTR Console Communication CTR Console Range WITH WITHOUT Indicates current communication between the number 1 console switch and the main BCM Reads WITH when there is a connection reads WITHOUT when unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC 303 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Com CRLAC Communication RL Seat A C Com CRRAC Communication RR Seat A C Range WITH WITHOUT Indicates current communication between the indicated CRLAC and RL left rear CRRAC and RR right rear seat climate control ECM the and the main BCM Reads WITH when there is a connection reads WITHOUT when unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com CRLS Com CRRS Range WITH WITHOUT Indicates current communication between the indicated CRLS left CRRS right rear seat position control ECM the and the main BCM Reads WITH when there is a connection reads WITHOUT when unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Cruise Ctrl Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the cruise control ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the
607. tem SRS Code 120 Transmission Manual Code 121 ABS Manual Code Reading 121 Data Slow dnte eias er ate es ure ce ete itapa ee dira 122 e gae c MN 122 Actuator Tests cert n et ba lal ign e de fire ion 122 Chapter 14 Nissan and 124 Testing Engine Systems ceci err ataca a d eeepc re e o aote gen 124 Code Reading Connectors and Locations 124 07 cii e pete tes ata ne eed das E ga 125 De CUME ce 129 Testing Transmission 132 Nissan 4EAT Transmission 0 133 Testing Antilock Brake Systems 134 Code Reading Connectors and 134 DLE 135 vii Table of Contents Aptuator 135 Testing Supplemental Restraint Systems 5 5 135 Manual Code 135 Testing Body Control Module
608. ter IPC Control System Sareen at aaae e nee ERR 97 Chapter 11 Kia iine toute Die eec ee A N 98 Testing Engine Transmission and Antilock Brake Systems 98 Gode Readirig a eae diaper ei MERE e ER Unde ee 98 Manual ABS Code 101 Chapter Ptr aaien ae 102 Testing Engine and Transmission 102 Code avai a e decet ees 102 Manual Code Reading 103 Functional Tests 1983 95 104 Functional Tests All models with EEC IV and EEC V 105 Transmission Code Retrieval 1987 626 110 Testing Antilock Brake 111 ABS Main reip reine eode diete han Ld to re eee 113 Testing Airbag Transfer Case and Body Module Systems through the 16 Pin Connector 116 Chapter 13 MitsubiShi nere irent Doro eese te Deren cuam e eae 117 Testing Engine Transmission ABS and 5 5 117 Code Reading Connectors and 117 Supplemental Restraint Sys
609. ter DTCs erased TIMESES Range actual Indicates the time since engine start TMBLVL Range LOW HIGH Indicates the voltage level of the transmission signal TMB circuit TORQUE Range variable Indicates the net engine torque 444 Data Parameters Engine Parameters TP 96 TP SENSOR V Range 0 to 100 or 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the absolute throttle opening value as calculated by the ECM from the voltage input from the TP sensor DBW drive by wire Operating range idle 4 to 14 or 0 2V to 0 7V Fully closed e 4 to 20 or 0 2V to 1 0V DBW TP 1 amp 2 AGREE TPS 1 amp 2 AGREE Range YES NO Indicates the results of a control module test that compares the signals from the throttle position TP sensors 1 and 2 YES indicates that TP sensors 1 and 2 voltages correspond to the same throttle position NO indicates that TP sensors 1 and 2 voltages correspond to different throttle positions 9 0 to 180 Indicates the correlation angle between TP sensor A and TP sensor B TP R TP_REL Range not available Indicates the relative throttle position TP SENSOR A V TP SENSOR B V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates throttle position sensor A or B signal voltage The ECM PCM compares the voltage from throttle position sensor A and throttle position sensor B to detect failures TP SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the throttle position switch it r
610. ter reading if equipped Tail Cancel Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the cancel link between the tail lamps and the dimming rheostat TRIP SW Range actual Trip odometer switch TRIP ODOMETER A Range MI KM Indicates trip odometer A The instrument panel cluster IPC calculates trip odometer A information from the vehicle speed data received from the PCM TRIP ODOMETER B Range MI KM Indicates trip odometer B The instrument panel cluster IPC calculates trip odometer B information from the vehicle speed data received from the PCM TRIP RESET SWITCH Range INACTVE ACTIVE Indicates the state of the trip reset button of the driver information center DIC switch as monitored by the instrument panel cluster IPC A closed switch is displayed as ACTIVE 480 Data Parameters Instrument Panel Cluster IPC Parameters UPSHIFT LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates the state of the upshift indicator lamp as commanded by the instrument panel cluster IPC This parameter may not be valid if the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission VEHICLE SPEED Range 0 to 155 MPH or 0 to 255 KPH Indicates the vehicle speed senor The powertrain control module PCM monitors the voltage at the signal circuit of the vehicle speed sensor The voltage is proportional to the vehicle speed The PCM computes the vehicle speed The instrument panel cluster IPC monitors the vehicle speed signal circuit from the PCM 481 Data Param
611. ters Engine Parameters EGR VAC SOL Range 0 to 100 Indicates the exhaust has recirculation solenoid valve vacuum status EGR VENT SOL Range 0 to 100 Indicates the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid A EGR_FAULT Range YES NO Indicates the exhaust gas recirculation status EGRBARO Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the EGR BARO sensor voltage signal BARO SEGRP solenoid The signal is used by the PCM to control EGR flow The greater the EGR flow the lower the voltage EGRBARO Range ON OFF Indicates the BARO SEGRP solenoid EGRC SOLENOID Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the EGR vacuum solenoid Should read ON when the EGR valve is closed and OFF when the EGR valve is open EGRCFault Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM detected a fault in the EGR control solenoid circuit that regulates vacuum to the EGR valve YES means a fault is present EGRFOpen Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM has detected an open circuit in the EGR vacuum regulator valve or EVR circuit YES means a fault is present EGRFShort Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM has detected a short circuit in the EGR vacuum regulator valve or EVR circuit YES means a fault is present EGRMDSD Range variable Indicates the desired EGR motor position EGRVFault Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM detected a fault in the EGR vacuum solenoid circuit YES means a fault is present EGRVR Range 0 to
612. ters Parameters that indicate ambient air pressure barometric pressure and high or low pressure inside the intake manifold are major input parameters used by the ECM to control the air fuel ratio and spark advance in relation to engine load The engine control system must measure the atmospheric air pressure and the pressure in the intake manifold to determine engine load and calculate the required fuel metering and spark advance Three pressure measurements or calculations are necessary Barometric pressure BARO is the ambient atmospheric air pressure The barometric pressure changes with altitude and temperature At sea level barometric pressure is 14 7 psi 101 3 kPa or 29 9 Hg Manifold vacuum is pressure in the intake manifold that is below atmospheric pressure on a running engine The manifold vacuum is measured in relation to atmospheric pressure High vacuum is low pressure Manifold absolute pressure MAP is a combination of atmospheric pressure and vacuum or the relative difference between the air pressure outside the manifold and the vacuum inside MAP is measured in relation to zero pressure high vacuum BARO manifold vacuum and MAP have the following relationships Figure 18 1 MAP BARO vacuum e Vacuum BARO MAP MAP vacuum ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE PRESSURE ressure above 0 BARO PRESSURE Signal Above 0 VACUUM Low Pressure Below Atmospheric ZERO PRE
613. tes the status of the transmission control indicator lamp It reads ON when Overdrive Cancel is requested and an indicator lamp is lit TrnCtriSw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the transmission control switch TCS The switch is normally open and the value reads OFF When the driver requests overdrive cancellation the switch closes and the reading is ON TrnFluidTmp V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the voltage signal from the transmission fluid temperature TFT sensor A low voltage reading indicates a high fluid temperature while a high voltage reading indicates a low fluid temperature TRVL AFTER MIL Range actual distance Indicates the distance traveled since the malfunction indicator lamp MIL was turned on 447 Data Parameters Engine Parameters TurbSpds RPM Range 0 to 8192 Indicates the speed of the transmission turbine shaft TWC TEMP Range 572 to 1949 F or 300 to 1065 Indicates the PCM calculated temperature of the catalytic converter which is useful for determining if the catalyst monitor test has run UPLVR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the gear shifter Slap Shift ON when selector lever is side OFF when selector lever is other than the above VAC CUT BYPASS Range ON OFF Indicates the PCM command to the vacuum cut bypass valve It only reads ON when the valve is opened to perform an EVAP system leak check VACUUM PMP Range ON OFF Indicates the k
614. the TCC engages in 4th gear until the temperature drops below 266 F 130 C the brakes applied or the TP sensor signal is low On some transmissions if the temperature reaches 302 to 307 150 to 153 C for 15 minutes a DTC sets or if the fluid temperature exceeds 3099 154 C for 1 second Hot mode continues until the next ignition cycle HTM CNT Range 0 to 255 High Temperature Mode count HTM DIS Range actual Indicates the distance traveled since high temperature IAC IDLE AIR Range 0 to 100 Indicates the idle air control IAT ACT Range 40 to 399 F or 40 199 C Indicates the intake air temperature IAT ACT V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the intake air temperature voltage IGN ADVANCEY Range 90 to 90 Indicates the spark advance IGN_V Range 0 0 to 16 0 V Indicates the ignition voltage ILM CONTROL Range ON OFF Indicates the Illumination control system operating status When the ECU is in fail safe mode the indicator lamp blinks as a warning lamp according to the illumination dimming cancel signal Therefore the dimming cancel signal is sent to the dimming circuit to ensure the amount of light even when the parking lamps or headlights are lit Normally when the voltage is low dimming is enabled In fail safe or service check mode the voltage is high and dimming is disabled 501 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters INDICATORS Range ON OFF
615. the ASCD set speed and ASCD operation is cut off LOAD 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the relative engine load The ECM calculates this value by dividing the actual manifold airflow volume by the maximum possible manifold airflow volume A high number indicates a heavy load a low number a lighter load LONGFT1 Range 0 to 100 Indicates long term fuel trim 1 in percentage LONGFT2 Range 0 to 100 Indicates long term fuel trim 2 in percentage LOOP LOOP STATUS L LOOP STATUS R 025 FB COND OPEN CLSD LOOP Range OPEN CLSD Indicates whether the engine is operating in open or closed loop it should read e OPEN during warm up open loop e CLSD during normal operating temperature operation closed loop Some vehicles display separate parameters for the left and right banks Some failure conditions many associated with trouble codes cause the ECM to return to open loop operation Some vehicles may normally return to open loop operation at idle This is usually because the O2S cools off at idle and the ECM returns to open loop You should be able to restore closed loop operation by accelerating off idle to warm the sensor LOW BATTERY Range YES NO Indicates the vehicle battery state reads NO under normal conditions and YES when battery voltage is below specifications LOW CLNT LEVEL Range YES NO Indicates whether the low coolant level switch has been activated it reads e YES if the coolant level is low
616. the desired fan speed the PCM is attempting to maintain The PCM compensates for various engine loads based on engine coolant temperature in order to keep the fan at the desired speed by turning on the fan clutch and monitoring the fan speed sensor DESIRED TP 96 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the desired throttle angle that the PCM is trying to maintain Compare the actual and desired throttle position readings They should be equal or close to each other DIST DTC CLEAR Range Min 0 km h Max 65 535 km h Indicates distance after DTC cleared Equivalent to drive distance after DTCs erased DISTANCE SINCE DTC CLEARED Range variable Indicates the distance accumulated since an emission diagnostic trouble code was cleared The distance displayed will increase as the vehicle is driven DOWNLVR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the gear shifter Slap Shift ON when selector lever is side OFF when selector lever is other than the above DPFE V Range 0 45 to 4 60 V Indicates the differential pressure feedback EGR DPFE sensor signal which reflects exhaust pressure The PCM uses DPFE to compute optimum EGR flow Pressure feedback EGR systems control EGR flow rate by monitoring pressure drop across a remotely located sharp edged orifice There are several sensor designs some have an aluminum housing and use a 0 55 V offset others have an aluminum or plastic housing and use a 1 0 V offset Typically sensor output should
617. the status of the A T D4 position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the D4 position A T R SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the A T R position switch Reads ON only when the shift selector lever is in the Reverse position AAT Range 40 to 389 F or 40 199 C Indicates the ambient air temperature 338 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ABSOL PRES V Range 0 0 to 5 00 V Indicates the absolute pressure ABSOL PRES sensor signal voltage which is determined by the MAP BARO solenoid See MAP BARO SOLENOID for more information ABSOTPB Range 0 to 100 Indicates the absolute throttle position as a percentage ABV VAC Range 0 to 100 Indicates the air bypass valve solenoid vacuum control status as a percentage ABV VENT Range 0 to 100 Indicates the air bypass valve solenoid vent control signal status as a percentage AC CMPL CAT CMPL CAT MONITOR COMP MON EGR CMPL EVAP A FS CMPL EVAP MONITOR FUEL SYS CMPL HEATER CAT CMPL MISFIRE CMPL 025 A FS MONITOR O2S A FS HTR CMPL O2S A FS CMPL SEC AIR MONITOR SEC AIR CMPL Range COMPL INCMPL These parameters part of the readiness monitors used to determine if the OBD II self diagnostics test has been run and or the resulting status of the test AC ENA CAT ENA COMP MON EGR ENA EVAP A FS ENA FUEL SYS ENA HEATER CAT ENA MISFIRE ENA O2S
618. there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Mayday Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the ECMs and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Mayday G Way Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the Mayday Gateway and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC 305 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters Com Meter Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the meter ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Park Assist Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the park assist ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com P Seat Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the passenger seat ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com Pwr
619. throttle The displayed value should increase smoothly as the accelerator moves from closed to WOT Some models use multiple APP sensors the ECM only requires information from one sensor the others serve as a fail safe AP SENSOR DEG Range 0 to 180 Indicates the accelerator pedal position APP as a percentage it normally reads 493 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters e O atidle e 180 at wide open throttle WOT The displayed value should increase smoothly as the accelerator moves from closed to WOT Some models use multiple APP sensors the ECM only requires information from one sensor the others serve as a fail safe ASCD CRUISE Range ON OFF Indicates whether the automatic speed control cruise has been activated it reads ON when cruise control is on AT OD CANCEL Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the overdrive switch reads ON when the cancel switch is on With a manual transmission this parameter always reads OFF ATF INDICATOR ATF SENSOR ATF TEMP SENSOR FLUID TEMP TRANS FLUID TRANS TEMP TFT Range 58 to 340 or 50 to 170 C Indicates the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid ATF which is calculated by the based on the signal voltage of a thermistor type temperature sensor ATF TEMP SENSOR V FLUID TEMP V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the signal voltage of the automatic transmission fluid ATF temperature sensor ATF TEMP INDIC
620. tion 179 Subaru Testing Transmission Systems Start Code Code 23 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 Sec 2 0 1 2 Sec 1 2 i 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 6 0 3 Sec 0 3 0 6 0 3 ES Figure 15 48 Subaru Code Type 08d Table 15 14 Subaru Code Type 08d Pattern Long and Short Read codes ABS or TCS light on instrument panel Start codes by Follow the appropriate Subaru procedure When done Clear codes according to the Subaru procedure 15 2 Testing Transmission Systems The following sections include information for testing Subaru transmission systems Subaru transmission testing includes the following e Transmission Code Reading on page 180 1987 92 4EAT Transmission Version 1 on page 181 e 1990 96 4EAT Transmission Version 2 on page 181 e 1990 96 4 Transmission Version 2 History Codes page 182 1989 94 Justy ECVT Transmission on page 183 e 1996 06 Subaru Models with an OBD II 16 pin Connector on page 184 15 2 1 Transmission Code Reading If you select Transmission from the System Selection menu after identifying a vehicle the scan tool gives you instructions for applying power or connecting to the OBD II 16 pin connector where applicable Automatic code gathering is not available on Subaru transmissions before 1984 or on Subaru models with an OBD
621. tive control motor mounts The active control motor mounts are used to dampen vibration under certain engine idle or load conditions AF B1 HEATER AF B2 HEATER AF 1 51 HEATER AF B2 S1 HEATER Range ON OFF Indicates the A F sensor heater status it turns off if the battery voltage is above 16 volts Reads ON when the heater is on usually at idle with a cold exhaust Cylinder bank 1 B1 contains cylinder 1 Sensor 1 S1 is upstream closest to the engine AF B1 LAMBDA AF B2 LAMBDA AF LAMBDA AF LAMBDA B1 AF LAMBDA B2 Range 0 0 to 99 9 Indicates the A F Sensor equivalence ratio which is the measured air fuel ratio divided by the stoichiometric A F ratio A value greater than 1 indicates lean operation and values less than 1 indicates rich operation B1 and B2 provide information for vehicles with two banks of injectors AF FB AF FB ST FUEL TRIM AF FB ST FUEL TRIM B1 AF FB ST FUEL TRIM B2 Range 0 0 to 99 9 Indicates the A F ratio feedback corrective commands from the ECM The reading is the air fuel ratio feedback coefficient AF FB AVG AF FB AVG LT FUEL TRIM AF FB AVG LT FUEL TRIM B1 AF FB AVG LT FUEL TRIM B2 Range 0 0 to 99 9 Indicates the A F ratio feedback average which is derived from the short term fuel trim value and it is used for long term correction of fuel delivery The reading is the air fuel ratio feedback coefficient value 343 Data Parameters Engine Parameters AF FB CMD AF FB CMD B
622. tmospheric pressure absolute pressure ATM PRESS V Range 0 0 to 5 12 V Indicates the barometric atmospheric pressure ATM Press sensor provided analog voltage parameter that varies directly with atmospheric barometric pressure The ECM uses the ATM Press sensor voltage and the manifold absolute pressure MAP sensor voltage to calculate the manifold vacuum and determine true absolute pressure Some systems do not have an ATM Press sensor However the ECM provides a BARO reading by sampling the MAP sensor reading with the key on and the engine off just before cranking At this point manifold pressure should equal or be very close to atmospheric pressure The ECM also updates these BARO estimates when the engine is running by sampling MAP voltage when the engine is at wide open throttle ATSDLB Range not available Indicates the status of the H serial data line between the fuel injection ECM and the TCM AUTO LRN TIMER Range ON OFF Indicates whether the vehicle theft deterrent VTD is in learn mode or it has timed out Reads ON when learn mode is active AUTO OIL Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the automatic engine oil feeder pump The oil feeder pump moves reserve oil from the reservoir into the crankcase It Reads ON when the ECM has commanded the pump to run B FUEL SCHDL msec Range eee Indicates the base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected Base fuel schedule indicates th
623. to the exhaust ports or the air switching solenoid DIV when the solenoid is commanded to move the valve to divert air to the atmosphere AIR CONTRL SOL is displayed on vehicles with only a single air injection control solenoid AIR DIVERT SOL is always displayed in conjunction with the AIR SWITCH SOL parameter on vehicles with two solenoids AIR INTAKE SOL Range ON OFF Shows the ECM command to the secondary air intake valve to open the secondary runners Reads ON when the ECM has commanded the solenoid to open the secondary valve Reads OFF when the ECM has not energized the solenoid to open the secondary valve the engine is operating on the primary intake runners 344 Data Parameters Engine Parameters NOTE The engine must be warmed up in closed loop and operating with certain combinations of speed throttle opening and load before AIR INTAKE SOL will read ON This is an output signal from the ECM only it does not indicate whether the solenoid has responded or whether the valve has in fact opened AIR PMP PRS kPa Range 0 kPa to 320 kPa Indicates the AIR PUMP absolute pressure This is normally atmospheric pressure 2 5kPa or more when the AIR PUMP is on and the air switching valve is open The system is closed to atmospheric pressure when the AIR PUMP is OFF and the air switching valve is closed AIT PMP PLS PRS kPa Range 0 kPa to 639 9 kPa Indicates the AIR PUMP pulsation pressure This is cumulative p
624. to vehicle max Indicates vehicle speed the value is calculated by the ABS control module from the input voltage signals of the wheel speed sensors For ABS this reading is not taken from the vehicle speed sensor VSS used by the PCM and it may not be the same as the speedometer reading An abnormally high low or erratic reading is usually due to wiring problems or faults in one or more wheel speed sensors VEHICLE SPD Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the wheel speed sensor reading Actual vehicle speed is indicated on the speedometer VLV CTR Range ON OFF Indicates the ABS valve control relay VOLT M C SEN Range 2 5 to 2 49 V Indicates the voltage signal of the master cylinder pressure sensor Typical readings range from 0 3 to 0 9 V when the brake pedal is released VOLT M C SENS 2 Range 2 5 to 2 49 V Indicates the voltage of the master cylinder pressure sensor 2 291 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters VOLT STROK SEN V Range 2 5 to 2 49 V Indicates the voltage signal of the stroke sensor VOLT STROK SEN 2 V Range 2 5 to 2 49 V Indicates the voltage signal of stroke sensor 2 VSC EQUIPED Range NO YES Indicates the existence of VSC system Reads YES if the test vehicle has a skid control system reads no if the vehicle does not have skid control VSC TRC OFF SW Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the vehicle skid control or traction control s
625. trieve 1992 1997 SVX airbag SRS codes 1 2 3 With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 9 of the airbag SRS diagnostic connector The connector is located in the left kick panel area Figure 15 56 Read trouble codes on the SRS or airbag warning light Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 Turn the key off and remove the diagnostic terminal from the diagnostic connector P To clear code memory T With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 9 of the airbag SRS diagnostic connector Figure 15 56 When the SRS or airbag warning light is flashing trouble codes install the other diagnostic terminal into pin 3 of the diagnostic connector for at least 3 seconds Codes are cleared when the SRS or airbag warning light resumes a normal flashing rate of 0 6 seconds On and 0 6 seconds Off 1 Pins 3 and 9 2 Diagnostic terminals 3 Airbag SRS Diagnostic connector Black 4 Subaru Select Monitor connector yellow Figure 15 56 SVX airbag 1995 1999 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon 1998 2004 Impreza Coupe Sedan and Wagon 1998 2004 Forester and Wagon P To retrieve 1998 2004 Impreza 1995 1999 Legacy and 1998 2004 Forester SRS codes 1 With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 1 or the airbag SRS diagnostic connector The connector is located in the left lower dash panel area Figure 15 57 Read
626. trol module for the current ignition cycle as amperes Rr ACM SOL MIN CURRENT Range variable Indicates the minimum current output to the rear ACM control module for the current ignition cycle as amperes S SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the transmission S range switch S C RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command to the magnetic clutch relay for the supercharger The relay should be energized and the clutch engaged when the reading is ON S C SOLENOID Range ON OFF Indicates the ECM command status of the speed control S C cruise solenoid It reads ON when the solenoid is energized and that the vehicle cruise control is engaged S C TARGET Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates the speed at which the cruise control is set by the driver S C VAC SOL S C VENT SOL Range OPEN CLSD Indicates the ECM output commands to the speed control S C vacuum and vent solenoids which regulate the cruise control servo The readings are ON whenever the solenoids are energized to increase or to vent vacuum The S C VAC SOL and S C VENT SOL readings usually have the following relationships with throttle position control Table 18 6 Vent and vacuum solenoid relationships S C Vacuum Solenoid S C Vent Solenoid Throttle Position ON OFF Accelerate ON or OFF ON Decelerate OFF OFF Steady SC ACT SW Range Indicates the speed control actuator switch on 430 Data Parameters Engine Parameters
627. trouble code with a noticeable pause between multiple codes For example eight equal flashes is Code 8 Tens Ones flashes a 2 digit trouble code with a noticeable pause between each digit The first set of flashes is the 10s digit the second set of flashes is the 1s digit For example Flash Flash pause Flash Flash Flash is Code 23 Operations 3 6 2 3 6 3 3 6 4 3 6 5 Code Functions e Long Short flashes a 2 digit trouble code with the 10s digit pulses staying on longer than the 1s digit pulses For example Long Long pause Short Short Short is Code 23 e Main code and Sub code main code will flash first then pause Sub code will follow 4 LED turns on one to four LEDs to display a binary code The LEDs stay on until the code is cleared e 2 LED flashes a 2 digit trouble code with the 10s digit flashed on one LED and the 1s digit flashed on the other LED Automatic Code Reading Selecting Auto Code Read from the Code Functions menu displays a gathering codes or incoming codes LEDs flash simultaneously as the codes are received by the scan tool NOTE Some vehicles transmit codes very slowly Allow several seconds after receiving any code to ensure that no more codes follow Clearing Codes The Clear Codes selection is available from the Code Functions menu after codes have been received Selecting Clear Codes provides specific information for clearing ECM trouble codes Trouble codes are often
628. trouble codes on the SRS or airbag warning light Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 Turn the key off and remove the diagnostic terminal from the diagnostic connector 193 Subaru Testing Airbag SRS Systems P To clear 1998 2004 Impreza 1995 1999 Legacy and 1998 2004 Forester SRS codes 1 With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 1 of the airbag SRS diagnostic connector Figure 15 56 2 When the SRS or airbag warning light is flashing trouble codes install the other diagnostic terminal into pin 2 of the diagnostic connector for at least 3 seconds 3 Codes are cleared when the SRS or airbag warning light resumes a normal flashing rate of 0 6 seconds On and 0 6 seconds Off A 9 1 1 2 2 Airbag 585 Diagnostic connector 3 Diagnostic terminals Figure 15 57 1998 2004 Impreza 1995 99 Legacy and 1998 2004 Forester Airbag SRS Diagnosis connector 2003 2004 Legacy Outback Sedan and Wagon 2003 2006 Baja P To retrieve 2000 2004 Legacy Outback and 2003 2006 Baja SRS codes 1 With the key on and the engine off install either diagnostic terminal into pin 2 or the airbag SRS diagnostic connector The connector is located in the left lower dash panel area Figure 15 58 2 Read the trouble codes on SRS or airbag warning light Code Type 08c Figure 15 47 3 Turn the key off and remove the diagnostic terminal from the diagnostic conn
629. tta n e o RE PG 462 2 96 PH 411 E ESLBIM B2 96 re t ite eR he ta ein ede en a Et 462 96 IN 411 ETSERIM 2 96 ict e ren RE i ee Hi eti der er tei i mre o pi a eo ERE EE 411 EETRM AVGI 96 hc da ta a He A Deed ye pape E Cr td vete 412 ETFSLRM AVG2 96 e n OE A te nd e n E od ED 412 Cugo 324 EUSEESOL MON ee ei eret Ute rte ete ida tete tete e eite 412 LUSEL SOL OUT M M SHAET SPBBBM 1d eee tese dele HE ek HR A RD Inte MR eds 412 5 5 p 471 287 M G SEN 2 RR P Pd ER D ete RERO 287 286 M T SHIFT LOC du 412 A VIA MAL EAT de I AM Ta Mur ANIM LIT Irc 413 gm Sec 2 413 ccu 413 Mia p M UO 414 MAE PERR TOMS 414 gt X 462 rnm 414 MAF Vjenna a De ae ade ee ek an AC Det ae 506 250 Data Parameters Alphabetic List of Parameters MAF MASS AIR V MAE FAULT
630. ual EGR minus commanded EGR multiplied by commanded EGR For example 5 10 5 multiplied by 10 50 EGR PCT Range 0 to 100 Indicates the opening of the exhaust gas recirculation EGR valve as a percentage A reading of 0 indicates the valve is closed no EGR flow a 100 reading indicates the valve is fully open maximum EGR flow ENGINE RPM Range 0 to engine max Indicates the engine speed which is computed internally by the PCM based on reference pulses from the ignition system or a crankshaft sensor EQ RAT Range variable ratio Indicates the air fuel A F ratio as commanded by the ECM To obtain the actual A F ratio multiply the stoichiometric A F ratio 14 7 1 by the displayed value A conventional oxygen sensor O2S displays EQ RAT only when the engine is operating in open loop A value of 1 0 displays when running in closed loop A wide range or linear O2S displays the EQ RAT in both open and closed loop 457 Data Parameters Generic OBD II Parameters EQ RAT11 EQ RAT12 EQ RAT13 EQ RAT14 EQ RAT21 EQ RAT22 EQ RAT23 EQ RAT24 EQ RAT31 EQ RAT32 EQ RAT41 EQ RAT42 Range 0 to 1 999 Indicates the air fuel A F ratio as commanded by the ECM for each oxygen sensor O2S on vehicles that use linear or wide ratio oxygen sensors For example EQ RAT11 displays the ratio for bank 1 sensor 1 upstream O2S and EQ RAT12 is the ratio for bank 1 sensor 2 downstream 025 To calculate the actual
631. uel when engine load and speed require it Readings should be e YES when asynchronous pulse function is active e NO when asynchronous pulse function is inactive Because these extra pulses are not synchronized with regular injector pulses they are called asynchronous AT Lockup A or B Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the lockup solenoids Solenoid valve A determines the lockup status Lockup control is on when solenoid coil A is activated Solenoid valve B controls the lockup area low middle high in the lockup control ON range Table 18 3 AT Lockup A or B Solenoid A Solenoid B Lockup Control ON OFF Low Range ON Cycling ON OFF Middle Range ON ON High Range ATCHK Range LOW HIGH Indicates the status of the slow speed data link between PGM FI and AVT it is used to transmit a timing retard request or automatic transmission trouble codes 349 Data Parameters Engine Parameters ATF TEMP 1 Range 40 to 419 F or 40 to 215 C Indicates the trans internal fluid temperature A fixed reading of 40 C 40 F would indicate an open sensor circuit A fixed reading of 419 F or 215 C would indicate a shorted sensor circuit ATM PRESS Range 0 to 37 0 inHG or 10 to 125 kPa Indicates the ECM calculated barometric atmospheric pressure reading from the ATM Press sensor voltage signal ATM PRESS Range Min 0 kPa Max 150 kPa Indicates atmospheric pressure Equivalent to a
632. urrent calibration ID number is valid SVC 4WD LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the transfer case shift control module command status to the Service 4WD indicator lamp on the instrument panel VBATT Range 010 16 V Indicates battery positive voltage VSS 4X4AM Range 0 to vehicle max Indicates vehicle speed XFER CASE LCKD Range YES NO Indicates the state of the transfer case It reads YES when locked to enabled 4WD operation 487 Data Parameters Transmission Parameters Transmission Parameters This section defines transmission data parameters available from the powertrain control module PCM or the transmission control module TCM To find the description of a specific parameter locate the parameter name in the index and then go to the listed page NOTE Many transmissions are not the same from vehicle to vehicle and some gear switch signals may not be active A parameter for an inactive signal always reads ON or YES on the tool 1 INDICATOR Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the 1 indicator lamp on the instrument panel It should only read ON when the 1 position lamp is lighted 1 POS SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates whether the contacts to the 1st gear position switch are closed or open Reads ON when the switch contacts are closed and the vehicle is in 1st gear 1 2 ERROR SEC 2 3 ERROR SEC 3 4 ERROR SEC Range variable Indicates the difference between the desired shift time and the actual shift tim
633. using the factory scan tool When done Turn the ignition off disconnect the connectors then clear codes The trouble codes are displayed by flashing the warning lamp Each code displayed consists of a number of flashes that represent the tens digit a 1 2 second pause then a number of flashes that represent the ones digit Each code displays once Code 12 always flashes first followed by any current codes After the current codes code 13 may flash to indicate the presence of history codes which then follow If only history codes are present code 12flashes first then code 13 followed by the historical codes The code cycle repeats as long as the system is in the diagnostic state 0 1 Sec oe Sec 1 1 1 1 1 1 au 11 i 3 0 2 0 Start codes by Start of Next Code Sec Key On 10757101 2 13 1 4 gt 1 Pulse 40s Digit isDigit 179 20 22 jSub Main Code 39 Main Sub Code 22 3 Figure 8 21 Honda SRS Code Type 06 Table 8 12 Honda SRS Code Type 06 Pattern Main code and sub code Read codes on SRS warning lamp Short the SCS and turn key on SRS warning light will turn on then off after 3 0 seconds if code is greater than 10 four quick flashes 0 1 seconds each 10 Start codes by main code will flash and pause 2 0 seconds and flash again if code is greater than 1 after a 2 0 second pause sub
634. ut 85 when the low beam head lamps or park lamps are on and the IP dimmer switch is in the Full Bright position Back Door Open Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the back door courtesy lamp switch Reads ON when the back door is open reads OFF when the door is closed 302 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters BATT V Range 0 0 to16 0 V Indicates vehicle battery voltage the value is the system voltage measured at the BCM ignition feed input The reading should be close to normal charging system regulated voltage with the engine running This is typically 13 5 to 14 5 V at idle Check the reading against actual voltage measured at the battery or alternator Check vehicle specifications for exact values BATT SAVR Range ON OFF Indicates the battery saver relay control BRK FLUID Range OK LOW Indicates the brake fluid level C_LOCK_SW Range ON OFF Indicates the central lock switch C_UNLOCK_SW Range ON OFF Indicates the central unlock switch Com B Door P W Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the back door power window ECM and the main BCM Reads ok when there is a connection reads stop when unable to communicate A malfunction sets a DTC Com ACC G Way Range OK STOP Indicates the connection status between the accessory gateway ECM and the main BCM Reads OK when there is an active connection between the modules reads STOP when the modules are unable to communica
635. valve position As vacuum is applied to the diaphragm of the EGR valve the lift amount of the EGR valve also increases EGR MON Range COMPL INCMP Indicates the status of the exhaust gas recirculation EGR system monitor Reads COMPL completed if the monitor successfully ran INCMP incomplete if not This monitor is enabled during EGR operation after certain base operating conditions are satisfied EGR 5 Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the exhaust gas recirculation valve position EGR POS V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the exhaust gas recirculation valve position EGR STEPS EGR STEP POS Range 0 to 125 Indicates the position of the EGR valve stepper motor as counts A 125 reading indicates the motor plunger is fully extended and the EGR valve is fully open EGR TEMP V Range 0 0 to 5 12 V Indicates a feedback signal from a thermistor mounted in the EGR passage which reflects the amount of EGR flowing On most vehicles a high voltage signal means a high EGR flow rate low voltage means low or no EGR flow However on some 1996 and later Nissan vehicles high voltage means a low flow rate low voltage means high or no EGR flow EGR TEMP gt Range 50 to 320 C or 58 to 600 F Indicates EGR gas temperature based on the signal of a sensor located slightly downstream from the EGR control valve A decrease in EGR temperature indicates either restricted EGR flow or a system malfunction 373 Data Parame
636. ve VTD FAIL ENABLD Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM received the correct password from the passlock module and a failure has occurred The PCM continues to enable fuel VTD FUEL Range ON OFF Indicates whether the vehicle theft deterrent VTD system is preventing fuel delivery it reads ON if the ECM has not received the correct password from the passlock module and is disabling the fuel system e OFF during normal operation VTD FUEL DISABL Range ON OFF Indicates whether the vehicle theft deterrent VTD system is preventing fuel delivery and reads as follows ON only if the ECM has not received the correct password from the passlock module and is disabling the fuel system OFF during normal operation VTD FUEL ENABLE Range ON OFF Indicates ON if the vehicle theft deterrent VTD system has detected a fault after the ignition has been turned on and a valid theft deterrent password has been received The engine will continue to run until the ignition is turned off The vehicle may be disabled on the next ignition cycle if a fault is detected and a valid password is not received OFF will display if the system is OK and the theft deterrent system is inactive 451 Data Parameters Engine Parameters VTD PASSWORD OK Range YES NO Indicates whether a valid vehicle theft deterrent VTD password was received VTEC INFORMATION Range not available Indicates the status of the variable valve timing system
637. ve DBW drive by wire Range not available Indicates the calculated volume of idle airflow with the accelerator pedal fully closed as counts The greater the number of counts the more the idle air passage is open DCRKMF Range not available Indicates the crankshaft sensor for misfire detection disconnect counter DCT CNT Range actual Indicates the number of trouble codes set DECEL ENLEAN DECEL FUEL C OFF FC AIRFLOW Range YES NO or ON OFF Indicates whether the ECM is reducing injector pulse width to create a lean air fuel mixture for deceleration it should read 368 Data Parameters Engine Parameters YES or ON during deceleration OFF during all other conditions Lean mixtures or fuel cutoff on deceleration help to prevent high HC emissions and allow the engine to return to a 14 7 1 idle air fuel ratio more quickly Reduced fuel flow also helps to prevent stalling at idle from an overly rich mixture DECHOKE Range YES NO No additional information is available for this parameter DES IDLE RPM DESIRED IDLE Range 0 to engine max Indicates the desired idle RPM the PCM is attempting to maintain If there is a large difference between actual and desired idle readings the ECM may have reached its control limit without being able to control the idle speed This may be due to either a basic mechanical or electrical problem with the engine DESIRED FAN RPM Range 0 to fan max Indicates
638. volutions NON A C Range ON OFF Indicates the A C installed confirm signal NON MMODE Range ON OFF Indicates whether the transmission is not in Manual mode pertains to the Slap Shift e OFF when in manual shift gate position neutral side side ON when in position other than the above NP SWITCH Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the neutral position switch on a manual transmission It reads ON electrically closed with the shift lever in neutral position NSX Range ON OFF Indicates the state of the NSX it reads OFF when the clutch pedal is depressed NTRBCD Range not available Indicates the total number of DTCs that the ECM stores NUMKEYS Range actual Indicates the number of keys stored 419 Data Parameters Engine Parameters O2 mV O2 1 mV O2 2 mV O2 B1 S1 mV O2 B1 S2 mV O2 B2 S1 mV O2 B2 S2 mV FRONT O2 mV REAR O2 mV Range 0 to 1800 mV O2 B1 S1 V O2 B1 S2 V O2 B2 S1 V O2 B2 S2 V O2S B1 S1 V O2S B1 S2 V O2S B2 S1 V O2S B2 S2 V Range 0 to 1 200 V F UPSTM O2S V DNSTM 028 V R UPSTM O2S V R DNSTM O2S V Range 0 to 4 98 V Indicates the exhaust oxygen sensor O2S signal voltage The O2S is the primary sensor that indicates whether the engine is running rich or lean The voltage signal typically ranges from 0 V to 1 V 0 to 1000 millivolts mV A high signal indicates a rich exhaust a low signal indicates a lean exhaust
639. when brake pedal is released 288 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters SLCT LVR POSI Range P R N D 1 2 3 4 Indicates shift position determined from the A T PNP switch signal SLIP INDI LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the slip indicator light status Reads ON when the indicator light is on OFF when the indicator light is off SLIP LAMP Range OFF ON Indicates SLIP lamp status ON indicates TCS function is active OFF indicates TCS function is inactive SLRFL CUR SLRFL CURR A Range Min 0 A Indicates the SLRFL solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A when brake pedal is released SLRFR CUR SLRFR CURR A Range Min 0 A Max 3A Indicates the SLRFR solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A when brake pedal is released SLRRR CUR Range Min 0 A Max Indicates the SLRRR solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A when brake pedal is released SLRRL CUR Range Min 0 A Max 3A Indicates the SLRRL solenoid current in amps Should read 0 A when brake pedal is released SMC1 Range ON OFF Indicates the master cut solenoid 1 SMC1 Reads ON when the solenoid is energized reads OFF at all other times SMC2 Range ON OFF Indicates the master cut solenoid 2 SMC2 Reads ON when the solenoid is energized reads OFF at all other times SNOW MODE SW Range OFF ON Indicates the SNOW MODE switch status Reads ON when switch is in snow mode operating position reads OF
640. when the button is pressed and held for 0 8 second Trunk Main Sw Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the trunk opener cancel switch Reads ON when the cancel switch in on and reads OFF at all other times Trunk Opener Monitor TRUNK OPN MNTR Range ON OFF Displays the trunk or back door open monitor Reads ON when open and OFF when closed TRUNK OPNR SW Range Not Available Displays the trunk opener switch status This Nissan parameter displays even on models without a rear door with remote release 330 Data Parameters Body Control Module BCM Parameters UN BUTTON ON UN BUTTON SIG Range ON OFF Indicates a door unlock switch signal being received from a remote transmitter UNLK SW AS UNLK SW DR Range ON OFF Indicates the door unlock switch signal status for the driver DR and passenger AS doors Unlock2 Operation Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the 2 times wireless unlock system Reads ON when the system is active and all doors unlock when the button is pressed twice Reads OFF when the system is disabled Unlock w KOEO amp Park Range ON OFF Indicates the status of the KOEO and park door unlock system Reads ON when the system is active all doors unlock when the ignition is off and the gear selector lever is shifted into Park Vehicle Speed VSS TPM Range 0 to MAX SPEED Indicates the vehicle speed Vehicle Spd Sig Range STOP RUN VHCL SPEED SEN Range ON OFF Indicates whether or
641. witch Reads ON when the Switch is sent to the on position reads OFF when the system is switched off VSC WARN LAMP Range ON OFF Indicates the VSC warning lamp Should read ON only when the lamp is illuminated reads OFF at all other times WHEEL SPD FL WHL SPD FL Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the wheel speed sensor FL reading actual wheel speed Similar speed as indicated on speedometer WHL SPD FR Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the wheel speed sensor FR reading actual wheel speed Similar speed as indicated on speedometer WHEEL SPD RL WHL SPD RL Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the wheel speed sensor RL reading actual wheel speed Similar speed as indicated on speedometer WHEEL SPD RR WHL SPD RR Range 0 mph to 202 mph or 0 km h to 326 km h Indicates the wheel speed sensor RR reading actual wheel speed Similar speed as indicated on speedometer YAW RATE Range 70 to 70 d s Indicates yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor 0 d s when vehicle is stopped 70 to 70 d s when vehicle is moving YAW RATE Range min 128 deg s max 128 deg s Indicates the yaw rate sensor output in degrees per second 292 Data Parameters Antilock Brake System ABS Parameters YAW RATE SEN Range NORM OPEN Indicates the yaw rate sensor open detection NORMAL Normal condition YAW RATE SENS 1 Range min 128 deg s max 127 deg s
642. x fuel sensor fault 383 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FLUID TEM V Range 0 0 to 5 0 V Indicates the transmission fluid temperature voltage FP Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel pump status FP Range 0 to 10096 Indicates the fuel pump status in percentage FP MODE Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel pump has been turned on or off in response to a PCM command FP RES RELAY Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel pump FP resistor relay status FP RLY Range ON OFF Indicates whether the fuel pump relay has turned on or off in response to a PCM command FP SENSOR kPa mmHg in Hg V Range o o Indicates pressure in the fuel rail as monitored by the fuel pressure sensor This signal can determine fuel pressure regulator performance At idle pressure readings should be e 270 kPa to 360 kPa 2025 mmHg to 2700 mmHg 79 inHg to 106 inHG FP RLY Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel pump relay status FPFault Range YES NO Indicates whether the PCM has detected a fault in the fuel pump circuit FPFault reads YES when a fault is present FPM FPMonitor Range ON OFF Indicates the fuel pump monitor FPTDR V Range LOW HIGH Indicates the input level voltage level of the FPTDR line FR ACM SOL CURRENT Range not available Indicates the actual electric current applied to the front ACM control module as amperes 384 Data Parameters Engine Parameters FR ACM SOL MA
643. y all circuits and parts involved in data communication before condemning the ECM NOTE You may need a wiring diagram for the specific test vehicle along with troubleshooting procedures from the manufacturer for some of the following checks 525 Troubleshooting GM Control Systems on Isuzu and Isuzu built Geo Check the ALDL connector with a digital voltmeter Figure 4 if the Check Engine lamp does not flash code 12 or if it does but the scan tool does not receive data 1 2 3 1 Check Engine lamp data transmission 2 Test or diagnostic enable 3 Ground Figure 4 suzu and Isuzu built Geo ALDL 3 pin and 12 pin connectors P To check ground continuity 1 Connect the voltmeter positive lead to ALDL pin A on the 12 pin connector or to pin C on the 3 pin connector 2 Connectthe negative lead to the negative battery terminal Use jumper wires as needed NOTE Do not connect to a body or chassis ground go directly to the negative battery terminal 3 Measure voltage drop with the ignition switched on Voltage drop across the ground terminal should be 0 1 V or less An open or high resistance ground prevents the ECM from entering the diagnostic mode P To test for an open ground at ALDL pin A or C 1 Turn the ignition on and jumper pin B to pin A in the 12 ALDL connector or pin A to pin C on the 3 pin connector 2 Connectthe voltmeter positive lead to the jumper and the negative lead t

Asian Import Vehicle Communication Software Manual - Snap-on

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents